230+ Best Easy Dairy-Free Recipes For Every Meal - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/special-diet/dairy-free/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Fri, 30 Jan 2026 19:23:37 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.3 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/cropped-cropped-Foolproof-Living-Favicon-image-resized-32x32.png 230+ Best Easy Dairy-Free Recipes For Every Meal - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/special-diet/dairy-free/ 32 32 Stuffed Onions with Ground Beef and Rice https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/ https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/#respond Wed, 10 Dec 2025 15:27:48 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=85205 Ingredients You’ll Need If you’ve been following along on social media, you’ve probably seen me testing this recipe quite a…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

Growing up in Türkiye, our holiday tables looked a little different than the ones we have here in the US. Kebabs were always on the menu, but whenever my mom wanted to make something special, she made these ground beef stuffed onions, or soğan dolması as we call it.

It has been years since I last made them, but seeing their recent popularity on social media made me pull out my mom’s handwritten notes and bring this recipe back to life.

Here are a few things that make this version special:

  • It has roots in Turkish cooking. There are many versions of stuffed onions across the Mediterranean and the Middle East, but the Turkish style uses pomegranate molasses to give the dish a gentle, sweet-and-tangy balance.
  • The ingredients are simple. Pomegranate molasses might sound unfamiliar, but most grocery stores now carry it. Everything else is a pantry staple, and I included plenty of substitutions so you can make it work with what you have on hand.
  • It looks impressive, but it is easier than it seems. Once you soften the onions and get the hang of rolling them, the rest of the process is surprisingly approachable and very forgiving.

If you have never made stuffed onions before, I think you will be pleasantly surprised by how doable this dish actually is.

Ingredients You’ll Need

If you’ve been following along on social media, you’ve probably seen me testing this recipe quite a bit. As I worked through each round, I learned a few things about choosing the right ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

The exact measurements are in the recipe card below, but these are the notes I kept from all that testing:

Onions: Look for onions that are firm, fresh, and heavy for their size. Yellow onions work beautifully because they naturally become sweeter as they cook, but Vidalia onions and Walla Walla onions will also work if you want an even milder flavor. Red onions are also an option, but stuffed red onions are slightly sweeter than yellow onions.

Pro tip: In the recipe card, you’ll see four medium onions. If you’re making this for the first time, go ahead and buy one extra just in case. Depending on the size, four to five onions usually give me about 20 to 22 usable layers, which is right around what you’ll need for this stuffed onion recipe.

Ground beef: Fat equals flavor, so I like using 85/15 ground beef because it stays juicy and tender. If you prefer something richer, use 80/20 ground beef. 

You can also use lamb if you like, or half lamb and half beef, which is pretty traditional. If you are looking for a lighter alternative, though not traditional, ground chicken would also work, but be aware that it would have a slightly different flavor profile.

White rice: I’m using long-grain white rice here, the everyday enriched kind that you can find in most grocery stores. 

My mom always rinsed the rice under cold water until it ran clear, so I do that too, but I know some people prefer not to wash their rice, and that’s perfectly fine.

Some people soak their rice before using it, which helps it cook a little faster, but since we are using a rather small amount, I do not think that it is necessary. 

Alternatively, medium bulgur wheat can be a good substitute for rice. It would have a distinct earthy flavor profile, but it would still be delicious.

Pomegranate molasses: Can you make it without it? You surely can. But, should you? Absolutely not, because pomegranate molasses takes these stuffed onions to another level, giving them the signature slightly sweet-and-sour taste. So, do not skip it.

Pro Tip: When shopping for it, look for a brand that uses 100% pomegranate juice and no added sugars. If you can’t find it in your local grocery stores’ Middle Eastern section, look for it online. My favorite one is this Pomegranate Molasses.

Red pepper paste: This is known as biber salçası in Turkish cooking. You can find mild or hot versions, and both work here. If you can’t find it, you can use an equal amount of tomato paste as a substitute, and it will still be delicious.

Most Middle Eastern supermarkets carry it, but if you can’t find it there, you can buy it online. I like Oncu Turkish Mild Pepper Paste, which has great depth without being overly spicy.

Spices: This part of the recipe is the most flexible, and you can get as creative as you want. I use ground cumin, dried mint, black pepper, and red pepper flakes for a little heat.

If you can’t get your hands on dried mint, you can omit using it or use a tablespoon of chopped fresh mint instead.

How to Make Stuffed Onions

If this is your first time making stuffed onions with meat, and it looks like a lot of work, let me assure you, it is not. Once you start stuffing and rolling your first couple of onions, you’ll see quickly that the whole process is actually quite simple.

Below, I am sharing every step of the process with the little things I learned from my mom and from making this Mediterranean dish over the years for my own family:

A collage of images showing the preparation of the onions to make stuffed onions.

Step 1 – Prep the onions: If there’s one part to pay a little extra attention to, it’s this step. We’re trying to separate the layers in one piece as much as we can. Even if a few tear, don’t worry, they still work just fine once they’re stuffed.

Start by cutting off both ends of each onion, peeling the outer skin, and making a single straight cut down to the center without slicing all the way through. Doing this helps the layers loosen easily after boiling. Use a sharp knife here to make it easier on yourself.

Step 2 – Boil the onions: Add the onions to a large pot of water, bring it to a boil, and let it simmer for about 15 minutes.  You don’t want them overly soft, just soft enough that they don’t rip when you start separating the layers later. 

A collage of images showing the onion layers and the beef and rice filling.

Step 3 – Let them cool and separate the layers: Spread the onions out on a plate and let them cool on the counter.

Pro Tip: It takes a while to cool down, especially the inner layers. If you are short on time, you can place them in a colander and run them under cold tap water to speed up cooling. However, it is imperative that you let them drain properly before you start stuffing and rolling them.

When cool enough to handle, carefully remove each layer of the onion, being gentle to avoid tearing it. You should have about 20-22 onion layers in the end. 

As you peel off each layer, you’ll notice a thin membrane. If you have the time, remove it; it helps the onions cook more evenly and prevents any chewiness. But if you’re in a pinch, you can skip this step. I’ve made this dish plenty of times, leaving the membrane on, and it still turns out great.

As you get closer to the middle, you’ll end up with the onion cores. Don’t throw them out. We’ll use them in the filling, so put them in a large bowl.

Step 4 – Mix the filling: Preheat the oven to 400°F (204°C), and while it heats, make the filling. Add the ground beef, rice, red pepper paste, tomato paste, all of the spices and seasoning, pomegranate molasses, and parsley to the bowl with the chopped onion cores.

Using clean hands, give it a good mix so that everything is evenly combined. You’re looking for a mixture that feels slightly sticky and moist but holds together when you press it between your fingers. 

Step 5 – Roll each layer into a little stuffed onion (aka dolma): Place about 1 ½ tablespoons of filling inside each layer and roll it tightly.

Pro Tip: As you stuff and roll, you’ll see that the very outermost layers of the onion are longer than the inner layers. I find that stuffed onions made with these longer layers are a bit chewy, so I cut them in half. This way, all layers are roughly the same size, and every stuffed onion tastes the same after everything is baked.

Stuffed onion in a skillet with the sauce.

Step 6 – Arrange them in the pan: I am using a 3 ½-quart cast iron skillet, but a large casserole dish would also work well. 

Place the stuffed onions in a spiral, starting from the outer edge, tucking each one right up against the next.

You want them close enough to support each other without squeezing them too tightly. In my 12-inch pan, depending on the size of my onions, I can usually fit 18-22 stuffed onions in one spiral layer.

Step 7 – Make the sauce: In a measuring cup, combine olive oil, pomegranate molasses, tomato paste, red pepper paste, garlic, salt, and boiling water. Whisk until everything dissolves. 

Pour the sauce right over the onions. You can cover the pan with foil or a large sheet of parchment paper.

Pro Tip: During my recipe testing, I kept thinking the sauce looked like too much. It isn’t. You need that liquid to help the onions and filling cook slowly and evenly, and most of it evaporates in the oven, leaving just the right amount behind.

Stuffed roasted before and after they are baked.

Step 8 – Bake: Place the onions in the oven, covered, for about 30 minutes to soften all the way through. Then uncover the dish and let them brown and caramelize around the edges for another 20 minutes or so.

You’ll see that the remaining liquid will be thicker and reduced almost in half.

Step 9 – Finish with fresh parsley and serve: I love adding a handful of parsley at the end to brighten the entire dish. Serve your baked stuffed onions warm, with extra sauce spooned over the top.

Expert Tips From My Mediterranean Kitchen

Stuffed roasted onions look fancy, but once you understand a few small techniques, the whole process becomes much easier (and more enjoyable).

Here are a few lessons I learned during my recipe testing, along with a few things I learned watching my mom make these when I was growing up in Türkiye.

Don’t over-boil the onions: Keep a close eye on them once they start boiling. Let them simmer just until they become soft enough to bend, usually around 15 minutes. If you cook them too long, the layers become mushy and tear easily when you try to separate them. 

Cool the onions before handling: Letting the onions cool takes some time. If you are in a pinch, you can run them under cold water to speed things up. However, it is imperative that you drain them properly before stuffing.

It is okay to cut long onion layers: The outer layers of the onion are sometimes too long for rolling. If they are, simply slice them in half. Too much onion wrapping around the filling can become chewy after baking.

You do not need extra oil: Some versions of this recipe online (especially on social media) add additional (between ¼ cup to ½ cup) olive oil to the filling. I tested this recipe both ways and did not think it was necessary, especially if you are using 85/15 ground meat.

That said, if you’re using leaner meat, feel free to add ¼ cup olive oil to keep the filling tender and moist.

Use boiling or hot tap water for the sauce: When making the sauce, it is hard to dissolve everything with cold (or even room temperature) water, so I recommend using hot water to make it easier on yourself. 

Use parchment paper or foil to cover: Most Turkish cooks use parchment paper to cover the dish. You need to cut it so it covers the entire surface and stays put. However, aluminum foil can also be used.

Ground beef stuffed onions in a skillet from the top view.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Beef stuffed onions garnished with parsley from the top view.
Print

Stuffed Onions Recipe

This Baked Ground Beef Stuffed Onions recipe is a showstopping main dish made with tender onion layers stuffed with a beef-and-rice filling. Everything bakes in a sweet-tangy pomegranate molasses sauce that caramelizes beautifully in the oven.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Cooling time (for Onions) 20 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 55 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 493kcal

Ingredients

For The Onions

  • 4 large onions ~ 2 ½ lbs
  • Salt

For The Filling

  • ½ lbs ground beef 85-15
  • ½ cup white rice rinsed under hot tap water
  • ¼ cup pomegranate molasses
  • 2 tablespoons red pepper paste Use tomato paste if you can't find it
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon allspice
  • ½ teaspoon dried mint optional
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes Urfa or Aleppo pepper, optional
  • 1 cup chopped fresh parsley plus more for garnish

For The Sauce

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ¼ cup pomegranate molasses
  • 2 tablespoons red pepper paste Use tomato paste if you can't find it
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 ½ cups boiling water or hot tap water

Instructions

  • Cut both ends of the onion and peel them one by one. Slice halfway through to the center without cutting all the way.
  • Fill a medium-sized saucepan with water and add the onions over medium heat. Bring to a boil and simmer for 15 minutes. The leaves will soften, and separate a bit.
  • Using a slotted spoon, carefully remove the onions from the boiling water and transfer them to a plate, and let them cool.
  • When cool enough to handle, carefully remove each layer of the onion, being gentle to avoid tearing it, and discard the thin membrane as needed. As you get closer to the middle, you’ll end up with the cores of the onions. Set them aside; we’ll use them in the filling.
  • You should have about 20-22 layers of onions in the end. Set them aside.
  • Meanwhile, preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
  • While the oven is heating, make the filling. Into a mixing bowl, place ground beef, white rice, pomegranate molasses, red pepper paste, tomato paste, kosher salt, black pepper, ground cumin, allspice, dried mint, red pepper flakes, and chopped fresh parsley.
  • Chop the reserved onion cores and add them to the bowl. Give it a good mix to ensure everything is fully incorporated.
  • When it is time to stuff, fill each layer of the onion with a tablespoon of the meat filling, then roll tightly. Repeat this process for the remaining onion layers, then arrange them in a spiral pattern in a large skillet or casserole dish.
  • To make the sauce, whisk together olive oil, pomegranate molasses, red pepper paste, tomato paste, garlic, salt, and boiling water in a measuring cup until combined.
  • Carefully pour the sauce over the stuffed onions. You can cover it with foil or a large sheet of parchment paper.
  • Bake in the oven for 30 minutes, then remove the parchment paper and continue baking for an additional 20 minutes, or until onions turn golden brown.
  • Garnish with chopped parsley and serve immediately.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 18-22 stuffed onions, which is ideal for serving 4 adults, with each adult eating 4-5 stuffed onions. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Prep the onions and the filling. Stuff and roll the onions and arrange them in a casserole or skillet. Cover tightly and keep in the fridge for up to 24 hours. When ready to cook, make the sauce and bake as directed.
  • Storage: Bring the leftovers to room temperature, place in an airtight container, and store in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 493kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 40mg | Sodium: 1353mg | Potassium: 672mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 1596IU | Vitamin C: 35mg | Calcium: 88mg | Iron: 4mg

What to Serve With Stuffed Onions

So you’ve made your beautiful stuffed baked onions. They’re tender, aromatic, and perfectly seasoned. But what should you serve alongside them to turn this into a complete meal?

Below are a few traditional and Mediterranean-inspired pairings to help you serve them the way they’re enjoyed across Türkiye:

Pair them with a cool yogurt sauce: A creamy yogurt sauce is one of the most classic pairings to dolma-style dishes. My Yogurt Dill Sauce adds a bright, herby note with lemon and fresh dill, while my Tzatziki Sauce Recipe is a classic pairing with thick Greek yogurt, cucumber, and garlic. 

Add a refreshing salad: A crisp salad never disappoints. Turkish Shepherd Salad is a traditional go-to with juicy tomatoes, cucumbers, and herbs, especially in the summer months. If you want something a bit more herby, Tabbouleh is another option with lots of fresh herbs.

Serve with rice or pilaf: To make this a little more filling, pair your stuffed onions with a starchy side dish. If you want a Turkish side, my Bulgur Pilaf is a classic, or try my Vermicelli Rice, another staple you’ll often see served alongside dishes like this in many Mediterranean restaurants. And if you want a gluten-free option, Lemon Quinoa brings a fresh, zesty note without overpowering the main dish.

How to Make Ahead, Store & Reheat 

One of the things I love most about this stuffed onion recipe is that you can make it ahead, and it tastes better the next day.  The flavors magically deepen as they sit, which makes it an ideal recipe for make-ahead dinners, holiday prep, or easy leftovers. 

Here’s how I do it:

Make Ahead: You have two make-ahead options:

  • You can prepare, stuff, and roll all the onions, arrange them in your pan, and refrigerate them unbaked, without the sauce, for up to 24 hours. When you’re ready to cook, simply mix the tomato sauce, pour it over the onions, and bake as directed.
  • Alternatively, you can bake them completely a day ahead. Let them cool, cover tightly, and refrigerate. Just pop them in the oven to warm thoroughly, sprinkle with fresh herbs, and serve!

Storage: Once baked, let the stuffed onions cool completely before storing. Transfer them to an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 4 days. 

Reheat: Reheat the stuffed onions in a 350°F (177°C) oven, loosely covered with parchment or foil, for 10-15 minutes, or just until warmed through. You can also microwave them if needed, but the oven keeps the texture softer and more consistent.

Freezing: Stuffed onions freeze very well. Once completely cooled, place them in an airtight container and freeze for up to 2 months. For the best texture, thaw them overnight in the refrigerator, then reheat.

FAQs

Can I make this recipe vegetarian?

Yes, you can make a vegetarian version. Simply increase the rice to 2 cups and add 3 tablespoons of extra-virgin olive oil to the filling. It is not traditional, but some cooked lentils or mushrooms can be added to the mixture to make it even more satisfying.

What if my onion layers fall apart?

This usually happens when the onions are overcooked. Boil them just until they’re soft enough to bend, but not mushy. Using firm, fresh onions also helps because the layers are sturdier.

Can I make stuffed onions ahead of time?

Yes. To do so, stuff the onions, arrange them in the baking dish, cover tightly, and refrigerate for up to 24 hours. When you’re ready to serve, simply add the sauce and bake.

Can I use brown rice?

Technically, yes, but it takes much longer to cook and stays much firmer inside the onions. For best results, stick with white rice (long-, medium-, or short-grain). If using brown rice, soak it for at least 1 hour to soften it before adding it to the filling mixture.

Can I use red or white onions?

Yes. Red, white, or yellow onions will all work for this recipe. Just make sure the onions you choose are fresh, firm, and not soft, so the layers hold up well when boiling and rolling.

How is this recipe different than Greek Stuffed Onions?

While the concept is pretty similar, the Greek version of this recipe does not use pomegranate molasses. It is also often made with ground pork, but, similar to my recipe here, ground beef and ground lamb can be good substitutes for pork.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You’ll Love

If these meat-stuffed onions made you curious to try more, I invite you to check out a few of my favorite recipes from the Mediterranean and Middle Eastern regions below:

  • If make-ahead meat dishes are your favorite, try my Greek Lamb Meatballs for an easy dinner or a quick appetizer.
  • You’ve probably seen the Doner Kebab recipe going viral on social media. It takes the century-old classic recipe and turns it into a weeknight dinner with a clever shortcut.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/feed/ 0
Thanksgiving Fruit Salad https://foolproofliving.com/thanksgiving-fruit-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/thanksgiving-fruit-salad/#respond Mon, 24 Nov 2025 20:47:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=84688 Ingredients You’ll Need You’ll need two sets of ingredients for this festive fruit salad recipe: Mostly fall fruits for the…]]>
Aysegul from the front view.

When I think about Thanksgiving, my mind immediately goes to the turkey, all the cozy vegetable sides, and of course, the pies. What we do not often think about is having something on the lighter side.

I first made this fall fruit salad a few years ago for a big family gathering where we had both kids and older relatives at the table. 

The pies still stole the show, but a few people quietly thanked me for having an option that felt a little lighter without taking away from the holiday spirit. I especially love it because:

  • It uses a mix of everyday fall fruit like apples, pears, oranges, and pomegranates that you probably have on hand.
  • The maple-citrus dressing comes together quickly and helps keep the apples and pears from browning.

Yes, there is a bit of chopping, but once everything is in the bowl, it adds something fresh to all the richer dishes on the table.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll need two sets of ingredients for this festive fruit salad recipe: Mostly fall fruits for the salad and just a few basic ingredients for the dressing.

You can find the full ingredient list in the recipe card, and below are some notes from my recipe testing. 

Fruit Salad Ingredients

Fruits used in the recipe in small bowls from the top view.

Apples: You can easily make this fall fruit salad with one variety of apples, but if you have it, combining two types, like Gala or Honeycrisp with Fuji, gives a way better balance of sweetness and texture. If you prefer a little tartness, you can also mix in one Granny Smith apple. There are no strict rules here, just pick apples that are firm and not overly ripe.

Pears: The same principle goes for pears as well. Bartlet and Anjou are my favorites, but any type would work. When shopping, choose pears that are ripe but still firm so they hold their shape in the salad. 

Grapes: I’m using seedless green grapes for their sweet-tart flavor, but red grapes would work as well. Go with whichever you like best, but I recommend choosing seedless grapes for the best texture in the salad. I like to cut them in half, but if they are too large, you can quarter them as well.

Oranges: Any type of oranges, Navel, Cara Cara, or even Blood Oranges would work beautifully in this autumn fruit salad recipe. You can cut them into small cubes or section them if you have a few extra minutes.

If you need a shortcut, you can also use canned mandarin oranges, but keep in mind that most brands have added sugars, so your Thanksgiving fruit salad will be sweeter. Regardless, if you go down that route, be sure to drain them well.

Kiwi: Look for kiwi that is a little soft when you press it, soft enough to be sweet, but not mushy.

Pomegranate seeds: I love adding pomegranate to this salad because it feels so festive and adds a bright, tart flavor. You can certainly de-seed it yourself, but nowadays, stores sell fresh arils ready to use, which is definitely a good time saver.

If you do not have pomegranate seeds or prefer an alternative, dried cranberries are a good substitute. The dried fruit would give a welcome chewiness and a bit more sweetness to the overall recipe.

Pecans: This is my secret ingredient. The salad tasted good the first time I tried it without pecans, but once I added them, it completely transformed the dish, taking it to a whole other level. They add the best crunch. Walnuts could work too, but pecans are my favorite here.

If you prefer a nut-free option, you can omit it or use pumpkin seeds instead.

Dressing Ingredients

The dressing for this salad is light and simple, and the best part is that it comes together in less than a minute. You will need:

The dressing ingredients from the top view.

Maple syrup: You can use either maple syrup or honey in this dressing. I also recommend adjusting the amount based on how sweet your fruit is. If your fruit is very sweet, you may want a little less, and vice versa.

Orange juice: I use freshly squeezed orange juice because it not only flavors the salad but also helps keep the apples and pears from browning with its acidity. You could also use store-bought orange juice, just make sure to choose one without added sugars since both the fruit and maple syrup are already plenty sweet.

Ground cinnamon: I’m using it here because it complements the fall fruits very well, but you can also use apple pie spice or pumpkin pie spice if you prefer a slightly different fall flavor.

How to Make Fruit Salad For Thanksgiving

When I first tested this recipe, I chopped all the fruit, set it in a bowl, and then mixed the dressing. The apples and pears started browning right away, which wasn’t ideal.

What worked so much better was starting with the dressing in a large bowl, then adding the fruit as I cut it. The acid in the orange juice helps slow browning and keeps everything looking fresh. So, grab a big bowl and follow along.

A collage of images showing the steps of make the dressing and adding the apples and pears in there.

Step 1 – Make the dressing: Add the maple syrup, orange zest, orange juice, vanilla extract, and cinnamon to a large salad bowl, whisking until well combined.

Step 2 – Prep and add the fruit: Once the dressing is ready, start chopping the fruit. I like to start with apples and pears first so I can ensure they interact with the acid in the bowl, which slows browning. From there, you can continue with kiwi, pomegranate seeds, oranges, and grapes.

Gently toss all your fruit to coat it with the dressing.

Thanksgiving fruit salad recipe in a bowl before and after it is mixed.

Step 3 – Add the pecans and garnish: Right before serving, add the pecans to keep them crisp. If you want to add a little color and freshness, add a handful of torn fresh mint leaves. Give everything one last gentle toss, and it’s ready to serve.

Make-Ahead, Storage & Serving Tips

While this Thanksgiving fruit salad is always best the day it’s made, you can also prepare it in advance if you coat the fruit well with the citrus dressing. Here’s how to make it ahead, store it, and serve it so it still tastes fresh:

Make ahead: You can prepare this fruit salad 2-3 days in advance, which is especially helpful for busy holiday cooking. Just be sure your apples and pears are well coated in the citrus dressing, as the orange juice helps prevent them from browning. I also keep the pecans separate until right before serving so they don’t get soggy.

Storage: You can store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator. It will taste its best within the first 2-3 days. If the fruit looks a little soft after it’s been in the fridge, a squeeze of fresh orange juice or lemon juice, or a small drizzle of maple syrup or honey, brightens it back up.

Freezing: I do not recommend freezing fruit salad. The fruit becomes mushy once thawed and loses its fresh texture.

Expert Tips for Perfect Fruit Salad for Your Thanksgiving Table

Slightly ripened fruit works best: When shopping for this recipe, take a few minutes to pick fruit that’s ripe but not overly soft. You want that sweet-juicy moment when you bite in, without the fruit turning mushy once everything is mixed.

Coat apples and pears in citrus right away: Apples and pears oxidize quickly, so I always mix the orange dressing in the bottom of the bowl first, then add the apples and pears. The citrus coats the fruit the moment it goes in, keeping it fresh.

Cut the fruit into equal sizes: Aim for roughly ½-inch bite-sized pieces so the salad feels balanced and you get a little bit of everything in each bite.

Add pecans right before serving: Pecans soften if they sit in the dressing too long, so add them in at the end. If you have a few extra minutes and want to take this fall fruit salad recipe up a notch, toast your pecans in a dry pan for a few minutes to bring out more of their earthy flavors.

Use a mix of seasonal colors and textures: It’s optional, but I really encourage you to play with different varieties of fruit. For example, instead of sticking to one type of orange, try using both a Navel and a Cara Cara. You can do the same with apples and pears. It gives the salad a nicer mix of textures and a little more interest in every bite.

Chill before serving: Refrigerating the salad for 10-15 minutes before serving is optional, but it makes this fruit salad even more refreshing.

Serve in small jars: When I make this for Thanksgiving or Friendsgiving, I like to spoon it into little jars, almost like jam jars. It makes it easier because it is already portioned out. Plus, your guests won’t have to worry about it getting lost on a crowded plate.

Fruit salad for Thanksgiving in a bowl from the top view.

What to Serve It With

This autumn fruit salad is versatile and pairs well with so many things, whether you’re serving it to kids, having it for breakfast, or adding it to a holiday spread. Here are a few ideas:

  • If you’re serving this to kids, you can add my Fruit Dip Recipe on the side. It makes the salad feel more like a treat and is always a favorite with little ones.
  • You can also spoon some fruit salad over a bowl of  Vanilla Yogurt for a quick breakfast or snack. 
  • And if you want to take things up a notch for the holidays, serve the fruit salad with a dollop of my light and airy Maple Whipped Cream. It adds just the right touch of sweetness, making the whole dish feel extra special.

FAQs

How do you keep fruit salad from turning brown?

The best way to prevent apples and pears from browning is to coat them with an acidic ingredient, such as orange juice, which helps slow down the oxidation.

Can I make a fruit salad the night before?

Yes, this fruit salad holds up well when made the night before. Just be sure the apples and pears are fully coated in the orange juice mixture (to prevent them from browning), then give the salad a gentle toss before serving.

What fruits should I avoid in fruit salad?

Most people don’t like adding bananas to fruit salads because they turn mushy as they sit. In my opinion, it is a personal preference, and there are no strict rules. Instead, the important thing is to pick fruit that is neither overly ripe nor soft, and vice versa.

Can I use canned fruit in Thanksgiving fruit salad?

Yes, you technically can. However, keep in mind that most canned fruit is packed in a sugary liquid or juice, which will make your fruit salad sweeter. If you decide to go down that route, be sure to adjust the amount of maple syrup you use in the dressing so it is not overly sweet.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Fruit Salads You Might Like

If you enjoyed this Thanksgiving fruit salad, here are a few more fresh and delicious fruit salads I think you’ll love:

  • If you want something light to enjoy in the mornings, my Breakfast Fruit Salad is a simple recipe you can also make ahead. It’s easy to make and perfect for quick breakfasts or weekend brunch.
  • For something more festive, my Christmas Fruit Salad includes a mix of seasonal fruit tossed in a similar maple-citrus dressing. It’s a great way to add a pop of festive color to your Christmas celebrations.
Thanksgiving fruit salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Thanksgiving Fruit Salad Recipe

A crowd pleaser, this Thanksgiving Fruit Salad is a lighter addition to your dessert lineup made with fall fruits like apples, pears, oranges, and pomegranate arils. No cooking required and comes together quickly.
Course Vegan side dish
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 208kcal

Ingredients

For the dressing:

  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup or honey
  • 1 teaspoon orange zest
  • ½ cup orange juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • teaspoon ground cinnamon or apple spice

For the fruit:

  • 2 medium apples cut into cubes ~ 3 cups
  • 2 medium pears cut into cubes ~ 3 cups
  • 1 cup seedless green grapes cut in half
  • 1 cup pomegranate arils
  • 2 oranges cut into small pieces ~ 2 cups
  • 1 kiwi cut into cubes ~ ½ cup
  • 1 cup pecans or walnuts

Optional Garnish:

  • A handful of fresh mint leaves torn

Instructions

  • To make the dressing, mix together maple syrup, orange zest, orange juice, vanilla extract, and cinnamon in a large bowl until combined.
  • Add in the cubed apples and pears to the bowl and give it a quick toss to ensure they are coated with the dressing (aka the acid in the orange juice) to prevent browning.
  • Then add in the grapes, pomegranate arils, oranges, and kiwi to the bowl. Toss to combine.
  • When ready to serve, add the pecans and toss. If using, garnish with fresh mint leaves and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 8-9 cups of fruit salad, ideal for 8 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: You can make this recipe a day (or two) in advance. Just follow the recipe as written (except adding the pecans and mint garnish), place in an airtight container, and store it in the fridge. When ready to serve, transfer it to a serving platter and garnish with pecans and fresh mint leaves, if using.

Nutrition

Calories: 208kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 361mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin A: 171IU | Vitamin C: 41mg | Calcium: 44mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/thanksgiving-fruit-salad/feed/ 0
Quinoa Stuffed Acorn Squash https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-stuffed-acorn-squash/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-stuffed-acorn-squash/#comments Tue, 07 Oct 2025 19:43:54 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20747 If you’ve ever hosted a holiday dinner, you know the struggle: one guest wants turkey, another is vegetarian, and someone…]]>

If you’ve ever hosted a holiday dinner, you know the struggle: one guest wants turkey, another is vegetarian, and someone else is vegan (and gluten-free, of course). You need a dish that can compete with turkey while meeting all the dietary requirements.

That’s where this Quinoa Stuffed Acorn Squash recipe comes in. I came up with it when my best friend showed up with her new boyfriend to last year’s Thanksgiving dinner, who happens to be vegan. And let me tell you, it served its purpose.

It worked beautifully as a plant-based holiday main dish for him, while the rest of the crowd enjoyed it as a side dish with turkey. The good news is that you can serve it warm, at room temperature, or cold, making it a no-fuss recipe that checks all the boxes.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This is one of those recipes that includes all the best festive fall ingredients. The full list with exact amounts is in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Acorn squash: While it may be available year-round in most grocery stores, it is at its peak in the fall and winter months. To choose the best squash, look for a mix of dark green and orange skin colors that look slightly dull (not shiny). It should feel firm and heavy. You can use traditional green acorn squash or try white, golden, or even carnival squash. 

Quinoa: Use the type of quinoa you prefer, such as white, red, black, or a mix of all three. You can cook quinoa on the stove, make microwave quinoa, or even make pressure cooker quinoa for a hands-off method. If you are not a fan of quinoa, you can swap it with cooked wild rice, farro, or couscous.

Apples:  I love using Fuji apples here, but Gala and Honeycrisp also work. If you like a tangier bite, go for Granny Smith. You can also swap the apples for pears for a sweeter bite.

Dried Fruit: I prefer dried cranberries for this recipe, but I like to chop them so they are easier to chew. You can also mix it up with other dried fruits, such as chopped apricots or dates.

Nuts: Pecans are my favorite here, but you can use walnuts, almonds, or whichever nut you prefer. 

For a nut-free option, try toasted pumpkin seeds or sunflower seeds. I usually opt for roasted nuts for extra flavor, but raw ones also work well.

Herbs: I am using fresh parsley, but you can also add other fresh holiday herbs like thyme, sage, or rosemary. During the fall, stores like Trader Joe’s often have holiday herb bundles, and they work perfectly here.

Optional Additions:

This is one of those recipes you can really customize and make your own. Here are a few of my favorite ways to mix it up:

Pomegranate Arils: For an extra fall touch, add a handful on top for a pop of color and tartness.

Maple syrup: If you enjoy the salty-sweet combination, whisk a tablespoon of maple syrup with olive oil and brush it over the squash prior to sprinkling it with the spice mixture.

Chickpeas: For a protein boost and a more filling dish (especially if you are serving it as a vegan main dish), you can stir in a 15-oz can of (drained and rinsed) chickpeas into the stuffing.

Mushrooms: For a distinctive yet delicious umami boost, consider adding sautéed or roasted mushrooms to the filling. 

Cheese: If you don’t mind making the dish vegetarian, you can garnish it with a handful of crumbled feta or Parmesan cheese for a creamy and salty bite.

How to Make Roasted Vegan Stuffed Acorn Squash

From start to finish, this vegan stuffed squash takes less than an hour to make. The process consists of three parts: roasting the acorn squash, preparing the quinoa and apple filling while it bakes, and filling the roasted squash with the stuffing. Here’s how I do it: 

Images showing how to cut acorn squash for stuffing.

Step 1 – Cut the Acorn Squash: You should exercise extreme caution when cutting acorn squash, especially if you have kids around. Start with a sharp knife to make the job easier and safer. 

First, cut a thin slice off the bottom so it can sit flat on your cutting board. Then cut from top to bottom vertically, pressing the tip of the knife into the center and working your way down until you have two halves. 

Lastly, scoop out the seeds and stringy bits inside. You can toss these or bake them; they make a delicious crunchy snack. 

Photos showing how to season and prepare acorn squash for roasting.

Step 2 – Season and Roast the Squash: Preheat the oven to 400°F (204°C) and line a baking sheet with parchment paper. 

Mix together onion powder, garlic powder, cinnamon, cumin, salt, and pepper in a small bowl. Brush the cut sides of the squash with a little olive oil and sprinkle it with the spice mixture.  

Place the acorn squash halves cut-side down to help the edges caramelize and keep the flesh tender. Roast for about 40 minutes, until you can easily slide a fork through the meat. Your kitchen will smell heavenly while these are baking.

A collage of images showing the quinoa filling and stuffing the roasted squash.

Step 3 – Make the Quinoa Filling: While the squash is roasting, sauté the onion and celery in a pan over medium-high heat until softened for 8-10 minutes, stirring frequently.

Then, add the apples and cook until they’re just soft enough, but not mushy. Stir in the garlic, cooked quinoa, cranberries, and pecans. Let it sit so the quinoa absorbs all the flavors, and add the parsley at the very end.

Step 4 – Assemble and Serve: Remove the roasted acorn squash halves from the oven and let them cool for 10 minutes. Then flip and fill each half with the quinoa mixture.

The acorn squash filling/stuffing recipe below yields 3-4 cups of filling. If you have leftovers, you can enjoy them as a side dish or a quick lunch the next day. It can also be served as a standalone side dish.

You can serve your filled acorn squash right away, or optionally, for a crispy, golden topping, return the stuffed squash to the oven and bake for an additional 10 minutes until the pecans are toasted and the quinoa looks golden brown. Garnish with fresh parsley, pomegranate arils, and your preferred toppings before serving.

Make Ahead, Storage & Reheating & Instructions

I love making this stuffed vegan squash recipe not only because it is a feast for the eyes, but also because you can easily prepare it ahead and serve it warm or cold, making it easy to incorporate into your holiday meal prep schedule.

Make Ahead: You can prepare the quinoa stuffing 1-2 days in advance, bring it to room temperature, and store it in an airtight container in the fridge. You can also roast the squash halves a day ahead, let them cool to room temperature, and refrigerate. When you are ready to serve, reheat the filling, stuff the squash, and warm them in the oven at 275°F (135°C) until heated through.

Alternatively, you can assemble the whole thing a day in advance, bring to room temperature, and store it in an airtight container. An hour before serving, you can reheat it in a low-heat (275°F (135°C)) oven for 15 minutes, or until heated through.

Storage: After the stuffed squash has cooled to room temperature, it can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. The leftovers make the most delicious lunch the next day.

Freezing: While you can technically freeze baked acorn squash, I don’t recommend it. It causes the squash to release extra water when thawed, resulting in a mushy texture and minimal flavor.

Expert Tips for Success

Microwave before cutting: Acorn squash can be hard to cut, especially if it is newly harvested. If you are having trouble cutting it, you can place it in the microwave for 1-2 minutes in 30-second increments to soften. Keep a close eye on it and check often rather than letting it run the whole time.

Cutting vertically vs horizontally: As you can see in the pictures, I cut my acorn squash vertically, but it is a personal preference. You can cut it horizontally if it is easier for you. However, be sure to cut a small amount from the top and bottom so they can sit straight after they are flipped.

Extra Caramelization: This is optional, but for a more golden, caramelized finish, flip the roasted squash cut-side up and place it under the broiler for 1-2 minutes after it’s finished baking. Just keep a close eye on it so it doesn’t burn.

Roast cut-side down: This is a crucial step, as it helps the edges caramelize and makes the flesh extra tender and sweet. While I didn’t think it was necessary, if you prefer, you can flip them at the end and put them under the broiler for a minute or two for even more caramelization.

Cook quinoa with stock: One of the best ways to season quinoa is by using stock instead of water as the cooking liquid. I usually use my homemade vegetable stock I make from scraps, but store-bought vegetable stock would also work. I highly recommend rinsing quinoa before cooking for optimal flavor.

Keep the filling moist: If you make it earlier in the day (or reheating), the quinoa mixture may dry out slightly. You can stir in a splash of water or stock to keep it fluffy and add more moisture.

Toast the nuts: Yes, it is an extra step, but toasting pecans (or pumpkin seeds) in a dry skillet takes just a few minutes and is a major upgrade in the overall taste of the filling. So, if you have a couple of extra minutes, place the nuts/seeds in an empty skillet and toast (keeping a super close eye on them) for 5-7 minutes over medium heat before adding them to the filling.

What to Serve with Quinoa-Stuffed Acorn Squash

This quinoa stuffed squash is one of those recipes that can play more than one role on your holiday table. You can enjoy it as a main dish for a vegetarian or vegan dinner, or serve it as a side alongside your favorite holiday mains. Here are a few of my favorite pairings:

FAQs

Can I make this ahead for Thanksgiving?

Yes, you can cook the quinoa filling a day or two before and keep it in the fridge in an airtight container. You can also roast the squash halves ahead of time and store them refrigerated for up to three days.

Can I freeze stuffed acorn squash?

Technically, yes, but I do not recommend it. The squash becomes watery and loses its texture once thawed.

Can I use butternut squash instead?

Yes, butternut squash also works. You can roast butternut squash halves or air-fry them and fill them with the quinoa mixture, following the same recipe.

What’s the safest way to cut acorn squash?

The secret is to use a sharp knife and start by slicing a thin piece off the bottom so the squash sits steady. Then cut from top to bottom to split it in half, and if it feels too tough to cut, microwave it for a minute or two to soften the skin.

What if I don’t like quinoa?

You can easily swap the quinoa for cooked rice, wild rice, farro, or even couscous for a similar filling.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Acorn Squash Recipes You Might Like

If you enjoyed this vegan acorn squash recipe, you might like these other fall favorite squash recipes:

  • If you are craving a fall salad, try my Acorn Squash Salad. Made with arugula, pepitas, cranberries, goat cheese, and pomegranate seeds, it has everything you crave during the holiday season.
  • Another reader favorite squash recipe is my Roasted Acorn Squash Slices! It takes the basic acorn squash but turns it into an easy side dish with a quick maple-cinnamon glaze.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Quinoa stuffed acorn squash garnished with pomegranate seeds.
Print

Quinoa Stuffed Acorn Squash Recipe

Tender roasted squash halves filled with a savory-sweet quinoa stuffing of apples, cranberries, pecans, and fresh herbs. Vegan, gluten-free, and make-ahead friendly, this is the perfect holiday main or side dish.
Course Side
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 10 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 291kcal

Ingredients

To Roast the Acorn Squash

  • ¼ teaspoon onion powder
  • ¼ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 4 large acorn squash cut in half and seeds removed

To Make the Stuffing:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 onion medium-size / chopped (~1 1/4 cup)
  • 3 stalks celery chopped (~3/4 cup)
  • 1 apple peeled and cut into small ½ inch cubes
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 ½ cups cooked quinoa from 1 cup uncooked quinoa
  • ½ cup dried cranberries chopped finely
  • ½ cup pecans coarsely chopped
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped, plus more as garnish
  • Handful of pomegranate seeds as garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400°F (204 °C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • In a small bowl, mix together onion powder, garlic powder, cinnamon, cumin, salt, and pepper.
  • Brush the insides of acorn squash with olive oil.
    Acorn squash halves getting seasoned and roasted on a sheet pan.
  • Sprinkle each half with the spice mixture, ensuring that it is evenly distributed.
  • Arrange the squash cut-side down and roast for 40 minutes, or until a knife inserted into the flesh of one of the squash comes out easily. Let it cool on the counter for 5 minutes before stuffing.
  • While the acorn squash is roasting, make the stuffing. Heat olive oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the onion and celery, and cook, stirring frequently, until translucent, 5-6 minutes.
  • Add the apple and cook for 3-4 more minutes, or until the apples are softened.
  • Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
    A collage of images showing the quinoa stuffing and as the acorn squash is getting stuffed.
  • Add the cooked quinoa, cranberries, pecans, and season with salt and pepper. Give it a stir and turn the heat to medium-low. Let it cook for 7-8 minutes, stirring occasionally to ensure it remains moist. If you feel like it is drying, add in a few tablespoons of water.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more, if necessary. At the last minute, stir in the parsley.
  • To assemble, fill each roasted acorn squash half with the stuffing and garnish it with pomegranate seeds (if using) and more parsley before serving.
    Vegan and gluten free quinoa stuffed acorn squash on a plate.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 8 halved stuffed acorn squash, which is ideal for serving 8 as a side dish. If you are serving it as a main dish, I would recommend serving 2 halves per person. The nutritional values listed below are per serving of one half.
  • Filling: Take the time to cut up your apple evenly to ensure that you get some with each bite. I also recommend chopping up the cranberries for the same reason.
  • Make ahead: You can roast the acorn squash and make the filling a day (or two) in advance. Bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge. Assemble and bake right before serving.
  • Storing leftovers: Bring them to room temperature and store in the fridge in an airtight container for 3-4 days. 

Nutrition

Calories: 291kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 461mg | Potassium: 979mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 1037IU | Vitamin C: 29mg | Calcium: 104mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-stuffed-acorn-squash/feed/ 30
Almond Flour Pancakes https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-pancakes/ https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-pancakes/#comments Fri, 26 Sep 2025 18:43:53 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=23947 If you’re a long-time reader, you know I’ve been sharing almond flour recipes since 2014. Beyond the blog, I use…]]>

If you’re a long-time reader, you know I’ve been sharing almond flour recipes since 2014. Beyond the blog, I use it just as much in my daily life because I love the taste, the satisfaction it brings, and its versatility.

So, it’s no surprise that pancakes using almond flour have made their way to the blog. If this is your first time trying them, the secret isn’t about adding extra ingredients but about how you cook them. 

Making pancakes with almond flour requires patience. Using low heat and a slightly longer cooking time allows the pancakes to set properly, preventing them from browning too quickly.

Pancakes made with almond flour on a plate topped off with maple syrup and berries.

For me, these pancakes are a weekend favorite. I love making a batch on Saturday morning, enjoying a few warm from the pan, and saving the rest for an easy, filling breakfast the next day.

Almond Flour Pancake Ingredients

If you’ve never baked with almond flour before, it might feel a little intimidating at first, but I promise it’s simpler than it sounds.

Ingredients for almond pancakes from the top view with text on each ingredient.

You can find the exact measurements (with ounces and grams) in the recipe card below, but here are some important notes from all my years baking with almond flour:

Almond flour: If you compare the weight of my almond flour to other people’s, you might think that there is a typo. There isn’t.

Throughout the years of cooking and baking with almond flour, I’ve found that packing the cup with almond flour is the most effective approach. If you use a lesser amount, your pancakes may not hold their shape and potentially fall apart.

If you are buying it from the store, my favorite brand is Blue Diamond, but you can also make your own almond flour at home.

PRO Tip: Using Almond flour vs Almond Meal?

For the best, most tender pancakes, stick with almond flour rather than almond meal. Almond flour is finely ground from blanched almonds, resulting in a finer texture. Almond meal is made with the skins left on and has a coarser grind, which can result in pancakes with a slightly denser texture. 

With that being said, if almond meal is all you have, you can use it in a pinch. They’ll still be delicious, but with a more grainy texture.

Baking powder: This is one of the most important ingredients, as it gives pancakes the signature lift that fluffy pancakes are known for, so don’t skip it. I always use aluminum-free baking powder, such as double-acting baking powder like Rumford.

Spices: Use any warm spices you love here. I usually add ground cinnamon and nutmeg, but cardamom would also be a great addition. In the fall, I also love adding a pinch of pumpkin pie spice.

Milk: I am using homemade almond milk, but any plant-based milk, like unsweetened almond milk or regular cow’s milk, will work.

Sweetener: My go-to is maple syrup, as it effectively minimizes the eggy taste and allows the pancakes to brown beautifully. 

If you follow a keto diet, you can swap in your favorite keto-friendly sweetener.

Otherwise, honey, agave, or a couple of tablespoons of regular (or brown) sugar will also work.

Eggs: They are the binder in this recipe. I recommend using large eggs that are at room temperature (or as close to it as possible).

PRO Tip:  If you want to make your pancakes egg-free, you can use flax eggs (mix 1 tablespoon of ground flax with 2 ½ tablespoons of water). They’ll still be tasty, but they won’t be quite as fluffy and may not hold together as well.

Butter (or Oil): You can use melted unsalted butter for that classic flavor, or swap in a neutral oil like avocado oil, olive oil, or coconut oil, for a dairy-free option.

Optional Mix-Ins

This is where you can have fun and make these gluten-free almond flour pancakes your own: 

Chocolate Chips: For almond flour chocolate chip pancakes, stir ¼ cup of mini chocolate chips into the batter. I prefer these over regular chips because they are naturally sweetened and don’t weigh the batter down as much.

Protein Powder: If you want to up the protein content, you can always stir in a scoop of your favorite protein powder into the pancake mix.

Fresh Fruit: You can fold in a small amount (no more than ¼ cup) of chopped blueberries or thinly sliced bananas into the batter just before cooking, so they retain their shape and don’t make the pancake batter watery.

How To Make Almond Flour Pancakes

You can still get a stack of fluffy pancakes with almond flour; you just need to mix, spread, and cook them a little differently. Here’s exactly how I make it step by step:

A collage of images showing the almond flour pancake mix and incorporating it with the wet ingredients.

Step 1 – Make the Batter: Whisk the almond flour, baking powder, salt, and spices in a medium bowl until no lumps remain. In a separate large bowl, whisk the eggs, almond milk, maple syrup, and vanilla. 

Pour the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients and whisk until you have a smooth batter, ensuring that the large chunks of almond flour are fully incorporated into the mixture. The consistency should be pourable but thick enough to hold its shape. If it feels too thick, add a splash of milk.

Person mixing the almond flour pancake batter and then cooking it in a skillet.

Step 2 – Heat the Pan and Spread the Pancake Batter: Warm a small amount of butter or oil in a nonstick skillet or on a griddle over medium heat. 

The key here is to maintain a gentle heat so that the outside doesn’t burn before the inside cooks through. I usually start with medium heat and then turn it down to medium-low. 

Through testing, I found that ¼ cup of batter makes the perfect pancake. Scoop it into the skillet and gently spread it into a 3½ inch circle

This step is crucial because if your pancake is too thick in the middle, the outside will brown before the center is fully cooked.

Additionally, avoid overcrowding the skillet. Depending on the size of your skillet, it is best to give them enough room so they cook evenly. 

A collage of images showing how to make almond flour pancakes and garnish them with berries.

Step 3 – Cook Low and Slow: Let the pancakes cook over medium-low heat until small bubbles form on the surface and the edges look set, it should take about 4 minutes. Flip each one carefully with a thin spatula and cook for an additional 4 minutes on the second side, until golden brown. 

Unlike regular pancakes that cook in 2-3 minutes, almond flour pancakes take closer to 4 minutes per side. If you rush this step or use a higher heat, they will most likely fall apart. Therefore, keep the temperature low and allow them time to cook through.

Step 4 – Finish and Serve: Continue cooking the remaining batter, lightly greasing the pan between batches to prevent the almond pancakes from sticking. If you are making a larger batch, you can keep the finished pancakes warm in a 200°F (95°C) oven until ready to serve.

Optional Toppings – Ways To Dress Them Up

I kept my almond pancakes recipe simple with fresh fruit and a drizzle of maple syrup, but here are a few serving suggestions to dress them up: 

  • For a truly special treat, try topping them with a spoonful of Blueberry Puree or a dollop of Maple Whipped Cream.
  • Top them off with a spoonful of your favorite nut butter, such as almond butter or peanut butter, to make them extra filling. 
  • Top with a dollop of homemade vanilla yogurt or coconut cream for more creaminess.
  • Sprinkle with your favorite nuts or chunky granola to add a touch of crunch.

Helpful Tips for the Best Almond Flour Pancakes

Like with any pancakes, the first batch may not be perfect, but once you get the hang of it, you’ll see how easy it is to make almond flour pancakes. Below are some of my notes from my own recipe testing to guide you along the way:

  • 2 teaspoons baking powder: Before you ask, I know it seems like a lot, but this amount is intentional. Compared to other flours (i.e., all-purpose, whole wheat, etc.), almond flour is naturally denser, so you need some leavening to help make it “fluffy”. Some recipes rely heavily on eggs, but I found that pancakes made without baking powder fell flat, and they were harder to flip.
  • Use a nonstick skillet: Paleo almond flour pancakes are more delicate than traditional pancakes, and if you don’t use a nonstick skillet, they may stick to the pan and fall apart. A good nonstick pan makes flipping them much easier. For that reason, I don’t recommend using a cast-iron skillet for this recipe, as the pancakes are more likely to burn and stick to the pan. 
  • Cook low and slow: Since almond flour browns faster than regular all purpose flour, keeping the heat on medium-low allows the centers to cook through without the outsides burning.
  • Be patient: Each pancake needs about 4 minutes per side. The first batch may take a little longer since the pan isn’t yet fully hot. Patience is key here; this step is the most common reason pancakes fall apart.
  • Don’t overcrowd the pan: Give each pancake enough room so you can flip them easily. In a 10-inch skillet, I usually make two at a time. With a 12-inch skillet, you can cook three.
  • Residual heat: Keep in mind that the pancakes continue to cook after you remove them from the skillet. During my recipe testing, I’ve found that letting them rest for 5-10 minutes helps cook the insides further and makes them perfectly tender.

How To Make Ahead, Store & Reheat

One of the best aspects of this almond flour pancake recipe is that it keeps well, making it ideal for meal prep. Here is how I do it:

Make Ahead: You have two options. You can prepare the batter a few hours in advance, cover it, and refrigerate until ready to cook. Just give it a quick stir before scooping to ensure everything is well combined. Or, cook the whole batch a day ahead, and let the pancakes cool completely before refrigerating.

Storage: When the pancakes are ready and have cooled, store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 2 to 3 days.

Reheat: You can warm them in a toaster or in a low oven at 275°F (135°C) until heated through. Both of these methods will keep the edges crispy, rather than soggy. You can also microwave them in 15-20 second intervals.

Freezing: Once they are completely cool, layer them between sheets of parchment paper in an airtight container or freezer bag. When you’re ready to eat, no need to thaw overnight; just take them out of the freezer about 30 minutes before serving, then reheat in the toaster or oven.

FAQs

Can I use almond meal instead of almond flour?

It is not ideal, but it would work in a pinch. Almond meal pancakes will be denser and have a more grainy texture compared to the lighter and fluffier texture you would get with almond flour.

What’s the best almond flour for pancakes?

Use a finely ground almond flour you like. I personally love and use Blue Diamond Almond Flour in all of my almond flour recipes on this website. Compared to most brands, it is cheaper and has no odor. Bob’s Red Mills’ superfine almond flour is another good brand, but it tends to be pricier.

Why do almond flour pancakes fall apart?

Usually, it’s from a runny batter, cooking on high heat, or flipping them too soon. If your batter has too much liquid, mix in a little more almond flour. Keep the heat low and wait until the edges look set before flipping.

Can I make these vegan?

Yes, you can use flax eggs (1 tablespoon ground flax + 2 ½  tablespoons water per egg), but they won’t be as fluffy and may not hold together as well.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Almond Flour Breakfast Recipes You Might Like

If you enjoyed these easy almond flour pancakes, here are a few more breakfast recipes I think you might also like:

  • If waffles are more your thing, my Almond Flour Waffles are crispy on the outside and super soft and fluffy on the inside. They are ready in under 30 minutes and are also perfect for meal prep.
  • For something savory, my Almond Flour Biscuits are buttery, tender, and perfect to serve with breakfast or brunch.
  • And if you’re looking for something sweeter, try my Almond Flour Banana Muffins. They are moist with a hint of cinnamon and make the perfect naturally sweet breakfast or snack.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

This recipe was published in April 2019 but has been updated with additional information, an updated recipe and new photos in September 2025.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Gluten free pancakes with almond flour stacked and garnished with berries.
Print

Almond Flour Pancakes Recipe

These almond flour pancakes are light, fluffy, and perfectly golden brown. Made with basic ingredients, they are low-carb and gluten-free. Serve with fresh fruit, maple syrup, or your favorite toppings. Great for weekends or meal prep.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 8 pancakes
Calories 230kcal

Ingredients

Dry Ingredients:

Wet Ingredients:

  • ¾ cup almond milk unsweetened
  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup plus more for drizzling
  • 3 large eggs at room temperature
  • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter or vegetable oil

Optional Toppings:

  • 1/2 cup mixed berries
  • 1/4 cup maple syrup

Instructions

  • Place almond flour, baking powder, kosher salt, ground cinnamon, and ground nutmeg in a medium mixing bowl. Whisk until well combined, breaking the large chunks of almond flour.
    Almond flour pancake mix batter in a bowl.
  • In a separate, large mixing bowl, whisk together the almond milk, eggs, and vanilla extract until well incorporated.
  • Add the dry ingredients to the wet ones and whisk until just combined, and you have a homogeneous batter.
    A collage of images showing how to make pancakes with almond flour.
  • Heat a tablespoon of butter or vegetable oil in a 10-inch nonstick skillet over medium-low heat until it is melted.
  • Using a ¼ cup measuring cup (approximately 2.54 oz/72 g.), scoop the batter into the skillet. Using a spatula, gently spread it to form a 3 ½-inch circle. Continue with one more or as many as your pan will accommodate, but make sure not to crowd the skillet.
  • Let it cook for 4 minutes, and once it is lightly browned, flip and cook for another 4 minutes. Low and slow heat is the key here, so do not rush the process.
  • Transfer them to a plate and repeat the process with the remaining batter, using the remaining vegetable oil.
    A collage of images showing how to cook and garnish almond pancakes.
  • When ready to serve, top it off with fresh berries and a drizzle of maple syrup.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 8 pancakes, serving 4. I weighed the ingredients using a kitchen scale while preparing the recipe. The nutritional values listed below are per pancake and do not include optional toppings.
  • Paleo: If you are following a strict paleo diet, I recommend using a paleo-friendly baking powder
  • Storage: Bring leftover pancakes to room temperature and store in an airtight container for up to 3 days.
  • Freezing: Once they are fully cooled, place them in a freezer-safe container with small sheets of parchment paper (to prevent sticking) and remove as much air as possible. No need to thaw overnight. Take it out of the freezer 30 minutes before you are ready to serve.

Nutrition

Calories: 230kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 69mg | Sodium: 328mg | Potassium: 39mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 177IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 164mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-pancakes/feed/ 36
Mediterranean Baked Cod https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-baked-cod/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-baked-cod/#comments Mon, 22 Sep 2025 19:18:38 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83443 I recently started working out with a trainer, and one of the first things she mentioned was the importance of…]]>

I recently started working out with a trainer, and one of the first things she mentioned was the importance of incorporating more protein into my meals. Thinking you might be in the same boat, I looked through my recipe archives and realized I needed more quick, protein-rich dinners that I could rely on during the week. That’s how this baked cod recipe came to life.

Growing up in the Mediterranean, fish was always prepared with simple, fresh ingredients, and this version captures exactly that. The combination of roasted tomatoes, garlic, olives, and a drizzle of olive oil is the kind of everyday cooking I grew up with: straightforward, flavorful, and nourishing without being complicated. 

Even if you have never cooked fish before, this recipe is designed to be foolproof, easy enough for a Tuesday night, yet full of the fresh and vibrant flavors I know so well.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You only need a handful of simple, fresh ingredients to make this baked cod fish. The exact amounts are listed in the recipe card below, but below are a few notes and tips from my kitchen to help you get the best results:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.

For The Vegetables:

Cherry tomatoes: If you can, purchase colorful cherry tomatoes as they are sweeter and offer different flavors. I halve them, but if yours are on the bigger side, quarter them. With that being said, any kind of tomatoes you have on hand would work. Just be sure to cut them into small, even chunks.

Onion: I opted for shallots for their mild and sweet flavor. When roasted, they slightly caramelize and get even sweeter. Alternatively, you can use red onions (cut in large chunks) for a similar flavor or chopped scallions for a milder onion flavor.

Garlic: Freshly minced garlic cloves are my choice, but garlic powder can be substituted if you prefer a milder garlic flavor.

Olives: I am using pitted green olives (Castelvetrano olives are my favorite) in this recipe, but Kalamata olives or any other type of olive you like would also work. If you’re not a fan of olives, other briny ingredients like capers or marinated artichoke hearts can be substituted.

For The Cod:

Cod fillets: Cod is best when bought in season, which typically runs from September through May. I like using wild-caught fresh cod, especially from the Pacific or Icelandic. 

You can purchase this fresh fish as fillets or as a whole. If buying already cut cod, I recommend buying fillets that are equal in size so they bake evenly. 

While I used already cut fillets, you can cook a whole fillet using this recipe. Make sure it fits your baking dish, and keep in mind that the cooking time might be slightly longer.

When it is not in season, frozen cod can be used; just be sure that it’s completely thawed before cooking. If you can’t find cod, halibut, or haddock are good substitutes.

Pro tip: If you’re using frozen cod, the safest way to thaw it is to transfer it from the freezer to the fridge to thaw overnight.

If you want to thaw it quicker, place your fillets in a plastic bag and submerge them in cold water, changing the water every 15 to 20 minutes. Don’t thaw them at room temperature, as it can cause bacteria to grow. 

Seasonings for baked cod: I kept it simple and seasoned my cod lightly with a bit of olive oil, kosher salt, and black pepper. But other seasonings like paprika, oregano, or even a little bit of red pepper flakes would work beautifully. 

If you are into making your own seasoning blends, make a batch of my Mediterranean Seasoning and add a teaspoon over the fish to incorporate more flavors of the region. 

Fresh Herbs: You can play around here. I used fresh parsley, but thyme or basil would work really well. 

White wine or vinegar (optional): I wanted to keep this recipe alcohol-free, but if you’d like, a splash of dry white wine (or white wine vinegar) added to the vegetables before roasting adds brightness and depth. The acidity balances the sweetness of the tomatoes and the richness of the olive oil, making the dish taste lighter and more complex.

How to Make Baked Cod with Tomatoes and Olives

One of the best things about this Mediterranean cod recipe is how weeknight-friendly it is. You just have to pre-roast the veggies and add the cod halfway through. Here’s how I do it:

A collage of images showing how to prep the tomatoes, olives and onions before baking.

Step 1 – Prepare the veggie base: In a 9X13 casserole dish, toss together the cherry tomatoes, sliced shallot, fresh garlic, and olives with the olive oil. Season with salt and pepper and give it a good mix. Place it in your preheated oven at 400°F (204°C) and let it roast for 15 minutes or until the tomatoes soften. 

Person drying and seasoning cod fish for baking.

Step 2 – Season cod fish: As the veggies roast, pat your fish fillets dry with paper towels on both sides. Doing so helps the seasoning adhere to the fish and prevents it from steaming, so it bakes up tender and flaky instead of watery.

Drizzle the fish with olive oil and season both sides with salt and pepper.

Showing the Mediterranean cod before and after it is baked.

Step 3 – Add the cod and lemon slices: Once the roasted vegetables are ready, nestle the cod fillets around the roasted veggies and add a few lemon slices around the fish. I like to add the lemon slices at this point so they won’t overcook and taste bitter.

Step 4 – Bake: Roast for 15-17 minutes more, until the fish turns opaque and flakes easily with a fork (or hits 140°F / 60°C if you’re using a meat thermometer). Cod cooks quickly, so keep an eye on it to avoid drying it out.

Step 5 – Serve and enjoy: Spoon some of the roasted tomatoes, olives, and all the juices over the fish before serving. Finish with some fresh parsley and a squeeze of fresh lemon juice.

Make-Ahead, Storage & Reheating Tips

This oven-baked cod is at its best straight from the oven, but if you have leftovers, here’s how to store and reheat them:

Make-Ahead: You can prep the vegetables 1 day in advance, just store them in an airtight container in the fridge. When ready to cook, just toss with olive oil and seasonings and continue with the recipe. 

Storage: Let the cooked codfish cool to room temperature first, then store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days.

Reheating: Warm gently in the oven at 300°F (150°C) for 5-7 minutes or until heated thoroughly or on the stovetop with a splash of water to keep it moist.

Freezing: I don’t recommend freezing, as the fish can turn watery and lose its texture once thawed.

Tips for the Perfect Baked Mediterranean Cod

Even though this recipe is quite simple to make, a few small details can make a big difference in the final result. Here’s what I found works best:

  • Always thaw frozen cod completely: For the best, flakiest texture, it is imperative that your fish is fully thawed before it goes into the oven. Cooking frozen or partially frozen cod will cause it to steam in the oven, leading to a watery and mushy texture.
  • Taste the olives first: Some olives can be extra salty, so tasting them first is always best to avoid oversalting the dish.
  • Pat the cod dry: This is essential for a flaky texture and helps the seasoning stick. Skipping this step can cause it to steam and turn mushy.
  • Use a meat thermometer: The best way to check doneness is to use a meat thermometer. It should register 140°F (60°C) when a thermometer is inserted in the thickest part of the fish.
Two images showing Mediterranean cod with tomatoes and olives in a casserole dish and served on a plate.

What to Serve with Mediterranean Baked Cod

You can enjoy this baked fish on its own with a glass of Sauvignon Blanc or a crisp rosé, but if you want to turn it into a full-on Mediterranean cod dinner, here are some of my favorite pairings:

  • With a starch: Serve it over my Lemon Orzo or Lemon Quinoa for a more filling plate.
  • With fresh greens: A veggie-packed salad is always a great pairing with fish, and this baked cod is no exception. Pair it with my Greek Cucumber Salad to continue with the Mediterranean flavors or with my Spring Mix Salad for a quick and easy green salad anyone can make.
  • Finish it with a sauce: A drizzle of Garlic Butter Sauce is an easy way to turn this dish into a restaurant-worthy meal.
  • Pair with warm bread: My Garlic Bread in Air Fryer or a loaf of my Staub Bread are perfect for soaking up the juices.

FAQs

What’s the best type of cod to use?

I recommend Fresh Atlantic or Pacific cod. Frozen fillets also work, just make sure they are fully thawed before cooking.

What temperature should I cook cod in the oven?

Roast the cod at 400°F (200°C) for it to cook through while staying moist.

How long should I bake my cod for?

For fillets that are 1 to 1 ½ inches thick, bake for 15-17 minutes at 400°F (204°C), or until the internal temperature reaches 140°F (60°C). The fish should be opaque and flake easily with a fork.

What should I season cod with?

I went with a basic extra virgin olive oil, salt, and pepper seasoning, but you can also use a pinch of paprika, oregano, or Italian seasoning.

Can I use other fish in this recipe?

Yes, you can. Haddock, halibut, snapper, or any mild white fish are all great substitutes.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Mediterranean Fish Recipes to Try

It is no secret that seafood dinners are a lifesaver when you need something quick and delicious without too much effort. Here are a few more similar recipes you might also like:

  • My Harissa Salmon Recipe is a sweet-and-spicy one-pan dinner that comes together in under 30 minutes.
  • For something crispy, try my Breaded Fish Recipe, which is baked with a breadcrumb coating, shallots, garlic, and fresh parsley.
  • Try my Grilled Mahi Mahi, marinated in citrus and herbs, then topped with fresh peach salsa.
  • My Shrimp Scampi without Wine is coated in a buttery garlic sauce and pairs perfectly with pasta or crusty bread.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Mediterranean Baked Cod from the top view.
Print

Mediterranean Baked Cod Recipe

Add this Mediterranean Baked Cod recipe to your weeknight dinner rotation. Made by roasting tomatoes, garlic, and olives in one casserole dish, this baked cod recipe is fresh, protein-rich, and ready in 45 minutes from start to finish.
Course Seafood
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 318kcal

Ingredients

For The Vegetables:

  • 2 cups cherry tomatoes halved
  • 1 medium-sized shallot sliced thinly
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ½ cup green olives sliced (or capers)
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil

For The Cod:

  • 4 cod fillets 1 ½ lbs / 5 to 6 oz. each (If using frozen, make sure it is thawed) *
  • 1 lemon sliced
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped, as a garnish

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400°F (204 °C).
  • Place cherry tomatoes, sliced shallot, minced garlic, and sliced olives in a 9X13 casserole dish.
    Two images showing how to prepare the tomato and olive mixture.
  • Drizzle it with 2 tablespoons of olive oil and sprinkle it with salt, pepper, and red pepper flakes, if using. Toss to combine.
  • Transfer to the preheated oven and bake for 15 minutes or until vegetables are softened.
  • Meanwhile, pat dry cod fillets with paper towels on both sides.
    Person patr drying and seasoning cod filets.
  • Drizzle them with 2 tablespoons of olive oil and season with salt and pepper.
  • Remove the veggies from the oven and carefully nestle the cod fillets and lemon slices in the vegetables.
  • Bake for 15-17 minutes or until the internal temperature of a cod filet registers 140 °F (60 °C) when a meat thermometer is inserted in the thickest part.
    Mediterranean cod in a casserole dish before and after it is baked.
  • When ready to serve, transfer a cod fillet to a plate and spoon it with some of the roasted veggies. Sprinkle it with fresh parsley right before serving.
    Baked cod with tomatoes and olives in a casserole dish.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 4 servings of baked cod, with each serving consisting of one fillet and roasted vegetables. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • *Don’t have cod? You can use any mild fish like haddock, halibut, or snapper.
  • Storing & reheating leftovers: Bring the baked cod to room temperature, place it in an airtight container, and store it in the fridge for up to 2 days.  Reheat in a low-heat oven, 300°F (150°C), for 5-7 minutes or until heated thoroughly.

Nutrition

Calories: 318kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 32g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Cholesterol: 73mg | Sodium: 805mg | Potassium: 963mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 859IU | Vitamin C: 39mg | Calcium: 63mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-baked-cod/feed/ 4
Kale Apple Slaw https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/ https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/#comments Tue, 16 Sep 2025 23:25:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=49034 Using apples in a savory salad isn’t new, but I think most apple salads miss a chance to pair them…]]>

Using apples in a savory salad isn’t new, but I think most apple salads miss a chance to pair them with something as sturdy and earthy as kale. A good dressing is key, especially when kale is involved, because let’s be honest, on its own, it’s not everyone’s favorite (my husband would agree). 

For me, the magic is in the balance of textures and tastes. Sweet, crisp apples meet earthy kale, all tied together with a dreamy maple Dijon dressing. Then comes the crunch from sunflower seeds, which makes every bite a little more exciting.

I call it a slaw because I was inspired by the Kale Apple Slaw at Tropical Smoothie Café, a cult-favorite dish that I loved so much that I had to recreate it in my own kitchen. It’s the kind of salad I make as part of my weekly meal prep because it holds up so well in the fridge. 

One bite and I think you’ll agree, let’s make it together.

Kale and Apple Slaw Ingredients 

You only need a handful of produce and a few basic pantry staples to make this fresh kale apple coleslaw. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my testing on ingredients and substitutions:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For the Dressing

It is no secret that the dressing is the most important part of any kale salad, as sturdy kale leaves can use a ton of help when it comes to flavoring. I decided to use my Maple Dijon Vinaigrette as it offers the perfect balance of sweet and tangy flavors that complements the rest of the ingredients.

Below are a couple of notes from my recipe testing:

Maple syrup: I love the caramel-like sweetness it brings with the Dijon. For a lighter, citrusy twist, swap it with orange juice. Honey also works if you prefer a richer sweetness. I tested this slaw with all three, and while each works, they give the salad a slightly different character.

Apple cider vinegar: A key ingredient. It adds acidity to the dressing and also ties the apples into the overall flavor. If you don’t have it, red wine vinegar works too, but the taste is a little sharper.

For The Slaw

Apple: Crisp, firm apples hold up best. Fuji, Pink Lady, and Honeycrisp are my top picks, though tart Granny Smith is also great. Whatever you choose, slice or cube them just before serving to avoid browning.

Kale: I usually go with curly kale, but lacinato kale (aka Tuscan kale) works just as well. Each type has a different flavor and texture. If you’re not sure which to use, my Types of Kale guide can help you decide.

Seeds and nuts: I often use sunflower seeds, especially when I want to keep the recipe nut-free. When I do use nuts, I prefer raw almonds, pecans, or walnuts. Their mild taste lets the kale and apples stand out.

Cabbage: Red cabbage adds color and a subtle earthy note, but green cabbage works if that’s what you have. The thinner you slice it, the better it absorbs the dressing. I usually shred it with this insert I keep in my food processor, which I’ve found safer and quicker than a traditional mandoline. If you’re pressed for time, a bagged coleslaw mix is a fine shortcut.

Red Onion: Even though red onion has a stronger taste, I like using it here because it stands up well against hearty kale and crisp cabbage. If you prefer something milder, green onions are a good alternative.

How to Make Kale Apple Slaw

One of my favorite things about this kale apple salad, besides how fresh and crunchy it is, is how easily it fits into any meal. It lasts for days in the fridge and pairs with just about anything. Here’s how I put it together:

Step 1 – Make the salad dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together the maple syrup, dijon mustard, apple cider vinegar, olive oil, salt, and pepper. 

Then, add the sliced red onion to the dressing mixture and let it steep in the mixture while you prepare the rest of the ingredients. The vinegar takes away the sharp edge of raw onion, making it softer and slightly sweeter.

person showing how to make maple dijon vinaigrette

Step 2 – Prepare the salad: In a large mixing bowl, add the shredded kale, shredded carrots, and sliced red cabbage. Drizzle with the dressing and red onion, then use your hands to lightly massage the kale to break down the tougher parts of the leaves, making them more tender, less bitter, and better at soaking up the dressing. 

Pro Tip: Massaging kale might seem like an unusual practice, but I believe it is the secret to making kale tender, which is a common complaint among many people. Once massaged, it transforms into something much softer and easier to enjoy.

Person showing how to make kale apple slaw with step by step photos.

Step 3 – Serve: Top it off with the sliced apple and sunflower seeds. Toss the mixture one more time to evenly distribute the toppings, and serve immediately for the best crunch and freshest flavor.

Tropical smoothie kale apple slaw recipe in a bowl.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

This easy slaw recipe is meal-prep friendly, holding up beautifully in the fridge for days, so you can enjoy a crisp side dish all week long. Here are the best ways to ensure it stays fresh:

Make ahead: The Maple Dijon Vinaigrette can be prepared up to 2 days in advance and stored in a mason jar in the fridge. On the day you plan to serve, simply toss it with the kale, cabbage, and carrots, then add the apples just before serving. Assembly takes only about 5 minutes.

Storage: Once assembled, the slaw will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. For the best texture and color, slice the apples right before eating to prevent browning.

Kale and Apple Slaw in a bowl with two spoons on the side

What to Serve with Apple Kale Slaw

This kale and apple slaw is one of those salads that just works with almost anything. It’s crisp, colorful, and adds a fresh bite that makes any meal feel a little brighter. Here are a few of my favorite ways to enjoy it:

  • Pair it with grains: For a more filling meal, consider adding a cooked grain like quinoa, bulgur wheat, or wild rice. They will soak up the maple dijon dressing and turn it into a quick lunch you can grab from the fridge.
  • With turkey: If you need a light but satisfying dinner in under an hour, pair this slaw with my Turkey Tenderloin. The turkey is juicy, tender, and quick to cook, so you can have a balanced meal even on a weeknight. 
  • With chicken: My Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast is one of my favorite proteins to serve on top. The crispy skin and juicy meat add just enough richness.
  • With meatloaf: Serve the slaw with my Turkey Meatloaf to lighten up a classic comfort food dinner. The fresh crunch balances the comfort of the meatloaf without feeling heavy.

Expert Tips

While the recipe is pretty simple and straightforward, here are a few pro tips for making the best kale apple coleslaw:

  • Using red onion: Raw red onion can be sharp, even when thinly sliced. I like to soak it in water or massage it with salt to mellow the bite. In this recipe, I let it sit in the dressing instead, which softens the flavor while adding depth. If you enjoy raw onion as-is, you can skip this step.
  • Slice everything thinly: Large pieces of kale are tough to chew. Removing the stems and slicing the leaves into thin ribbons helps them absorb the dressing, making the salad easier to eat. 
  • Massage the kale: This is the step that turns tough kale into something tender and delicious. A quick massage not only softens the leaves but also helps the dressing cling to every bite. 
  • Blanch for a milder taste: If you find kale too bitter, you can blanch it. Just boil for a minute or two, then plunge into ice water. This quick step softens the leaves and tones down their bitterness.
  • Optional Add-Ins: You can easily make this salad your own with a few simple additions or swaps. Try dried cranberries or pomegranate seeds instead of apples for a sweet-tart twist, or add a handful of shaved parmesan to bring a savory, umami note that makes it even more delicious.

FAQs

What part of the kale do you cut off?

Remove the tough center stem (also called the rib) that runs down the middle of each leaf. It’s hard and chewy when raw, so strip the leafy greens away and chop them into bite-sized pieces for the best texture.

How can I make the kale less bitter?

The best way to reduce kale’s bitterness is to massage it with the dressing for 2-3 minutes to soften the leaves. This breaks down the tough fibers and makes the kale more tender and easier to chew. If you’re sensitive to bitterness, blanch the kale for 1-2 minutes before adding it to the salad.

How can I tell if I’m choosing good kale?

Look for kale with firm, crisp leaves that have a rich green color. Skip any that are starting to yellow, feel limp, or have wilted spots.

What’s the best apple to use in kale apple coleslaw?

Firm, crisp apples such as Honeycrisp, Fuji, Pink Lady, or Granny Smith work best.

Can I use a different dressing to make this kale and apple slaw recipe?

Yes. For a lighter, more citrusy flavor, try it with my Lemon Balsamic Dressing. For a creamy variation, use my Yogurt Salad Dressing.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Kale Recipes You Might Like:

If this recipe convinced you to give kale a chance, I am confident that you’ll be looking for more. So, here are a few other fresh kale salad recipes that I know you’ll enjoy:

  • If you’re in the mood for something cozy and seasonal, my Fall Harvest Salad is packed with all the fall flavors we love and is drizzled with a sweet dressing that ties it all together.
  • For a crunchy, make-ahead option, my Brussels Sprout Kale Salad includes shaved Brussels sprouts and kale with a bright vinaigrette.
  • And when you’re craving something simple and satisfying, my Kale and Avocado Salad comes together in minutes with a sweet-sour dressing you’ll want to drizzle on everything.
Kale Apple Carrot Slaw in a bowl with two spoons on the side
Print

Kale Apple Slaw Recipe

15 minute Kale Apple Slaw recipe that is perfect for a satisfying and filling meal. Also gluten free and vegan, you can make a batch as a part of your weekly meal prep and enjoy it throughout the week.
Course Salad
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 407kcal

Ingredients

For The Maple Dijon Vinaigrette

  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
  • 1 tablespoon dijon mustard
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ small red onion sliced thinly

For The Kale Apple Slaw

  • 6 cups curly kale (1 bunch destemmed and cut into ribbons)
  • 2 carrots shredded
  • 1 cup red cabbage sliced thinly
  • 1 apple sliced thinly
  • 1 cup sunflower seeds or any other nuts

Instructions

  • To make the salad dressing: Whisk together maple syrup, dijon mustard, garlic, apple cider vinegar, olive oil, salt and pepper in a small bowl or in a mason jar. Add in the sliced red onion and let it steep in it as you work on the rest of the ingredients.
    A collage of images showing the making of the dressing.
  • To make the Apple Kale Slaw: Place kale, shredded carrots and sliced red cabbage in a bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing. Using clean hands, give them a light massage making sure to distribute the dressing evenly throughout the salad. As you massage, the tough kale leaves will soften.
    Person showing how to massage kale for the slaw.
  • Top it off with sliced apple and sunflower seeds. Give it a toss and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 7 to 8 cups of salad and is ideal for four servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Steep the red onion: This is an optional step but letting your red onion slices soak in the dressing will give them a great texture and make them less bitter and overpowering.
  • Slice everything thinly: To make sure every bite of this recipe bursts with flavor, make sure you thinly slice all of your ingredients. Small pieces make it easier for your veggies to soak up the tangy dressing.
  • Massage the kale: Though it may seem like an odd step, massaging the kale is crucial to giving your leaves the perfect, tender texture. The massaging process infuses the kale with the acidic dressing, which helps break down the parts of fresh kale that are hard to digest.
  • Storage: Once prepared, kale and apple coleslaw will stay fresh in an airtight container for up to 3 days. Be sure to store it in an airtight container in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 407kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Sodium: 381mg | Potassium: 585mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 8535IU | Vitamin C: 48mg | Calcium: 148mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/feed/ 2
Vegan Apple Crisp https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-apple-crisp/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-apple-crisp/#comments Sun, 14 Sep 2025 13:56:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=35696 Every fall, my husband and I make it a point to go apple picking. And like most apple-picking trips, we…]]>

Every fall, my husband and I make it a point to go apple picking. And like most apple-picking trips, we always come home with more apples than we need. When that happens, this simple vegan apple crisp is the first thing I turn to.

What I love about this version is that it delivers all the comfort of a traditional crisp but with a lighter approach. Instead of the usual butter-flour-sugar crumble, the topping is made with rolled oats, almond flour, shredded coconut, and a touch of coconut oil.

It’s still golden, crisp, and satisfying, just a little more in line with how I like to bake at home.

And the best part? It’s vegan, dairy-free, and gluten-free, so it’s one of those desserts you can easily share or enjoy yourself, no special occasion needed.

Ingredients You’ll Need

As it is with any fruit crisp recipe, this no-sugar-added apple crisp recipe consists of two sets of ingredients: the apple layer and the crispy topping. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few notes on  key ingredients to help you get the best results:

Ingredients for butterless apple crisp from the top view.

For The Apple Layer:

Apples: You can use any type of apples you like. Use one type of apple or a combination of apples that offer different flavors. I usually use Fuji, Gala, and Honeycrisp apples, as they are sweeter than most other types, which helps make the crisp minimally sweetened. I also like to incorporate a Granny Smith apple for a little tartness.

Maple syrup: I use a small amount of maple syrup to coat the apples, but you can also use one tablespoon of coconut sugar, brown sugar, agave, or even regular sugar.

Lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice brightens everything up and keeps your apples from browning before baking. For this recipe, I wouldn’t recommend bottled juice.

Salt: I use kosher salt here. Don’t skip it, because even that tiny pinch enhances the sweetness coming from apples and makes the crisp taste richer.

Arrowroot powder: This helps the apple juices thicken as they bake, so you don’t end up with a watery crisp. An equal amount of cornstarch would be a great alternative.

For The Crisp Topping:

Oats: Use rolled oats (also called old-fashioned oats) for the best chewy texture. Quick oats will not work as they are thinner and tend to disappear into the bake. If you are curious about the difference, check out my Rolled Oats vs. Quick Oats guide for a full breakdown.

If you are following a gluten-free diet, make sure to purchase gluten-free certified rolled oats.

Almond flour: Almond flour and almond meal both work in this recipe. I often use Blue Diamond Almond Flour because it is finely ground and easy to find, but Trader Joe’s almond meal is a good choice, too. 

If you can’t find almond flour at the store (or need a cheaper alternative), you can make it at home following my comprehensive guide on How to Make Almond Flour.

How to Make The Best Vegan Apple Crisp: Step-by-Step Instructions

This easy vegan apple crisp might look like something that belongs on a holiday table and takes hours to pull off, but it is actually super simple to make. Here’s how I do it:

Step 1 – Prepare the apples: Chop your apples into small cubes. I prefer smaller chunks so they bake evenly and get soft all the way through. Once they’re cut, toss them in a medium bowl with maple syrup, lemon juice, cinnamon, salt, and arrowroot until everything looks coated. 

A collage of images showing the making of vegetarian apple crisp's topping.

Step 2 – Make the crisp topping: In a large bowl, stir together the oats, almond flour, shredded coconut, cinnamon, salt, coconut oil, maple syrup, and pecans. Mix until it starts to clump together in little bits because those clumps are what bake into those crunchy clusters everyone loves.

Rolled oats are the best choice here since they hold their shape in the oven and give you that real “crisp” texture. Quick oats are thinner and tend to disappear into the mix. 

Side by side photos showing the assembly of the recipe for vegan apple crisp.

Step 3 – Assemble the crisp: Spread the apple mixture evenly in a 9 or 10-inch baking dish. You can use a glass or ceramic pie plate or a square baking pan. The important thing is to ensure that cubed apples are spread evenly at the bottom of the dish.

Spread the topping on top. No need to worry about making it perfect. The uneven clusters are what make this simple apple crisp extra crunchy in the end.

A photo of the freshly baked no butter added apple crisp from the top view.

Step 4 – Bake: Bake in a preheated 350°F (177 °C) oven for about 40 to 45 minutes. You’ll know it’s ready when the topping is golden brown and you see the apples bubbling around the edges.

I did not experience this, but if the topping browns a little too quickly, you can cover the dish loosely with foil towards the end.

Step 5 – Cool and serve: Let the crisp rest for about 10 minutes before serving so the juices settle and the topping stays crunchy. I know it’s hard to wait, but it’s worth it.

How To Store, Reheat, and Freeze Apple Crisp

This gluten-free apple crisp is at its best when it comes out of the oven warm and sizzling, but you can definitely make it ahead or save leftovers to enjoy later. Here’s what I’ve found works best:

Storage: This recipe yields approximately 6 servings, and while it typically disappears quickly, any leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 or 5 days.

Reheating: When you are ready to serve, warm it in the oven at 300°F (149 °C) to 350°F (177 °C) for about 10 to 15 minutes. The microwave works in a pinch, but the topping will soften instead of staying crisp.

Freezing: Apple crisp freezes well for up to 2 months, and you have two options:

  • Freeze before baking: Assemble the crisp in a freezer-safe dish, cover tightly, and freeze. When you are ready, bake it straight from frozen at 350°F (177 °C), adding a little extra time until the apples are tender and the top is golden. This is the best option if you want the topping to stay crunchy.
  • Freeze after baking: Let the crisp cool completely, then wrap it well (to prevent freezer burn) and freeze. When you are ready to enjoy, thaw it overnight in the fridge and warm it in the oven at 350°F (177 °C) for 15 to 20 minutes. The topping will be softer than when freshly baked, but the flavor will still be delicious.
Apple crisp topped off with three scoops of vegan vanilla ice cream.

Expert Tips for the Best Apple Crisp

Even though this vegan apple dessert is one of the easiest desserts you can make, a few small details can really change the outcome. Here are my best tips from testing this recipe:

  • Cut the apples into small pieces: Aim for evenly cut, ½-inch cubes. Larger chunks take longer to cook and soften, which makes the baking time longer.
  • Prevent a watery filling: If your apples are extra juicy (like Honey Crisp), add ½ teaspoon more arrowroot powder or cornstarch to keep the filling from being too watery.
  • Let it rest before serving: Allow it to cool down for about 10-15 minutes before serving so the juices have time to settle.

Variations & Substitutions 

One of the best things about this butterless apple crisp is how easy it is to adapt to your own needs and preferences. Here are a few ideas from my recipe testing:

  • Nut-Free: If you want to skip the nuts, swap the almond flour for oat flour and leave out the pecans. The crisp topping will not be as crunchy, but it can be a good substitute.
  • Sugar-Free Keto: For a keto or sugar-free version, replace the maple syrup with monk fruit sweetener or your favorite keto sweetener. Alternatively, if you want to make a sugar-free apple crisp, you can omit adding maple syrup completely. It won’t have the subtle sweetness that maple syrup offers, but it will still be delicious.
  • Mix-ins and spices: Try soaking raisins in warm apple juice and stirring them into the filling along with a pinch of ground cloves for a bit more spiciness. You can also experiment with chopped dates and even add a dash of cardamom if you are a fan of those cozy spices.

FAQs

Do I need to peel the apples?

It is totally up to you. I prefer not to peel mine, but either way would work.

What is the best way to cut apples?

Use a sharp knife to cut the apple in half, remove the core, and then cut it into ½-inch to ¾-inch cubes. The important thing here is that they are equal in size, so they bake evenly.

How do I keep the topping crunchy?

The key to keeping the topping crunchy is to let it cool for 10 to 15 minutes before serving. This way, the apple crisp has some time to settle and harden before it is served.

What is the difference between an apple crisp and an apple crumble?

They are very similar apple desserts, with a minor difference. A crisp is usually made with oats and nuts in the topping, whereas a crumble typically has a topping made with just flour, sugar, and butter, so it’s more like a streusel.

Serving Suggestions

One of the best parts of this no-butter apple crisp is how versatile it is. It’s the perfect fall dessert to enjoy straight from the oven or dress it up with a few simple add-ons to make it extra special. Here are some of my favorite pairings:

A Glass of milk: Serve it with a glass of cold milk, or for a plant-based option, try my Homemade Almond Milk to balance the sweetness of the warm apples.

Ice Cream: You can never go wrong with a scoop of vegan vanilla ice cream on top. Alternatively, you can try my Coconut Milk Ice Cream for another dairy-free option or my Homemade Honey Ice Cream for a vegetarian option. 

Whipped Cream: If you prefer something lighter than ice cream, a dollop of Maple Whipped Cream on top adds just the right amount of sweetness without overpowering the apples.

Yogurt: You can even use this vegan apple crumble as a topping on my Vanilla Yogurt Recipe. It’s perfect for turning leftovers into a cozy breakfast the next day.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Apple Recipes You Might Like

If you loved this apple dessert, there are plenty of other apple recipes you can try this season:

  • My No Sugar Crockpot Applesauce is one of the simplest ways to use up extra apples and makes the perfect snack or baking staple during the fall months.
  • For a quick breakfast, try my Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal. It’s ready in 15 minutes and has all the warm fall flavors we love in a bowl. 
  • Or, if you’re feeding a crowd, Baked Apple Oatmeal is the ultimate make-ahead breakfast, perfect for fall.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Apple crisp in a bowl with a spoon in the bowl.
Print

Vegan Apple Crisp Recipe

The best vegan apple crisp recipe made without the use of butter and refined sugar (sweetened with maple syrup and fresh apples). Caramelized apples topped with almond flour-oat topping for a perfect vegan apple crumble for fall. Vegan, gluten-free, dairy-free, refined sugar free.
Course Breakfast Sweets, Dessert
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 servings
Calories 481kcal

Ingredients

For The Apple Layer:

  • 4 apples medium sized – cut into ½ inch cubes*
  • 1 tablespoon maple syrup
  • 1 teaspoon lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon 2 gr
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 2 tablespoons arrowroot powder or cornstarch – 14 gr

For The Crisp Topping:

  • 1 cup rolled oats not the quick-cooking kind- 100 gr
  • 1 cup almond flour 120 gr. (or almond meal)
  • ½ cup unsweetened shredded coconut 40 gr (optional)
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 7 tablespoons coconut oil melted and cooled
  • cup maple syrup
  • ½ cup pecans roughly chopped 50 gr

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350 degrees F.

To prepare the apples:

  • Place apples, maple syrup, lemon juice, ground cinnamon, kosher salt, and arrowroot powder in a bowl. Give it a stir. Place it in a 9 or 10-inch baking dish.

To prepare the crisp:

  • Mix together the rolled oats, almond flour, shredded coconut, ground cinnamon, kosher salt, coconut oil, maple syrup and pecans in a bowl. Mix until well combined.
    Person making crumb topping.

To Assemble & Bake:

  • Distribute the crisp topping onto the apples in an even layer.
    Collage of images showing the assembly of the apple crisp.
  • Bake for 40-45 minutes or until the topping turns lightly golden.
    Freshly baked apple crisp from the top view.
  • Serve with a scoop of vanilla ice cream or a cup of almond milk on the side.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 6 generous servings (approximately 3/4 to 1 cup per serving). The nutritional values below are per serving and do not include optional ice cream on top.
  • * What kind of apples should I use? Feel free to use any kind of apples you like. I personally prefer using two different kinds for different flavors, but either way would work.
  • Can I make it ahead? You can prep the apples a day in advance and keep them in an airtight container in the fridge until you are ready to use them. They will probably brown a little bit, but since you will bake them, it shouldn’t be a problem. I do not recommend making the vegan crumble topping in advance as it could get soggy. Luckily, it takes no more than 5 minutes to put all the ingredients in a bowl and mix them.
  • How to store the leftovers? This recipe serves 6 servings. I doubt that you will have any leftovers, but if you do, place it in an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 2 days. When ready to serve, warm it in a low heat oven (250-300 degrees F) for 5-10 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 481kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 198mg | Potassium: 264mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 72IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 89mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-apple-crisp/feed/ 10
Crockpot Applesauce (No Sugar Added) https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooker-unsweetened-applesauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooker-unsweetened-applesauce/#comments Sat, 13 Sep 2025 23:28:36 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=10762 Whether you enjoy it warm straight from the pot, spooned over oatmeal, used as a natural sweetener in baking, or…]]>

Whether you enjoy it warm straight from the pot, spooned over oatmeal, used as a natural sweetener in baking, or frozen for later, this homemade applesauce recipe is a cozy and versatile fall staple you’ll want to make again and again.

It seems to happen every fall. We go apple picking, and I come home with more apples than I know what to do with. On our last trip to Ellijay in North Georgia, I thought I had planned better, but once again, we returned with bags and bags of apples. 

That is when I turn to this homemade applesauce recipe. The slow cooker does all the work, and the best part is that no sugar is needed.

As the apples cook low and slow, their natural sugars become richer and sweeter, giving you an applesauce that tastes just right without any extra sugars. 

Over the years, I have tried this recipe with many different apple varieties and found that a mix of sweet and tart apples gives the best flavor and balance, which is why this is the version I keep coming back to.

Jars of applesauce from the front view.

Notes on the Ingredients You’ll Need

You really only need three main ingredients to make this applesauce crock pot recipe: apples, water, and some lemon juice. Everything else is optional. 

You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are some notes from my testing on base ingredients:

Apples: Any type of apple will work here, so use the ones you love most or mix a few. Apples like Fuji, Honeycrisp, and Gala are sweeter, while a Granny Smith apple or Cortland are a bit more tart. 

I usually go with a mix of Fuji, Honeycrisp, and Gala, and add one Granny Smith. And you do not need all of those. One or two types are sufficient.

You’ll need about 3 pounds total (6-8 medium apples), which makes around 4 cups of applesauce. If your apples are very different in size, weighing them is the easiest way to make sure you have enough.

I peel my apples because I prefer a creamy and smooth applesauce. However, if you prefer to cook them with their skin on, you certainly could, but just know your applesauce won’t be as smooth.

Water: You only need about 1/2 cup for 3 pounds of apples. If you want a sweeter applesauce, you can swap the water for apple juice.

Lemon juice: A little squeeze of fresh lemon juice brightens the flavor and keeps the applesauce from browning as it cooks. I’ve tested this recipe with and without it, and the version with lemon offered a more complex flavor.

Spices: Since I like to use this applesauce in baking and cooking, I keep the spices to a minimum, but feel free to pick and choose as you prefer. I find that a couple of cinnamon sticks, cloves, and a pinch of freshly ground nutmeg work beautifully.

Sweetener (Optional): Since the cooked apples are already sweet, I prefer not to add any sugar. However, if you want yours sweeter, you can sweeten it with granulated or brown sugar, honey, or maple syrup after it is cooked. Start with a small amount (about ¼ cup), taste, and adjust from there.

How to Make Applesauce in a Crockpot: Step-by-Step Instructions

The beauty of making applesauce in a slow cooker is that it’s almost completely hands-off. Simply peel and chop the apples and toss them into the crock pot, and let it do its thing. Here’s how I make it, step by step:

Step 1 – Prep the Apples: Peel, core, and chop about 3 pounds of apples. While you do not need to cut them perfectly, it is best to aim for medium chunks. This way, they can cook evenly and soften without turning mushy too quickly.

A photo of apples and cinnamon in a crockpot from the front view.

Step 2 – Load the Slow Cooker: Add the apples, lemon juice, water, spices, and a pinch of salt to the crockpot. Give everything a quick toss so the apples are coated. It may look like there is not enough liquid at first, but the apples will release a lot of their juices as they cook.

Step 3 – Cook: Cover with the lid and cook on high for 3 to 4 hours or on low for 5 to 6 hours. Use high heat if you want applesauce ready the same day, or low heat if you prefer to set it in the morning and come back to it later. If you can, stir it once or twice to keep the apples cooking evenly.

Step 4 – Mash or Blend: Once the apples are soft and falling apart, it is time to blend. The tool to use depends on the texture you are going for. Use:

I have tested all three, and it really comes down to what you like best.

Step 5 – Taste and Adjust: This applesauce is usually sweet enough on its own. But if you prefer a sweeter flavor, add a little sugar, honey, or maple syrup at this stage. I would recommend starting with a small amount, tasting it, and adding more if needed.  

Step 6 – Let it Cool: Enjoy warm, or let it cool completely before transferring to mason jars or airtight containers.

How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat Your Applesauce

Chances are you will end up with more applesauce than you can eat in one sitting, and personally, that is the best part. It keeps so well that you can enjoy it all week or even freeze it for later. 

Storage: Bring your applesauce to room temperature and scoop it into glass jars. It will stay fresh in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. 

Freezing: Divide it into smaller portions (I usually do 1 cup) and store in freezer-safe containers. I like using Weck jars because, unlike mason jars, they can be used to freeze food. Alternatively, you can use reusable bags (such as Stasher Bags) to save space in your freezer.

Thawing and Reheating: To enjoy, just thaw it overnight in the fridge. When you are ready to eat, warm it gently on the stovetop or in the microwave until it is heated through.

Notes from My Kitchen: What I Learned Making This Recipe

While this slow cooker applesauce recipe is simple, here are a few things I learned during testing that will help you get the best results:

  • Flavors get more intense as they cook: As apples cook down, the flavors concentrate. The apples become sweeter, lemon juice tastes more sour, and cinnamon gets stronger. Keep add-ins minimal at first. You can always add more later, but you cannot remove it.
  • Whole spices vs ground spices: In my first recipe testing, I used a small amount of ground cinnamon, but in the finished applesauce, the flavor was overpowering. Whole spices, such as cinnamon sticks or cloves, provide a more balanced result. If you only have ground spices, start with just a pinch and adjust to taste after blending.
  • Make it your own: Store-bought applesauce often comes in different flavors, but you can easily flavor your homemade version. My favorites are Maple-Vanilla (a splash of maple syrup and vanilla, which I love with pancakes on the weekend) and Pumpkin Spice (just a pinch is enough for a cozy fall twist).
  • Baby-friendly: If you are planning to serve this applesauce to your baby, keep it simple by skipping the spices and blending until very smooth. Freeze in silicone trays or small cubes for easy single servings. Always check with your pediatrician for feeding guidance.
Slowcooker applesauce in jars.

Favorite Ways to Use Crockpot Applesauce

You can enjoy your slow cooker apple sauce warm straight from the pot with a spoon, or simply eat it on its own as a snack. And that’s just the tip of the iceberg! Here are a few more ideas:

  • With yogurt or oats: Swirl some applesauce into Overnight Oats with Yogurt for a creamy, grab-and-go breakfast, on top of Slow Cooker Steel Cut Oats for something more cozy, or mix it into Oatmeal with Chia Seeds for an easy morning bowl. 
  • With chia pudding: Try it on top of Chia Pudding with Yogurt. The applesauce makes it sweeter while still keeping it quick and simple.
  • Sweeten your muesli: Mix a spoonful into your morning Muesli for a natural way to sweeten it. It blends in smoothly with the oats, nuts, and seeds, requiring no extra sugar.
  • As a baking swap: While the amount will depend on the exact recipe, you can use applesauce to replace oil or eggs in baked goods to keep them soft and moist. It also sweetens them in a natural way. I use it in my Cinnamon and Apple Baked Oatmeal recipe to keep oats moist and sweet.
  • Ice cream topping: Add a spoonful of applesauce over vanilla ice cream and top it off with a handful of pecans for a fall twist.

FAQs

What are the best apples for crockpot applesauce?

Any type of apple will work, but for the best flavor, I recommend using a mix of sweet and tart varieties. Fuji, Gala, and Honeycrisp add natural sweetness, while Granny Smith brings just enough tartness for balance.

Do I need to peel the apples?

It depends on the texture you are after. If you prefer a super smooth applesauce, it is best to peel them. However, some people prefer to leave it on to get more texture and fiber.

Can I use apple juice instead of water?

Yes, you can. If you do, I recommend skipping the addition of any sugar so it won’t be overly sweet.

Can I make this without a slow cooker?

Yes, you can cook it on the stovetop by simmering the apples with the same ingredients in a large pot over low heat until they soften (about 25 to 30 minutes). You can also use an Instant Pot on the manual setting for about 5 minutes, then quick-release and mash or blend.

Can you overcook applesauce?

While applesauce is pretty forgiving, it can overcook if left in too long. The sauce will become thicker, darker, and may start to stick to the bottom if there isn’t enough liquid left. To avoid this, keep an eye on the cooking time and check that there is always some liquid in the slow cooker as it cooks.

How does the texture change after frozen applesauce is thawed?

When applesauce is frozen, the water content forms ice crystals. After thawing, those crystals melt and can make the applesauce a little more watery. For best results, I recommend giving it a good stir.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Apple Recipes to Try

During the apple season, I make this slow cooker applesauce recipe on repeat, but I also love finding new ways to use apples throughout the week. Here are a few that I make often:

  • My Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal is a quick stovetop breakfast that comes together in just 15 minutes with oats, apples, almond milk, and some maple syrup.
  • For dessert, try my No Butter Apple Crisp. Made with oats and almond flour, it features a crispy topping that is dairy-free and refined sugar-free.
  • If you are looking for something fresh, my 15-minute Kale Apple Slaw is tossed in a tangy maple Dijon vinaigrette, making it the perfect side dish for your favorite protein.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Homemade applesauce in jars.
Print

Crockpot Applesauce Recipe

Learn how to make applesauce in your slow cooker with just a few simple ingredients. Made without any extra sugar, this is the best way to preserve apples and enjoy all year long.
Course Condiment/Sauce
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 4 hours
Total Time 4 hours 10 minutes
Servings 4 cups
Calories 181kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 3 pounds apples peeled, cored and cut into 1-inch cubes – 6-8 apples depending on their size
  • ½ cup water
  • 1 tbs lemon juice
  • 2 cinnamon sticks
  • pinch ground nutmeg optional

Instructions

  • Layer sliced apples in the bowl of a slow cooker. Pour in the water and lemon juice.
  • Add in the cinnamon sticks, salt, and ground nutmeg. Stir to combine.
  • Cook in high heat setting up to 3-4 hours, or in low heat setting for 5-6 hours. Depending on your slow cooker the timing might be slightly different so keep a close eye after the 3-hour mark. I also recommend giving it a stir a few times during the cooking process.
  • Transfer the now-softened-apples into a high power blender (such as Vitamix) and puree until smooth. Alternatively, you can use an immersion blender, but it might take longer for it to be completely pureed.
  • Let it cool completely and then divide it amongst jars.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 4 cups of applesauce. The nutritional values below are per cup.
  • When you first put all the ingredients in the crockpot, you might think that there is not enough liquid. During my recipe testing, I found that if you add more than 1/2 cup of water, the applesauce becomes too watery.
  • I intentionally used cinnamon sticks instead of ground cinnamon. As the apples cook, the flavors of every ingredient amplify. I found that ground cinnamon was a bit overpowering, whereas a cinnamon stick provided a more subtle cinnamon flavor. If you do not have cinnamon sticks, you can use ground cinnamon, but I recommend starting with a small amount, no more than 1/4 teaspoon.
  • Storage: Leftovers will keep fresh in airtight containers for up to 5 days in the fridge.
  • Freezing: Portion your applesauce into freezer-safe containers and freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight.

Nutrition

Calories: 181kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 5mg | Potassium: 364mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 35g | Vitamin A: 184IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooker-unsweetened-applesauce/feed/ 20
Chicken Kofta https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kofta/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kofta/#comments Tue, 02 Sep 2025 13:35:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83148 I kept her tricks in my own version so you can enjoy juicy, reliable patties year-round. You can grill them…]]>

I kept her tricks in my own version so you can enjoy juicy, reliable patties year-round. You can grill them outside in summer, roast them on a sheet pan with veggies, or cook them quickly on the stovetop or even in your air fryer.

Grilled chicken kofta served with hummus, sliced onions and tomatoes.

Ingredients for the Juiciest Chicken Kofta

Having grown up eating this dish and after making it countless times, I’ve learned a few helpful things about the key ingredients. You’ll find the complete list in the recipe card below, but here are some highlights, including substitutions:

Ingredients for the recipe from  the top view with the name of the ingredients.

Onion: Both white and yellow onions work. My mom always grated the onion so it blended evenly into the mixture. Be sure to drain the liquid, as grated onions release a significant amount of juice. Red onion would also work, but it would have a slightly sweeter flavor.

Ground chicken: I prefer to use organic chicken when available. Ground chicken made with dark meat adds more richness, but lean ground chicken breast also works if you prefer a lighter option.

Panko breadcrumbs: I usually reach for panko, but regular or seasoned breadcrumbs will also work. For a gluten-free option, use gluten-free breadcrumbs. Half a cup is the sweet spot. Any less and the mixture feels loose, any more and it turns too dense.

Fresh Garlic Cloves: Mince them as finely as you can. Garlic powder works in a pinch, but fresh garlic makes a big difference here.

Baking soda: This is our secret ingredient and one of my mom’s little tricks. A small amount of baking soda alters the pH of the meat, allowing the proteins to bind less tightly, which helps koftas remain tender while retaining their shape. And in case you are wondering, you won’t taste the baking soda in your cooked chicken koftas.

Egg: The egg works as a binder, which is especially helpful with lean ground chicken. Some recipes skip it, but I’ve tested it both ways and find that adding one keeps the patties from falling apart. If you prefer not to use it, the kofta will still work, though they may be a little more delicate when cooking.

Spices & Seasonings: I opted for ground cumin, sweet paprika, kosher salt, and black pepper, but adding ground coriander would also be a great option. If you want some heat, Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes are great options. Start with a small amount and adjust to taste.

Herbs: I opted for fresh Italian parsley, but any fresh herbs, such as mint or dill, work beautifully.

Optional Add-Ins:

Tomato paste: You can add up to 1 tablespoon to the mixture to add moisture and a pop of color. Red pepper paste also works, but it will slightly change the flavor.

Cheese: Both grated Parmesan cheese and low-moisture mozzarella work well here, about ¼ cup. Parmesan adds a savory umami boost, but it is salty, so be mindful of the salt in the rest of the recipe.

How to Make Chicken Kofta: Step-by-Step Instructions

Person showing how to grate an onion using a box grater.

Step 1 – Prep the onion: Set a fine mesh strainer over a bowl and grab your box grater. Using the large holes, grate the onion and place it right into the strainer. Then, using the back of a spoon, press it down to squeeze out as much juice as you can. 

It may feel like extra work, but draining the onion is key for kofta that hold their shape. If you prefer, you can chop the onion instead, but it won’t blend as seamlessly into the mixture.

Ground chicken kofta mixture in a bowl before and after it is mixed.

Step 2 – Mix everything together: Transfer the grated onion to a large mixing bowl, then add the ground chicken, panko breadcrumbs, garlic, baking soda, cumin, paprika, egg, salt, black pepper, red pepper flakes, and parsley. 

I like to mix it with my hands, gently working it until just combined. This helps you feel when everything is evenly distributed and prevents overmixing, which can make the patties too dense.

A collage of images showing the shaping of the meatballs and grilling them.

Step 3 – Shape the kofta: Pour a little olive oil (or water) into a small bowl to keep nearby. Scoop about two tablespoons of the mixture, or use a cookie scoop so you’ll get even chicken kofta meatballs. 

Lightly oil your hands, and roll and press them into oval-shaped patties. Dip your hands in olive oil as needed to prevent the mixture from sticking to your hands and to help you form smooth, even patties.

Pro Tip: Traditionally, ground chicken koftas are shaped into oval patties, which is how my mom used to make them. You can also roll them into meatballs, flatten them slightly, or even press them onto skewers to make chicken kofta kebabs. Just remember that different shapes may cook a little faster or slower.

Step 4 – Let them rest: Place the shaped kofta on a platter, cover with plastic wrap, and let them sit at room temperature for 10-15 minutes while you heat up your grill, skillet, or oven. This quick rest helps them hold their shape when you cook them. If you are prepping ahead, you can refrigerate them instead.

How To Cook Chicken Kofta

My favorite way to cook chicken kofta is on the grill for those beautiful char marks, but I know that is not always possible. The good news is that they also turn out delicious when cooked in the oven or on the stovetop. Below are the steps for each method:

On The Grill

Step 1 – Preheat and prep the grill: Heat to medium-high and clean the grates thoroughly. A hot, oiled surface keeps the patties from sticking and gives them good grill marks.

Step 2 – Grill the Kofta: Place the patties on the grill and cook for 2 to 3 minutes per side, turning them over to ensure even cooking.

Step 3 – Check for doneness: Use an instant-read thermometer and remove the kofta as soon as the center reaches 165°F (74°C). Pulling them off at exactly the right temperature keeps them juicy and tender.

In The Oven

Step 1 – Preheat the oven: Set your oven to 375°F and line a baking sheet with parchment paper. The parchment not only makes cleanup easier, but it also helps prevent the bottoms of the kofta from sticking or over-browning.

Step 2 – Arrange and Bake: Place the patties in a single layer, leaving some space between each one to allow hot air to circulate. Bake for about 15 minutes, flipping halfway through for even cooking.

Step 3 – Avoid overbaking: Start checking the temperature at the 14-minute mark. Chicken cooks quickly in the oven, and once it reaches an internal temperature of 165°F (74°C), it can dry out rapidly.

On The Stove Top

Step 1 – Heat the skillet: A cast-iron pan works best because it retains heat evenly and provides a good sear for the kofta. Add a tablespoon of olive oil and heat until it begins to shimmer. A hot pan sears the outside quickly, helping to lock in the juices.

Step 2 – Cook the kofta: Place the patties in the skillet and cook 2-3 minutes per side, keeping total cook time under 8 minutes. Medium-high heat gives you golden outsides while keeping the inside tender.

Step 3 – Cook in batches if needed: Avoid overcrowding the pan, as this will lower the temperature and cause the kofta to steam instead of sear. Cooking in two batches is worth it for the better browning and flavor. Check for 165°F (74°C) in the center before serving, so you know they are cooked perfectly.

In the Air Fryer

Step 1 – Preheat: Set your air fryer to 375°F (191 °C) and lightly spray or brush the basket with olive oil to prevent sticking.

Step 2 – Arrange: Lay your chicken koftas in a single layer, leaving a small amount of space between each one to ensure even cooking.

Step 3 – Cook: Air fry for about 12 minutes, flipping them halfway through. They’re ready when the centers reach 165°F (74 °C) on a meat thermometer or when they’re nicely golden on the outside.

How To Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat

Chicken kofta is a great make-ahead recipe, whether you’re planning for a busy weeknight or stocking the freezer for later. You can prepare the mixture ahead of time, store leftovers after cooking, or freeze them raw or cooked. Here’s how I handle it:

Make Ahead: Shape the koftas, place them on a baking sheet, wrap with stretch film, and store them in the fridge for up to 24 hours. 

Storing Leftovers: You can enjoy them warm or cold. If you’re eating them cold, just let them come to room temperature so they’re not fridge-cold. Store them in an airtight container and they’ll keep in the fridge for 3 to 4 days.

Reheat: My favorite way to reheat is on the stove with just a splash of water in the pan. The steam from the water gently warms the kofta, keeping them from drying out. 

You can also pop them in a 300°F (149°C) oven for 5-10 minutes or until they are heated through. 

Freeze (raw or cooked): You can freeze them raw or cooked. Below is how I do it.

  • Raw: Place the shaped ground chicken kofta on a parchment-lined sheet pan, cover with plastic wrap, and freeze for a couple of hours until firm. Then move them into a freezer bag so they don’t take up much space. They should last up to 3 months this way. When you’re ready to cook, thaw them overnight in the fridge.
  • Cooked: Store in a freezer-safe container, pressing out as much air as you can to prevent freezer burn. They’ll keep for up to 3 months. Thaw them in the fridge overnight.
Grilled chicken koftas on a plate served with lemon wedges.

Expert Tips

Even though making this chicken kofta recipe is simple, a few small details can make all the difference in how tender, juicy, and perfectly cooked they turn out. Below are my notes from years of making this recipe, along with what I learned from testing various methods.

  • Do not overmix the mixture: Overmixing the meat compresses the protein fibers and squeezes out some of the natural moisture. This is what can make the cooked chicken koftas feel dense instead of soft and tender. I like to mix just until all the ingredients are evenly combined. 
  • Wet your hands when shaping:  Be aware that the meat mixture is very sticky. To make shaping easier, I keep a small bowl of olive oil (or water) nearby and dip my hands in it to keep them moist. A small amount of liquid makes the mixture glide smoothly, resulting in even, smooth patties.
  • Avoid cooking straight from the fridge: If you’ve prepped the mixture ahead of time and stored it in the fridge, let it sit at room temperature for 20-30 minutes before cooking. Starting with ice-cold meat can cause the kofta to cook unevenly. Allowing it to come closer to room temperature helps them cook more evenly and stay juicy.

Serving Suggestions for Chicken Kofta

If you’re wondering what to serve with chicken kofta, the good news is that it’s one of the most versatile dishes I make. You can build it into a wrap, pair it with grains, or add it to a mezze platter for entertaining. Here are some of my favorite ways to serve it:

  • Wraps: My favorite way to serve kofta chicken is tucked into Homemade Pita Bread or wrapped in soft Lavash Bread, with fresh veggies, and drizzled generously with one of my creamy yogurt sauces, such as Mint Yogurt Sauce or Yogurt Dill Sauce. It’s quick, satisfying, and makes the perfect grab-and-go meal.
  • Salad: A simple crisp salad balances the warm spices in the kofta beautifully. Try my Mediterranean Pasta Salad for a crowd-pleasing, make-ahead option, or keep it light with a fresh green salad, such as my Spring Mix Salad or Fattoush.
  • Sheet Pan Kofta: For a hands-off option, make a sheet pan chicken kofta dinner by roasting the chicken koftas in the oven with quick-cooking vegetables like onions, bell peppers, and cherry tomatoes. Everything comes out ready at the same time, making it ideal for busy weeknights. 
  • Mezze Platter: Add these Turkish chicken meatballs to a mezze platter alongside Hummus, Tzatziki, and CAVA’s Feta Sauce, then add some warm bread and a few marinated olives. It’s the easiest way to make dinner feel like a little Mediterranean feast. If you prefer ground beef, my Turkish Meatballs are another great option for a mezze spread.
  • Grains: For a more filling plate, serve the kofta over Vermicelli Rice or Seasoned Quinoa. A spoonful of yogurt sauce ties everything together.

FAQs

What is the difference between kebab and kofta?

The biggest difference lies in how the meat is prepared and cooked. In Turkey, we call it chicken kofte. It is made from ground meat mixed with spices and herbs, then shaped into logs, patties, or little meatballs. If you shape it into long cylinders and wrap them around skewers, you get chicken kofta kebab. Kebab, on the other hand, is more about the cooking style and typically refers to chunks of meat, sometimes accompanied by vegetables, grilled on skewers.

Why did my kofta fall apart?

The most common reasons are either too much moisture or not enough binding. Be sure to squeeze out as much juice as possible from the onion before adding it to the mixture. Additionally, letting the shaped kofta rest for 10-15 minutes before cooking also helps them stay together.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Mediterranean Chicken Dinners You Might Like

If you enjoyed this chicken kofta recipe, here are a few other Mediterranean chicken dinners to add to your weeknight rotation:

  • For a customizable meal prep-friendly dinner, my Chicken Shawarma Bowl is a great choice. It is a great dinner you can make ahead and enjoy during the week.
  • If you love a mix of savory, spicy, and sweet, my Harissa Honey Chicken is always a hit. All you need is 30 minutes of marinating time.
  • For a hands-on Mediterranean chicken recipe, try cooking Chicken Kabobs in the Oven.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Grilled chicken kofta in a platter from the top view.
Print

Chicken Kofta Recipe

Juicy, tender chicken kofta comes together in less than an hour with simple ingredients. Grill, bake, or pan-sear these seasoned patties and serve with warm bread, crisp salads, or your favorite sides for a delicious Mediterranean dinner.
Course Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Halal
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 6 minutes
Resting time 15 minutes
Total Time 36 minutes
Servings 10 koftas
Calories 103kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 onion medium-size / peeled (about ½ cup)
  • 1 lb ground chicken
  • ½ cup panko breadcrumbs
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ¼ teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon sweet paprika
  • 1 egg
  • 1 ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • ¼ cup fresh Italian parsley chopped
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil to use when shaping the kofta (or water)

Instructions

  • Place a fine mesh strainer over a bowl and set it aside. Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the onion*. Place the grated onion into the strainer. Using the back of a spoon, strain all of its juices. Transfer the onion to a large mixing bowl. Discard the juices.
    Person grating onion and then straining its juices.
  • Into that same bowl, add 1 lb ground chicken, ½ cup of panko breadcrumbs, 2 cloves of minced garlic, ¼ teaspoon of baking soda, 1 teaspoon of ground cumin, 1 teaspoon of sweet paprika, 1 large egg, 1 ½ teaspoon of kosher salt, ½ teaspoon of black pepper, ¼ teaspoon of red pepper flakes, and ¼ of chopped fresh parsley.
    A collage of images showing the making of the chicken kofta mixture.
  • Mix with clean hands until well combined.
  • Pour the olive oil into a small bowl. To shape the kofta, scoop about 2 tablespoons of the mixture, oil your hands lightly, and form into 10 oval patties (or your preferred shape). A cookie scoop works well for even portions.
    Person shaping chicken koftas and grilling them.
  • Arrange the koftas on a platter, cover with plastic wrap, and let them rest at room temperature for 10-15 minutes before cooking.

Cooking On The Grill

  • Preheat a gas grill to medium-high heat. Clean the grates, then oil them using a paper towel dipped in oil.
  • Grill the kofta for 2-3 minutes for each side, turning often, until lightly golden brown and cooked through. They’re ready when an instant-read thermometer inserted into the center registers 165°F.
  • Transfer to a plate and let rest for 5-10 minutes before serving.

In The Oven

  • Preheat your oven to 375 °F (191°C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Arrange the chicken koftas on the baking sheet and bake for 15 minutes, flipping them halfway through the cooking process for even baking.

On The Stove top

  • Heat a tablespoon of olive oil in a cast-iron skillet (or a large non-stick skillet) over medium high heat until shimmering.
  • Place the patties in the skillet, and cook undisturbed, for 2-3 minutes or until lightly golden brown. Continue to cook each side, turning every 2-3 minutes. It should take no more than 8 minutes to cook.*

In The Air Fryer

  • Preheat your air fryer to 375 °F (191°C). Lightly spray (or brush) it with oil.
  • Arrange the koftas in a single layer, leaving enough room between each patty for air to circulate.
  • Air fry for 12-13 minutes, turning them halfway through, until the center of a chicken kofta registers 165°F (74 °C) when inserted with a meat thermometer.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 10 chicken koftas. The nutritional values listed below are per kofta.
  • Grating the onion: I know that grating the onion is the most time-consuming part of this recipe, and I think it is worth the effort, as it allows the onion to blend seamlessly into the meat mixture. However, if you prefer, you can chop your onion finely. Be sure to remove any juices (if present) before use.
  • Baking soda: The small amount of baking soda helps keep the koftas hold their shape. In case you are wondering, no, you won’t taste it in the finished dish.
  • Do not overcrowd the pan*: When cooking on the stove, it is best to cook your koftas in batches to achieve a good crust. If you cook them all at the same time, koftas will steam instead of sear.
  • Storing leftovers: Once your chicken patties come to room temperature, you can place them in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 4 days. You can enjoy them cold or warm. 

Nutrition

Calories: 103kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 55mg | Sodium: 434mg | Potassium: 286mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 267IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kofta/feed/ 2
Turkish Shepherd Salad https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/#respond Mon, 25 Aug 2025 18:22:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83027 What is Shepherd Salad? If there were such a thing as the easiest salad in the world, Shepherd Salad would…]]>

What is Shepherd Salad?

If there were such a thing as the easiest salad in the world, Shepherd Salad would probably top the list. 

The name may sound a little unusual, but it comes from humble origins. In the countryside of Turkey, shepherds carried simple, inexpensive ingredients like tomatoes, cucumbers, onions, and peppers. Out in the fields, they would quickly chop everything and dress it with olive oil and lemon juice for a fresh, no-cook meal.

Shepherd salad in a bowl with spoons on the side.

Because these were the kinds of ingredients that were affordable and easy to find, Shepherd Salad has always been considered a simple, everyday dish rather than a luxury.

Today, Çoban Salatası remains a staple across Turkey and the Eastern Mediterranean. While it shares some similarities with Greek Salad, Shepherd Salad does not usually include cheese or olives, keeping it lighter and more refreshing. 

I left Turkey over 20 years ago, but to this day, I still make this salad almost daily when summer produce is at its peak. It’s one of those recipes that instantly brings me back home.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need 

You’ll only need a handful of fresh vegetables and pantry staples to make this easy summer salad. You can find the full ingredient list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my experience and from how it is traditionally made in Turkey:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

Tomatoes: Use the ripest, juiciest tomatoes you can find. Heirloom, Roma, cherry, or even steak tomatoes all work well.

Cucumbers: The authentic Turkish shepherd salad recipe uses Persian cucumbers, which are crunchy and with fewer seeds compared to English cucumbers. However, both types can be used in this recipe. If your cucumbers are freshly picked, it is not necessary to peel them, but I recommend tasting them, as older cucumbers may have bitter skin.

Scallions: I opted for scallions (also known as green onions) for their mild flavor, but finely chopped red onion or white onion can be used if you prefer a sharper bite. If you’re using green onions, you can use both the white parts and the green parts.

Green peppers: Traditionally, this salad is made with a Turkish pepper called sivri biber, a long, slender pepper that can range from mild to hot. Since I can’t find it here in the US, I usually use Anaheim peppers or jalapeños. For a milder option, a green bell pepper works as well.

Lemon juice: For the best taste, use freshly squeezed lemon juice, but in a pinch, bottled juice would also work. You can also swap it with white wine vinegar, apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar for a slightly different tang.

Olive oil: I recommend using a mild-flavored extra virgin olive oil.

Sumac powder: Sumac is usually available in the Middle Eastern or Mediterranean section of most grocery stores, sold as sumac spice or sumac powder. I often buy mine online, and if you are new to sumac, I really like Eastanbul Sumac Spice.

Just be sure to check the best-by date, as sumac has a shorter shelf life than many other spices (usually around 6 months).

Fresh herbs: I use fresh flat-leaf parsley in this recipe, but you can easily switch it up with whatever herbs you have on hand. In Turkey, it is very common to add fresh mint, fresh dill, or even a mix of the two.

Optional Add-Ins (Modern Variations):

The traditional Shepherd’s Salad is made with just the basics, but you can easily make it your own with a few optional add-ins. Some of my favorites are:

Olives: A handful of olives is a delicious way to make this salad more substantial and filling. In Turkey, we often use briny, firm varieties like Gemlik olives, but Kalamata and black olives work as well. Any olives you enjoy, even simple green olives, will do the trick.

Feta cheese: For the best taste and creamy texture, choose a good-quality feta made from sheep’s or cow’s milk and stored in brine. 

Dried mint: In some parts of Turkey, a small pinch of dried mint is sprinkled over the salad for more of an earthy flavor. It is not used in every version, but it is a traditional touch that pairs well with the sumac.

Urfa Chile or Aleppo Pepper: For a little heat, you can also sprinkle in some Urfa Chile pepper, Aleppo pepper, or any red pepper flakes you have on hand. For the most authentic result, aim for a variety that isn’t too spicy so the fresh flavors of the salad can really shine.

How to Make Turkish Shepherd Salad (Step-by-Step Guide)

Making Shepherd’s Salad couldn’t be simpler. You don’t need any special equipment; just a sharp knife, a cutting board, and a bowl. Here’s how to prepare it:

A collage of images showing the assembling of shepherd's salad.

Step 1 – Chop the vegetables: One of the hallmarks of this salad is that everything is cut into small, even pieces. This way, every bite has a little bit of everything. Dice the tomatoes, cucumbers, scallions, and peppers, then transfer them to a large bowl.

Step 2 – Add the dressing: Drizzle the vegetables with lemon juice and olive oil. Sprinkle with sumac, salt, and black pepper.

A collage of images showing the mixing of Turkish tomato and cucumber salad.

Step 3 – Finish with herbs: Add the chopped parsley on top. Using salad tongs (or clean hands), gently toss until the vegetables are evenly coated. Tossing gently is key, as it helps keep the tomatoes from getting mushy.

Step 4 – Serve: Enjoy right away while the vegetables are crisp and fresh. Shepherd’s Salad is best served immediately, since the salt and lemon juice draw water out of the vegetables, and the salad can become watery if it sits too long.

Storing Leftovers & Making Ahead

Making Ahead: You can chop the vegetables a few hours in advance and store them covered in the refrigerator. For the best texture, wait to add the dressing until just before serving to keep the vegetables crisp and prevent too much liquid from collecting in the bowl.

Storing Leftovers: Place any leftovers in an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 2 days. Keep in mind that the vegetables will naturally release some liquid as they sit, which will make the salad softer the next day. If that happens, just give it a quick toss and, if needed, add a squeeze of fresh lemon juice to brighten it back up.

Freezing: Freezing is not recommended since the vegetables lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the freshest taste and crunch, enjoy this salad right away.

Expert Tips:

While Shepherd’s Salad is simple to make, a few small details can take it from good to truly authentic. Here are my best tips:

  • Use fresh ingredients: This salad depends on peak-season produce. Ripe, juicy tomatoes and crisp cucumbers make all the difference. If your vegetables aren’t in season, sprinkle them with a pinch of salt and let them sit for a few minutes to bring out their natural juices.
  • Finely chop the vegetables: The traditional way in Turkey is to cut everything into small, even pieces. This will give you a mix of everything in each bite, and it will also ensure the lemon and olive oil coat everything evenly.
  • Season just before serving: Salt and lemon juice draw liquid out of the vegetables, especially tomatoes. So to keep the salad crisp, add the dressing and seasonings right before you bring it to the table.
  • Mix gently: Toss the salad lightly with your hands or salad tongs so the tomatoes don’t break down and become mushy.
  • Keep it chilled: Shepherd’s Salad is especially refreshing when served slightly cold. If you prep the vegetables ahead, store them in the fridge and dress just before serving.

Delicious Ways to Serve Turkish Shepherd Salad:

The pairing options are endless for this Turkish tomato and cucumber salad. While you can enjoy it with nearly any meal, here are some of my favorite ways to serve it:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Turkish shepherd salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Turkish Shepherd Salad Recipe

An authentic Turkish Shepherd Salad (Çoban Salatası) made with juicy tomatoes, crisp cucumbers, peppers, onions, and parsley. Light, refreshing, and ready in just 15 minutes.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 119kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 medium-sized tomatoes diced into 1 ½ inch cubes
  • 3 Persian cucumbers peeled and sliced ¼ inch thick
  • 2 scallions both green and white parts, thinly sliced
  • 2 green peppers Aneheim peppers, jalapenos, or serrano peppers – seeds removed and sliced thinly
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon sumac
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Place tomatoes, cucumbers, scallions, and green peppers in a large bowl or a large platter.
    Side by side images showing the ingredients of Turkish shepherd's salad.
  • Drizzle it with lemon juice, olive oil, and season with salt, pepper, and sumac.
  • Sprinkle it with fresh parsley and toss to combine.
    Side by side photos showing the making of coban salad.
  • Serve it right away.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6 cups of salad (depending on the size of your vegetables), and it is ideal for 4 (large) servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Place leftovers in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge for up to 2 days. It is normal for the vegetables to release their juices as they sit. Just give it a stir before serving.
  • Optional add-ins: As I was writing this recipe, I wanted to stay true to the traditional recipe. However, some modern-day versions of this recipe add other ingredients like a handful of crumbled feta cheese, chopped black olives, and a sprinkle of red pepper flakes (or Urfa chile if you can get your hands on.) All of these would be great addition to the recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 119kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 588mg | Potassium: 247mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 748IU | Vitamin C: 61mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

FAQ’s

What’s the difference between Turkish Shepherd Salad and Greek Salad?

Both salads feature tomatoes and cucumbers as their base, but they are prepared and served differently. In Turkish Shepherd Salad, the vegetables are finely chopped so every bite has a mix of everything. It’s dressed simply with olive oil, lemon juice, and sometimes a sprinkle of sumac, and traditionally does not include cheese or olives (though you can add them if you like).

Greek Salad (Horiatiki), on the other hand, is made with larger chunks of vegetables and usually includes feta cheese, olives, and oregano, giving it a heartier and more briny flavor.

Can I add cheese to Turkish Shepherd Salad?

While it is not traditional, you can sprinkle it with a handful of crumbled feta cheese.

What does Çoban mean in Turkish?

Çoban, pronounced as Chough-bahn, means Shepherd.

Other Turkish Salads You Might Like:

Turkish cuisine is known for similar, easy-to-make salads like this one that you can make during the peak tomato season. A few of my favorites are:

  • Summer tomatoes mixed in with white beans and red onions, Piyaz (Turkish White Bean Salad) is yet another simple salad 
  • At every kebab restaurant in Turkey, you’ll find a side of ezme, and my version shows you how to make this authentic “Turkish salsa” at home with just a few simple ingredients.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/feed/ 0
Turkish Ezme https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/#respond Mon, 25 Aug 2025 18:22:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82987 What Is Turkish Ezme? Ezme is a finely chopped Turkish tomato salad or dip that you can make in 10…]]>

What Is Turkish Ezme?

Ezme is a finely chopped Turkish tomato salad or dip that you can make in 10 minutes. Today, I’m sharing my mom’s version, along with the tips I’ve learned from her, to make it authentically spicy or more gentle.

This year, I made it my mission to share some of my favorite kebab recipes, and you simply can’t talk about kebabs without mentioning their ultimate pairing: Turkish ezme

Turkish ezme on an oval plate from the top view.

Pronounced exactly as it looks, this bright tomato salad (or dip) is one of the most authentic dishes you’ll find alongside kebabs in Turkey.

Often described as a Turkish “salsa” by those trying it for the first time, for those of us who grew up with this simple dish, Turkish ezme is so much more. It’s refreshing, a little spicy, and the perfect companion not only to kebabs but to any grilled meats.

Originating from the regions best known for their kebabs, Gaziantep, Urfa, Adana, and Mardin, Turkish ezme is a staple that’s deeply woven into the kebab tradition. Each region puts its own spin on it; Gaziantep’s version (referred to as Antep Ezme) is usually spicier, while Urfa’s might lean more tomato-forward.

If you’ve ever been to a kebab restaurant, you’ll know what I mean. The moment you order, they don’t ask whether you’d like ezme on the side. They just bring it, often with a side of lavash or pita bread for scooping, along with other staples like cacik (pronounced ja-juk, aka the Turkish cousin of tzatziki) and hummus. It’s part of the ritual, and to me, it’s as essential as the kebab itself.

Traditional Turkish ezme is made with finely chopped onions, ripe tomatoes, and peppers mixed with red pepper paste, lemon juice, and a handful of spices. 

Depending on how it’s prepared, it can be spicy (called Acılı Ezme) or more mild if you remove the seeds of the peppers or cut back on the red pepper flakes.

Ingredients You’ll Need & Why They Matter

The ingredients in Turkish Ezme dip are simple, fresh, and rooted in the flavors of the Eastern Mediterranean. While it uses everyday ingredients, there are some nuances that I’d like to share to ensure your version is as close to the original.

Ingredients for the recipe with text on each ingredient.

Yellow Onion: Traditional Ezme is made with yellow or white onions. At first, a whole onion may seem like a lot, but once it’s finely chopped and mixed in, it melts into the salad and gives just the right balance. 

While not traditional, red onion would also work, but it would have a slightly sweeter flavor.

Garlic: The authentic version of this Turkish dipping sauce does not use garlic, but my mom always did, so I am following in her footsteps. That small tweak is what makes my family’s version unique. It can be omitted if you are a purist.

Kosher Salt: I use kosher salt not only to flavor the overall ezme but also to soften the chopped onion and garlic. It also helps mellow their sharp, raw flavors.

Tomatoes: Authentic Turkish ezme is traditionally made with tomatoes from the Southeastern region of Turkey. Because of the hot, dry climate, those tomatoes are less juicy than what we often find here in the US.

For the best results, use firm, not overly ripe, tomatoes such as Roma, heirloom, or even cherry tomatoes. Whatever you choose, it’s important to remove the seeds.

Ezme should be juicy enough to scoop up with bread but not watery. If taking the seeds out feels like too much work, you can chop the tomatoes finely and strain them briefly through a fine mesh sieve to get rid of the excess liquid.

In the winter months, when good tomatoes are harder to come by, some people turn to canned whole peeled tomatoes. While that can work in a pinch, I find the taste of fresh tomatoes makes the biggest difference in capturing the true spirit of ezme.

Green Peppers: The authentic recipe uses Turkish sivri biber. The name literally means “pointed pepper,” and that’s exactly what it looks like: long, thin, and tapering to a point. 

Since I cannot get my hands on sivri biber here in the US, I use Anaheim, jalapeno, or serranos as an alternative. I remove seeds to keep the spice levels mild, but if you prefer yours spicy (and want to make an acili ezme recipe, as we say in Turkish), feel free to keep some.

Red Pepper Paste (or Tomato Paste): Red pepper paste is yet another traditional ingredient used in most kebab and meze recipes. I buy mine online. Tukas’s red pepper paste is my favorite. However, tomato paste is a good substitute.

Lemon Juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice is the best, but if bottled juice is all you have on hand, that would work in a pinch.

Fresh Herbs: I kept the recipe simple and only used fresh parsley, but my mom always added a few tablespoons of chopped fresh mint and dill in addition to parsley. If you are growing your own herbs, this is a fantastic recipe to put them to good use.

Sumac: A sprinkle of sumac is the finishing touch for this Turkish salad. I buy sumac online, but you can find it in the Middle Eastern/Mediterranean section of your grocery store. If you can’t get your hands on it, you can omit it. Your salad will still taste great.

Urfa Chili Pepper (or Aleppo Pepper or Red Pepper Flakes): For a smoky finish, use the traditional Urfa chili (Urfa biber). If you prefer a bit more straightforward, less smoky, bright finish, use Aleppo chili (Pul biber). If you do not have either of those, a pinch of any red pepper flakes you have on hand would also work.

Optional Add Ins:

Classic Turkish ezme is usually made with the ingredients I listed above, but depending on the region and sometimes the creativity of the chef, you will find different variations. The add-ins below are not traditional in every version, but they are wonderful ways to build on the base and make it your own.
Pomegranate Molasses (optional): You’ll often see restaurants finish off this Turkish red sauce with a drizzle of pomegranate molasses, especially if they are serving it as a part of a meze platter. 

While it is an optional ingredient in this recipe, if you are into Mediterranean cooking, I highly recommend investing in a bottle. It provides a unique depth, a fruity tartness that can’t be replicated with just lemon juice.

When shopping for pomegranate molasses, look for a brand that lists only one ingredient: pomegranate concentrate. That way, you’ll get the purest taste without added sugar or preservatives. The one I always buy online is Eastanbul.

Olive Oil: A tablespoon (or two) of olive oil drizzled at the last minute makes it richer. I recommend an extra virgin olive oil that is mild in flavor, such as Garcia de la Cruz.

Walnuts: A close cousin of Turkish ezme is a dish called Gavurdağı Salatası. In some parts of Turkey, it’s common to add a handful of chopped walnuts, which makes the salad richer and adds a pleasant crunch. You can mix them in with the vegetables or simply sprinkle them on top as a garnish.

Pomegranate Seeds: For a beautiful pop of color, a juicy burst of sweet-tart flavor, and a delicate crunch that makes the dish feel even more special, you can add (2 tablespoons) pomegranate seeds.

How to Make Turkish Ezme?

Making this authentic recipe is surprisingly simple, and it all starts with fresh, high-quality ingredients. This Turkish dip gets its signature texture from chopping everything very finely by hand, which gives the salad its unique, crushed consistency. Here is how I make it in my kitchen:

Person chopping onions.

Step 1 – Mince and Soften the Aromatics: On a large cutting board, finely chop the onion and garlic. Sprinkle them with kosher salt and gently knead the mixture with your hands.
Adding the salt not only helps soften the raw onions but also mellow their sharpness. Transfer the mixture to a medium-size mixing bowl.

A collage of images showing of the cutting tomatoes and peppers.

Step 2 – Add the Fresh Vegetables: Using a sharp knife, carefully remove the seeds from the tomatoes and chop them finely. If you’d rather not fuss with seeding, chop them and give them a quick press through a fine mesh sieve to remove the extra liquid.

Next, remove the seeds from your peppers and chop them as finely as possible. When cutting peppers, I highly recommend wearing gloves if you have them. The oils can cause a burning sensation on your hands and sting really badly if you accidentally touch your eyes.

Transfer the tomatoes and the peppers to the bowl. Some cooks use a food processor for convenience, but I find it’s easy to over-process and end up with more of a puree of vegetables. I think hand chopping is worth the effort, especially if you are looking for the most authentic version of this Turkish red sauce.

Person mixing the ingredients for ezme in a bowl.

Step 3 – Mix in the Flavorings: Stir in the red pepper paste (or tomato paste), lemon juice, chopped parsley, sumac, and Urfa chili flakes (if using).

Step 4 – Thoroughly Combine: Using a large spoon, gently mix everything together until all the ingredients are well incorporated and evenly coated. Don’t rush this step, as ezme should feel like one unified mix, not separate vegetables.

Step 5 – Finish and Serve: You can serve it straight from the bowl, but if you want to do it the way we do it in Turkey, then transfer it to a small to medium-sized oval plate. Drizzle with pomegranate molasses or olive oil (if using) and serve right away, ideally with some warm pita or lavash on the side.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips

Make Ahead: This Turkish dip actually tastes even better after it has rested. I often make it a few hours in advance and let it chill in the fridge so the flavors can deepen and meld.

Keep in mind that the juices will settle as they sit, so you may have to drain them before serving.

Storage: Leftover ezme keeps well for 2-3 days when stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Just be sure to give it a good stir before serving, and again, drain the juices as needed.

Freezing: This dish is best when enjoyed fresh, so I do not recommend freezing it as it will lose its signature texture when thawed.

Expert Tips from My Turkish Kitchen

Use a fine mince when chopping by hand: The secret to ezme’s classic texture is how finely everything is chopped. You don’t want big chunks in there. Take your time when chopping; it is part of what makes this recipe so good.

Dealing with excess juice: Earlier, I mentioned removing the seeds from the tomatoes to get the authentic texture that ezme is known for. But if you don’t mind some extra juice, that’s perfectly fine too. It will still taste fresh and delicious.

Using a food processor: My mom would probably turn in her grave if she saw me recommending a food processor when making ezme. Traditionally, everything is chopped by hand, and I still believe that’s the best way to get the right texture. That said, I know it can be a real time-saver, especially if you’re making a big batch.

If you do decide to use one, here’s what I recommend:

  • Start with the harder vegetables (onions, garlic, peppers) and chop them finely before adding the softer tomatoes.
  • Once you add the tomatoes, use short pulses instead of running the machine continuously. This helps you avoid ending up with a puree and keeps that slightly crushed consistency that makes ezme special.

Make it your own: Once you’ve made the basic recipe I shared below, try creating your version by adding a bit more heat (there is a reason people ask for ‘acili ezme’, the spicy version of this dish) or incorporating some of the optional ingredients I mentioned above.

How to Serve Turkish Ezme (The Ultimate Kebab Side Dish)

Ezme is one of those dishes that goes with almost everything. While it’s a classic alongside kebabs, its fresh, tangy flavor also makes it a great match for other Mediterranean favorites, from grilled meats to mezze platters.

  • With Kebabs or Grilled Meats: Ezme is the ultimate side to dishes like Adana Kebab or Chicken Kebab. Its acidity and spice help balance the richness of the meat, which is exactly why it’s such a common pairing in Turkey.
  • Part of a Meze Platter: Add it to a Mediterranean-inspired mezze platter alongside hummus, baba ganoush, and muhammara. Don’t forget the lavash, Turkish pide bread, or pita bread (or pita chips) for scooping! This dish is meant for sharing.
  • As a Spread or Sandwich Topping: Use leftover ezme as a spread for sandwiches or wraps the next day. It’s especially good on my Grilled Lamb Burgers, adding a bright, tangy kick that makes them even more special.
Spicy ezme served on an oval plate from the top view.
Print

Turkish Ezme Recipe

This authentic Turkish Ezme is a refreshing tomato and pepper salad that pairs perfectly with kebabs or grilled meats. Quick, fresh, and versatile. Vegan, no-cook, and gluten-free recipe.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 73kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 yellow onion medium size
  • 1 clove garlic finely minced
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 4 medium tomatoes
  • 2 green peppers Anaheim, jalapeño, or serrano, seeded
  • 1 tablespoon Turkish red pepper paste or tomato paste
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
  • 1 tablespoon sumac
  • ¼ teaspoon Urfa chili Aleppo pepper, or red pepper flakes (optional)
  • 2 tablespoons pomegranate molasses optional

Instructions

  • On a large cutting board, finely chop onion and garlic. Sprinkle with kosher salt and knead gently to soften. Transfer to a large bowl.
    Person chopping onions for ezme.
  • Remove the seeds of your tomatoes and give them a fine chop. Alternatively, you can chop them first and strain through a fine mesh strainer to remove the juices. Transfer the tomatoes to the bowl.
    Person chopping tomatoes and peppers on a cutting board.
  • Chop the seeded peppers finely and add them to the bowl.
  • Stir in the red pepper paste, lemon juice, parsley, sumac, and chili flakes (if using). Mix well to combine.
    Person mixing ezme salad ingredients in a bowl.
  • If using, drizzle with pomegranate molasses and serve*.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 to 2 1/2 cups of ezme, which is ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Leftovers will keep well for 2-3 days when stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
  • *Let it rest before serving: It is optional, but if you have the time, chill it in the fridge for about 30 minutes before serving. This gives the ingredients a chance to mingle and develop deeper flavor. Just keep in mind that it will release some of its juices as it sits, so you may want to spoon out the excess liquid before bringing it to the table.
  • Adjusting the spiciness: If you prefer your ezme to be on the milder side, I recommend taking the time to remove all of the seeds of your peppers and avoid using red pepper flakes.

Nutrition

Calories: 73kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.5g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 624mg | Potassium: 512mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 1623IU | Vitamin C: 77mg | Calcium: 34mg | Iron: 1mg

FAQ’s

Is ezme spicy?

Ezme has a gentle heat, but you can easily control the spice level. If you prefer it mild (or not spicy at all), take the time to remove all of the seeds of your peppers and omit using red pepper flakes.

How does Acılı ezme vary by region?

In Turkey, every region puts its own spin on ezme. In Gaziantep, it’s usually spicier, in Urfa it leans more tomato-forward, and in Adana it often includes extra pepper paste. My mom’s version here is closest to what you would find in kebab restaurants across the country.

Can I make it less acidic?

Absolutely. If you’re sensitive to acidity, try reducing the amount of fresh lemon juice or skipping the pomegranate molasses. It will still taste fresh and delicious.

How long does Turkish ezme last in the fridge?

As long as it is stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator, it should still be fresh for up to 3 days.

Other Turkish Salads You Might Like:

If you’re already convinced to make this Turkish ezme salad recipe, you’re already on your way to creating a fantastic feast. Here are a few more fresh and delicious Turkish salad recipes to serve alongside your grilled meats:

  • My go-to Turkish summer salad, Piyaz, is A zesty and refreshing salad made with white beans, red onions, tomatoes, and parsley, all tossed in a simple lemon-olive oil dressing. It’s a perfect complement to rich, grilled meats.
  • For a simple side salad that will pretty much work with any grilled meat and vegetable, look no further than my Turkish Shepherd Salad.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/feed/ 0
Harissa Salmon https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-salmon/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-salmon/#respond Wed, 20 Aug 2025 16:24:09 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82909 My love for Sockeye Salmon started after a trip to Copper River in Alaska, where I had the chance to…]]>

My love for Sockeye Salmon started after a trip to Copper River in Alaska, where I had the chance to see how local fishers catch salmon during the short but intense fishing season. 

Ever since then, as soon as the Sockeye season starts, I begin thinking about how to make the most of it. This recipe is one of my favorite ways. It combines my love for harissa with the fatty richness of the salmon. Not to mention, it is a fantastic Mediterranean weeknight dinner.

Plus, it’s incredibly easy to prepare. Just mix the glaze, spread it on, and roast. It’s the kind of dish that feels a little fancy but fits perfectly into a busy weeknight.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You do not need a long list of ingredients to make this honey harissa salmon, and while you might have a few of them on hand, harissa is the one you may need to pick up or make from scratch. 

Ingredients for the recipe with text on the image for each ingredient.

You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are my notes on the key ingredients and why they make such a difference:

Harissa: Thanks to social media, harissa, a spicy and smooth chili sauce originating in Tunisia, is having a moment right now. And I have to say, it is for a good reason because it is delicious. 

As a little trivia, most versions of harissa you find at markets are the Moroccan version of this North African sauce, mixed in with other ingredients such as red peppers, preserved lemons, etc., compared to the original recipe made with dried chili peppers, olive oil, garlic, and spices.

Regardless of the version of harissa you use, in my opinion, it is the perfect spicy sauce for salmon.

And, when it comes to harissa for this spicy baked salmon recipe, you have a few options:

  • Homemade from scratch: You can follow my Harissa Sauce recipe for a homemade version, which takes about 45 minutes to make (with just 10 minutes of hands-on time).
  • Homemade from harissa powder: You can also make your own harissa spice blend (or buy it at the store) and turn that powder into a paste.
  • Store-bought: Or, you can buy a jar at grocery stores like Trader Joe’s and Whole Foods, in their “international,” “Mediterranean,” or “ethnic” sections. I tested this recipe with both NY Shuk and Mina, and while they both worked well, my husband and I thought NY Shuk’s preserved lemon harissa had a superior taste.

Still, regardless of the brand, keep in mind that spice levels vary, so give it a taste first and adjust the amount, especially if you’re serving kids. 

I’ve tested this recipe with both store-bought and homemade harissa, and while both work, if you have the time, I recommend making your own. It not only tastes better but also allows you to control the spice level.

Salmon: I like to use fresh wild salmon, especially Sockeye, available May through September. However, while wild-caught is my go-to, farm-raised can also be used. 

If you can’t get your hands on fresh salmon, you can use frozen salmon, but be sure to thaw it before using.

You can use Atlantic or Pacific salmon, and if you want to treat yourself and don’t mind spending a bit extra, king salmon is an amazing choice. Other options, such as Sockeye and Coho, are also excellent. 

You can cook a whole fillet or use pre-cut portions, just aim for center-cut pieces so they are an even thickness and cook at the same rate. Remember that thickness can vary, so you may need to adjust the cooking time.

Finally, you can use skin-on or skinless salmon; it is totally a personal preference.

Honey: Honey is my secret ingredient here, so don’t skip it. Just a tablespoon of it helps balance the heat coming from harissa, the fattiness from salmon, and the acid from lemon slices.

And in case you are wondering, it doesn’t make the whole dish sweet. Rather, it is there to tame the spiciness and offer a surprising sweet pop of flavor.

Olive oil: As it is with any recipe that uses just a few basic ingredients, using a good quality extra virgin olive oil is highly recommended in this baked salmon recipe. Choose one that you like the taste of. 

Lately, my go-to has been Garcia de la Cruz, but feel free to use any extra virgin olive oil you enjoy.

Lemon: We use a small amount of lemon juice in this spiced salmon to brighten up the harissa and lemon slices to garnish on top as it is baking in the oven. 

You can use lime instead, but keep in mind that the finished dish will have a slightly more tangy and aromatic flavor.

Garlic: In my opinion, fresh minced garlic is the best option, but for a milder flavor, you can also use a teaspoon of garlic powder instead.

Spices: I used kosher salt and black pepper, but you can add your favorites like paprika, cumin, coriander, or a pinch of cayenne for extra heat. Though I would refrain from incorporating too many spices, as we want the spicy harissa to shine. 

Fresh herbs: I used a small amount of fresh parsley, mostly for color and a pop of freshness. However, other herbs like fresh dill or cilantro can also be used for a slightly different but just as delicious flavor.

How to Make Harissa Salmon: Step-by-Step Instructions

Cooking salmon with a harissa glaze can look quite simple, but a few small details will make sure it turns out tender, flaky, and perfectly balanced between sweet and spicy. Here is how I do it and why each step matters:

Step 1 – Preheat your oven and prep the pan: Set your oven to 375°F and line a baking sheet with parchment paper to make cleanup easier and prevent the glaze from sticking or burning. This temperature is ideal for salmon because it cooks the fish through but without drying it out in only 12-14 minutes.

A collage of images showing of the making of the dressing.

Step 2 – Make the glaze: In a small bowl, whisk together the harissa, honey, olive oil, lemon juice, minced garlic, salt, and pepper. I like to mix the liquids first, then add the seasonings so the honey blends in smoothly. The smoother the glaze, the more evenly it will spread over the salmon, giving you a seasoned bite each time. 

Be sure to give it a taste and adjust as needed. If your harissa is very spicy, feel free to add a small amount of honey or lemon juice to balance the heat and adjust the seasoning as needed.

A collage of images showing how to prepare salmon to bake.

Step 3 – Prep the salmon: Pat the salmon dry on both sides with paper towels to remove that extra moisture. This is an important step in that it helps the glaze stick well on the fish and allows it to roast rather than steam, resulting in a nice, lightly crisp salmon.

Images showing honey harissa salmon before and after it is baked.

Step 4 – Glaze generously: Next, place the salmon on the baking sheet and spread the harissa mixture over the top, making sure to get the sides too. You want it fully coated so every bite is seasoned. 

I like to finish with a few lemon slices on top before baking, because as they cook, they release a bit of juice that soaks into the glaze. This adds a pop of brightness that balances the harissa and makes it visually appealing.

Step 5 – Bake: Place your salmon in the oven and let it bake for about 12 to 14 minutes. You will know it is ready when the thickest, center part of the fillet is between 125 and 135°F on an instant-read thermometer. Be sure to check in the middle and not the thinner ends, since those cook faster and can give you a misleading reading. 

We are keeping the temperature gentle and the cook time short because the goal is soft, moist salmon that flakes apart with just a fork. Overcooking can dry it out quickly, so keep an eye on the clock. With that being said, if you prefer a more well-done fillet, bake for about 15-17 minutes.

Step 6 – Garnish and serve: When the salmon comes out of the oven, top it with fresh parsley for freshness. I also like to put extra lemon wedges on the table so everyone can squeeze fresh lemon juice over the salmon.

Expert Tips

Even though this harissa salmon recipe is quick to put together, a few small details can make a big difference in how juicy and perfectly cooked your fish turns out. Here are my notes from years of cooking salmon and testing this recipe:

Remove salmon and harissa from the fridge before use: Remove the salmon from the fridge and let it sit at room temperature for about 10 minutes before cooking. Starting with cold salmon can cause it to cook unevenly. This also applies to harissa, especially if you are using a store-bought brand. It spreads more easily when it is at room temperature.

No need to cover with foil: Some recipes suggest covering the salmon with foil, but since this one cooks quickly, leaving it uncovered helps the glaze caramelize while still keeping the salmon tender. 

Use a meat thermometer: This is the best way to avoid dry salmon. Aim for 125 to 135°F in the thickest, middle part of the fillet. If you are using a different type of salmon, you may need to adjust the cooking time depending on its thickness. 

If you don’t have a thermometer, you can gently peek in the middle with a fork. It should flake easily and look cooked through, not raw or pinkish.

Don’t overcook: Salmon cooks pretty quickly, and overcooking is the fastest way to dry it out. By using a gentle oven temperature and baking it just long enough, you end up with soft, flaky fish that comes apart easily with a fork and stays nice and juicy.

Coat all sides with the glaze: Take a minute to make sure to cover every bit of the salmon with the harissa and honey mixture, not just the top. As it bakes, the mixture caramelizes, and with the roasted lemon on top, it’s absolutely delicious.

What To Serve With This Spicy Salmon Recipe?

One of my favorite things about this spicy baked salmon recipe is how easy it is to turn it into a complete meal. You can keep it light with a fresh salad, add something hearty like a grain, or drizzle it with a creamy sauce. Here are a few ideas:

Grains: Light, citrusy grains go so well with the heat from the harissa. My Lemon Orzo or Lemon Quinoa add a nice freshness and are great for soaking up that extra glaze.

Salads: If you are looking to keep the Mediterranean-theme going, pair it with either my Mediterranean Pasta Salad or Quinoa Tabbouleh. If you want something cooling to balance the spice, my Creamy Cucumber Salad is always a hit.

Sauce: A drizzle of Yogurt Dill Sauce on top or on the side is the easiest way to add creaminess and a fresh, herby touch that works perfectly with the spicy-sweet salmon.

How To Store and Reheat?

If you have leftovers, you can definitely enjoy this salmon the next day. It’s great cold over a salad, or you can gently reheat it so it stays moist.

Storage: Once the salmon has cooled, store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. If possible, keep it whole instead of flaking it apart, as this helps it retain more moisture when reheated.

Reheating: Salmon dries out quickly, so it is best to reheat it low and slow. Here, you have two options:

  • In the oven: Pop it in a low heat oven (275 °F / 135 °C) for about 7-10 minutes or until heated thoroughly.
  • In a skillet: Place the salmon in a non-stick skillet over low heat with a splash of water to create a little steam to keep the fish moist as it reheats. Keep a close eye on it as it warms very quickly.

Make Ahead: This recipe comes together so quickly that I wouldn’t bother making it ahead. You’ll get the best texture and flavor when it’s fresh from the oven.

Freezing: I don’t recommend freezing cooked harissa salmon. The texture of the fish changes, and it loses that soft, flaky quality we love.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Harissa salmon fresh out of the oven garnished with lemon slices.
Print

Harissa Salmon Recipe

This baked harissa salmon recipe is spread with a sweet and spicy honey-harissa glaze for a quick and easy dinner you can make in under 30 minutes.
Course Dinner, Seafood
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 14 minutes
Total Time 24 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 309kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons harissa homemade or store-bought
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice or lime juice
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 ½ lbs salmon filet skin on or off*
  • 1 lemon sliced
  • Fresh parsley leaves for garnish

Instructions

  • Preheat your oven to 375 °F (191 °C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Into a bowl, place harissa, honey, olive oil, lemon juice, minced garlic, salt, and black pepper. Whisk until fully combined. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Set it aside.
    Person making the harissa sauce for the salmon.
  • Pat-dry the salmon on both sides using a few sheets of parchment paper. Transfer it to the prepared baking sheet.
  • Spread the harissa mixture evenly on the salmon, ensuring that all the top and sides are fully covered. There is no need to spread harissa at the bottom. Top it off with a few slices of lemon.
    Photos showing the salmon being prepared for baking.
  • Bake in the preheated oven for 12-14 minutes or until your salmon registers between 125 to 135 °F.
    Photos showing harissa salmon before and after it is baked.
  • Garnish with parsley and serve it with lemon slices/wedges on the side.

Notes

  • Salmon: I prefer using wild Alaskan salmon (such as Sockeye Salmon or King Salmon) in most of my salmon recipes, and this one is no exception. However, you can use any salmon you can get your hands on. If it is thawed, be sure to fully thaw it before spreading it with harissa. Also, keep in mind that the baking time could change based on the thickness of your salmon.
  • A Whole filet or slices? Both would work. I usually shop for salmon in Costco, and they sell it as a filet. However, sliced salmon can also be used. 
  • Skin on or off: Both would work.
  • Storage: While this dish tastes best fresh out of the oven leftovers can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 309kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 34g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 94mg | Sodium: 517mg | Potassium: 924mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 151IU | Vitamin C: 18mg | Calcium: 32mg | Iron: 2mg

FAQs

Can I substitute harissa?

In a pinch, you can use Turkish red pepper paste (biber salcasi) or even sriracha. Just know they are not quite the same. Sriracha is tangier and sweeter, while harissa has a deeper, spicier kick that is fantastic in marinades, dips, soups, and roasted meats. If you swap, the overall flavor will be a little different, but still delicious.

How do I know when my salmon is done?

If you have a meat thermometer, aim for 125 to 135°F in the thickest, middle section of the fish. If you do not have one, use a fork to gently peek inside. The salmon should flake easily and look opaque, not raw or too pink in the center.

How spicy is harissa salmon?

The spice levels depend on the harissa you are using. If you are making it home, you can adjust the spice levels by removing most of the seeds from the chilies. If you are buying harissa from the store, choose a brand that suits your taste and spiciness preference.

Can I grill harissa salmon?

You sure can. I usually use my Grilled Salmon Recipe as a guide when grilling. Simply preheat your grill to 350 °F/177 °C. Place salmon, skin side down, and cook uncovered for 3 minutes or until it releases easily. Carefully flip and cook the other side for another 3 minutes or until the thickest part of it registers 125 °F to 135 °C.

Can I make this recipe with frozen salmon?

You sure can, but be sure to thaw your salmon fully before using it in the recipe.

Can I make harissa salmon in the air fryer?

Yes, you can. For best results, use 2-3 salmon fillets instead of a whole side of salmon. Preheat your air fryer to 400°F and cook the fillets for about 5 minutes. Then, carefully spread the salmon with harissa paste over the top and continue cooking for another 2-3 minutes, or until the salmon is cooked through and flakes easily. Just keep in mind that cooking time may vary depending on the thickness of your fish.

Other Harissa Recipes You Might Like:

If you love harissa and are in need of more creative ideas to use it, these recipes are worth a try:

  • My Harissa Vinaigrette is a quick CAVA-inspired dressing that you can drizzle over salads, grain bowls, grilled meats, or roasted veggies.
  • For a simple weeknight dinner, Grilled Harissa Chicken pairs tender chicken with the bold, smoky kick of harissa and comes together with just 20 minutes of hands-on time.
  • When you’re craving a sweet-and-spicy combo (similar to this harissa honey salmon recipe), my Harissa Honey Chicken combines harissa with honey, garlic, and lemon for roasted caramelized chicken thighs.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-salmon/feed/ 0
Flank Steak Marinade https://foolproofliving.com/flank-steak-marinade/ https://foolproofliving.com/flank-steak-marinade/#comments Tue, 12 Aug 2025 20:13:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82742 I’ve been making flank steak for years, but it wasn’t until we bought our first gas grill a couple of…]]>

I’ve been making flank steak for years, but it wasn’t until we bought our first gas grill a couple of summers ago that I really started perfecting it. I was first drawn to this cut because it’s budget-friendly and cooks quickly, which makes it perfect for busy weeknights or casual weekend grilling.

Back then, I kept things simple with just salt and pepper. The steak was fine, but it never had that “wow” factor. That changed once I began experimenting with marinades, and the version you see here quickly became my go-to. 

Grilled flank steak sliced on a plate.

What makes this the best flank steak marinade is the balance of soy sauce, vinegar, Dijon mustard, and a touch of honey (or brown sugar). Paired with high heat and a quick cook time, it transforms this lean cut into a tender, juicy steak that people can hardly believe is flank steak.

Ingredients You’ll Need

The full list of ingredients is in the recipe card below, but after making this recipe countless times, I’ve gathered a few notes on what makes these key ingredients so important:

Ingredient for the recipe from the top view.

Olive oil: Use a good-quality extra virgin olive oil here. Nowadays, my favorite brand is Garcia de la Cruz (affiliate link) with its smooth and earthy flavor. You’ll also want to keep a little extra oil to grease your grill grates right before grilling to prevent the meat from sticking to the grill. 

Soy sauce: Soy sauce is the secret ingredient that gives the steak its deep, salty, savory, and umami kick. I’ve tried using just salt before, but soy sauce adds so much more depth. If you’re following a gluten-free diet, tamari or coconut aminos work just as well.

Apple Cider Vinegar: As the primary acid in this recipe, vinegar helps tenderize the meat. I use apple cider vinegar in this recipe, as it is commonly found in most households. However, balsamic vinegar or red wine vinegar would also work. Keep in mind, though, depending on the vinegar you use, that the flavor profile of your marinade will be slightly different.

For example, using an aged balsamic from Modena will give you a deeper, sweeter taste.

Lemon or lime juice: I recommend using freshly squeezed juice for the best taste. I usually go with lemon juice for its slightly tangier flavor, but lime juice works just as well. While freshly squeezed juice is best, in a pinch, bottled juice will work too.

Dijon mustard: When it comes to mustard, I like to use Dijon mustard for its strong, tangy flavors, but if you prefer a bit of texture in your marinade, you can also use grainy mustard. Yellow mustard will work in a pinch, though it has a milder taste.

Sweetener of your choice: A small amount of sugar helps balance the tangy and umami flavors of the marinade. I use honey in my recipe, but brown sugar would also work.  Either way, be sure to whisk it well so that it’s fully dissolved to prevent the sugar burning on the grill.

Fresh garlic cloves: For the best taste, I recommend using freshly minced garlic. But if you prefer a milder flavor, garlic powder works too.

Seasoning for Flank Steak: For the spices in this marinade, I’ve found that sweet paprika and ground cumin work best, but if you prefer a smokier flavor, you can swap in smoked paprika. You can also add fresh or dried herbs that complement the rest of your meal. Choose ones that echo the flavors in your side dishes for a harmonious pairing.

Flank steak: When buying flank steak, look for a cut that is well marbled and has a bright red color that looks fresh and moist. It is best to choose a flank steak that is even in thickness. My recipe calls for 1 ½ lbs of flank steak that is  ¾ to 1 inch thick, which is ideal for grilling.

How to Marinate Flank Steak? Step-by-Step Instructions

Marinating flank steak is one of the simplest ways to ensure it turns out tender and full of flavor. It really is as easy as whisking a few ingredients together in a large bowl and letting the steak soak up all that goodness.

Here’s exactly how I do it with some helpful tips on every step:

Flank steak marinade in a bowl and being poured over the meat.

Step 1 – Make the marinade: In a mixing bowl, combine olive oil, soy sauce, vinegar, lemon juice, Worcestershire sauce, Dijon mustard, honey, garlic, paprika, cumin, salt, and pepper. Whisk until everything is fully incorporated and the marinade looks smooth. 

I find it helps to start with the wet ingredients first, then add in the seasonings so everything blends evenly. This is especially helpful when using ingredients like honey or Dijon mustard, as it ensures they dissolve smoothly and don’t clump.

Step 2 – Add the steak: Use a large, shallow dish (ideally one with a tight-fitting lid) that’s big enough to hold your flank steak in a single layer so it can lie flat and be fully coated in the marinade. 

If you’re working with a larger cut or want less cleanup, a resealable plastic bag will work as well. Pour the marinade over the top, making sure the entire surface is covered.

I like to press the steak gently into the marinade to help it really soak in. If you’re using a plastic bag, seal it tightly and massage the marinade into the meat to distribute the liquid evenly. 

Marinated flank steak before and after it is grilled.

Step 3 – Cover and marinate: Cover your dish with a tight-fitting lid (or seal your bag). If you can plan ahead, marinating overnight in the fridge is my go-to, but even a quick 1-hour marinade will still give you good flavor. Depending on your schedule, here’s how I do both:

  • 1 Hour Marinade: If all you have is an hour, you can let it sit at room temperature on your kitchen counter, which helps take the chill off the meat, allowing it to cook more evenly later. 
  • Overnight Marinade (preferred method): If you can plan ahead, marinating it overnight in the fridge is even better. Just don’t go past 24 hours; the acids in the marinade will start to change the texture, and instead of tender, the meat can turn a little mushy.

How To Cook Marinated Flank Steak?

Once your steak is marinated and ready to go, it’s time to cook. While my preferred method for cooking is on the grill, I know that it is not always possible. The good news is that you can cook your marinated steak on the stove or in the oven.

Below are the steps for each method:

On The Grill

Step 1 – Preheat the grill: When it comes to grilling marinated beef flank steak, we’re aiming for high heat, around 500°F. You want that grill nice and hot so you get a good sear on the steak without overcooking the inside. 

While the grill heats up, give the grates a good scrape to remove any residue. Then, use a paper towel dipped in oil to coat the grates generously to prevent sticking and help you get those beautiful grill marks.

Step 2 – Prepare the steak: Remove the steak from the marinade, letting the excess drip off. We don’t want it soaking wet when it hits the grill, which can cause flare-ups and burn the outside before the inside cooks. 

As the first side cooks, you can spoon a little of the leftover marinade over the top to keep the uncooked side moist. However, once you flip the steak, you should discard any marinade that has been in contact with raw meat.

Step 3 – Grill: Place the steak directly on the grill and cook for about 4 to 5 minutes per side for medium-rare. The best way to determine if it has reached your ideal doneness is to use an instant-read thermometer (affiliate link). If you’re not sure what temperature to aim for, here’s a quick guide to help you cook your steak just the way you like it:

  • Medium-rare: 130 to 135°F internal temperature (3 to 4 minutes per side)
  • Medium: 140 to 145°F internal temperature (4 to 5 minutes per side)
  • Medium-well: 150 to 155°F internal temperature (5 to 6 minutes per side)

I usually go for a medium-rare to medium level of doneness with flank steak to keep it juicy and tender, but feel free to adjust based on your preference. Just remember, since it’s a lean cut, going much past medium can start to dry it out.

Step 4 – Rest before slicing: Once your steak is cooked to your liking, transfer it to a cutting board or platter and let it rest for about 5 to 10 minutes. This will give the juices time to redistribute, so when you slice into it, they stay in the meat instead of running out and keeping every bite juicy and tender.

In The Oven

I’ll be honest, my favorite way of cooking flank steak is on the grill, but let’s face it, sometimes grilling is not an option. The good news is that you can get a similar result using your oven’s broiler, and it’s just as easy.

Step 1 – Turn the broiler on: Set your oven to the “broil” setting on high. For the best results, place the oven rack in the upper third section, about 5-6 inches from the heat source.

Step 2 – Prepare the pan: Line a baking sheet with parchment paper (or aluminum foil), then set a wire rack over it. The rack is key because it allows hot air to circulate completely around the meat as it roasts, helping us create crispy edges and evenly cooked flank steak.

Step 3 – Broil: Remove the steak from the marinade and let the excess drip off before transferring it to your prepared sheet pan. Broil for 5-6 minutes on each side, or until it reaches your desired doneness. The best way to know when it’s ready is by inserting an instant-read thermometer into the thickest part of the meat. For a quick guide on what temperatures to aim for, see the doneness temperature chart in the grilling section above.

Step 4 – Rest and slice: When the cooking time is completed, transfer the steak to a plate, cover loosely with foil, and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before slicing.

On The Stove Top:

When it comes to cooking your marinated steak on the stove top, a cast-iron skillet works best as it retains heat very well. Simply:

Step 1 – Heat the skillet: Grab a large (10 or 12 inch) cast iron skillet and heat it over medium-high heat until sizzling hot. You can check if it is hot enough by spraying it with a drop of water. If it evaporates right away, it should be good to go.

Step 2 – Prepare the steak: Remove the marinated flank steak from the marinade, making sure to remove any excess. This is an important step in that excess liquid will steam the meat instead of searing it. I even recommend patting it dry with a few sheets of paper towels to make sure that it is as “dry” as possible.

Step 3 – Cook the steak: Transfer the steak to the skillet and sear for 3-4 minutes or until nicely browned. Flip the steak and cook for another 3-5 minutes, depending on the level of doneness you prefer.

Expert Tips:

Even though marinating flank steak is a simple process, a few small details can make all the difference in how tender and juicy your steak turns out. Below, I am sharing my notes from my recipe testing to help you make the best marinated flank steak:

  • Don’t put cold meat on the grill: If you’re marinating your flank steak overnight, take it out of the fridge 30-60 minutes before grilling. You don’t want to put super cold steak onto a hot grill, as it won’t sear properly, and the outside can overcook before the inside comes up to temperature.
  • Let the excess marinade drip off: Before cooking, I always let the steak rest for a moment over the bowl or dish to let any extra marinade drip off. Too much liquid on the surface can cause the steak to steam instead of sear, especially if you’re grilling or using a cast-iron skillet. Also, since the marinade contains acid, putting the steak on the grill while it’s still dripping can cause flare-ups. Letting it drip off helps avoid all that and gives you better control over the cook.
  • Aim for medium doneness: Since flank steak is a thinner, leaner cut, I usually aim to cook it to medium. This gives you a tender, juicy result without drying it out. If you go much past that, it can start to get tough and chewy.
  • Let it rest before slicing: Just like with any steak, let it rest for 5 to 10 minutes on a cutting board before slicing. This allows the juices to redistribute throughout the meat instead of spilling out, keeping every bite tender.
  • Always slice against the grain: This is the key to keeping flank steak tender. The long muscle fibers run in one direction, and cutting across them shortens those fibers, making each bite easier to chew.

What To Serve It With?

One of the things I love most about this flank steak marinade recipe is how versatile the steak turns out. You can serve it on its own for a simple dinner or build it into bowls, tacos, or hearty salads. No matter how you enjoy it, here are some of my favorite recipes to round out the meal:

Grilled Vegetables: If you’re making this as a summer meal, it pairs beautifully with grilled vegetables like Grilled Eggplant or Grilled Corn on the Cob. Both are easy to prepare alongside the steak and bring that same fresh-off-the-grill taste to the plate.

Marinated flank steak served over a salad.

Salad: My Grilled Flank Steak Salad is a fantastic, meal-worthy salad that is everything you want in a bowl on a warm summer dinner. If you want a different option, my Original Caesar Salad, tangy Mediterranean Pasta Salad, or creamy Coleslaw with Greek Yogurt all complement the steak perfectly without overpowering it.

Potatoes: If you’re looking to add something hearty, try a side of crispy potatoes. I recommend my Fingerling Potatoes in an Air Fryer for a quick option or my simple Smashed Fingerling Potatoes.

Butter Sauce: And don’t forget a drizzle of something buttery to finish it off. A spoonful of Roasted Garlic Butter or my simple buttery Garlic Sauce takes this steak over the top and ties the whole meal together.

How To Store, Freeze, and Reheat?

If you have leftovers, this grilled flank steak keeps well and makes for an easy second meal. Remember, the key to great leftovers is preserving moisture. By following these simple steps, you can enjoy this delicious flank steak days or even weeks later with the same great taste:

Storage:

If you’re planning to store leftovers, I recommend keeping the steak whole. It helps lock in moisture and makes it easier to reheat without overcooking. Once it’s cooled, wrap it up or transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. 

If it’s already sliced, that’s okay, you’ll just want to reheat it in a cast-iron skillet with a splash of water to bring back some of that texture.

Freezing:

If you plan on freezing it, I recommend freezing the cooked steak whole. Let it cool completely first, then wrap it tightly in parchment paper or plastic wrap to help prevent freezer burn. Place it in a freezer-safe bag and press out as much air as you can before sealing. It’ll keep well in the freezer for up to 3 months.

When you’re ready to enjoy it again, thaw it in the fridge overnight. For a quicker option, submerge the sealed bag in a bowl of cold water and let it sit for about 30 minutes.

Reheating: 

If you stored your steak whole, the best way to reheat it is in the oven. Preheat to 275°F, wrap the steak loosely in foil, and warm it for 10 to 15 minutes or until heated through. Covering is important as it will help lock in moisture and keep the steak from drying out.

If your steak is already sliced, I recommend reheating it in a cast-iron skillet over medium heat. Add a splash of water or beef broth to keep it moist, and warm just until heated through. This helps bring back some of that texture and gives the edges a slight crisp without overcooking the inside.

Whichever method you use, reheat low and slow. Since flank steak is lean, high heat can dry it out fast.

FAQs

How long can you marinate flank steak?

You can marinate flank steak for as little as 1 hour at room temperature if you’re short on time. For the best results, though, I recommend marinating it overnight in the fridge. Just be sure not to go over 24 hours, as the acid in the marinade can start to break the meat down and affect the texture.

Can I freeze raw flank steak in the marinade?

Yes, you technically can. Freezing pauses the marinating process, and as the meat thaws, it will continue to absorb the flavor. The key is to cook the meat as soon as it is thawed, to ensure that the acidic ingredients don’t alter its texture too much.
To freeze, place the raw meat and the marinade in a freezer-safe bag and remove all the air. Freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight before cooking.

Can I freeze marinated flank steak after it is cooked?

Yes, you can. For best results, freeze the steak whole. This helps maintain its moisture and texture when you reheat it. Make sure it’s fully cooled, then wrap it tightly in parchment paper or plastic wrap to avoid freezer burn. Transfer it to a freezer-safe bag, remove as much air as possible, and seal. It’ll keep well in the freezer for up to 3 months.

What is the best way to slice flank steak?

Always slice flank steak against the grain. This means cutting across the visible lines of muscle fibers rather than parallel to them. Doing this shortens the muscle fibers and gives you tender and easy-to-chew pieces every time.

Can I use this marinade for skirt steak as well?

Yes, you can. Skirt steak is a similar cut that is lean and perfect for high-heat cooking, so it benefits from the same balance of acidity, salt, and sweetness.

Flank Steak vs. Flap Steak: Are they the same?

Most people are confused about these two cuts of meat, but they are not the same. Flank steak comes from the cow’s lower abdomen, while flap steak is cut from the bottom sirloin, just next to the flank. With that being said, this marinade can be used for flap steak and deliver great results.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Steak Recipes You Might Like:

If you enjoyed this easy flank steak recipe, there are plenty of other ways to enjoy it too:

  • For an easy weeknight dinner or a get-together, you can’t go wrong with my Flank Steak Tacos. These pair perfectly with fresh toppings and warm tortillas.
  • If you’re craving something hearty and satisfying, my Chimichurri Steak Sandwich is always a hit.  Imagine perfectly cooked steak wrapped in chimichurri sauce in a soft, crusty bread. It’s everything you want in a sandwich.
  • Or if you’re in the mood for something lighter, try the cult-favorite, Houston’s Thai Steak Noodle Salad for an impressive yet easy steak dinner recipe.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Grilled marinated Flank steak sliced on a plate.
Print

Flank Steak Marinade Recipe

Here's an easy flank steak marinade that transforms a budget-friendly cut into a tender, juicy steak every time. Made with simple pantry staples, it's perfect for grilling, broiling, or searing flank steak for an easy, crowd-pleasing meal.
Course Meat
Cuisine American
Diet Halal
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Marinating Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 25 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 266kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more to oil the grill grates
  • cup soy sauce
  • ¼ cup apple cider vinegar or balsamic vinegar or red wine vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice or lime juice
  • 2 tablespoons Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon honey or brown sugar
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon sweet paprika
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 ½ lbs flank steak

Instructions

  • Select a container that is large enough to fit your flank steak comfortably, ideally one with a fitting lid. Alternatively, you can also use a resealable plastic bag.
  • Add in ¼ cup of olive oil, ⅓ cup of soy sauce, ¼ cup of apple cider vinegar, 2 tablespoons of lemon juice, 2 tablespoons of Worcestershire sauce, 1 tablespoon of Dijon mustard, 1 tablespoon of honey, 3 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon of sweet paprika, ½ teaspoon of ground cumin, ½ teaspoon of kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon black pepper. Whisk to combine.
    Flank steak marinade being poured over the meat.
  • Add the flank steak and ensure that the whole piece is submerged in the marinade.
  • Cover and refrigerate for at least 1 hour, preferably overnight, but no longer than 24 hours.
    Flank steak in the marinade and then on the grill.

To Cook it on the Grill:

  • When ready to cook, preheat a gas grill to 500°F.
  • Scrape the grill grates to remove any possible food residue. Dip a wad of paper towel into a bowl of oil and coat the grates generously with the oil.
  • Remove the flank steak from the marinade, letting the excess marinade drip off. Discard the marinade.
  • Place the meat on the grill and cook for 3-4 minutes on each side for rare (internal temperature is 130 to 135 °F), 4-5 minutes on each side for medium (internal temperature is 136 to 145 °F), or 5-6 minutes on each side for medium-well (internal temperature is 146 to 155 °F).
  • When it reaches your desired doneness, transfer the grilled flank steak to a platter and cover it with foil.
  • Let it rest for 5 minutes, and then slice it against the grain. Serve while still warm.

To Broil in The Oven

  • Set your oven to the "broil" setting on high. For the best results, place the oven rack in the upper third section, about 5-6 inches from the heat source.
  • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set a wire rack over it.
  • Remove the steak from the marinade and let the excess drip off before transferring it to your prepared sheet pan. Broil for 5-6 minutes on each side, or until it reaches your desired doneness.
  • Transfer the steak to a plate, cover loosely with foil, and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before slicing.

On The Stove Top

  • Place a large cast-iron skillet over medium high heat and heat it until sizzling hot.
  • Remove the marinated flank steak from the marinade, making sure to remove any excess. Transfer it onto a clean plate and pat dry with a paper towel to remove as much of the liquid as possible.
  • Transfer the steak to the skillet and sear for 3-4 minutes or until nicely browned. Flip the steak and cook for another 3-5 minutes, depending on the level of doneness you prefer.

Video

Notes

  • Let it come to room temperature before grilling: If you are marinating your steak overnight, take it out of the fridge and let it rest on the counter 30 to 60 minutes before grilling. If you put cold marinated steak on a hot grill, it won’t sear properly. It’s likely that the outside will cook before the inside is cooked.
  • Level of doneness: Please use the grilling times I listed in the post as a place to start. The grilling time could change based on the thickness of your flank steak. The best way to check doneness is with a meat thermometer.
  • Storage: If you’re planning to store leftovers, I recommend keeping the steak whole. Once it’s cooled, wrap it up or transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. If it’s already sliced, that’s okay too. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 266kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 68mg | Sodium: 1077mg | Potassium: 495mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 173IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 41mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/flank-steak-marinade/feed/ 2
CAVA Cucumber Mint Lime Drink (Copycat Recipe) https://foolproofliving.com/cava-cucumber-mint-lime-drink/ https://foolproofliving.com/cava-cucumber-mint-lime-drink/#respond Tue, 05 Aug 2025 12:59:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82635 As I set out to recreate CAVA’s cucumber mint lime drink, I started with a base of lime juice, almost…]]>

As I set out to recreate CAVA’s cucumber mint lime drink, I started with a base of lime juice, almost like making a classic limeade. At first, I blended cucumber juice, lime juice, and a bit of simple syrup. It was good, but honestly, it just tasted like limeade. It was nothing memorable.

Then I came across a tip that suggested enhancing limeade with lime zest and a splash of lemon juice. That tip was golden. Those two small additions completely transformed my simple drink into something bright, layered, and refreshing, and more importantly, just like the version I love at CAVA.

CAVA copycat mint lime cucumber drink in glasses garnished with mint lime, and cucumber slices.

This homemade cucumber mint lime juice drink recipe has that exact light, crisp, and not overly sweet flavor. It’s also incredibly easy to customize, can be served non-alcoholic or as a cocktail, and is also make-ahead friendly, making it a total crowd-pleaser for any warm day. Not to mention, making your own is way more cost-effective than buying at the store.

Cava Cucumber Mint Lime Ingredients

To make this copycat CAVA cucumber mint limeade, you only need a few simple, fresh ingredients you probably already have in your fridge/pantry. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my testing:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

For the Mint Simple Syrup

Sweetener: Traditionally, simple syrup uses equal parts sugar and water. I like to use honey (or agave syrup) instead, inspired by my Honey Simple Syrup recipe, to keep the drink naturally sweetened. Both options work beautifully.

Mint: Any fresh mint you grow or can find in your local supermarket will do. Peppermint or spearmint are both great choices.

For the Drink

Cucumbers: I prefer Persian cucumbers for their crisp, sweet taste, but English cucumbers are a great substitute. Peeling is optional, but if you keep the skin on, give it a taste first to make sure it’s not bitter, since older cucumber skins can sometimes be tough and a bit bitter.

Lime and Lemon Juice & Zest: Freshly squeezed juice is best for a bright, clean taste. Bottled juice works in a pinch, but if you can, squeeze your own. When I was testing this recipe, I noticed that using only the juice didn’t quite capture the citrusy kick that makes CAVA’s version so refreshing.

That’s when I decided to add the zest of both lime and lemon. It turned out to be the missing piece, bringing the drink much closer to the one I first enjoyed at CAVA.

Ice: Cubed or crushed ice keeps the drink cold and refreshing.

For the Garnishes

This is where you can have some fun. Add cucumber slices, sliced lime, or fresh mint sprigs for a pretty, restaurant-style touch.

How To Make Cucumber Mint Limeade?

Although it may seem like a lot of steps, making this refreshing drink is actually quite simple. Just follow the easy steps below:

A collage of images showing the making of simple syrup and cucumbers in a food processor.

Step 1 – Make the mint simple syrup: To keep my drink naturally sweetened, I am making a batch of my honey syrup recipe. That being said, you can make it with regular simple syrup by using 3/4 cup of granulated sugar and 3/4 cup of water, following the same steps.

If you are following in my footsteps, combine honey (or sugar) and water in a small saucepan over medium heat. Cook, stirring occasionally, until the honey fully dissolves. Refrain from boiling honey, as exposure to high heat can potentially degrade the nutritional value and natural flavors of your honey.

Remove from the heat and stir in the mint leaves, ensuring they are fully submerged. Let them steep for 15-20 minutes, then strain and set aside to cool.

Step 2- Puree the cucumbers: Cut the peeled cucumbers into small chunks and transfer them into a food processor or high-powered blender and blend until smooth and lightly pureed. 

A collage of images showing the making of cucumber juice.

Step 3- Strain the juice: Pour it into a fine-mesh strainer set over a bowl (or a nut milk bag would also work). Use the back of a spoon or spatula to press out as much of the juice as possible. In the end, you should get about ½ cup of cucumber juice.

A collage of photos showing the mixing and making of the cucumber lime mint drink.

Step 4 – Mix the drink: Grab a large pitcher and pour in all the prepared ingredients, starting with cucumber juice, lime and lemon zests and juices, now-cooled mint simple syrup, and 2 cups of cold water. Give it a good stir to ensure everything is thoroughly mixed.

Step 5 – Chill & Serve: Cover and refrigerate for an hour or two to allow the flavors to blend together. When ready to serve, fill glasses with ice and pour the drink over it. Garnish it with a sprig of fresh mint and your other preferred garnishes.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

One of the best parts about this cucumber mint limeade is how easy it is to prepare ahead of time. It’s perfect for entertaining or for keeping a refreshing drink ready in the fridge all week.

Make Ahead: The mint simple syrup can be made 1-2 days in advance and stored in an airtight jar or bottle in the refrigerator.

If you’d rather mix the whole drink ahead, you can prepare it a day in advance. Just cover and refrigerate until ready to serve.

Storage: Store the finished drink in a sealed pitcher in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days.

It’s normal for the liquid to separate as it sits. Just give it a good stir before pouring.

Freezing for Later:

A fun option is to freeze the cucumber mint limeade in ice cube trays. Once frozen, drop the cubes into a glass of water or sparkling water for a light, refreshing sip without making a whole batch.

I like using silicone ice cube molds (affiliate) so the cubes pop out easily.

Expert Tips:

Adjust sweetness to your liking: If you’ve ever made lemonade or limeade, you know that not all lemons and limes taste the same. Some are sweeter while others can be quite tart. I find that about ¾ cup of simple syrup is just right for this cucumber mint drink, but you can easily adjust it according to your taste buds. If it tastes too strong, add a bit more water. If you’d like it sweeter, stir in a touch more syrup until it’s just right for you.

Freshly squeezed juice is best: Fresh limes and lemons make all the difference in this mint and cucumber drink. While bottled juice is a convenient shortcut, it often tastes flat or even slightly bitter. If you can, take the extra few minutes to squeeze your own; it gives the drink a much brighter, cleaner taste.

Don’t skip the straining: It may feel like an extra step, but straining makes a big difference. For a smooth, pulp-free cucumber drink, be sure to strain the mixture before serving. It keeps the drink light, clean, and refreshing.

Chill thoroughly: For the best taste, let the cucumber mint refresher chill in the refrigerator for at least 1-2 hours before serving. This gives the flavors time to meld together. If you’re short on time, you can cut the chilling time by starting with cold ingredients, like refrigerated cucumbers and citrus.

Don’t forget the garnishes: A few simple garnishes can take this beverage from everyday to eye-catching. Add lime slices, sliced cucumber, and a sprig of mint (though be sure to remove the woody stems) to make it look as refreshing as it tastes. For the prettiest presentation, serve it in a clear glass or pitcher over ice; it’s an instant crowd-pleaser.

Variations

One of the best parts about this cucumber mint drink recipe is how easy it is to customize. With just a few simple swaps or additions, you can make it fit any occasion, like serving it to kids on a hot afternoon or mixing it up for friends at happy hour.

Add Sparkling water: For a bubbly twist, replace some or all of the water with sparkling water. You can even use lightly flavored sparkling water  (like Bubly or Spindrift) that you enjoy. It adds a refreshing fizz and makes the drink feel extra special.

Turn it into agua fresca: For a lighter taste, similar to a cucumber mint agua fresca, use less citrus and more water.

Make it a cocktail: This limeade is the perfect base for gin, vodka, or even white rum. Add a splash over ice for a refreshing adult beverage.

Add some ginger: If you enjoy a little spice, try steeping a few slices of fresh ginger in the mint simple syrup. It adds a subtle warmth and zing that balances beautifully with the cool cucumber and bright citrus.

What to Serve It With

This cucumber mint lime CAVA recipe is honestly one of those drinks that just goes with everything. It’s light, refreshing, and makes whatever you’re eating taste even better. But if I had to pick my favorites, these are the times I always want a glass in my hand:

FAQs

Can I substitute fresh lime juice for bottled juice?

Yes, you can. However, please keep in mind that freshly squeezed juice will be better in terms of flavor.

Should I peel the cucumbers for this drink?

Peeling is optional, but here’s a little trick: if you decide to keep the skin on, give it a taste first. Older cucumber skins can sometimes be a little bitter, and I wouldn’t recommend that for this drink.

How long does Copycat Cava Cucumber Mint Limeade last?

As long as it is kept in an airtight container in the fridge, this drink will taste fresh for up to 5 days. You may notice some natural separation, which is completely normal. Just give it a quick stir before pouring, and it should be good to go.

Can I make this drink alcoholic?

Absolutely! This limeade is the perfect base for a summer cocktail. It pairs wonderfully with a splash of white rum, gin, or even vodka. You can just add a shot or two over ice, and you’ve got a fantastic new happy hour drink ready to go!

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Similar Drink Recipes You Might Like

If you’re as obsessed with this CAVA drink as I am, you’ll love these other refreshing recipes from the archives:

  • If you are in search of the most refreshing summer drink on a hot day, look no further than my Strawberry Basil Mocktail. Made in just a few minutes with strawberries and fresh basil, it’s such a nice twist to the classic version.
  • Elevate your lemonade game with my go-to Rosemary Lemonade Recipe, made from scratch with a unique hint of vanilla.
  • Inspired by a trip to Dominica, my honey-sweetened Iced Ginger Tea is a true summer treat for any ginger lover.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

CAVA copycat cucumber mint lime garnished with a sprig of mint.
Print

CAVA Copycat Cucumber Mint Lime Recipe

If you've been looking for a good recipe for CAVA's Cucumber Mint Lime Juice Drink, you are in the right place! This refresher is cool, crisp, and just the right amount of citrusy. Perfect for get-togethers, cocktails, or a refreshing sip for the kids.
Course Non Alcoholic Drink
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 3 minutes
Cooling time 2 hours
Total Time 2 hours 23 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 153kcal

Ingredients

For the simple syrup:

  • cup honey or sugar
  • cup water
  • 1 cup fresh mint leaves rinsed and picked over – plus more as garnish (15 g)

For the drink:

  • 6 Persian cucumbers peeled and cut into chunks or 2 English cucumber (peeled), plus more as garnish
  • Zest of 1 lime 1g – about 1 tsp
  • Zest of 1 lemon 1g – about 1 tsp
  • 1 ½ cups fresh lime juice about 10-12 medium-sized limes
  • ½ cup fresh lemon juice about 5 medium-sized lemons
  • 2 cups water

As Garnish:

  • 1 lime sliced
  • Ice for serving

Instructions

  • Make the Mint Syrup: In a small saucepan, combine honey (or sugar) and water. Warm over medium heat, stirring occasionally, until the honey dissolves completely. Remove from the heat and stir in the mint leaves. Make sure they're fully submerged. Let steep for 20 minutes, then strain and set the syrup aside to cool.
    Images showing how to make cucumber juice.
  • Juice the Cucumbers: Place peeled cucumbers in a food processor and blend until smooth. Set a fine mesh sieve or colander over a bowl and pour in the puree. Use a spoon or spatula to press out as much juice as possible. You should get about ½ cup of cucumber juice.
    Images showing how to make cucumber juice.
  • Mix the Drink: In a large pitcher, combine the cucumber juice, lime zest, lemon zest, lime juice, lemon juice, and the cooled mint syrup. Add 2 cups of water and stir well.
    A collage of images showing how to make the drink.
  • Chill: Cover and refrigerate for 1-2 hours to allow the flavors to blend together.
  • Serve: When ready to serve, fill glasses with ice, cucumber slices, and lime slices. Pour the drink over the ice and garnish with fresh mint.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6 to 7 cups of limeade, ideal for serving 6 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Simple syrup: I made a honey simple syrup to keep my drink naturally sweetened, but you can make a regular simple syrup by mixing an equal amount of granulated sugar with water (1 to 1 ratio). Do not skip this step, otherwise the sugar will not dissolve in the drink.
  • Taste and adjust: Not all lemons and limes are created equal. Some can be sweet, some can be too tart. Once you mix all the ingredients, be sure to give it a taste and adjust with more water or syrup.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in a bottle or jar with a tight fitting lid for upto 3-4 days. Be sure to give it a good shake before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 153kcal | Carbohydrates: 42g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.3g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 12mg | Potassium: 261mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 34g | Vitamin A: 424IU | Vitamin C: 34mg | Calcium: 47mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cava-cucumber-mint-lime-drink/feed/ 0
Sumac Onions Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/ https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 21:22:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82353 What Are Sumac Onions? Growing up in Turkey, sumac onions were always on the table. For us, they were what…]]>

What Are Sumac Onions?

Growing up in Turkey, sumac onions were always on the table. For us, they were what pickled onions are for many American homes: a simple, tangy side that brightens up almost any meal.

While we called it “sumac onions” and served it more like a condiment, some people also refer to it as a “red onion salad” and serve it as a side dish. Both are perfectly acceptable.

Sumac onions in a bowl from a top view.

Now, in case you are not familiar, the key ingredient is sumac. It is a deep red spice made from dried berries (not peppers, though many people think so) with a tangy lemony flavor and slightly earthy taste. Unlike chili powders, it isn’t spicy hot.

When mixed with thinly sliced red onions, sumac helps tame their sharpness, turning them into a slightly sweet and refreshing bite. That’s why you’ll often see sumac onions served alongside meat-centric dishes like lamb, beef, or chicken kebabs. They cut through the richness and spice, bringing a welcome crunch and a pop of brightness to every bite.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll need only a few basic pantry staples to make this sumac onions recipe. You can find the complete list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Ingredients for sumac red onions in bowls from the top view.

Red Onion: Since this is the main ingredient, use a fresh red onion and slice it as thinly as possible. A sharp knife works well, but a mandolin ensures even slices. In a pinch, you can substitute white or yellow onions, though the flavor will be slightly different.

Extra Virgin Olive Oil: A mild-flavored olive oil works best.

Lemon Juice: My mom always used lemon juice, as most Turkish families do, but other acidic ingredients like apple cider vinegar, red wine vinegar, or lime juice also work. Keep in mind, though, that the flavor profile will vary depending on the acid you use.

Kosher Salt: I used Diamond kosher salt, but if you are using other brands like Morton’s or sea salt, I would use half the amount and adjust it as necessary.

Sumac: Usually available in the Middle Eastern section of most supermarkets, sold as sumac spice or sumac powder. If you’re new to sumac, I really like Eastanbul sumac spice (affiliate link). Keep an eye on the best-by date, since sumac typically has a shorter shelf life than many other spices, about 6 months.

Red Pepper Flakes (Urfa Chili or Aleppo Pepper): Optional, but the authentic version often uses a pinch of Urfa chili or Aleppo pepper. If you can’t get your hands on either one of those, any other red pepper flakes you have on hand would also work.

Fresh Chopped Parsley: Finely chopped parsley is traditional, but you can switch it up depending on the dish you are serving it with. For example, fresh mint pairs beautifully when serving with lamb.

Pomegranate molasses (optional): A drizzle of pomegranate molasses is optional, but it would add a nice sweetness, especially if you are serving this with kebabs.

Tomatoes (optional): If I am serving this sumac onion salad with lamb kabobs like the traditional Adana Kebab, I add a handful of halved cherry tomatoes. They bring a pop of color and an extra touch of freshness.

How to Make Sumac Onions (Step-by-Step Guide)

Making Turkish sumac onions is as straightforward as it gets. You don’t need any special equipment, just a sharp knife and a bowl. Follow these simple steps, and you’ll have a tangy, refreshing side ready to serve with your favorite dishes.

A collage of images showing thinly sliced onion and a bowl of onions mixed with the rest of the ingredients.

Step 1 – Slice the onions: On a sturdy cutting board, cut the red onion in half lengthwise. Remove the skins and slice thinly into half-moon shapes. A sharp knife works best, but always keep the flat side of the onion against the board for safety.

Step 2 – Mix the ingredients: Place the sliced onion in a medium bowl. Add the olive oil, lemon juice, kosher salt, sumac, and Aleppo pepper (if using).

A collage of images showing thinly sliced red onions being massaged and garnished with parsley.

Step 3 – Massage: Using clean hands, gently massage the onions for 1-2 minutes, until they have softened slightly and absorbed the seasonings.

Step 4 – Garnish and rest: Sprinkle with chopped parsley and toss to combine. If you have the time, cover and refrigerate for 10-15 minutes before serving to let the flavors meld.

Helpful Expert Tips

Whether you’re serving sumac pickled onions as a condiment for kebabs or tucking them into sandwiches, this recipe is simple enough for anyone to make. Still, a few tips can help you get the best results on your first try:

  • Soak the onions if needed: If you’re sensitive to the strong, pungent taste of red onions, soak the slices in cold tap water with a pinch of salt for about 10 minutes, then drain before mixing. This works especially well if you plan to serve them right away. However, keep in mind that if you are making them ahead, this step is unnecessary, as their sharpness naturally mellows as they sit in the fridge.
  • Use fresh sumac: Unlike many other spices, sumac has a relatively short shelf life. Check the freshness before using it. I list one tablespoon in the recipe, but I often add closer to 2 tablespoons at home because I love the flavor. Taste and adjust to your preference.
  • Slice evenly: Try to cut the onions into even slices so each bite has the same texture and balance of seasoning. A mandolin can be helpful, but a sharp chef’s knife works just fine.
  • Don’t skip the massage: Gently massaging for a minute not only softens the onions but also helps them absorb the sumac and other seasonings more fully. 
  • Serve slightly chilled: While you can enjoy them right away, serving them chilled adds a refreshing crunch that pairs especially well with rich meat dishes.
  • Watch out for stains: Sumac has a deep red color, and when mixed with red onions, it can easily stain.. Avoid wearing your favorite white shirt while preparing it, and consider using gloves if you prefer.

Delicious Ways to Serve Sumac Onions

The pairing options are endless for this Turkish onion salad. While you can serve it with nearly any savory dish, here are some of my favorite ways to enjoy it:

  • With Kebabs & Grilled Meats: Sumac onions are the classic pairing with the rich, smoky kebabs that Turkish, Lebanese, and other Middle Eastern cuisines are known for. I especially love to serve on top of my Adana Kebab, Chicken Shish Tawook, Doner Kebab, and Oven Chicken Kebabs.
  • With Shawarma: Their tangy bite balances the spices in shawarma beautifully. Try them with my Easy Chicken Shawarma or Beef Shawarma.
  • In Bowls: Add freshness and brightness to grain or salad bowls. They’re perfect on top of a Chicken Shawarma Bowl or a Homemade CAVA Bowl.
  • With Seafood Dishes: They pair wonderfully with Grilled or Baked salmon, adding contrast to the richness of the fish.
  • Make it a part of your mezze platter: Serve it along with other mezze platter staples like Hummus, Muhammara, and Baba Ganoush.
  • Vegetarian & Vegan Favorites: Sumac onions bring life to plant-based meals, adding a burst of freshness that makes every bite more satisfying. I love serving them alongside Rice with Vermicelli or crispy Falafel.

Storing Leftovers & Making Ahead

Making Ahead: This recipe is perfect for meal prep since the onions continue to mellow and develop flavor as they sit. You can make them 2–3 days in advance and store them in an airtight container or mason jar in the fridge.

Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers refrigerated for 3 to 4 days. Just give them a quick stir before serving to mix the seasonings back in.

Freezing: Freezing isn’t recommended, as the onions lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the best taste and crunch, enjoy them fresh.

Zoomed in photo of sumac onions in a bowl.

FAQs

What do sumac onions taste like?

Sumac onions have a bright, tangy taste with a hint of sweetness. The sumac adds an earthy, citrus-like note that softens the sharpness of raw red onions.

How do you make raw onions less strong/pungent?

If you find raw onions too sharp, soak the slices in a bowl of cold water with a pinch of salt for about 10 minutes, then drain well before using.

How long do sumac onions last / How should I store sumac onions?

They should last for 3-4 days as long as they are stored in an airtight container or a jar with a tight-fitting lid.

Can I add other ingredients or variations?

Yes, absolutely. Sumac onions are very versatile. You can drizzle in a little pomegranate molasses for extra sweetness, swap in fresh mint instead of parsley, or add spices like ground cumin for a different twist.

Other Middle Eastern/Mediterranean Condiments You Might Like

If you enjoy this onion sumac salad, chances are you’ll love other Middle Eastern and Mediterranean condiments too. Here are a few to try next:

  • If you’re a fan of the bold, spicy flavors of the region, my homemade harissa recipe is a must-try.
  • Bright and earthy with lemon and garlic, tahini sauce is one of the easiest ways to add depth to grilled meats or roasted vegetables.
  • When you want to mellow out the richness of kebabs or grilled meats, everyone’s favorite creamy Greek white sauce (known as tzatziki) made with cucumber, garlic, and dill is hard to beat.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Turkish red onion sumac salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Sumac Onions Recipe

These quick and tangy Sumac Onions are a quick Middle Eastern condiment. Made with thinly sliced red onions, lemon juice, olive oil, and sumac, they add a refreshing, citrusy bite that balances rich dishes like kebabs, shawarma, or grilled fish. Serve as a side, condiment, or salad for a fresh pop of flavor.
Course Condiment
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 45kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 red onion medium sized
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon sumac
  • ¼ teaspoon Urfa or Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Cut onions in half lengthwise, remove the skins, and slice thinly into half-moon shapes. Transfer to a medium bowl.
  • Add the olive oil, lemon juice, Kosher salt, sumac, and Aleppo pepper.
    Two images side by side showing onions being thinly sliced and onions in a bowl garnished with sumac.
  • Using your hands, gently massage the onions for 1–2 minutes until they soften slightly and absorb the seasonings.
  • Add the parsley and toss to combine.
    A collage of images showing sumac onions massaged and then garnished with parsley.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes ½ to ¾ of sumac onions, which would be ideal for serving 4 adults. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Onions: While the traditional recipe is made with red onions, in a pinch, you can use white onions, but keep in mind that the flavor profile will be slightly different.
  • Make Ahead: These onions get even better as they sit. You can prepare them 2-3 days in advance and store them in an airtight container or jar in the fridge.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in the fridge for up to 4 days. Just give them a quick stir before serving to mix the seasonings back in.
  • Freezing: Not recommended, as the onions lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the best flavor and crunch, enjoy them fresh.

Nutrition

Calories: 45kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 295mg | Potassium: 61mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 207IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 0.2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/feed/ 0
Adana Kebab Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/adana-kebab/ https://foolproofliving.com/adana-kebab/#comments Tue, 29 Jul 2025 21:17:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82217 Recently, a local reader challenged me to share how to make this iconic kebab at home. Having grown up in…]]>

Recently, a local reader challenged me to share how to make this iconic kebab at home. Having grown up in Turkiye and with a good friend who owns a kebab restaurant in Adana (and serves nothing else!), I felt uniquely qualified to take on the challenge.

In this post, I will walk you through every aspect of creating these juicy, flavorful skewers with confidence. I’ll share how to choose the right meat, the true authentic seasonings, essential shaping techniques, and foolproof grilling tips I’ve picked up through my own recipe testing.

Adana wrap on a plate from the top view.

What Is Adana Kebab?

At its essence, Adana Kebab (or as we call it, Adana Kebap) is Turkey’s most iconic grilled lamb skewer. Hailing from the city of Adana, this traditional recipe is made with just a handful of core ingredients: finely ground lamb, tail fat, a specific Turkish red pepper called kapya, fiery Urfa chili flakes (or Aleppo pepper), salt, and black pepper.

Although many online versions include aromatics and spices like onion, garlic, or cumin, the authentic recipe adheres to those five basics.

The traditional method also calls for hand-mincing the meat with a special curved knife called a zırh (affiliate link), threading it onto wide metal skewers, then grilling it over charcoal for a deeply smoky, rich result.

The True Secret of Adana Kebab: Ingredients and Their Role

When it comes to the ingredient list for this Turkish classic, the most important thing to remember is that less is more.

Sure, you can add onion, garlic, or spices like cumin and coriander. But my suggestion is to first master the basics of the authentic recipe, and then tweak it to your own preferences from there.

Ingredients for Turkish lamb kebabs in bowls from the top view.

You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here is a more detailed breakdown of what you will need.

The Meat: Lamb, Beef, or Both?

That said, even though I just made a case for sticking to tradition, I’ll be the first to bend the rules a bit, starting with the most important part of the recipe: the meat.

The authentic version is made by chopping lamb (typically from the shoulder) and tail fat with a curved knife called a zırh (in the US, it is referred to as a cleaver knife).

The goal with using a tool like zırh is to chop the meat and fat together, back and forth, so that it (almost) forms a paste. In a way, you’re grinding the meat yourself, by hand, until the fat and muscle bind naturally.

Now, as much as I love the idea of sticking to the original, even as someone who cooks for a living, I don’t own a zırh.

And as for tail fat? Let’s just say it’s not exactly easy to find.

So, in the spirit of making this Turkish skewers recipe doable for home cooks (dare I say it, even on a weeknight), I use ground lamb instead. I know it’s not quite the same, but I truly believe it’s the next best thing.

Now, you might be wondering: can you use ground beef instead, or a combination of both? The answer is yes and yes. But there’s one very important detail to keep in mind: fat content.

What makes Adana Kebab so iconic, and so delicious, is the fat. Fat doesn’t just add richness. It also helps the meat hold together and cling to the skewer as it cooks. It’s the secret to that signature juicy texture and the reason these kebabs don’t dry out or fall apart on the grill.

Since ground lamb naturally has more fat than beef, you’ll need to make adjustments if you’re using beef. Look for a fatty grind, ideally a 60/40 ratio if possible. 

If you’re buying from a butcher, ask for ground chuck with extra fat, or see if they can add in some beef fat trimmings for you.

Signature Seasonings of Adana: Red Pepper, Urfa Chili, and Salt

There’s a common belief that most kebab recipes rely heavily on aromatics like onion and garlic, along with spices such as ground cumin, coriander, and paprika.

Red Pepper

While that might be true for many types of kebab, this ground lamb skewer recipe challenges that idea. Instead of layering in lots of spices, it highlights one very specific ingredient: a red pepper called kapya. Native to Turkey, kapya peppers are known for their sweet and smoky flavor and add a distinctive depth to the original recipe.

I would have loved to use Kapya here, but since it’s not widely available in the US, I went with the next best thing I could find: red Fresno peppers.

If you can’t get your hands on those, a red bell pepper will also work.

Urfa Chili Flakes (Pul Biber)

The next signature ingredient is Urfa chili pepper (affiliate link), also known as Aleppo-style red pepper flakes. Urfa chili has a deep, earthy heat that’s mild yet complex, and it complements the richness of the lamb beautifully.

If you can find it, it is absolutely worth using. That said, you can use any red pepper flakes you have on hand. And, of course, feel free to adjust the heat level to suit your preferences.

Paprika

To help round out the flavor of the red pepper, especially when using substitutes like Fresno or bell pepper, I like to add a little extra depth with paprika. I use two teaspoons of my favorite kind to help bring in some of the sweetness and smokiness that kapya naturally offers.

This is also a great place to put your own spin on the recipe. Use sweet paprika, smoky paprika, or a combination of both, depending on what you prefer and have on hand.

Salt & Pepper

Finally, we have salt and black pepper.

And I’ll say this upfront. The amount of salt might surprise you. The recipe calls for one tablespoon of kosher salt for two pounds of ground lamb. It may sound like a lot, but it is essential.

Salt not only enhances the taste, but it also helps the meat bind and hold its shape on the skewer.

Of course, not all salts are created equal. I use Diamond Crystal kosher salt (affiliate link), which is lighter and less salty by volume than many other brands. If you are using something like Morton’s kosher salt, I recommend starting with half the amount and adjusting to taste.

I also add a touch of black pepper to round out the simple seasoning.

The Essential Tool Worth Investing in for Home-Style Adana Kebab

Whenever I share a recipe here on the blog, I try to avoid using tools or gadgets that most home kitchens don’t already have.

But in the case of this Turkish lamb skewers recipe, I wanted to stay as true to the original as possible, which meant making one small exception; I had to buy the thick, flat metal skewers (affiliate link) traditionally used in Adana.

My thinking is this: if you enjoy making kebabs at home, this is a worthy one-time investment that will more than pay off in the long run.

During my recipe testing, I first attempted to make these kebabs using thin bamboo skewers commonly found in most households. I had such a hard time getting the meat to stick and hold that signature thickness. The mixture kept slipping off or falling apart during grilling, which made the whole process stressful.

That’s when I realized that the people who have been making this Adana recipe for generations must know what they’re doing. So, I ordered a set of one-inch-wide kebab skewers (affiliate link), and the difference was night and day.

Here is how it is helpful:

  • The thicker skewers give you more surface area to work with when shaping the meat. 
  • Their width helps the meat cling better, and the longer body allows you to form a full-length kebab that cooks evenly over the grill. 
  • They also help the meat stay intact when exposed to high heat, which is especially important when working with a high-fat mixture like this one.

How to Make Adana Kebab at Home

Once you have your ingredients prepped and your skewers ready, the rest comes down to technique. It’s not difficult, just a few key steps to follow for the best results. Here’s how I break it down:

Preparing your kebab mixture:

Step 1 – Chop and Drain the Red Peppers

Start by removing the seeds and chopping the red peppers as finely as you can. This helps them blend seamlessly into the meat mixture, rather than showing up as visible chunks.

After chopping, place the peppers in a fine mesh strainer and press gently to release their juices. This step is essential as we want to remove as much liquid as possible so the mixture doesn’t become too wet or soggy when it’s time to shape.

Meat mixture in a bowl from the top view.

Step 2 – Prepare the Meat Mixture

In a large mixing bowl, combine the drained chopped peppers, ground lamb, paprika, red pepper flakes, salt, and black pepper. Using clean hands, mix everything together until fully combined and evenly seasoned.

Once it’s mixed, divide the meat into equal portions based on how many skewers you plan to use. My set came with three skewers, so I divided the mixture into three even parts. You can eyeball it or, if you prefer precision, weigh the portions using a kitchen scale.

If you want to make it ahead, just cover the bowl and place it in the fridge. In fact, if you can plan ahead, I highly recommend it. Giving the mixture a chance to rest helps the flavors come together and settle into the meat. An overnight rest (up to 24 hours) can really make a difference.

Shaping your Adana Kebabs

The meat is being threaded onto the skewer.

Step 3 – Thread Onto the Skewers

When you’re ready to thread the meat, start by setting up your workstation. Grab your skewers, a small bowl of water to wet your hands, and bring out the meat mixture from the fridge.

To thread, take one portion of the ground lamb mixture, shape it into a ball, and gently insert the skewer through the center. Using your hands, press and spread the meat down the length of the skewer, turning it as you go to create an even shape.

If or when the mixture starts to feel sticky, lightly wet your hands to prevent the meat from sticking too much. Just be careful not to overdo it. A little water goes a long way, and too much can make the mixture too soft to hold together.

As you work, do your best to keep the thickness even from top to bottom. Once you’ve shaped the kebab, take a moment to gently press and seal the top and bottom ends of the meat onto the skewer.

Step 4 – Create the signature ridges

Adana skewers shaped from the top view.

If you’ve had Adana Kebab before, you’ve probably noticed the pattern of shallow ridges pressed into the surface. They’re not just for appearance. These indentations help the meat cook more evenly over high heat and give the kebab its signature look.

To make them, use your thumb and forefinger to gently press along the length of the meat, making shallow marks every couple of inches. Rotate the skewer and repeat the same motion on the other side.

Grilling Your Kebabs

Step 5 – Grill

Lamb kebabs on the grill.

The traditional way to cook Adana Kebab is over a charcoal grill, which gives it that distinct smoky taste and slightly crisp exterior. That said, I used my gas grill for this version to keep it simple and approachable for home cooks. Both methods work well, and below you’ll find tips for each.

If using a gas grill: Preheat your grill to 400°F to 425°F. Clean the grill grates thoroughly and brush them with oil to prevent sticking.

Carefully place the Adana kebab skewers on the grates and grill, turning them frequently to ensure even cooking and a nice char on all sides.

Depending on the thickness and length of your kebabs, this will take about 10 to 12 minutes.

Because the meat is rich in fat, you may see flare-ups as it cooks. That’s completely normal, but it’s important to stay close to the grill while they’re cooking. 

Adjust the heat as needed and continue rotating the skewers to avoid burning and help them cook evenly.

If using a charcoal grill: Light your charcoal and let the coals burn until they’re covered with a thin layer of white ash.

Spread them out evenly and position the skewers directly over the heat. Grill the kebabs, turning them every couple of minutes to ensure even cooking and that nice, smoky char.

The total time will be similar, around 10 to 12 minutes, again depending on the heat level and the size of your skewers.

Similar to cooking it on a gas grill, keep a close eye during grilling, especially if you notice flare-ups. The goal is juicy, charred kebabs that stay intact from grill to plate.

Step 6 – Let It Rest While Making Sumac Onions

Sumac onions before and after they are mixed.

Once the kebabs are grilled, transfer them to a sheet pan and cover loosely with foil. Let them rest for about 5 to 10 minutes so the juices have time to settle back into the meat.

While the kebabs are resting, you can prepare one of the classic accompaniments to Adana Kebab: sumac onions, a traditional onion salad that beautifully balances the richness of the meat.

They’re easy to make, but if you’d like a more detailed breakdown, feel free to check out my Sumac Onions recipe.

To make a quick batch, combine sliced red onion, olive oil, lemon juice, kosher salt, sumac, and a pinch of red pepper flakes in a medium bowl. Using clean hands, gently massage the onions until they have softened slightly. Finish with a sprinkle of chopped parsley.

Assembling and Serving

Step 7 – Assemble:

Adana wrap being assembled and placed on a plate from the top view.

With the meat grilled and your sumac onions ready, all that’s left is the bread. Traditionally, Adana Kebab is served with lavash, a soft Mediterranean-style flatbread.

It’s similar to pita bread, and you can usually find it in most supermarkets. Of course, if you’d like to try making your own, I also have a homemade lavash recipe available for you to follow.

To assemble, place a piece of lavash flat on a plate and use it to slide the meat off the skewer. Since my skewers are quite large, I like to cut the kebab in half while it’s still on the skewer, then slide each half off gently. The meat should release easily.

From there, simply top it with a generous spoonful of sumac onions, a few slices of tomatoes, and a sprinkle of fresh parsley before rolling it up.

Needless to say, it is best to enjoy your Adana wrap while it’s still warm.

Expert Tips: Troubleshooting Adana Kebab

As you can see, making this Turkish Adana Kebab recipe doesn’t require any unusual ingredients or complicated cooking techniques. Still, while preparing this post, I made a few mistakes and learned a few things that I think would be helpful, especially if you’re making it for the first time.

Below are some tips to help you get the best results:

Falling off the skewer during grilling: During my recipe testing, I had a couple of kebabs fall apart on the grill. In the end, I realized there are two main reasons this can happen:

  • Not enough fat: If the meat doesn’t have enough fat, it will have trouble sticking to the skewer and keeping its shape. So don’t skip the fat, especially if you’re using ground beef or a beef-lamb mix.
  • Ends not sealed properly: Sealing the ends means gently squeezing and securing both the top and bottom of the kebab where the meat meets the skewer. If this step is skipped, the meat may loosen or fall off when exposed to high heat.

Even thickness is key: As you’re threading the skewers, make sure the meat is evenly distributed from end to end. I’ll admit, it takes a little practice, but once you shape your first one, it gets easier. Taking the time to shape the kebab evenly helps it cook properly and stay intact.

Let it rest: As with any kebab recipe, letting the meat rest in the fridge before grilling makes a big difference. That chill time allows the salt to work its way through the mixture and gives the flavors time to meld.

Keep a close eye on the grill: Because of the high fat content, flare-ups are normal while grilling. This is where you may need to manage the heat a bit. Stay close by, and turn the skewers often so they cook evenly without burning.

Using make-shift skewers: During my research for this recipe, I came across a few versions where people used makeshift skewers by wrapping bamboo skewers (or wooden skewers) with aluminum foil.

I’ll be honest, I haven’t tried that method myself. After testing this recipe more than five times, I can say that even with thick metal skewers, getting the meat to stick takes a bit of technique. So while it might work in a pinch, I’d be hesitant to recommend it. In my experience, investing in proper wide skewers makes the process much more reliable and much less frustrating.

How to Serve Adana Kebab: Authentic Turkish Pairings for a Complete Meal

So you made your Adana Kebab, garnished it with sumac onions, and wrapped it in warm lavash. Good for you! But what if you want to take it up a notch?

Below are a few traditional pairing ideas in case you’d like to serve it the way we do in Türkiye:

Pair it with a classic Turkish salad: Turn your kebab into a full feast by serving it alongside a fresh salad like the classic pairing, Turkish Ezme. Alternatively, you can go with a traditional Shepherd’s Salad (Çoban Salatası), a white bean salad like Piyaz, or even my Greek Cucumber Salad for a cooling contrast.

Add grilled vegetables: If you have a little extra time, grill some tomatoes or green peppers on the side while your kebabs are cooking. These simple vegetables add a lovely charred flavor and are often served right on top of the kebab in restaurants across Türkiye.

Serve with rice or bulgur pilaf: For a more substantial meal, pair your kebab with a starch. My Vermicelli Rice or Bulgur Pilaf are both authentic and satisfying options that round out the plate perfectly.

Drizzle it with yogurt sauce: While not traditional, a spoonful of tzatziki sauce or my yogurt mint sauce can be a nice addition, especially if you’re serving this to kids or anyone who prefers a milder dish. The creamy yogurt helps balance the spices and adds a cooling contrast to the richness of the meat.

Don’t forget the ayran: In Türkiye, if you order Adana Kebab at a restaurant, chances are your server will bring out a glass of ayran without even asking. This cool, tangy yogurt drink helps balance the spices in the kebab and brings everything together. The good news is you can make ayran at home in just a few minutes.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Adana kebab on a plate served over lavash.
Print

Adana Kebab Recipe

This Adana Kebab recipe is a home-cook-friendly version of the iconic Turkish ground lamb kebab, made with ground lamb, red peppers, and Urfa chili (also known as red pepper flakes). Threaded onto wide skewers and grilled to perfection, it's rich, juicy, and full of authentic flavor. Served with lavash and sumac onions, it's a complete meal that brings the taste of Türkiye to your own backyard.
Course Dinner, Lamb
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Halal
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Resting time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 32 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 669kcal

Ingredients

For the kebab

  • 2 red peppers red fresno chilis or ½ red bell pepper
  • 2 lbs ground lamb or 1 lb ground lamb + 1 lb ground beef
  • 2 teaspoons paprika
  • 1 teaspoon Urfa chili flakes or Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes
  • 1 tablespoon kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • Water to wet your hands

For the Sumac Onions

  • 1 medium-sized red onion sliced
  • 1 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoons sumac
  • ¼ teaspoon Urfa chili flakes Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

To Serve with

  • 6 Lavash or pita bread

Instructions

  • Start by preparing the peppers. Remove the seeds and chop them as finely as you can. Place the chopped peppers in a colander set over a bowl and let them drain to release their juices. Once drained, transfer them to a large mixing bowl.
  • Add the ground lamb, paprika, Aleppo pepper, salt, and black pepper to the bowl with the peppers.
    Ground lamb mixed with red peppers and spices in a bowl.
  • Using clean hands, mix everything together until fully combined and the seasonings are evenly distributed.
  • Divide the meat mixture evenly based on the number of skewers you have. For example, if you have 3 skewers, divide the mixture into 3 equal portions.
    A person is threading the meat onto the skewer.
  • Take one portion, shape it into a ball, and gently insert the skewer through the center.
  • Fill a small bowl with cold tap water and keep it nearby. Using your hands, carefully press and spread the meat down the length of the skewer, turning it as you go to ensure even thickness all around. Lightly wet your fingers as needed to prevent the meat from sticking to your hands. Remember that just a little water is enough to help shape the kebabs without making the mixture too wet.
    Adana kebab on skewers ready to grill.
  • Once shaped, gently press and secure the top and bottom edges of the meat where it starts and ends on the skewer. This is an essential step in that it helps prevent the meat from breaking apart during grilling.
  • To create the traditional ridges, use your thumb and forefinger to lightly press along the length of the kebab, making shallow marks every couple of inches. Rotate the skewer and repeat on the other side. These ridges help the meat cook evenly and give the kebabs their signature look.
  • Preheat your gas grill to 400°F-425°F. Clean the grill grates well and brush them with oil to prevent sticking.
    Turkish Adana on the grill.
  • Once the grill is ready, place the Adana kebab skewers on the grates. Grill for 10-12 minutes, turning them often so they cook evenly and develop a nice char on the outside.
  • Keep in mind that because the meat has a higher fat content, you may experience flare-ups. Stay close to the grill and adjust the heat as needed to prevent burning.
  • Once cooked to your liking, cover the meat with foil and let it rest for 5-10 minutes.
  • While the meat is resting, make the sumac onions. In a medium-sized bowl, mix the sliced onions, olive oil, lemon juice, salt, sumac, and red pepper flakes.
    Sumac onions in a bowl.
  • Using clean hands, gently massage the onion mixture until slightly softened. Garnish with parsley.
  • When ready to assemble your Adana kebab, grab a lavash (or pita bread), place the meat on top, and garnish with sumac onions. Roll and serve right away.
    Adana kebab served on lavash with sumac onions on top.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves six adults and the nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Using beef instead of lamb: You can make this recipe with beef or with a mixture of beef and lamb, but it is important that you use a cut that is high in fat or ask your butcher to incorporate some beef trimmings to your ground beef.
  • Keep a close eye while grilling: Because the meat is rich in fat, you may see flare-ups as it is grilling. That’s expected, but it’s essential to stay close to the grill while they’re cooking.
  • Storage: Bring your kebabs to room temperature and store in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.
  • Reheating: Warm in a low oven set to 300°F (150°C) for about 10 to 15 minutes, or until warmed through. Cover loosely with foil to prevent it from drying out.

Nutrition

Calories: 669kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 33g | Fat: 39g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Cholesterol: 110mg | Sodium: 1755mg | Potassium: 487mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1809IU | Vitamin C: 56mg | Calcium: 39mg | Iron: 6mg

Storing, Reheating and Freezing Instructions:

While freshly grilled Adana Kebab is always best, leftovers can be stored, frozen, and reheated with good results. Here’s how I handle it:

Storage: Let the kebab cool to room temperature, then place it in an airtight container. Store it in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

Freezing: Wrap the leftover meat tightly in parchment paper, then wrap again with aluminum foil to keep everything in place. Transfer to the freezer and store for up to 1 month. When ready to use, thaw overnight in the fridge.

Reheating: Reheat in a low oven set to 300°F (150°C) for about 10 to 15 minutes, or until warmed through. Cover loosely with foil to prevent it from drying out.

Can You Make Adana Kebab Without a Grill? (Oven & Stovetop Alternatives)

While many online sources suggest you can easily cook Adana Kebab in the oven or on the stovetop, the truth is, the very essence of true Adana Kebab comes from cooking it over an open flame.

To be perfectly honest, that signature smoky flavor and crisp exterior are incredibly difficult to replicate without a grill.

However, I understand not everyone has a grill, and /or weather conditions may not cooperate to grill kebabs on the outside.

In that case, you can adapt this recipe, but it’s important to know you’ll likely be missing out of the signature smokey flavors. These alternatives are best thought of as Adana-style ground lamb kebabs, not a substitute for the real thing.

Cooking in the Oven

Step 1: Line a quarter sheet pan with a wire rack. This helps the meat cook evenly and allows air to circulate underneath. Preheat your oven to 400°F (204°C).

Step 2: Spread the meat mixture onto the rack in an even layer. Using a knife or spatula, divide it into 6 to 8 portions to mimic the shape and size of skewers.

Step 3: Bake for 20 to 23 minutes. Finish with 1 to 2 minutes under the broiler to develop a bit of char on top.

Cooking on the Stovetop

To be completely honest, I don’t recommend trying to cook full skewers on a skillet. It’s just too difficult to manage the thickness and shape. Instead, I suggest turning the meat mixture into Adana Kofte-style meatballs, which are easier to handle and still delicious.

Step 1: Form meatballs. Use a small cookie scoop or tablespoon to portion out the meat. Roll and gently flatten each one in the palm of your hand, then set them aside on a plate.

Step 2: Heat the pan. Add about a tablespoon of oil to a cast-iron or heavy-bottomed skillet. Heat it until it’s shimmering and very hot-this ensures you get a nice sear rather than steaming the meat.

Step 3: Cook in batches. Add the meatballs to the skillet, being careful not to overcrowd the pan. Cook them on all sides until nicely browned and cooked through, working in batches and adding more oil if needed.

FAQs

Is Adana kebab very spicy?

It depends. The heat in Adana Kebab comes mainly from the red peppers and Urfa chili used in the recipe. The level of spiciness can vary based on how many pepper seeds you include and how hot your red pepper flakes are.

If you want a milder version, simply remove all the seeds from the peppers and use less Urfa chili or substitute with a milder variety. If you like it spicy, keep some of the seeds and use more chili to dial up the heat.

Can I add onion, garlic, or other spices like cumin to this recipe?

You can, but keep in mind that it won’t be considered authentic Adana Kebab anymore. The traditional version is very simple and doesn’t include aromatics like onion or garlic.
That said, if you’d like to experiment with your own version, you can absolutely add them. Just make sure to grate them finely (or use a food processor to chop it finely) and strain out any excess liquid before mixing them into the meat. This helps keep the mixture from getting too wet and falling apart on the grill.

How do I know when Adana Kebab is cooked through?

You will know that it is fully cooked when it is nicely browned with grilled marks on the outside, is firm to touch and juicy when cut open.

What if I don’t have wide metal skewers?

Wide, flat metal skewers are essential for shaping and grilling Adana Kebab properly. If you don’t have them, you can try doubling up bamboo skewers or flattening them slightly, but keep in mind that the results won’t be quite the same.

You’ll likely lose the traditional look, and there’s a higher chance the meat won’t stay in place during grilling.

Other Authentic Turkish Recipes You Might Like:

If you’ve landed on this page, I suspect you’re a fan of Turkish food and maybe looking for even more foolproof, beginner-friendly recipes from my home country. Below are a few more classics you might also enjoy:

  • If you’ve ever been to a kebab restaurant and looked over the menu, chances are you’ve seen Turkish Red Lentil Soup on the list. It’s a simple 30-minute soup that’s just as beloved and familiar as Adana Kebab.
  • And if you’re in the mood for something cozy and quick, Turkish Pasta is another weeknight favorite that’s gone viral for a reason. It’s easy to make and loaded with comforting flavors.
  • Treat yourself to Türkiye’s most famous breakfast dish with my Turkish Eggs (Çılbır), poached eggs nestled on garlicky yogurt, drizzled with spicy butter, and ready in minutes. It’s truly a unique and satisfying experience!

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/adana-kebab/feed/ 2
Texas Caviar Recipe (Cowboy Caviar) https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/ https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/#comments Wed, 25 Jun 2025 18:24:29 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=22788 For years, I avoided this cowboy bean salad anytime I saw it at a potluck or outdoor party. If you’re…]]>

For years, I avoided this cowboy bean salad anytime I saw it at a potluck or outdoor party. If you’re like me and didn’t grow up eating it, you might agree that some versions can be overly sweet.

Then I came across Dorie Greenspan’s version in her cookbook Everyday Dorie (affiliate link) and decided to give it another shot. To my surprise, it was nothing like what I had tasted before. Her cowboy caviar dressing was perfectly tangy with just a touch of sweetness, balancing out the earthy beans in the best way.

Cowboy caviar in a bowl with two spoons on the side.

This recipe, sometimes called Texas Caviar, Cowboy Caviar, Cowboy Salad, or even Cowboy Bean Dip, is my take on her version, with a few minor tweaks.

Whatever name you use, it’s one of the easiest dishes to throw together, and it works as a dip, a salad, or a chunky salsa perfect with a side of tortilla chips.

Texas Caviar Ingredients

For a quick overview, find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below. But for truly foolproof results, here are my top tips as you shop and prep:

The Dressing Ingredients:

Some versions of this recipe use bottled Italian dressing, but I find those to be overly oily and lacking in depth. What makes this Cowboy Caviar dip different is the homemade lime and olive oil dressing. It’s just enough to coat the beans and veggies without weighing them down, adding brightness and balance in every bite.

Ingredients for cowboy caviar's dressing.

Here are a couple of helpful ingredient notes as you make the dressing:

Lime zest and lime juice: My version of the Texas Caviar dressing uses both lime zest and fresh lime juice to bring out a bright, tangy flavor. Four tablespoons of lime juice might sound like a lot, but trust me, it’s just the right amount.

If you prefer a milder taste, you can use 2 tablespoons of red wine vinegar and reduce the lime juice to 2 tablespoons.

And just a quick tip: it’s always easier to zest the lime before squeezing it.

Spices: I use a small amount of ground cumin and sweet paprika, following Dorie’s recipe. I think they add a beautiful depth and a welcome punch. Still, if you’re not a fan of either spice, feel free to leave them out.

Sweetener: I almost always reach for natural sweeteners like honey or maple syrup, but granulated sugar works in a pinch if that’s what you have on hand.

Garlic: Whenever I make a salad dressing, I love using fresh garlic. I think the sharp bite and depth of flavor just can’t be replicated. But if you prefer something milder, you can substitute it with 1 teaspoon of garlic powder.

Salad Ingredients:

A photo showing what's in Texas caviar.

Beans: I use a combination of black beans and black-eyed peas in my version of this Cowboy Caviar salad. In my opinion, black-eyed peas are pretty much a must in any Texas Caviar dip recipe. You can swap red kidney beans or pinto beans in place of the black beans if you’d like, and you’ll still get the heart of the dish.

Canned beans help keep things quick and easy, but you can absolutely cook them from scratch if that’s your preference.

Just be sure to rinse and dry them well before assembling the salad to avoid extra liquid watering it down.

Corn: In the summer, I love using fresh shucked corn when it’s in season. But if you’re making this at another time of year, frozen (and thawed) or canned (rinsed and drained) corn works just as well.

Onion: I use a combination of finely chopped green onions and red onions because I love the distinct flavors each one adds. You get a mix of color, crunch, and both mild and sharp flavors. If you prefer a milder taste, you can leave out the red onion. Or if you want something with more bite, skip the green and just use red.

Peppers: Most Texas Caviar recipes use a combination of red bell peppers and jalapeño, and for good reason. Each one brings its own unique flavor. If you like a bit of heat, feel free to leave some of the jalapeño seeds in for a touch of spiciness.

Tomatoes: During the summer months, I love using colorful cherry tomatoes for this Texas Caviar dip. But really, any kind of tomato will work. Heirloom, beefsteak, or even regular Roma tomatoes are all good options. Just be sure to cut them into small, bite-sized pieces so they mix easily with the other ingredients.

Avocado: It is optional and not traditional, but I think a ripe avocado makes a great addition, especially if you’re planning to serve this as a dip with chips on the side. Just be sure to cut it into small cubes so it blends in nicely.

Fresh Herbs: I used a handful of finely chopped fresh cilantro leaves, but if you are not a fan, you can use fresh parsley instead.

How To Make Texas Caviar?

Making this recipe takes no more than 15-20 minutes and requires no special equipment. 

Step 1 – Make the Cowboy Caviar Dressing: 

Person making Texas caviar dressing.

In a mixing bowl, whisk together the olive oil, lime zest, lime juice, ground cumin, paprika, kosher salt, honey, and garlic until fully combined.

Or, if you prefer, add everything to a mason jar, put the lid on, and give it a good shake.

You can also make the dressing a day or two ahead of time to speed things up even more when you’re ready to assemble the dip.

Step 2 – Assemble the salad:

Cowboy caviar salad from the top view in a bowl.

In a large salad bowl, combine the drained and rinsed black beans and black-eyed peas with the corn kernels, scallions, red onion, bell peppers, jalapeños, tomatoes, and chopped cilantro.

If you’re using avocado, I recommend adding it just before serving so it doesn’t brown.

Step 3 – Drizzle and Serve:

Images showing how to make Cowboy caviar.

Drizzle the dressing over the salad and gently toss to combine, being careful not to break up the beans too much.

This is also a good time to give it a taste and adjust the seasoning if needed.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips:

One of the best things about this Cowboy Salad recipe is that it can be made ahead of time (one or two days). In fact, I recommend it because the extra time allows the flavors to mingle and develop. Here’s how I do it:

  • To make ahead:
    Prepare the dressing and chop all the salad ingredients except the avocado. Toss everything together in a large bowl, drizzle with the dressing, cover tightly, and refrigerate. If you’re using avocado, add it just before serving to keep it from browning.
  • Storing leftovers:
    Transfer any leftover Cowboy Caviar to an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Before serving, give it a good stir and freshen it up with a squeeze of lime juice and a sprinkle of salt if needed.

Expert Tips for The Best Texas Caviar

While this recipe is pretty straightforward, below are a few helpful tips for the best results.

  • Let it rest: This step is optional, but I recommend letting the salad rest in the fridge for about an hour before serving. It gives the tangy lime juice dressing time to soak into the beans and veggies, bringing everything together.
  • Evenly cut vegetables: The most time-consuming part of this recipe is chopping the vegetables, but it’s worth taking your time. Aim to cut everything into similar-sized pieces so each bite feels balanced. Try to slice the tomatoes thinly and cut the peppers into small, bite-sized pieces, ideally smaller than the black-eyed peas.
  • Be gentle as you toss: When mixing the salad, go slowly and gently to avoid breaking the beans. This helps keep the texture nice and prevents everything from turning into mush. 

Cowboy Caviar Variations and Substitutions

Making this Cowboy Caviar dip your own is easy because, let’s face it, this simple recipe is endlessly customizable. Here are a few ideas to get you started:

  • Add more veggies: You can pack your Cowboy Caviar with even more fresh vegetables. Try thinly sliced cucumbers, chopped celery, or even finely diced radishes for extra crunch and color.
  • Add fruit: I’ve seen versions of this recipe made with sweet fruit like mango or pineapple. It might sound unexpected, but the sweetness pairs nicely with the tangy dressing, adding a refreshing twist, especially when served as a dip with chips.
  • Switch up the dressing: While my favorite part of this recipe is the tangy lime dressing, I sometimes change things up with my chili lime vinaigrette, which incorporates chili powder and adds a more Mexican-inspired twist.
  • Toss in grains: I love adding a cup of cooked quinoa, wild rice or farro to make it a filling salad especially if I am making this recipe as a part of my weekly meal prep.
  • Make it vegan: If you prefer a vegan version, just swap the honey for maple syrup or agave.

What To Serve with Texas Caviar?

It’s no secret that this recipe makes a great side dish or appetizer, whether you’re heading to a summer BBQ, a potluck, or packing lunch for work. But if you’d like to turn it into a full meal, you have plenty of options. Here are a few ideas:

  • Grilled Meats and seafood: Serve it alongside grilled chicken, shrimp, or salmon for a light and colorful plate. It’s a perfect match for summer cookouts or easy weeknight dinners.
  • With chips on the side: This Cowboy Salsa recipe makes a great appetizer when served with tortilla chips. I like using the scoopable kind, so you can get a little bit of everything in each bite.
  • With eggs: Scrambled eggs wrapped in a tortilla with a generous spoonful of Texas Caviar makes an excellent breakfast burrito. It adds freshness, texture, and just the right amount of zing to your morning meal.

FAQs

What is Texas Caviar?

Texas Caviar is a recipe originally created and served by Helen Corbitt, the culinary director of Neiman Marcus, in 1940s Dallas.

Made with a combination of canned or cooked beans (i.e. red, black, or pinto), black-eyed peas, peppers, tomatoes, garlic, and other extras like corn, avocado, mango, and various herbs and spices, since then it has stood the test of time and become a Southern classic.

Texas Caviar vs. Cowboy Caviar: Is There a Difference?

The dish was originally created in Texas, which is how it got the name “Texas Caviar.” Over time, people started calling it “Cowboy Caviar” as a fun, casual nickname.

How far in advance can you make cowboy caviar?

You can make Cowboy Caviar up to 2 days in advance. Just store it in an airtight container in the fridge, and it should still taste fresh and delicious. If you’re planning to include avocado, wait to add it until right before serving to keep it from browning.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Delicious Bean Salads You’ll Love

Fan of bean salads? Me too! Here are a few more that you might like:

  • My Corn and Black Bean Salad is yet another great alternative to a bean salad that you can serve with chips on the side.
  • What makes my Five Bean Salad recipe the best bean salad is the garlicky mustard dressing. Just like this cowboy caviar recipe, it uses a combination of canned beans and some lightly boiled fresh green beans.
  • If you have extra black eyed peas, then my Black Eyed Peas Salad is just as fresh and satisfying. Not to mention, it takes 15 minutes to make.
Texas caviar in a bowl with two spoons on the side.
Print

Texas Caviar Recipe

This Texas Caviar (aka Cowboy Caviar)loaded with black-eyed peas, corn, tomatoes, peppers, and tangy lime dressing makes the best salad, dip, or side dish. Ready in 30 minutes and can be made ahead.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 192kcal

Ingredients

For The Dressing:

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon lime zest
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon paprika sweet or smoked
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon honey
  • 2 cloves garlic minced

For The Caviar Dip:

  • 1 can black beans 15-oz can, drained and rinsed
  • 1 can black eyed peas 15-oz can, drained and rinsed
  • ½ cup corn kernels frozen (and thawed), canned (and drained) or fresh corn would all work
  • 3 scallions both white and green parts are chopped
  • cup red onion chopped finely or diced
  • 1 red bell peppers chopped (approx. 1/2 cup)
  • 1 jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped
  • ½ cup cherry tomatoes sliced thinly
  • ½ avocado ripe – cut into small cubes
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro rinsed and chopped

To Serve With (Optional)

  • Your favorite hot Sauce
  • Tortilla Chips

Instructions

  • To make the dressing: Whisk together the olive oil, lime zest, lime juice, ground cumin, smoked paprika, salt, honey and garlic. Set it aside.
    Person making Texas caviar dressing with lime juice.
  • For the Texas Caviar dip (or salad): Place, black beans, black eyed peas, corn kernels, scallions, red onion, bell peppers, jalapeno pepper, cherry tomatoes, avocado, and fresh cilantro in a bowl.
    The ingredients for Cowboy caviar in a bowl from the top view.
  • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a gentle toss. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
    Person drizzling the salad with dressing and mixing it.
  • If preferred, add in a few dashes of your favorite hot sauce and serve with tortilla chips.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 5-6 cups of Cowboy caviar ideal for serving 6 adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving and does not include the calories coming from (optional) tortilla chips.
  • Make ahead: You can make this recipe up to 2 days in advance. If you go in that direction, add the avocado right before serving to avoid browning.
  • Storage: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • If you want to go with more of the traditional Italian salad dressing route instead of the lime dressing I used, feel free to use my Italian salad dressing below: ¼ cups extra virgin olive oil
    2 tablespoons white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
    1 tablespoon freshly squeezed lemon juice
    1 clove of garlic, minced
    1 teaspoon dried basil
    1/4 teaspoon dried oregano
    ¼ teaspoon crushed red pepper (optional)
    ½ teaspoon Kosher salt (I use Diamond kosher salt)
    ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Nutrition

Calories: 192kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 326mg | Potassium: 386mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 982IU | Vitamin C: 39mg | Calcium: 31mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was originally published in March 2019. It has been updated with some additional information with no changes to the original recipe in July 2025.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/feed/ 44
Balsamic Chicken Marinade https://foolproofliving.com/balsamic-chicken-marinade/ https://foolproofliving.com/balsamic-chicken-marinade/#comments Wed, 04 Jun 2025 21:44:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81713 Whether you’re cooking on the grill, in the oven, or on the stovetop, this versatile marinade transforms everyday chicken breasts…]]>

Whether you’re cooking on the grill, in the oven, or on the stovetop, this versatile marinade transforms everyday chicken breasts (or thighs) into a flavorful, crowd-pleasing meal. Plus, it’s easy to make ahead, perfect for meal prep, and freezer-friendly, making it ideal for busy weeknights or laid-back weekend BBQs.

Key Ingredients for Balsamic Marinade for Chicken

You can find the full list of ingredients for this balsamic vinegar chicken marinade in the recipe card. Below are a few helpful notes to help you make it your own.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Balsamic vinegar: When choosing a balsamic vinegar, follow your taste buds and your budget. 

You can use a traditional, aged balsamic from Modena for deeper sweetness and complexity, or a more affordable condiment-grade balsamic vinegar. Both will work beautifully to add that sweet-tangy depth to your chicken.

I would not recommend substituting store-bought balsamic glaze here, as it is already sweet and thickened. As a result, it won’t work the same way in the marinade.

Olive oil: I recommend using a high-quality extra-virgin olive oil here. Its smooth flavor perfectly balances the tangy balsamic vinegar and creamy Dijon mustard, helping the marinade coat the chicken evenly and soak up all those delicious flavors.

Sweetener: While I used honey, other liquid sweeteners such as maple syrup and agave can also be used. If you prefer to use brown sugar instead, be sure to stir it thoroughly so that no grainy sugar particles are left behind.

Garlic: I find that fresh garlic cloves make this recipe shine, but for a milder flavor, you can use ½ teaspoon garlic powder (equivalent to 2 cloves of fresh garlic).

Fresh Herbs: I think chopped fresh thyme pairs beautifully with the tangy-sweet flavors in this balsamic vinaigrette marinade, but if you don’t have fresh thyme, use half the amount of dried thyme instead. 

Alternatively, a robust Italian seasoning blend or other fresh (or dried herbs) like rosemary and oregano would also work well in this recipe.

Chicken: While I used skinless and boneless chicken breasts, you can also use skinless and boneless chicken thighs. 

How To Make Balsamic Chicken Marinade?

Making this balsamic vinegar marinade for chicken is easy and quick (in fact, the base is very similar to my versatile Lemon Balsamic Salad Dressing). Here are the steps:

A collage of images showing how to make balsamic marinade for chicken.

Step 1 – Mix the Ingredients: Use a container large enough to comfortably hold two pounds of chicken, ideally one with a tight-fitting lid. 

Place the balsamic vinegar, olive oil, honey, Dijon mustard, minced garlic, thyme, salt, and pepper in the container and whisk until thoroughly combined.

Alternatively, you can use a heavy-duty resealable bag, such as a Ziplock bag (for easy cleanup), and pour marinade over the meat. This is especially ideal if you are making it in larger quantities.

Step 2 – Add the chicken: Place the chicken in the marinade, making sure each piece is fully coated. Cover tightly with the lid and refrigerate.

Chicken marinating in balsamic marinade from the top view.

Step 3 – Let time do the rest: Marinate the chicken in the fridge for at least 30 minutes or, if you have the time, overnight for maximum flavor.

How To Cook Balsamic Marinated Chicken?

What makes this balsamic vinegar-marinated chicken so versatile is that you can cook it in any way you like. During the summer months, I love to fire up the grill, while in cooler weather, I let the oven do the heavy lifting. And when I’m short on time, cooking them quickly on the stovetop makes for an easy and delicious lunch. Here’s how you can do it:

Balsamic marinated chicken breasts on the grill.

On The Grill:

This is by far my favorite way to cook chicken marinated in balsamic vinegar—the high heat seals in the juices and creates those beautiful charred grill marks. Here’s how I do it:

Step 1 – Prepare the grill: Preheat your grill to medium-high heat (about 425–450°F). Clean the grill grates to ensure there’s no residue from previous grilling sessions. Use a pad of oiled paper towels to thoroughly oil the grates to prevent the chicken from sticking.

Step 2 – Remove the chicken: Take the chicken out of the marinade, letting any excess drip off. This is an important step, as too much marinade can cause flare-ups on the grill.

Step 3 – Grill: Place the chicken breasts on the hot grill and close the lid. Grill for about 6 to 8 minutes per side. A good way to tell when it is time to flip is to gently lift the chicken. If it releases easily from the grill, it is ready to flip. If it is sticking, give it another minute or two. It will release naturally once it is properly seared. 

Please note that the timing may vary depending on the thickness of your chicken. Check for doneness by inserting a digital thermometer in the thickest part of the chicken—it should read 165°F.

Step 4 – Rest & Serve: Loosely tent the grilled balsamic-marinated chicken with foil and let it rest for 5–7 minutes, allowing the juices to redistribute before serving.

Balsamic marinated grilled chicken on a plate from the top view.

In The Oven:

When I’m after a more hands-off approach, I let the oven do most of the work for me. Below are the steps:

Step 1 – Preheat the oven: My go-to oven temperature for baking chicken is 425°F (218 °C). I find that any lower, and it takes longer; plus, caramelization happens better at this hotter temperature.

Grab a baking sheet and line it with parchment paper. This helps with cleanup later, but if you prefer a more caramelized, slightly sticky exterior, you can skip using it.

Step 2 – Arrange: Place the chicken breasts on the sheet pan. Just like with the grilling method, it is important to let any excess marinade drip off first. Otherwise, it will steam instead of roast, and you will miss out on that beautiful caramelized crust.

Step 3 – Roast: Let the oven do its magic for 20 to 22 minutes, keeping in mind that the exact timing will depend on the thickness of your chicken pieces. Rotate the pan halfway through for even roasting.

Again, the best way to check for doneness is by inserting a digital thermometer into the thickest part of the chicken and ensuring that it registers 165°F (74°C).

Step 4 – Rest & Serve: Remove from the oven, cover loosely with foil (or parchment paper) and let it rest 5-10 minutes before serving.

On The Stove Top:

I usually cook it on the stove when I am preparing my balsamic marinated chicken for lunch, to serve with a quick salad or rice on the side. Here’s how:

Step 1 – Heat your skillet: Heat 1 tablespoon of oil in a large (10–12 inch) skillet over medium-high heat. 

Pro Tip: It is essential that the skillet is shimmering hot before adding the chicken. A properly heated skillet ensures the chicken sears immediately, creating a flavorful crust and preventing it from sticking to the pan.

Step 2 – Add the chicken: Place the chicken breasts in the pan, making sure to (1) let the excess marinade drip off first and (2) avoid overcrowding the skillet. Giving the chicken enough space helps it sear and brown properly rather than steaming.

Step 3 – Cook: Let the chicken cook for 5 to 7 minutes on each side. Similar to the grilling method, if the chicken releases easily when you try to flip it, it is ready to be turned. If not, give it a few more minutes to develop a nice sear.

Use a digital thermometer to check doneness.

Step 4 – Rest and serve: Transfer the now-cooked chicken to a plate, cover with foil and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before serving.

How To Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

My favorite thing about this balsamic marinade recipe is that you can make a batch in minutes and have it ready to cook at a moment’s notice. 

It also freezes beautifully, making it perfect for those busy days when you need a quick and flavorful meal.

Storage and reheating: The leftover cooked or grilled balsamic-marinated chicken can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. You can reheat it in a low-temp oven (300 degrees F) for 10 minutes or until it is heated through, being careful not to overcook and dry it out.

Freezing: If you prefer to freeze, I recommend freezing the raw chicken in the marinade instead of cooking it first. Simply place the chicken and marinade in a freezer-safe bag or container, removing as much air as possible to help prevent any ice crystals from forming. It will keep well in the freezer for up to 3 months.

Thawing: Remove the frozen chicken and marinade from the freezer and let them thaw in the fridge overnight.

Balsamic marinated chicken served with a salad on the side.

Expert Tips:

While marinating chicken in this balsamic vinegar marinade is a straightforward process, there are a few key points to consider for optimal results.

  • Marinating time: I find that the ideal marinating time is between 30 minutes and 12 hours, maximum. Balsamic vinegar, as an acidic ingredient, helps break down the muscle fibers in the chicken, making it more tender and juicy.
    However, any longer than that and the acidity can start to break down the chicken too much, especially with lean cuts like chicken breasts, leading to a mushy texture.
  • Take the chicken out of the fridge 15-30 minutes before cooking: While it may sound like an extra step, letting the chicken come close to room temperature helps it cook evenly. If you put cold chicken directly into a hot pan, grill, or oven, the outside will start cooking quickly while the inside remains cold.
  • Save some of the marinade: Before adding the chicken, save a few tablespoons of the marinade to use for a light brushing at the end. I especially recommend this when you’re grilling. It adds a beautiful finishing touch, keeping the chicken juicy and glossy all at the same time.
  • Safety First: Discard any marinade that came in contact with raw chicken once you’re done with it. This helps prevent any foodborne illnesses or salmonella contamination.
  • Large Chicken Breasts: If you’re using very large chicken breasts, I recommend cutting them in half lengthwise or pounding them with a meat mallet to an even thickness. This not only shortens the cooking time but also helps them cook more evenly.

FAQs

How long can you marinate chicken in balsamic vinegar?

I recommend marinating the chicken for at least 30 minutes or up to 12 hours in the refrigerator.

Why did my balsamic chicken burn on the grill?

Balsamic marinated chicken can potentially burn if the grill is too hot or if you use too much sugar in the marinade.

Do I need to rinse the marinade off the chicken before grilling?

No, you do not. Just let the excess marinade drip off before cooking.

Pairing Suggestions with Balsamic Chicken

Starches: Pair it with my Seasoned Quinoa for a light meal, or turn it into a feast with Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes.

Salads: During the summer months, when I need something quick and easy to serve with grilled balsamic chicken, I usually go for my 5 Bean Salad or Greek Cucumber Salad.

Vegetables: If you’re after a low-carb dinner, serve your balsamic marinated chicken with a side of my Garlic and Butter Green Beans or Sauteed Asparagus.

Make it a dinner: Try my Grilled Caprese Chicken, where I use this marinade and then grill the chicken with sliced fresh mozzarella for an easy summer dinner.

Other Chicken Marinade Recipes You Might Like:

If you enjoyed this recipe, I think you might also:

  • Enjoy my Yogurt Chicken Marinade. Similar to vinegar-based marinades, the lactic acid in yogurt gently tenderizes the meat, keeping it just as juicy and flavorful.
  • Like my Mediterranean Chicken Marinade recipe, it embodies the characteristics of the Mediterranean diet with fresh lemon juice, olive oil, and fresh herbs. And you only need 15 minutes of marinating time for the most succulent chicken recipe.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Balsamic chicken breasts sliced on a plate.
Print

Balsamic Chicken Marinade Recipe

This easy balsamic chicken marinade comes together in minutes using simple pantry staples. It’s perfect for grilling, baking, or pan-searing, and it leaves your chicken tender, juicy, and full of rich, tangy-sweet flavor.
Course Chicken
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Resting time 30 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 426kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ cup balsamic vinegar
  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more for cooking and for grill grates
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 2 cloves minced garlic
  • 1 teaspoon chopped fresh thyme or ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 lbs boneless skinless chicken breasts 6-8 oz each / or thighs

Instructions

To Make The Marinade:

  • In a large container with a lid, whisk together ½ cup balsamic vinegar, ¼ cup olive oil, 1 tablespoon honey, 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon chopped thyme, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon black pepper until combined.
    A collage of images showing how to make balsamic chicken marinade.
  • Place the chicken in the container and ensure it is thoroughly coated with the marinade.
  • Cover it with the lid and refrigerate for 30 minutes or overnight.
    Chicken marinating in balsamic marinade.
  • When ready to cook, remove it from the fridge 10-15 minutes before you are prepared to cook.

To Cook on the Grill:

  • Preheat a gas grill to medium-high heat (450°F/232°C). Clean grill grates and brush them with vegetable oil.
  • Remove the chicken from the marinade, letting excess liquid drip off as much as possible, and place on the grill.
  • Grill for 6-8 minutes per side (the timing would change depending on the thickness of your chicken breasts) or until the thickest part of a chicken breast registers 165°F (74°C) when inserted with a meat thermometer.
    Balsamic grilled chicken on the grill from the top view.
  • Transfer the now cooked chicken onto a plate, cover with aluminum foil and let it rest for 5-7 minutes before serving.

To Cook in the Oven:

  • Preheat the oven to 425°F/218°C. Line a sheet pan with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Place the chicken breasts on the sheet pan and bake for 20-22 minutes, or until the internal temperature reaches 165°F / 74°C.
  • Remove from the oven and onto a plate. Cover with aluminum foil and let them rest for 5 minutes before slicing and/or serving.

To Cook on the Stove:

  • Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large skillet (10 or 12-inch cast iron skillet or a skillet grill is ideal) over medium-high heat.
  • When it is simmering hot, place the chicken breasts in the skillet, making sure not to overcrowd the pan.
  • Cook, turning once until they are fully cooked, 12-15 minutes, or until a digital thermometer inserted in the center of a breast registers 165°F /74°C.
  • Remove the chicken breasts from the skillet and onto a plate; cover with aluminum foil and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about ¾ cups of balsamic vinegar chicken marinade, enough for marinating 2 pounds of chicken which is good for 4 servings. The nutritional values listed below are per serving.
  • Let the excess marinade drip off: Regardless of the cooking method you are using, take the time to let the excess marinade drip off before cooking. This is an essential step for achieving perfectly cooked and lightly caramelized balsamic chicken, rather than burned or steamed chicken.
  • Storage and Reheating: Leftover cooked or grilled chicken can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low-heat oven (300°F / 149°C) for 10 minutes or so until it is warmed to your liking.
  • Freezing & Thawing: You can freeze raw chicken in marinade in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight before cooking.

Nutrition

Calories: 426kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 48g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 145mg | Sodium: 866mg | Potassium: 889mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 70IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/balsamic-chicken-marinade/feed/ 2
Mediterranean Chicken Marinade https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-chicken-marinade/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-chicken-marinade/#comments Wed, 04 Jun 2025 21:37:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81740 Inspired by my Turkish roots and my mom’s love for bold, homemade flavors, this marinade is truly foolproof. No more…]]>

Inspired by my Turkish roots and my mom’s love for bold, homemade flavors, this marinade is truly foolproof. No more bottled dressings or long waits needed. Just real, simple ingredients that deliver mouthwatering results with minimal effort. 

Whether you’re firing up the grill, roasting in the oven, or searing on the stovetop, my marinade for Mediterranean chicken guarantees tender, delicious chicken that’s perfect for meal prep or a fast, flavorful dinner.

Key Ingredients – Building Blocks of Flavor

The beauty of this chicken marinade is that it is made with everyday ingredients you likely already have in your pantry. You can find the complete list of ingredients in the recipe card below. Below are some helpful ingredient notes.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Olive Oil: I recommend using extra-virgin olive oil, which is the purest and least processed type of olive oil. Look for a brand that offers fruity flavors with balanced bitterness and a slight peppery finish.

Lemon zest: The zest of a lemon is essential for delivering the distinctive lemony flavors that Mediterranean chicken marinade recipes are known for. Keep in mind that zesting the lemon is much easier before juicing it, so zest first, then juice.

Fresh lemon juice: No bottled supermarket juice here. Take the time to juice fresh lemons as freshness is key to a bright, zesty flavor.

Garlic: For the most potent flavor, I recommend using 3 minced fresh garlic cloves. For a milder garlic flavor, feel free to use garlic powder.

Mustard: I prefer Dijon mustard for its smooth tanginess, which brings the marinade together beautifully. However, grainy mustard can also be a great choice, adding a bit of texture and richness.

Fresh herbs: For the most authentic Mediterranean chicken marinade, I used fresh oregano, chopped just before adding it to the mix. Fresh rosemary, thyme, or even parsley (for a milder flavor) also work well in this recipe. If you’re using dried herbs instead, they’re more concentrated, so use about half the amount of fresh to avoid overpowering the marinade.

Seasoning: While I used basic salt and pepper for seasoning my marinade, you can use your favorite seasoning blends or spices from your cabinet. I particularly like my Mediterranean spice blend, also known as Baharat Spice Mix, for its continuation of Mediterranean flavors.

Chicken: I tested this recipe both with skinless and boneless chicken breasts and thighs, and they both worked beautifully. However, I think this is an all-purpose chicken marinade that would work with any cut of chicken.

How to Make Mediterranean Chicken Marinade?

Making this chicken marinade is quick and easy (in fact, the base is very similar to my versatile Mediterranean Salad Dressing). While the steps are pretty straightforward, there are a few things to keep in mind. Below are the steps to follow:

Steps showing how to make the marinade.

Step 1 – Mix the Ingredients: Grab a large container with a tight-fitting lid (big enough to hold 2 pounds of chicken). 

Combine the olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, minced garlic, Dijon mustard, oregano, and a good pinch of salt and pepper. Whisk until everything is combined.

Alternatively, you can use a heavy-duty resealable ziplock bag, which makes cleanup easy and is especially handy if you’re doubling or tripling the marinade.

Step 2 – Add the chicken: Place the chicken breasts in the marinade, making sure each piece is fully coated. Cover tightly with the lid.

Chicken breasts submerged in the marinade.

Step 3 – Let it rest: Let the chicken marinate on the kitchen counter for 15 to 30 minutes.

Pro Tip: Due to the amount of lemon juice we’re using, marinating for longer can cause the chicken to start “cooking” in the acid, which can result in a slightly rubbery texture and an overpowering lemony flavor once cooked.

How to Cook Mediterranean Marinated Chicken?

In addition to being a quick marinade that only needs 15 minutes, you can cook your Mediterranean marinated chicken any way you like. While grilling is my favorite method for this chicken recipe, I also love roasting it in the oven for a hands-off approach. And when I need a quick sear, I turn to the stovetop. 

Below, you’ll find my tips and how I use each cooking method.

Marinated Mediterranean chicken on the grill.

On The Grill:

This is one of my favorite grilled chicken marinade recipes because as soon as the chicken hits the hot grill, the tangy juices lock in the flavors, and you get those beautiful grill marks. Here’s how I do it:

Step 1 – Heat Up the Grill: Start by preheating your grill to a medium-high heat about 425–450°F (218-232 °C). Give the grates a good scrub to remove any lingering bits from past cooks, then lightly oil them with a paper towel pad dipped in oil. This keeps the chicken from sticking and makes for easy flipping.

Step 2 – Prep the Chicken: Take the marinated Mediterranean chicken out of the marinade, letting any extra drip off. Too much marinade can cause flare-ups or uneven cooking, so this step is worth taking the extra time to do it right.

Step 3 – Grill Away: Place the chicken on the hot grill and close the lid. Grill for 6 to 8 minutes per side. You’ll know it’s ready to flip when it naturally releases from the grill. If it sticks, give it another minute. Patience here pays off! 

Use a digital thermometer to check for doneness; you’re aiming for 165°F (74°C) in the thickest part.

Step 4 – Rest and Enjoy: Once the chicken is grilled, transfer it to a platter, cover it loosely with foil, and let it rest for 5–7 minutes. This brief pause allows the juices to settle back into the meat, ensuring every bite is juicy and full of Mediterranean flavor.

In the Oven:

When I’m in the mood for a more hands-off approach, I let the oven do all the work.

Oven-roasting helps lock in moisture and ensures the meat cooks through gently and evenly, which is something you don’t always get with quicker, high-heat methods.

Step 1 – Preheat the Oven: Heat your oven to 425°F (218°C). This temperature is ideal for roasting chicken because it cooks quickly, helping the chicken stay juicy and flavorful. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper for easy cleanup, or skip the parchment if you prefer a slightly crispier exterior.

Step 2 – Arrange the Chicken: Place the chicken breasts on the sheet pan, making sure to let any excess marinade drip off first. This prevents the chicken from steaming and helps it roast to a golden perfection.

Step 3 – Roast: Bake the chicken for 20 to 22 minutes, rotating the pan halfway through for even cooking. Keep in mind that the exact timing will depend on the thickness of your chicken. Check for doneness with a meat thermometer. It should register 165°F (74°C) when inserted in the thickest part of a chicken breast.

Step 4 – Rest and Serve: Remove the chicken from the oven, cover loosely with foil (or parchment paper), and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before slicing and serving.

Grilled chicken from the top view.

On the Stovetop:

I often turn to the stovetop when I want to get a quick sear for lunch or an easy dinner. 

Step 1 – Heat Your Skillet: In a large skillet (10–12 inch), heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil over medium-high heat. You can also use a cast iron skillet if you prefer.
Pro Tip: Wait until the oil is shimmering hot before adding the chicken—this ensures a flavorful sear and prevents the chicken from sticking.

Step 2 – Add the Chicken: Place the marinated chicken breasts into the pan, shaking off any excess marinade first. Avoid overcrowding the pan to give the chicken space to sear properly.

Step 3 – Cook: Let the chicken cook for about 5 to 7 minutes on each side. If the chicken releases easily when you try to flip it, it’s ready; otherwise, let it cook a bit longer to develop that beautiful crust. Use a digital thermometer to check that the thickest part of the chicken reaches 165°F (74°C).

Step 4 – Rest and Serve: Transfer the cooked chicken to a plate, cover it with foil, and let it rest for 5-10 minutes to allow the juices to redistribute.

Expert Tips for the Best Mediterranean Chicken

While this recipe is straightforward and doesn’t involve any fancy steps, there are a few key points to keep in mind for optimal results. Here are some of the helpful insights I picked up while testing this recipe:

  • Reserve Some Marinade: It’s a good idea to set aside a few tablespoons of the marinade before adding the chicken. I love to use this reserved portion to brush over the grilled or cooked chicken at the end for a glossy finish.
  • Toss the Marinade: After marinating the chicken, discard any leftover marinade. This helps prevent the risk of spreading harmful bacteria, such as Salmonella.
  • Don’t Marinate for Too Long: Through testing, I found that the sweet spot for this lemon and olive oil chicken marinade is 15 to 30 minutes. Marinating longer can cause the chicken to become rubbery, so stick to the recommended time.
  • Cooking Times Vary: The cooking times in the recipe card are based on chicken breasts. If you’re using other cuts, such as chicken thighs, keep in mind that they may take a bit longer to cook. The foolproof way to check doneness is with a digital meat thermometer.
  • Pound the Chicken Breasts: I used chicken breasts that were around 6–8 ounces, which is considered a normal size. If yours are larger or thicker, use a meat mallet to pound them to an even thickness, which ensures even cooking and juicy results.
  • Garnish for Presentation: For an extra-special presentation, serve your Mediterranean chicken with slices of fresh lemon and a sprinkle of fresh herbs.

Storage and Freezing Tips

Storage and reheating: You can store leftover cooked chicken in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low-heat oven (300°F/149 °C) for 5-10 minutes, or until warmed to your liking.

Freezing: While freezing does slow down the effects of the acidic lemon in the marinade, it doesn’t completely stop it. As a result, when the chicken is thawed and cooked, it can end up rubbery and mushy. For that reason, I don’t recommend freezing the raw chicken in the marinade.

What to Serve with Mediterranean Chicken?

What I love most about this recipe is its versatility, transforming your marinated Mediterranean chicken into an impressive feast with endless pairing options to suit any crowd. Here are a few of my favorite ways to round out the meal:

  • Salads: Keep things fresh and light with salads that highlight Mediterranean flavors. My creamy yogurt cucumber salad or Greek salad are both low-carb, crisp, and refreshing recipes that pair perfectly with this chicken. If you’re after a vibrant splash of color, my Red Cabbage and Carrot Slaw adds a satisfying crunch and a pop of color.
  • Pilafs: For a more substantial meal or to incorporate into your weekly meal prep, pair your chicken with Mediterranean classics like my Bulgur Wheat Pilaf or Mediterranean Rice with Vermicelli. These cozy sides bring a warm, hearty balance to the lemony chicken.
  • Pasta: Looking for a comforting plate? Slice your chicken and serve it over or alongside my Garlic Butter Spaghetti or Lemon Ricotta Spinach Pasta for a delicious, easy-to-make dinner.
  • Sauce: Add an extra layer of Mediterranean flavor with classic sauces like my Tzatziki sauce or yoghurt tahini sauce. They’re creamy, cooling, and the perfect finish for this juicy chicken.

FAQs

Can I use this marinade for other proteins?

Yes! This Mediterranean marinade recipe is a great all-purpose option that works beautifully with seafood (like shrimp or salmon) and lamb.

Do I need to pat the chicken dry before marinating?

Patting the chicken dry does help the marinade stick better and more evenly coat the meat, but it will still work well if you skip this step.

Can I use the leftover marinade as a sauce?

No. Since the marinade has come into contact with raw chicken, it’s not safe to use as a sauce. Instead, if you’d like to brush it on the cooked chicken for extra flavor, set aside some marinade before adding the raw chicken.

How can I prevent my chicken from drying out?

Use a digital meat thermometer to make sure you don’t overcook the chicken. Once it reaches an internal temperature of 165°F (74°C), take it off the heat. Also, don’t skip the resting step because letting the chicken rest before slicing helps the juices settle back in, keeping every bite tender and juicy.

Other Chicken Marinade Recipes You Might Also Like

  • If you prefer a yogurt-based marinade that still captures those Mediterranean flavors, try my Yogurt Chicken Marinade. It’s creamy and packed with herbs.
  • For a more robust, vinegar-forward flavor, my Balsamic Vinegar Chicken Marinade is a fantastic option with its sweet and tangy notes.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim

Mediterranean marinated chicken on a plate.
Print

Mediterranean Chicken Marinade Recipe

This Mediterranean Chicken Marinade is a quick 15-minute marinade that infuses chicken with fresh, vibrant flavors. Made with basic ingredients, this foolproof recipe guarantees juicy, flavorful chicken that can be cooked on the grill, in the oven, or on the stovetop.
Course Chicken Recipes
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Marinading Time 15 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 430kcal

Ingredients

  • cup olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • cup lemon juice
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon fresh oregano chopped or 2 tsp dried plus more as garnish
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 lbs chicken breasts boneless & skinless (6-8 oz each) or chicken thighs

Instructions

To make the marinade:

  • In a large bowl, whisk together ⅓ cup olive oil, 1 teaspoon lemon zest, ⅓ cup lemon juice, 3 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard, 1 tablespoon chopped fresh oregano (or 2 teaspoons dried), 1 teaspoon kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon black pepper until fully combined.
    A collage of images showing how to make the marinade.
  • Add the chicken into the bowl, making sure it’s fully coated with the marinade.
    Chicken breasts in the marinade.
  • Cover with the lid and refrigerate for 15 minutes or up to 30 minutes.

To Cook on the Grill:

  • Preheat a gas grill to medium-high heat (about 450°F/232 °C). Clean grill grates and brush lightly with oil.
  • Remove chicken from the marinade, letting excess drip off, and place on the grill.
  • Grill for 6-8 minutes per side, or until a digital thermometer inserted into the thickest part registers 165°F (74°C)
  • Transfer the now-cooked chicken to a plate, cover with aluminum foil, and let rest for 5-7 minutes before serving.
    Grilled Mediterranean chicken from the top view.

To Cook in the Oven:

  • Preheat oven to 425°F/218°C. Line a sheet pan with parchment paper.
  • Place chicken breasts on the prepared sheet pan. Bake for 20-22 minutes, or until a digital thermometer registers 165°F (74°C)
  • Transfer the cooked chicken to a plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and let it rest for 5 minutes before slicing and serving.

To Cook on the Stove:

  • Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large skillet (10- or 12-inch cast-iron skillet or grill pan) over medium-high heat.
  • Once the oil is hot and shimmering, place chicken breasts in the skillet, making sure not to overcrowd the pan. You may have to cook them in batches.
  • Cook, turning once, for 12-15 minutes, or until a digital thermometer inserted into the thickest part of the breast registers 165°F (74°C)
  • Transfer the cooked chicken to a plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about ⅔ cup of marinade, enough for 2 pounds of chicken breasts, which is ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional information below is calculated per serving.
  • Drip off the excess marinade: Take a moment to let any extra marinade drip off before cooking. This is especially important if you’re grilling to prevent flare-ups.
  • Storage: Cooked marinated chicken can be stored in the fridge for up to 3 days. You can reheat it in a low-heat oven (300°F/ 149 °C) for 5-10 minutes or until it is warmed through.
  • Freezing: I do not recommend freezing raw chicken in this marinade. The acid in the lemon juice will continue to break down the chicken (similar to ceviche), leading to a rubbery texture when cooked.

Nutrition

Calories: 430kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 49g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 145mg | Sodium: 860mg | Potassium: 891mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 93IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-chicken-marinade/feed/ 2
Bulgur Pilaf https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/ https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/#comments Wed, 14 May 2025 11:56:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7708 If you are unsure about what to do with that bag of bulgur in your pantry, you’re not alone. It’s…]]>

If you are unsure about what to do with that bag of bulgur in your pantry, you’re not alone. It’s just not as popular as grains like brown rice or quinoa here in the U.S. But you’re in the right place. 

I grew up eating (and cooking) this ancient grain on the regular, and on this site, you’ll find plenty of approachable and flavorful recipes using bulgur wheat. Start with this Turkish bulgur pilaf recipe, and when you are ready for more, learn How To Prepare and Cook Bulgur like rice or try my Chicken with Bulgur and Tabbouleh Salad recipes.

Turkish bulgur pilaf in a pot with a wooden spoon on the side.

What You Need To Know in a Nutshell

  • What is Bulgur Pilaf? Also referred to as bulgar pilaf, bulgur pilavi, or bulghur pilaf, this traditional dish is made by cooking bulgur with aromatic vegetables and spices. It’s a beloved staple across Mediterranean and Middle Eastern countries, especially in Turkish, Lebanese, and Armenian cuisines. Made with coarse bulgur, it has a chewy texture and a naturally nutty flavor that makes it both hearty and satisfying.
  • Two versions to choose from: Depending on the region (or your own preference), bulgur wheat pilaf can be made with vegetables like onions, tomatoes, and peppers, or kept more basic with toasted vermicelli. Both are equally simple to prepare and delicious in their own way.

How To Make Bulgur Pilaf?

This Mediterranean Bulgur Wheat Pilaf recipe comes together in just a few steps with pantry staples. Here is how you cook it:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.
  1. Gather your ingredients:  For the full list of ingredients, check out the recipe card below. Here are a few helpful notes and substitution ideas:
    • Bulgur: You’ll find several types of bulgur at the store, but for this recipe, coarse or extra coarse bulgur works best. I usually order mine online (affiliate link), but Bob’s Red Mill red bulgur is a good alternative and easy to find in most grocery stores.
    • Tomato: One large fresh tomato is all you need. If you do not have fresh tomatoes on hand, you can either omit it or add one more tablespoon of tomato paste.
    • Pepper: A small green bell pepper can be used instead of jalapenos.
    • Cooking liquid: For extra flavor, use vegetable stock or chicken stock instead of water.
    • Spices and herbs: Ground cumin and fresh parsley are classic choices, but feel free to experiment with other spices such as ground coriander and paprika. The same applies to fresh herbs.  If you have it on hand, a combination of fresh mint, dill, and parsley would be fantastic in this Mediterranean bulgur recipe.
A collage of images showing how to make bulgur pilaf with tomatoes and chickpeas.
  1. Saute aromatics: Heat olive oil in a medium saucepan over medium heat. Add onion, ground cumin, green pepper, and saute until translucent, 4-5 minutes. Stir in the minced garlic and tomato paste and cook, stirring constantly, for a minute or so.
  2. Add in the rest of the ingredients: Add in bulgur, chopped tomatoes, chickpeas, and your cooking liquid of choice. Season with salt and pepper, and stir to combine everything evenly.
A collage of images showing bulgur wheat pilaf before and after it is cooked.
  1. Let it cook: Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, and lower the heat. Let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until most of the liquid is absorbed.
  2. Let it rest & serve: Off the heat, rest for 10 minutes (with the lid on), fluff it with a fork. Garnish with fresh chopped parsley and serve.

Bulgur With Vermicelli – Mom’s Version

A lot of Turkish rice dishes include vermicelli, like the classic Vermicelli Rice Pilaf. So it’s no surprise that bulgur pilaf with vermicelli is also a popular variation. As a matter of fact, it was one of my mom’s signature recipes. 

Bulgur wheat pilaf with vermicelli from the top view.

To cook Bulgur Pilaf with Vermicelli:

  1. Heat oil (or butter): You can use any oil, but as is usually the case, butter makes this pilaf taste better. Heat it on medium heat.
  2. Saute vermicelli: Add in ¼ cup of the vermicelli (or orzo) and saute until it is golden brown. It should feel like it is almost burning. 
  3. Add in the coarse bulgur wheat: Add in bulgur wheat and saute for 4-5 minutes while constantly stirring.
  4. Add in the liquid & bring it to a boil: Add in your cooking liquid (water, stock, or a combination), salt, and pepper. Stir to combine.
  5. Cook: Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat, and let it simmer for 12-15 minutes.

Expert Tips

  • Use the right bulgur grind: For the best texture, stick with coarse or extra coarse bulgur (sometimes sold as “pilavlik bulgur”). Finer (sold as fine bulgur) varieties tend to become mushy and won’t give you the signature chewy bite that it is known for. If you are new to cooking bulgur and adding it in your recipes, feel free to check out my post I wrote on Types of Bulgur Wheat.
  • Should you rinse bulgur before cooking? It’s totally up to you. Rinsing isn’t required, especially if your bulgur is pre-packaged and clean. But if you’re buying from bulk bins, a quick rinse under cold water is a good idea.
  • Toast for extra flavor: If you have a few extra minutes, toast the bulgur briefly before adding the liquid. It might come as an extra step, but doing so deepens the nutty flavor and adds a subtle complexity to the overall dish.
  • Liquid-to-bulgur ratio: My go-to ratio for 1:2, meaning for every 1 cup of coarse bulgur, you will need 2 cups of liquid. That said, depending on the brand and grind of bulgur, you might need slightly more or less liquid. If the grains still feel firm after the liquid is absorbed, add a splash of hot water, cover, and let it sit a bit longer.
  • Do not skip the resting: Letting the pilaf rest covered after cooking helps the grains fully absorb any remaining moisture and gives you a fluffier final dish.
  • Adjust the seasoning after cooking: Taste your bulgur pilaf before serving and adjust the salt, pepper, or herbs to your liking. While it is optional, a squeeze of lemon juice just before serving can brighten the flavors beautifully.

Serving Suggestions

Traditionally, bulgur pilaf is served with chicken or beef recipes as a side dish. That being said, it can stand on its own as a vegetarian dish, especially if it is served with a side salad. Here are a few of my favorite pairings:

  • Red meat: Bulgur pilaf pairs beautifully with hearty meat dishes, especially the ones with rich sauces that the pilaf can soak up. Try it with my eggplant beef stew or Ina’s pot roast to add a Mediterranean twist to your meal. And if you’re in the mood for something a little lighter, it goes perfectly with lamb meatballs.
  • Chicken: This pilaf is the perfect side dish for classic Middle Eastern chicken recipes. Serve it with juicy Shawarma Chicken or Shish Taouk for a meal that feels special but is super easy to pull together. 
  • Vegetarian: For a simple vegetarian meal, serve the pilaf with creamy cucumber and yogurt sauce (aka tzatziki), yogurt dressing, or a cold glass of ayran. Or, if you’re feeling a bit fancy, use it as a filling in my Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant recipe—it’s a beautiful dish that looks impressive but is easy enough for a weeknight dinner.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This Bulgur Pilaf recipe is one of the most popular Turkish recipes on Foolproof Living, and for good reason, it is absolutely delicious. If you try it, please leave a comment and rating below to let me know how it turned out. And don’t forget to tag your photos on Instagram with #foolproofeats so I can see and share your creations!

Turkish bulgur pilaf recipe in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Turkish Bulgur Pilaf Recipe

This Bulgur Pilaf recipe is a classic Middle Eastern/Mediterranean side dish made with simple pantry ingredients. Ready in about 20 minutes, it has a satisfying chewy texture and a subtle nutty taste, making it perfect to serve with meat, chicken, or as a light vegetarian meal.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Total Time 22 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 214kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tbsp olive oil or butter
  • 1 onion chopped, medium sized (approximately 1 cup)
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 green pepper seeded jalapeno or a small bell pepper would work (approximately 1/2 cup)
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 tbsp tomato paste
  • 1 cup coarse bulgur both coarse and extra coarse bulgur would work for this recipe
  • 1 fresh tomato cut into small cubes (approximately 1 cup)
  • 1 can chickpeas 14 oz. can, drained and rinsed
  • 2 cups water or vegetable broth
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon ground black pepper

Garnishes

  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Saute onion and tomato paste: Heat olive oil in a medium saucepan over medium heat. Add in onion, cumin and green pepper and saute until translucent, 4-5 minutes.
    Person showing how to saute veggies to make bulgur wheat pilaf.
  • Stir in the minced garlic and sautee for 30 seconds. Add in tomato paste and stir constantly for a minute or so.
  • Add in bulgur wheat, tomatoes, chickpeas, and water (or stock). Season it with salt and pepper.
  • Stir to combine, bring it to a boil, put the lid on, and turn down the heat to low. Let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until most of the liquid is absorbed.
    Bulgur pilaf before and after it is cooked.
  • Off the heat, allow it to rest for 10 minutes (with the lid on), fluff it with a fork, garnish with parsley, and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 4 cups of bulgur pilaf, which serves four people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Reheat in a pot with a splash of water over medium heat until warmed to your liking.
  • Freezing: Bring leftovers to room temperature, transfer to a freezer-safe container, and freeze for up to 2 months. Thaw it a day in advance in the fridge and warm it up on the stove before you are ready to serve it.
  • Bulgur and Vermicelli Pilaf: An earlier version of this recipe included a more basic bulgur pilaf made without tomatoes, tomato paste, vegetables (onion, pepper, etc.) and chickpeas. It is how my mother made it. To cook Bulgur Pilaf with Vermicelli:
    1. Heat oil (or butter): Heat oil in medium heat.
    2. Saute vermicelli: Add in 1/4 cup vermicelli and saute until it is golden brown for 5-6 minutes while constantly stirring it with a wooden spoon. It should feel like it is almost burning. 
    3. Add in the coarse bulgur wheat: Add in bulgur and saute for 4-5 minutes while constantly stirring.
    4. Add in the liquid & bring it to a boil. Add in your cooking liquid (water, stock, or a combination), salt and pepper. Give it a stir. Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat, and let it simmer for 12-15 minutes.
    5. Rest & Serve: Let it rest (with the lid on) for 10 minutes and then fluff it with a fork before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 214kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 661mg | Potassium: 407mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 499IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/feed/ 49
Red Cabbage Slaw https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/ https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/#comments Wed, 30 Apr 2025 14:37:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81303 How to Make Red Cabbage Slaw? This recipe comes together in just a few steps with simple ingredients you probably…]]>

What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

Before you dive in, here are a few quick tips that will help you make the best red cabbage slaw every time:

Slice Thinly for Best Texture: A mandolin is great for getting ultra-thin, even slices, but a sharp knife works just as well. The key is to slice the cabbage as evenly as possible to keep the slaw light, crisp, and not bulky.

Make It Ahead: This simple slaw stores beautifully in the fridge if you prefer to make it ahead. In fact, it gets even better as it sits and the flavors meld together — ideal for meal prep!

No mayo dressing: Made with a light, tangy vinegar dressing instead of mayo, this purple cabbage slaw recipe is naturally vegan. It’s a great option if you’re looking for a coleslaw that’s a little lighter but still delivers on texture and taste.

How to Make Red Cabbage Slaw?

This recipe comes together in just a few steps with simple ingredients you probably already have on hand, and once everything’s sliced and tossed, you’re ready to go. Here’s how to make it:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Step 1 Gather Your Ingredients: For a full list and measurements, check out the recipe card below. Here’s a few ingredient substitution ideas:

  • Make It Creamy: I opted for a vinegar-based dressing to keep it light, but if you prefer your red cabbage coleslaw with mayonnaise, this classic coleslaw dressing will give you that creamy texture and flavor you’re after.
  • Onion: I like the milder bite of green onions here, but thinly sliced red onions work just as well if you want a bit more punch.
  • Fresh Herbs: A handful of parsley brightens up the slaw and adds a pop of green, but feel free to use what you have — fresh cilantro, dill, or even fresh mint would all be delicious.
  • Carrots: I add carrots for extra crunch and a pop of color, but you can definitely leave them out if you prefer a simpler slaw.
    Steps showing how to make coleslaw with red cabbage.

    Step 2 Prepare the vegetables: Using a mandolin (or a sharp chef’s knife if you prefer), shred the red cabbage into thin, even slices. Grate the carrots using the large holes of a box grater, then thinly slice the green onions and chop the parsley. Add all the ingredients to a large mixing bowl and set it aside.

    Step 3 Mix the Dressing: In a small bowl or mason jar, whisk together the extra virgin olive oil, minced garlic, lemon juice, apple cider vinegar (or red wine vinegar or rice vinegar), honey (or maple syrup or sugar), Dijon mustard, kosher salt, and black pepper until smooth.

      Red cabbage slaw being drizzled with dressing.

      Step 4 Toss It All Together: Drizzle the dressing over the cabbage mixture. Use clean hands (or tongs) to toss everything together, making sure the vegetables are evenly coated.

      Step 5 Chill and Serve: If you have the time, cover the bowl and refrigerate for at least 30 minutes to let the flavors come together. Serve your red cabbage carrot slaw chilled and enjoy.

        Coleslaw with red cabbage and carrots in a bowl.

        What to Serve It With?

        This simple red cabbage slaw is one of those side dishes that pairs well with many meals. Whether you’re making tacos, grilling, or just pulling together a quick weeknight dinner, it brings the perfect pop of color and crunch. Here are some of my favorite ways to serve it:

        • Tacos: I love using this red cabbage slaw for tacos! It’s especially good piled onto brisket tacos for a smoky, hearty bite. It’s also fantastic with flank steak tacos, adding just the right amount of freshness, and honestly, it’s a must with fish tacos. The crunch balances out the tender, flaky fish so well.
        • Grilled Meats: This slaw is a total no-brainer for BBQ season. Serve it alongside grilled harissa chicken for a spicy kick or with grilled turkey tenderloin for a light but satisfying meal. And I am pretty sure no one would complain if you served it with grilled lamb burgers either.
        • Grilled Seafood: For seafood nights, I love pairing it with grilled shrimp, grilled salmon, or grilled mahi mahi. It’s the kind of side that keeps everything feeling light, bright, and colorful. Perfect for summer dinners!
        • Pulled Pork: Try tossing this purple cabbage slaw onto your pulled pork sandwiches for a crunchy twist, or serve it next to a big plate of roasted veggies and grains for a fresh meal.

        Similar Salad Recipes You Might Like:

        It is no secret that coleslaw recipes are some of the most popular summer salads. Here are a few other reader favorites in case you need more inspiration:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Red cabbage and carrot slow in a bowl.
        Print

        Red Cabbage Slaw Recipe

        A vibrant and easy Red Cabbage Slaw made with a light, zesty dressing — no mayo needed! Great for tacos, pulled pork, grilled meats, and fresh summer meals. Vegan and gluten-free.
        Course Vegan side dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Resting time (otpional) 30 minutes
        Total Time 45 minutes
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 98kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Coleslaw

        • 1 head of red cabbage about 1 ½ lbs shredded (~7-8 loosely packed cups)
        • 2 medium carrots peeled and shredded, about ½ lbs (~2 cups)
        • 3 green onions chopped thinly (or 1/2 cup sliced red onion)
        • 3 tablespoons fresh parsley roughly chopped

        For The Dressing

        • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
        • 2 cloves fresh garlic finely minced
        • 1 tablespoon lemon juice or lime juice
        • 3 tablespoons apple cider vinegar or red wine or rice vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon honey or maple syrup, or sugar
        • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        Instructions

        • Place shredded red cabbage (about 7-8 cups), 2 shredded carrots, 3 thinly sliced green onions, and 3 tablespoons of chopped fresh parsley in a large bowl. Set it aside.
          Cabbage slaw made with red cabbage preparation photos.
        • In a small bowl (or mason jar), whisk together 3 tablespoons of extra virgin olive oil, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 1 tablespoon honey (or your preferred sweetener), 1 tablespoon of lemon juice, 3 tablespoons apple cider vinegar, 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and ¼ teaspoon of ground black pepper.
          Person drizzling and mixing purple cabbage slaw with dressing and mixing it.
        • If you have the time, cover and refrigerate for 30 minutes before serving. Serve chilled.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: Red cabbage can range in size. I used a small to medium-sized head (about 1 ½ pounds with the core), which gave me roughly 7 to 8 cups of sliced cabbage. Once you mix it with the shredded carrots (about 2 cups), you’ll have around 10 cups of veggies. After tossing it with the dressing and letting it sit, the slaw wilts slightly and loses about 1½ to 2 cups in volume. Even so, this recipe still makes plenty — enough to comfortably serve 6 to 8 people as a side dish.
        • Taste for Seasoning: Always give your slaw a taste before serving. If it seems like it needs more salt right away, give it a little time to sit first. As the slaw rests, the flavors develop and become more pronounced, so it might balance out perfectly without adding anything extra.
        • Make ahead: You can prep it a day in advance — just toss everything together, cover it, and place it in the fridge. Letting it sit for a few hours (or even overnight) helps the flavors come together.
        • Storing leftovers: Leftovers will keep well in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Just give it a quick toss before serving. If any liquid has settled at the bottom, that’s totally normal — a quick stir will bring it right back to life.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 98kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 339mg | Potassium: 337mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 3890IU | Vitamin C: 64mg | Calcium: 60mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/feed/ 2
        Schug Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/schug/ https://foolproofliving.com/schug/#comments Fri, 25 Apr 2025 16:41:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81215 How to Make Schug Sauce? This shug sauce recipe comes together quickly in a food processor and keeps well in…]]>

        What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

        • What is Schug? Also known as skhug, zhug, s’hug, zhoug, zoug, schugg, or by its Arabic name sahawiq, schug is actually its Hebrew name. This vibrant and spicy condiment is made from fresh herbs, chili peppers, garlic, and spices. Originating from Yemen, think of it as the Middle Eastern counterpart to chimichurri or salsa verde. It’s a staple in Israeli shawarma and falafel stands, and for us home cooks, it’s perfect for spooning over grain bowls, grilled meats, roasted vegetables, or swirling into hummus and soups.
        • Spice levels are adjustable: Authentic schug brings the heat, but you can dial it down by removing more of the pepper seeds or reducing the number of chilies used. Want it fiery? Keep the seeds.
        • Stores and freezes well: Green schug keeps fresh in the fridge for up to a week in an airtight container. For extended storage, freeze the cubes in ice cube trays, then transfer them to a freezer-safe container. This makes it super easy to grab just what you need, whether it’s a single spoonful or more.
        • Green, Red, and Brown Varieties: While this recipe is for the most common, green schug, made with green chili peppers like jalapeños and serranos, there are also red schug (made with dried red chilies) and brown schug (made with tomatoes).

        How to Make Schug Sauce?

        This shug sauce recipe comes together quickly in a food processor and keeps well in the fridge or freezer. Let’s walk through it step-by-step.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.
        1. Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the complete list of skhug ingredients in the recipe card below. Below are a few helpful notes:
          • Peppers: I like to use a combination of green peppers like jalapenos and serranos—together they add a layered, more complex heat and flavor to the sauce. However, if you only have one type on hand, either pepper will still give you a delicious result.
          • Fresh Herbs: While schug is often called a spicy cilantro sauce, I find that a mix of fresh parsley and cilantro gives it a more balanced, herbaceous flavor. That said, if cilantro isn’t your thing, feel free to use an equal amount of fresh parsley instead.
          • Optional Add-Ins: Depending on the region, some schug recipes include extra spices for added complexity. You can try adding a pinch of ground cardamom, caraway seeds, or a small amount of red pepper flakes if you want to bump up the heat even more.
        A collage of images showing the peppers in a food processor before and after they are processed.
        1. Pulse the peppers: Add the seeded jalapeno and serrano peppers to your food processor. Pulse about 10 times, scraping the sides halfway through to ensure even chopping.
        Green schug sauce in the food processor.
        1. Add the herbs and spices: Toss in the cilantro, parsley, garlic, ground cumin, ground coriander, lemon juice, lemon zest, salt, and pepper. Blend until you get a coarse, pesto-like texture, stopping to scrape the sides as needed.
        Drizzling the shug with oil and showing the texture.
        1. Drizzle in the olive oil: With the processor running, slowly pour in the olive oil. You want the texture to be saucy but still textured.
        2. Taste and adjust: Give your green schug sauce a taste and tweak the salt, lemon juice, or spice to your liking.
        3. Store or freeze: Transfer to an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 5 days. Or freeze in portions using ice cube trays for later use.

        Expert Tips

        • Keep the stems on: No need to pick off all the leaves—both cilantro and parsley stems are tender and full of flavor. They blend right in and actually add to the sauce’s vibrant, herbaceous taste.
        • Texture: Stop blending once you reach a pesto-like texture—overprocessing it can turn it into an herb puree.
        • Using mortar and pestle: While the food processor is a great time-saver, if you’ve got a little extra time and a mortar and pestle, it’s worth trying the traditional way. Start by grinding whole spices, such as cumin and coriander. For even more flavor, you can toast them in a dry skillet for a minute until fragrant before grinding. Then add the garlic, lemon juice, lemon zest, and salt to create a flavorful paste. Next, add the fresh herbs and green chilies, pounding until you reach a chunky paste. Finally, slowly drizzle in the olive oil while mixing to bring everything together into a smooth, spoonable sauce.
        • Wear gloves: Since this Israeli schug is made with hot peppers like jalapeños and serranos, it’s a good idea to wear gloves while handling them, especially if you’re sensitive to spice or tend to touch your face while cooking.
        • Schug replacement: Wondering what to use instead of schug in a recipe? While the flavor profiles are quite different, you can use chimichurri, salsa verde, or even pesto as a substitute in a pinch.
        Zhug sauce in a jar with a spoon on the side.

        Serving Suggestions

        One of the best things about this spicy schug is its versatility. It can totally transform a simple dish into something exciting and flavorful. If you’re wondering where to start, here are a few of my favorite ways to use it— any place you’d typically use a punchy green sauce, schug fits right in.

        • Grain Bowls: I love spooning this Yemenite hot sauce over my Homemade CAVA Bowl—it adds a zesty flavor that ties everything together. It’s even better when paired with other Middle Eastern condiments like Harissa and Tzatziki.
        • Hummus: Whether you’re making a classic batch or going with something a little different, like Roasted Carrot Hummus, the spicy kick and fresh herbs swirled right in add an extra layer of flavor. Serve it with some warm Pita Bread on the side, and you’ve got a snack that everyone will love.
        • Meat Dishes: Schug pairs beautifully with richly seasoned dishes from the Mediterranean and the Middle East. It’s especially good with Shish Tawook, Beef Shawarma, or Grilled Harissa Chicken—adding a fresh, spicy contrast that lifts all those bold flavors.
        • Eggs: A spoonful stirred into your scrambled eggs in the morning or drizzled over poached eggs is a game changer. If you like savory breakfasts, try it on top of my çilbir, also known as Turkish poached eggs with yogurt. It brings just the right amount of heat to balance out the creaminess.

        Other Green Sauces You Might Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this schug sauce and bring the bold flavors of the Middle East to your home, I’d love to hear how it turned out! Leaving a rating and a comment below is a great way to support the site and helps others who are thinking about making it. And if you snap a photo, be sure to tag it on Instagram with #foolproofeats—I’d love to see and share your creations with the Foolproof Living community.

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Schug sauce in a jar with a spoon from the top view.
        Print

        Schug Recipe

        This bold and herb-packed green sauce is a staple Middle Eastern condiment with roots in Yemenite cuisine. Made with fresh herbs, chili peppers, and spices, it's perfect for adding a spicy kick to grain bowls, grilled vegetables, and meats, or even hummus.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 2 cups
        Calories 304kcal

        Ingredients

        • 7 jalapeno peppers stems and seeds removed (98 g.)
        • 2 serrano peppers stems and seeds removed (12 g.)
        • 2 cups fresh cilantro with stems and loosely packed
        • 2 cups fresh flat leaf parsley with stems and loosely packed
        • 4 garlic cloves roughly chopped
        • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
        • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
        • 6 tablespoons lemon juice
        • 1 teaspoon lemon zest from one large lemon
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon fresh ground black pepper
        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil

        Instructions

        • Place both the jalapeno and serrano peppers in the bowl of the food processor and pulse 10 times, scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through.
          A collage of images showing the processing of the peppers.
        • Add cilantro, parsley, garlic, cumin, coriander, lemon juice, lemon zest, salt and pepper and process until all ingredients resemble a “chunky” blend. Again, stop and scrape down the sides a few times to ensure that everything is processed evenly.
          A collage of photos showing the sauce being made and a person scraping the side of the food processor.
        • While the food processor is still running, slowly drizzle in the olive oil until you reach your desired consistency. It should (almost) resemble a pesto-like texture.
          Person drizzling the sauce with oil and showing texture.
        • Taste for seasoning and adjust the amount of seasoning, lemon juice, and spices as needed.
        • Refrigerate in an airtight container in the fridge for up to a week (be sure to stir before using it) or spoon it into an ice cube tray and freeze for up to 3 months.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about ~ 2 cups of green schug sauce. The nutrition information below is per cup.
        • Size of the peppers: I used seven medium-sized jalapenos, which were about 3.5 ounces (98g). If yours are smaller or larger, adjust the number of peppers accordingly.
        • Remove the seeds (or not): You can adjust the spice levels by removing or keeping the seeds of the peppers.
        • Olive oil solidifies in the fridge: It’s normal for the olive oil in schug to firm up when chilled. Just let it sit at room temperature for a few minutes before serving, and it will return to its smooth, spoonable consistency.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 304kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Sodium: 1209mg | Potassium: 650mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 6731IU | Vitamin C: 166mg | Calcium: 126mg | Iron: 5mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/schug/feed/ 4
        Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts https://foolproofliving.com/maple-balsamic-brussels-sprouts/ https://foolproofliving.com/maple-balsamic-brussels-sprouts/#respond Wed, 23 Apr 2025 17:27:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81131 How to Make Brussels Sprouts with Maple Syrup and Balsamic? Making these maple balsamic roasted Brussels sprouts takes just a…]]>

        What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

        This recipe is pretty straightforward, but here are the most important things to know to make your balsamic and maple-glazed Brussels sprouts a success:

        • Cut side down: Roasting the Brussels sprouts with the cut side down gives you crisp, golden edges and more flavor. Tossing halfway through the roasting process ensures that they are roasted evenly and don’t get too dark on one side.
        • Glaze after roasting: Tossing the vegetables in maple syrup and balsamic vinegar after roasting them helps prevent the sugars from burning during the roasting process.
        • Check doneness: The best way to tell if your Brussels sprouts are fully roasted is by inserting a sharp knife into the center of one—it should slide in easily with little resistance.

        How to Make Brussels Sprouts with Maple Syrup and Balsamic?

        Making these maple balsamic roasted Brussels sprouts takes just a few simple steps. The most time-consuming part is slicing the Brussels sprouts in half—after that, it’s mostly hands-off while the oven does the work. Below are the steps:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.
        1. Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below. Below are a few ingredient substitutions:
          • Oil: I opted for extra virgin olive oil, but any flavorless oil, such as avocado oil, would also work.
          • Honey: While the flavor profile will change slightly, honey can be a good substitute for maple syrup. 
        2. Preheat & Prep: Preheat your oven to 425°F (218°C). Line a sheet pan with parchment paper for easy cleanup, or roast directly on the pan for more caramelization.
        A person is drizzling Brussels sprouts with olive oil and then spreading them on a baking sheet.
        1. Arrange and season: Spread the halved Brussels sprouts directly onto the pan. Drizzle with olive oil, then sprinkle with kosher salt and freshly ground pepper. Toss lightly on the pan, then arrange in a single layer, cut side down. Don’t skip this step as it is crucial for crispy Brussels sprouts.
        Vegetables before and after they are roasted.
        1. Roast: Roast for 20–25 minutes, flipping halfway through. They should be deeply golden and tender.
        Roasted Brussels sprouts being drizzled and mixed with balsamic maple syrup glaze.
        1. Prepare the maple balsamic glaze: Let them rest for 5 minutes, then transfer to a bowl. In a small bowl, mix the balsamic vinegar and maple syrup. Drizzle this maple glaze for Brussels sprouts over the top and toss gently to coat.
        2. Finish & serve: Add optional toppings like chopped toasted pecans and pomegranate seeds for extra flair. Serve your roasted maple Brussels sprouts warm and enjoy!
        Roasted maple balsamic brussel sprouts in a plate with a spoon on the side.

        Expert Tips:

        This balsamic maple Brussels sprouts recipe is pretty straightforward, but there are a couple of things I want to highlight to help you get the best results.

        • Keep an eye during the last 10 minutes: Brussels sprouts can go from perfectly roasted to overdone quickly. Start checking around the 20-minute mark, and give them a toss to promote even browning.
        • Don’t toss the loose leaves: Any leaves that fall off during trimming will crisp up beautifully in the oven. Leave them on the pan—they’ll add great texture and a bit of crunch.
        • Great served warm—or cold: While I prefer serving this dish warm, the flavors hold up well even when served at room temperature or chilled. It’s a versatile side that works beautifully for gatherings or even for meal prep.

        Serving Suggestions:

        While most people think of roasted balsamic Brussels sprouts as more of a holiday side dish (and trust me, it’s one of my favorite Thanksgiving veggie sides), I make it all year round . Below are a few of my favorite pairings:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        You Might Also Like:

        Brussels sprouts can surprise you in the best way. Here are a few more recipes I love making when I have a fresh bag in my fridge.

        Roasted brussel sprouts with maple syrup and balsamic on a plate.
        Print

        Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts Recipe

        These Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts are golden, crisp, and full of flavor—the perfect easy vegetable side dish for weeknights or holiday gatherings.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine American Vegan
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 25 minutes
        Total Time 35 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 148kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 lb Brussels sprouts clean and sliced in half lengthwise
        • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon grond black pepper
        • 3 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
        • 2 tablespoons maple syrup

        Optional Toppings *

        • ¼ cup pomegranate arils optional
        • ½ cup pecans chopped, optional

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F/218 C. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
        • Spread the prepared Brussels sprouts in the pan, drizzle with olive oil, and sprinkle with kosher salt and black pepper. Toss to combine. Spread them, cut side down, in a single layer.
          Person drizzling oil and spready brussel sprouts on a sheet pan.
        • Roast for 20-25 minutes until tender, tossing halfway through.
          Brussel sprouts before and after they are roasted.
        • Let it cool for 5 minutes, then transfer it to a large bowl.
          Person drizzling brussel sprouts with maple syrup and balsamic vinegar mixture.
        • Mix the balsamic vinegar and maple syrup in a bowl. Drizzle it over the roasted Brussels sprouts and toss to combine.
        • Taste for seasoning and add more if needed.
        • Transfer to a serving platter or bowl and garnish with pecans and pomegranate seeds, if using. Serve.
          Roasted balsamic maple Brussels sprouts in a plate from the top view.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 3 cups of roasted Brussels sprouts with maple and balsamic, which is ideal for four servings as a side dish. The nutrition information below does not include the optional toppings.
        • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for upto 4 days. Be sure to bring it to room temperature before storing.
        • Reheating: I find that reheating them in the oven is the best way to keep their crispiness. Simply preheat the oven to 350°F (175°C) and warm for about 10 minutes, or until heated through.
        • Air fryer method: If you prefer cooking Brussels sprouts in an air fryer to save on time, simply preheat your air fryer to 375°F, spread the halved sprouts on a single layer, and air fry for 15 minutes, rotating halfway through. 
        • It’s easy to customize this dish with a variety of optional toppings. Below are some ideas:
          • Nuts: The toasted pecans and pomegranate seeds are optional, but they elevate the dish with texture and color. You can easily swap the pecans for other nuts, such as walnuts, hazelnuts, or sliced almonds. 
          • Fruit: For a fruity touch, try using dried cranberries or chopped dried apricots instead of pomegranate seeds. 
          • Cheese: And if you want to add a bit of richness, a sprinkle of crumbled goat cheese or shredded Parmesan cheese works beautifully too.
          • Bacon: For a smoky-salty bite, try crumbling in some cooked bacon. I prefer baked turkey bacon, but regular bacon would also work.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 148kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 614mg | Potassium: 477mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 855IU | Vitamin C: 96mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/maple-balsamic-brussels-sprouts/feed/ 0
        Air Fryer Asparagus https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-asparagus/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-asparagus/#respond Sat, 08 Mar 2025 16:54:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=48753 Why You Need To Know In a Nutshell With the help of air frying technology, getting deliciously crispy asparagus is…]]>

        Why You Need To Know In a Nutshell

        With the help of air frying technology, getting deliciously crispy asparagus is easier than ever now. Here are a few reasons why you should give this recipe a try:

        • The quickest method: Compared to roasting in the ovencooking on the stovetop, or steaming it, roasting asparagus in the air fryer is faster, with only 13 minutes from start to finish. 
        • Perfect texture every time: The light and crispy texture of air fried asparagus can’t be duplicated through any other method. It also has less oil than deep fried asparagus.
        • Easy to jazz up: Easy customizations with different spices, add-ons and toppings make this a new favorite you’ll make again and again.
        • Versatile: It is the perfect side dish, healthy snack, or a great addition to recipes like Asparagus Salad, Asparagus Tart and even Butter Lettuce Salad.
        Air fried asparagus on a plate from the top view

        Ingredients

        This air fryer asparagus recipe has five simple ingredients:

        • Fresh asparagus
        • Olive oil
        • Minced garlic
        • Kosher salt
        • Black pepper

        You probably have most of these at home already.

        Ingredients for cooking asparagus in air fryer

        How to Cook Asparagus in Air Fryer

        1. Preheat the air fryer: Plug in your air fryer and let it preheat to 375 F / 190 C. Rinse and dry asparagus spears. Place the asparagus on a cutting board. While holding the bunch with one hand, cut the woody ends by one inch from the bottom using a sharp knife.
        person showing how to prepare asparagus for cooking with multiple step by step pictures
        1. Season the asparagus: In a large bowl, combine the trimmed asparagus, a little bit of oil, minced garlic, and salt and black pepper. With clean hands or kitchen tongs, give it a toss to make sure that each asparagus spear is thoroughly coated with the mixture.
        asparagus in the air fryer before and after it is cooked
        1. Arrange in the basket: Carefully arrange asparagus spears in the air fryer basket in a single layer. A larger air fryer might fit all the asparagus stalks, but a smaller air fryer may require multiple batches. 
        2. Cook until tender: Cook for only 6-7 minutes until tender, but don’t forget to turn the spears halfway through. If you are using thin asparagus, air fry for 3-4 minutes.
        3. Transfer to serving platter: Carefully transfer to a serving plate, season with salt and pepper, a squeeze of fresh lemon juice (or a sprinkle of parmesan cheese), and serve while it is still warm.

        How to Store & Reheat

        Use this air-fried asparagus recipe to batch-cook asparagus for your weekly meal prep and store it in the refrigerator following my directions below:

        • Storage: Let the leftovers of your cooked asparagus come to room temperature, place in an airtight container and store for up to 3 days in the fridge.
        • How to Reheat Asparagus: To reheat, air fry your asparagus at 375 F / 190 C for about 3 minutes making sure to give it a toss halfway through the cooking process.

        Recipe Variations

        Want to check it up and make it your own? Here are a few ways to take your air fryer roasted asparagus to a whole new level:

        • Freshen with herbs: Fresh herbs give this dish new flavor. Try basil, parsley, mint or chives.
        • Experiment with spices: Make this dish unique each time with new spices. Try paprika, garlic powder or even red pepper flakes to start.
        • Use lemon zest and balsamic: Drizzle it with a mixture of lemon zest, balsamic vinegar (or lemon juice) and a little olive oil to give it a refreshing flavor.
        • Sprinkle with cheese: Shredded mozzarella or parmesan cheese makes the dish more scrumptious.
        • Imitate Asian flavors: Use soy sauce, maple syrup or honey to create an Asian-inspired sauce.

        Expert Tips

        • Take time to trim asparagus, dry it thoroughly and cook in single layers – even if it requires batch cooking. This is crucial for light, crispy asparagus. 
        • Change the cooking time if necessary. As I mentioned earlier, this recipe was tested both with thick asparagus and pencil thin asparagus. If you are using thin asparagus, be sure to reduce the cooking time by half. And don’t forget to turn the asparagus halfway through cooking.
        • Add variety with new flavors. Make this dish new each time by experimenting with spices, herbs and other fresh ingredients.
        • For more of a crispy air fryer asparagus, air fry it for 1-2 more minutes.
        • Keep in mind that the cooking time may differ from one air fryer to another. I tested this recipe in my Instant Vortex 6 Quart Air Fryer (affiliate link). For the best results, it is best to keep a close eye on the asparagus and check doneness after the 5-minute mark.
        Air Fryer Roasted Asparagus in the basket right after it is cooked

        Serving Suggestions

        There isn’t one right answer when it comes to serving this air fried asparagus recipe. It tastes great in so many ways, so consider your options! 

        FAQs

        What temperature do you air fry asparagus?

        The ideal temperature for air frying asparagus is 375 F degrees (190 C).

        How long to cook asparagus in air fryer?

        Cooking asparagus in air fryer takes about 6-7 minutes at 375 F degrees. 

        How to cook frozen asparagus in air fryer?

        Frozen asparagus takes 9-10 minutes to cook in the air fryer, but there’s no need to thaw beforehand.

        How long do you reheat asparagus in air fryer?

        Air frying leftover asparagus only takes 3 minutes to reheat, so it couldn’t be easier. 

        Do I need to adjust the cooking time when using thin asparagus?

        Yes, you do. This recipe was tested both with thick asparagus and thin asparagus. By thick asparagus, I mean the regular asparagus you would find in most grocery stores. Thin asparagus is usually available for a short time at the beginning of spring. You can cook both types of asparagus in an air fryer. However, the thinner should be cooked for a shorter amount of time. While the exact time depends on how thin the asparagus stalks are, shortening the air frying time by 2-3 minutes (and keeping a close eye on it) is a good place to start.

        Why did my asparagus come out stringy and tough?

        If you do not take the time and cut the woodsy ends, you will end up with stringy and tough asparagus.

        Do I need to soak my asparagus before air frying?

        No, you do not need to soak asparagus before air frying. Instead, we recommend giving it a quick rinse and drying it as much as possible.

        Other Air Fryer Vegetable Recipes You Might Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this air fryer asparagus recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        asparagus in air fryer basket from the top view
        Print

        Air Fryer Asparagus Recipe

        Learn how to cook asparagus in air fryer for perfectly crispy and tender asparagus cooked in less than 10 minutes by using only a teaspoon of oil. Easy, quick, and convenient.
        Course Vegetarian Side Dish
        Cuisine American Vegan
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 3 minutes
        Cook Time 7 minutes
        Preheating Air Fryer 3 minutes
        Total Time 13 minutes
        Servings 4 people
        Calories 33kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 pound asparagus* woody ends trimmed
        • 1 teaspoon olive oil
        • 1 garlic clove minced (optional)
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        Instructions

        • Preheat air fryer to 375 F degrees.
        • Place asparagus, olive oil, minced garlic, and salt and black pepper in a bowl. Using your clean hands or kitchen tongs, toss to make sure that each asparagus spear is coated with oil, garlic and seasonings.
        • Arrange them in your air fryer basket making sure that they are on a single layer. If you have a smaller air fryer, you may have to air fry your asparagus in batches.
        • Cook until tender for 6-7 minutes making sure to toss halfway through the cooking process.
        • Carefully transfer the now air fried asparagus to a platter and serve right away.

        Notes

        • Thick Asparagus vs Thin Asparagus: This recipe was tested both with thick asparagus and pencil-thin asparagus. If you are using thin asparagus, be sure to reduce the cooking time by half. And don’t forget to turn the asparagus halfway through cooking.
        • To Store: Let your cooked asparagus come to room temperature, place in an airtight container and store for up to 3 days in the fridge.
        • How to Reheat Asparagus: To reheat, air fry your asparagus at 375 F / 190 C for about 3 minutes making sure to give it a toss halfway through the cooking process.
        • For more of a crispy air fryer asparagus, air fry it for 1-2 more minutes.
        • I listed fresh garlic as an optional ingredient as this recipe would work perfectly without it. You can also substitute fresh garlic with 1 teaspoon garlic powder if you wish.
        • Optional toppings: Depending on what I am serving it, I usually finish it off with a squeeze of fresh lemon juice (ideal if I am serving it seafood) or a sprinkle of parmesan cheese (ideal if I am serving it with chicken or meat dishes).

        Nutrition

        Calories: 33kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 234mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 858IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-asparagus/feed/ 0
        Mint Chimichurri https://foolproofliving.com/mint-chimichurri/ https://foolproofliving.com/mint-chimichurri/#respond Fri, 07 Mar 2025 16:28:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80649 My chimichurri with mint is also a playful alternative to my other mint sauces—Lamb Mint Sauce and Yogurt Mint Sauce.…]]>

        My chimichurri with mint is also a playful alternative to my other mint sauces—Lamb Mint Sauce and Yogurt Mint Sauce. Serve them with lamb, seafood, steak, and more!

        Mint chimichurri in a jar with a spoonful of it.

        Ingredients and Substitutions

        The fresh, crisp flavor of my mint chimichurri recipe is all thanks to these fresh ingredients that you can find at your local grocer, farmer’s market, or in your garden. 

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Fresh mint leaves: We will be using only the leaves for my mint chimichurri sauce, as I find the stems to be too “woodsy” in flavor to include. 
        • Fresh parsley leaves: While I prefer to use only the leaves of the parsley, if you can chop it all very finely, feel free to include the stems as well. 
        • Red chili pepper: Traditional chimichurri sauce uses red chili peppers, but you’re welcome to swap them out with ¼ teaspoon of red pepper flakes, if that’s what you have available. Or, if you’d like to up the heat, you can also try using serrano or jalapeno peppers instead. 
        • Fresh garlic cloves: Garlic is a big part of the classic recipe, and the fresh cloves add a bold spiciness that you won’t want to skimp on. 
        • Vinegar: In Argentina, chimichurri sauce is always made using red wine vinegar. If you don’t have any on hand, you are welcome to swap in white wine vinegar. Another non-traditional option for the acid in this chimichurri sauce with mint that works, too, is lime juice.
        • Seasonings: With so many fresh herbs, the only additional seasonings needed are Kosher salt and black pepper. 
        • Extra virgin olive oil: I recommend a good extra-virgin olive oil since this isn’t being cooked (unless you end up using it as a marinade), and the flavor will really shine through. 
        • Shallot (optional): The traditional chimichurri sauce does not use shallots, but you can add a finely chopped shallot, especially if you plan on using this as a salad dressing. 

        How to make Mint Chimichurri?

        You can chop the ingredients of this simple sauce by hand, or use a food processor. I personally prefer the rough traditional hand-chop method, but a few quick pulses of the processor do the trick, too. Here are the simple steps to throw it all together:

        Steps showing how to make the recipe.
        1. In a medium-sized bowl, combine your finely chopped fresh mint and parsley leaves, chopped small red chili pepper, minced garlic cloves, red wine vinegar, Kosher salt, ground black pepper, and extra virgin olive oil. 
        2. Mix to combine, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary before serving.

        How To Store and Freeze?

        This is an excellent make-ahead condiment that stores well. Here’s how I do it:

        • Storage: You can store your mint chimichurri in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
        • Freezer: Freezing is a fantastic way to enjoy recipes with mint sauce for months to come. Simply pour your chimichurri sauce into an ice cube tray and freeze it. Once frozen, place the chimichurri cubes in a freezer bag and take out a cube to enjoy whenever needed. 

        Serving Suggestions

        This multi-purpose sauce can be used to add a cool burst of flavor to an array of dishes. Whether it’s enjoyed as a sauce, marinade, condiment, or dressing, these are some of my top choices to pair it with:

        • With Lamb: Mint and lamb are such a classic flavor combination. This mint chimichurri sauce is excellent with any of my lamb recipes but I particularly like serving it as a sauce for my Leg of Lamb and Rack of Lamb.
        • Seafood: Mint sauces like this pair beautifully with seafood dishes. Drizzle a generous spoon over  Grilled Shrimp or Grilled Salmon for a refreshing and bright finish.
        • Roasted Veggies: Savory veggies fresh out of the oven shine with a splash of chimichurri sauce with mint. I love pairing it with my Baked Eggplant and Roasted Asparagus, especially when I serve them with meat dishes.
        • Salad Dressing: Mint chimichurri can perk up your homemade salad dressing for an unexpected taste that perks up any boring salad. Try adding a few tablespoons to either my Lemon Vinaigrette or my Yogurt Salad Dressing.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Other Recipes with Fresh Mint

        If you make your own Mint Chimichurri recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Photography by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Mint chimichurri sauce in a bowl with a spoon.
        Print

        Mint Chimichurri Recipe

        A classic chimichurri with a mint twist, this play on the traditional Argentinean herb sauce comes together in about 5 minutes with everyday ingredients. It complements beautifully with any lamb, seafood, and veggie dishes.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Argentina
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 177kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup fresh mint leaves finely chopped
        • 1 cup fresh parsley leaves finely chopped
        • 1 small red chili pepper deseeded and chopped, or ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
        • 3 garlic cloves minced
        • 2 tablespoons red wine vinegar
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • cup extra virgin olive oil

        Instructions

        • Place 1 cup of finely chopped fresh mint leaves, 1 cup of finely chopped fresh parsley leaves, 1 chopped small red chili pepper, 3 minced garlic cloves, 2 tablespoons red wine vinegar, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper, and ⅓ cup extra virgin olive oil in a medium-sized bowl.
        • Mix to combine, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary before serving.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes ~ 2/3 cups of mint chimichurri sauce that is ideal for 4-6 servings.
        • Using a food processor: While I chopped the herbs by hand, you can certainly use a food processor if you want to make it quicker.
          • Storage: You can store it in an airtight container for up to 4 days. The green color of the chimichurri gets darker as it sits, which is normal.
        • Freezing: Place it in ice cubes and freeze overnight. Store the frozen cubes in an airtight container in individual portions.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 177kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 304mg | Potassium: 161mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 1742IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 53mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mint-chimichurri/feed/ 0
        Roasted Boneless Leg of Lamb https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-boneless-leg-of-lamb/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-boneless-leg-of-lamb/#comments Fri, 07 Mar 2025 16:28:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80631 Served with a bright and herby mint chimichurri, this leg of lamb roast recipe is a showstopper whether you serve…]]>

        Served with a bright and herby mint chimichurri, this leg of lamb roast recipe is a showstopper whether you serve it for Easter dinner, Christmas, or a special Sunday dinner. 

        If you’re looking for more roasted lamb recipes, we also have a roasted rack of lamb that is incredibly tender and has a well-rounded flavor profile through plenty of fresh garlic and rosemary.

        Sliced roasted boneless leg of lamb served with mint chimichurri.

        Ingredients and Substitutions for Leg of Lamb Roast

        With a few simple ingredients—all of which you can find on a single supermarket run!—you can make this boneless leg of lamb roast recipe and wow everyone at your table. Here’s what you will need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Boneless (or deboned) leg of lamb: Here in the U.S., you’ll typically find lamb from New Zealand, Australia, or the U.S. I usually buy mine from Costco, which carries Australian lamb leg. It is sold in different weights, so choose one based on how many people you plan on serving. The leg of lamb without bone I’m using here is just over 5 pounds, which is perfect for 6 to 8 adults, but you can go smaller or larger depending on your needs.
        • Dijon mustard: Dijon adds a nice tangy flavor and helps tame the gameness of lamb. I do not recommend swapping it out for yellow or brown mustard, which can be too harsh for this simple leg of lamb recipe.
        • Extra Virgin Olive oil
        • Fresh garlic cloves: We use a lot of fresh garlic in this recipe to balance out the gamey flavor of the boneless lamb roast—8 whole garlic cloves! You will use 4 of them, finely minced, for the inside of the lamb (mixed into the marinade), and the remaining four cloves will be stuffed into slits on the outside once it’s rolled.
        • Fresh herbs: We used a combination of fresh rosemary and parsley, though you’re welcome to substitute in thyme, as well. However, it’s important to finely mince the rosemary, if that’s what you plan on using, so the pine-like needles blend in well. 
        • Spices and seasonings: This rosemary and garlic lamb roast is quite adaptable to a range of seasoning blends, depending on the flavor profile you’re aiming for. As a nod to my own Mediterranean roots, I opted for ground cumin and coriander. 
        • Lemon zest: The brightness of lemon mellows out the gamey flavor in our seasoned leg of lamb. 

        How to Cook Boneless Leg of Lamb in the Oven

        If you’ve been feeling a little intimidated when you see photos of perfectly roasted lamb, don’t worry—if you follow these simple steps that I’ve outlined for you, accompanied by the step-by-step photos, you can easily achieve a stunning roast boneless leg of lamb of your own. Here, my friends, is the best way to cook a boneless leg of lamb:

        1. Prep your oven: Adjust your oven rack to the lower-middle position and heat the oven to 425 degrees F. (218 C). Place a wire rack on a baking sheet and set it aside to warm with the oven.
        Steps showing how to make the seasoning and prep the lamb for the recipe.
        1. Make the seasoning: Into a medium-sized bowl, combine your Dijon mustard, olive oil, 4 cloves of minced garlic, finely chopped fresh rosemary, finely chopped fresh parsley, ground cumin, ground coriander, Kosher salt, black pepper, and zest of a lemon. Stir mixture evenly. 
        2. Prepare the lamb: Remove the lamb from its packaging. It will likely look like an uneven bundle of meat. Lay it flat on a cutting board with the inside facing up. Do your best to spread it out into as even of a shape as possible. Pat it dry with paper towels on both sides to remove excess moisture. Using a sharp chef’s knife, trim off any excess fat, focusing on removing any greyish or tough fat. *Note: the grey fat is what brings out the gamey flavor, which is why we focus on removing that type in this step.
        3. Remove the excess fat (optional): Turn it over and trim away any thick or uneven patches of fat, leaving a thin layer for flavor and moisture retention. 
        Steps showing how to prepare the boneless leg of lamb for roasting.
        1. Even out the thickness: Flip the meat back to the inside facing up position. Cover the meat with plastic wrap. Using a meat mallet, gently pound the meat to create an even thickness of about 1-inch, focusing on the thicker areas. Remove the stretch film. 
        2. Spread it with the seasoning rub: Spread ⅔ of the Dijon-herb mixture evenly over the inside layer of the meat.
        3. Roll into a cylinder: To roll the leg of lamb, begin with the right bottom part of the meat and roll it towards the center (away from your body), pulling it snug as you go. Then, take the left top side and roll it towards you, meeting the first roll in the middle. It should have a uniform cylinder shape. Tuck the ends of the meat inside the roll as much as you can.
        4. Tie the lamb: Using butcher’s twine, secure the roast by tying loops around it at roughly  1 ½ inch intervals, ideally starting from the center and working towards both ends. You’ll likely need about 8-9 loops to keep everything in place. It doesn’t have to be perfect!
        Person inserting sliced garlic in the lamb and seasoning the outside.
        1. Cut small slits for more garlic: Using a pairing knife cut 14-16  1-inch slits evenly around the exterior of the lamb and insert the leftover four sliced garlic cloves into each cut as evenly as you can.
        2. Season the outside: Spread the rest of the dijon-herb mixture over the outside of the deboned lamb roast, ensuring that all sides are evenly coated.
        3. Roast: Transfer the meat onto the prepared baking sheet from the oven. Bake for 15 minutes in the preheated 425 degrees F oven for a nice sear and then turn the heat down to 350 degrees F and bake until the internal temperature reaches 125-130 degrees F (for medium-rare) when a thermometer is inserted in the middle of the roast. This takes about 40-45 minutes* (a total of 1 hour in the oven). 
        4. Let lamb rest: When the leg of lamb is finished roasting, remove it from the oven, tent it with foil, and let it rest for 10-15 minutes. As the lamb rests, the internal temperature will increase by 5 to 10 degrees, thanks to the residual heat.
        5. Slice and serve: Transfer the roast onto a cutting board, remove the twine, and slice it into about 1-inch thick slices, depending on your preference. Transfer your boneless leg of lamb roast onto a plate and serve it with your favorite sauce (I served mine with my mint chimichurri sauce).
        Boneless leg of lamb roast sliced and served with mint sauce on the side.

        Ideal Temperature and Cooking Time (Based on Doneness Level)

        Some of the top questions I receive are: How long to cook boneless leg of lamb? and What is the optimum cooking temperature? I promised you an easy boneless leg of lamb recipe, so here are a few notes to keep it easy & foolproof:

        • How long to roast a boneless leg of lamb depends on the weight and your preferred doneness level. While most boneless leg of lamb recipes say the cooking time per pound is about 15-20 minutes, I think it is more like 10-15 minutes.
        • 3 things affect the boneless leg of lamb roasting time:
          •  The boneless leg of lamb temperature (I usually take the meat out of the fridge to come to room temperature for at least 30 minutes to an hour before working with it); 
          • The weight of your boneless lamb leg roast
          • Your preferred doneness (rare, medium-rare, or medium). 
        • The two-step process – My approach to roasting lamb starts with a high-heat sear to lock in flavor, followed by a slow, gentle cook. I begin at 425°F for the first 15 minutes, then lower the temperature to 350°F to ensure a tender, evenly cooked roast. The final touch happens as the lamb rests, allowing residual heat to finish the cooking process while keeping it juicy and flavorful.
        • Looking for a boneless leg of lamb roasting chart based on doneness? The below chart from America’s Test Kitchen cookbook, Meat Illustrated (affiliate link), is the one I use.
        Desired DonenessCooking Stop TemperatureFinal Temperature After Resting
        Rare115 to 120 °F (46 – 49 °C) 120 to 125 °F (49 – 52 °C)
        Medium-Rare120 to 125 °F (49 – 52 °C)125 to 130 °F (52 – 54 °C)
        Medium130 to 135 °F (52 – 57 °C)135 to 140 °F (57 – 60 °C)
        Medium-Well140 to 145 °F (60 – 63 °C)145 to 150 °F (63 – 66 °C)
        Well-Done150 to 155 °F (66 – 68 °C)155 to 160 °F (68 – 71 °C)
        • Residual heat will likely raise the temperature of your leg of lamb with garlic and rosemary by 5–10 degrees during the 10–15 minutes of resting. That means if I pull my lamb out when the internal temperature is at 120°F, it should ultimately reach around 130°F, which is exactly how I like it—perfectly tender and juicy.

        Expert Tips

        Here are a few tips from my foolproof test kitchen to help you get the best results on your first try:

        • Before cooking it in the oven, be sure to take it out of the refrigerator for at least 30 minutes to an hour prior. You do not want to put it directly in the oven while it’s still cold.
        • A wire rack is essential. A wire rack allows the air to circulate, producing an evenly cooked roasted leg of lamb. If you do not have a wire rack, you can use a roasting pan with a V-rack.
        • Chop your herbs finely.  Rosemary is a pine-y shaped herb, and can add unpleasant bits to chew on if you don’t chop it finely enough. Feel free to experiment with the amount of herbs you use based on your preferences.
        • Remove the fat from the inside and outside of your leg of lamb in the prep stage. My boneless lamb roast recipe is perfectly flavored in large part due to this step, so don’t skip it. The grey fat on the inside is what contributes most to the gamey flavor of the lamb, so if that’s not something you enjoy (I do not), removing a large part of the grey fat will solve this issue. While the outer layer of fat does help retain moisture as it roasts, you want to remove some of it so the end slices are not excessively fatty. 
        • Evening out the meat makes rolling your roast easier. This is a great tip that I picked up in my research from America’s Test Kitchen. Using a meat mallet (or you can also use a can or mason jar in a pinch) helps create an even layer, which then makes it easier to achieve the cylinder shape you see in my photos.
        • Do not skip resting your meat. Resting allows the juices to redistribute, making the meat extra tender.
        • Slice your baked boneless leg of lamb evenly. Using your chef’s knife to slice your roast into 1-1.5” slices will give you a beautiful presentation and equal serving sizes. 

        How To Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat

        Looking to save some time on the roasting day? Here are some quick tips:

        • Make Ahead: This entire recipe can be prepared ahead of the roasting day. Simply follow all of the steps before putting it in the oven, then wrap it in stretch film. This is a great way to bring out more flavor by allowing it to marinate overnight. Just remember to take it out of the fridge an hour or two before cooking to allow it to come to room temperature. 
        • Storage: Store any leftover lamb as a cylinder or as slices. First, allow the meat to come to room temperature—you don’t want to store it while it’s still hot. Then, wrap it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 4 days.
        • Freezing and Thawing: You can freeze any leftovers as a cylinder or as slices as well. Bring it to room temperature and then store it in a freezer-safe container for up to a month in the freezer. Thaw it overnight in the fridge.
        • Reheat: Warm slices of the lamb in a low heat (275 F to 300 F oven) for 10 minutes or until heated thoroughly.

        FAQs

        Do I cook lamb with netting on?

        No. For even cooking, you must first remove the net and follow my instructions to flatten the meat, then roll it into a cylinder to get the best results.

        How much boneless leg of lamb per person?

        I usually serve ¾ lbs per person, about 2 slices each.

        Should you cover lamb with foil when roasting?

        No, there is no need. You want the oven air to circulate evenly around the meat for a nice sear on the outside.

        What To Serve with It?

        This leg of lamb recipe is a versatile main dish that pairs well with many sides, making it perfect for any special meal. Here are some great serving ideas:

        Other Lamb Recipes You Might Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make your own Roasted Boneless Leg of Lamb recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Photography by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Roasted boneless leg of lamb sliced on a plate.
        Print

        Roasted Boneless Leg of Lamb Recipe

        Looking for a foolproof way to make a juicy, flavorful, roasted boneless leg of lamb? This easy recipe walks you through every step—from seasoning to roasting—so you get a perfectly tender, golden-crusted lamb every time.
        Course Dinner
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 30 minutes
        Cook Time 1 hour
        Resting time 15 minutes
        Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 363kcal

        Ingredients

        • ¼ cup Dijon mustard
        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • 8 cloves garlic divided – 4 cloves for rub minced, 4 cloves for inserting into slits sliced
        • 2 tablespoons fresh rosemary leaves removed from stems and chopped finely
        • ¼ cup fresh parsley finely chopped
        • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
        • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
        • 3 teaspoons kosher salt
        • 1 teaspoon black pepper
        • Zest of 1 lemon about 1 ½ teaspoon
        • 5 lbs Boneless leg of lamb

        Instructions

        • Adjust oven rack to lower-middle position and heat oven to 425 degrees F. (218 C). Place a wire rack on a baking sheet and set it aside.
        • Into a medium-sized bowl, place ¼ cup of Dijon mustard, 2 tablespoons of olive oil, 4 cloves of sliced garlic, 2 tablespoons of finely chopped fresh rosemary, ¼ cup finely fresh parsley, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon ground coriander, 3 teaspoons kosher salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper, and zest of a lemon. Stir to combine.
          A collage of images showing the garlic mustard seasoning.
        • Remove the leg of lamb from its packaging. It will likely look like an uneven bundle of meat. Lay it flat on a cutting board with the inside facing up. Do your best to spread it out into as even a shape as possible. Pat it dry with paper towels on both sides.
        • Using a sharp chef’s knife, trim off any excess fat, focusing on removing any greyish or tough fat.
        • Turn it over and trim away any thick or uneven patches of fat, leaving a thin layer for flavor and for keeping the moisture in.
          Person removing fat from lamb.
        • Flip the meat back to the inside facing up position. Cover the meat with plastic wrap.
          Person evening out the meat and spreading it with the seasoning.
        • Using a meat mallet, gently pound the meat to create an even thickness of about 1-inch, focusing on the thicker areas. Remove the stretch film.
        • Spread ⅔ of the dijon-herb mixture evenly over the meat.
        • To roll the leg of lamb, begin with the right bottom part of the meat and roll it towards the center away from you, pulling it snug as you go. Then, take the left top side and roll it towards you, meeting the first roll in the middle. It should have a uniform cylinder shape. Tuck the ends inside the roll as much as you can.
          Person rolling the lamb and then it is tied.
        • Using kitchen twine, secure the roast by tying loops around it at roughly 1 ½ inch intervals, ideally starting from the center and working towards both ends. You’ll likely need about 8-9 loops to keep everything in place.
        • Using a pairing knife, cut 14-16 1-inch slits evenly around the exterior of the lamb and insert the leftover four sliced garlic into each cut as evenly as you can.
          Person inserting garlic into the meat and spreading it with the rest of the seasoning.
        • Spread the rest of the dijon-herb mixture over the meat, ensuring that all sides are evenly coated.
        • Transfer the meat onto the prepared baking sheet.
        • Bake for 15 minutes in the preheated 425 degrees F oven and then turn the heat down to 350 degrees and bake until the internal temperature of the meat reaches 125-130 degrees F for medium-rare when a thermometer is inserted in the middle of the roast. This takes about 40-45 minutes* (a total of 1 hour in the oven).
        • When the leg of lamb is finished roasting, remove it from the oven, tent it with foil, and let it rest for 10-15 minutes. As the lamb rests, the internal temperature will increase by 5 to 10 degrees, thanks to the residual heat.
        • Transfer the roast onto a cutting board, remove the twine, and slice it into about 1-inch thick slices, depending on your preference.
          Finished dish from the top view.
        • Transfer onto a plate and serve it with your favorite sauce.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 10-12 slices (as shown in pictures), which is ideal for serving 6 adults (~2 slices per person and about ¾ lb per serving).
        • *Use a thermometer: As it is with any large cut of meat like this, the best way to check doneness is by using a probe thermometer or an instant-read thermometer. If you have a probe thermometer, you can insert it into the meat before placing it in the oven and set it to your desired temperature. Alternatively, you can use a meat thermometer to check doneness.
        • Make ahead: You can season, roll, and tie the lamb a day in advance and store it in the fridge in an airtight container. Be sure to remove it from the refrigerator a couple of hours before roasting.
        • Storage and reheating: Bring leftover lamb to room temperature, transfer to an airtight container, and store in the fridge for up to 4 days. Warm them up in a low heat (300 F) oven for 10 minutes or until warmed.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 363kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 50g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 152mg | Sodium: 1428mg | Potassium: 753mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 244IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 41mg | Iron: 5mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-boneless-leg-of-lamb/feed/ 2
        Cottage Cheese Flatbread https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-flatbread/ https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-flatbread/#comments Thu, 06 Mar 2025 14:31:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80245 If you’ve spent any time on social media lately, you’ve probably noticed that cottage cheese is having a major comeback.…]]>

        If you’ve spent any time on social media lately, you’ve probably noticed that cottage cheese is having a major comeback. This viral cottage cheese flatbread recipe, created by Francesca Aralla of HealthyMumWay, is a perfect example of why—it’s simple, high in protein, and incredibly versatile.

        Cottage cheese flatbread used as a wrap.

        Ingredients You’ll Need

        This recipe for cottage cheese flatbread calls for only 2 main ingredients—seriously, it’s that simple. A 2-ingredient recipe that takes only 5 minutes to prepare is a lifesaver for those who love to meal prep and for busy weeknight dinners. Here’s what you’ll need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Full-Fat Cottage Cheese: The full-fat 4% version of cottage cheese works best in this recipe, giving it the desired end texture. My favorite cottage cheese brands are Good Culture, Trader Joe’s, and Daisy. If you prefer to use 2%, Good Culture is a solid choice.
        • Eggs: I tested this recipe using large whole eggs, which is what I recommend. However, if you want to make cottage cheese flatbread with egg whites, you can do so—just be aware that your protein flatbread will end up being lighter in both color and flavor. 
        • Optional—Salt: I don’t include this as a main ingredient, as adding salt will be determined by the type of cottage cheese you end up using. Some types of cottage cheese are saltier than others, so be sure to taste your cottage cheese before adding any additional salt. If you do, just a pinch will do. 
        • To Prep Pan—Cooking Spray: Have a can of cooking spray handy to ensure your baked cottage cheese flatbread doesn’t stick to the baking sheet. I prefer avocado oil spray. 

        Optional Add-Ins

        This simple cottage cheese flatbread recipe is endlessly customizable. Depending on which toppings, spices, sauces, and ingredients you choose to use, you can turn this into a wide variety of meals. 

        A little tomato sauce, Italian seasoning, and cheese—you’ve got pizza. Choose hummus, cucumber, and red onion for a Mediterranean twist. You get the idea. Here are some of my optional add-in suggestions you can try:

        • Seasonings & Spices: Give your keto cottage cheese flatbread a bolder overall flavor by using garlic powder, onion powder, black pepper, red pepper flakes, paprika or a seasoning blend like Italian seasoning. 
        • Fresh herbs: Chop up some fresh parsley or chives for a pop of color and taste. You can use fresh basil is you are using this flatbread as “pizza crust.”
        • Cheese: While this is already a high protein flatbread recipe, some additional cheese will up the overall grams of protein and add a rich flavor. Feel free to add two tablespoons of either grated Parmesan cheese or grated mozzarella. 
        • A Sweet version: While the viral recipe is served as a savory cottage cheese flatbread, I have also made a sweeter version by adding a pinch of cinnamon, a teaspoon of vanilla, and a touch of honey for a breakfast-style flatbread.

        How to Make Cottage Cheese Flatbread?

        It only takes a couple of simple steps to make this low carb cottage cheese flatbread. Here’s how:

        1. Prepare your baking sheet & oven: Preheat the oven to 350° degrees F. Next, line a small sheet pan (I used a quarter sheet pan, which is 9 ½  by 13 inches) with parchment paper and spray the sides with cooking spray. Do not skip this step, as both of these elements make sure your high-protein flatbread will not stick to the pan. Without them, it would be hard to remove and keep them in one piece. Once ready, set it aside.
        A collage of images showing how to make flatbread with cottage cheese and eggs.
        1. Blend your cottage cheese mixture: Place one cup of cottage cheese, two whole eggs, and a pinch of salt (plus any of the optional add-ins you want) into the bowl of your food processor. Pulse it 6-7 times in one-second intervals until it is fully incorporated but not pulverized; you do not want to liquify it. It is okay to have small pieces of cottage cheese remaining. If you do not have a food processor, you can use a hand mixer, a whisk or a blender.
        2. Spread your egg and cottage cheese flatbread: Pour the mixture onto the parchment-lined sheet pan and spread it into an even (ideally 8 by 11 inch rectangular) layer using a spatula or the back of a spoon. An even thickness is essential for even cooking. 
        3. Bake it in the oven. Bake it in the preheated oven for 30 to 35 minutes or until it is lightly golden brown. Then remove it and let it cool for 5 minutes before carefully removing it from the pan. Serve it by itself, as a sandwich wrap, or as a pizza base, following the suggestions below.

        How to Serve it?

        This is the best cottage cheese flatbread recipe because—here’s the fun part—you get to use your creativity and choose how you want to serve it. Here are three options to get you started: 

        Two ways to serve cottage cheese flatbread; as a wrap and as a pizza base.
        1. Enjoy it as is. It’s a delicious high-protein snack served plain.
        2. Make a Sandwich: Any of your favorite sandwich toppings will work here. I like to spread it with a thin layer of mayo (or mustard) and then place three slices of provolone cheese, 2 slices of deli meat (turkey or chicken breasts are my favorite), some lettuce, and some sliced tomatoes. Gently roll the cottage cheese bread wrap around the ingredients, and then cut it in half before serving. You can also use a pre-made mix, such as chicken salad with mayo instead, which is popular on Instagram and TikTok.
        3. Make a Pizza: For a cottage cheese flatbread pizza recipe, here’s what to do: After 30 minutes of baking, remove it from the oven and then spread it with ½ cup of marinara sauce (or plain tomato sauce),  ½ to ⅔ cup of shredded mozzarella cheese, and 12-15 slices of turkey (or regular) pepperoni. Put it back in the oven and bake until the cheese is melted, for about 4-5 minutes.

        How to Store Cottage Cheese Flatbread

        This cottage cheese flatbread recipe comes together so quickly that it’s easy to make fresh the day you plan to serve it. However, if you would like to make larger batches to meal prep, here’s how to store any extras you may have:

        • Storage: Once cooled, store it in an airtight container for up to 3 days. I recommend that you place parchment paper in between any stacks of flatbread that you have to prevent them from sticking together. 
        • Reheating: Leftover flatbread with cottage cheese can be enjoyed cold, at room temperature, or warm. If you wish to eat it warmed up, place it on a parchment-lined sheet pan in a low-heat oven of 300 degrees F for 5-7 minutes or until warmed all the way through. 

        FAQs

        How long to cook cottage cheese flatbread?

        The overall cooking time really depends on the thickness of your cottage cheese mixture and what size pan you’re using. If you spread it out in an evenly thin layer about 8” by 11” in size as I did, it will take about 30-35 minutes to cook. If you decide to use a smaller pan and thus have a thicker layer of the mixture, your cooking time will need to be longer.

        How long does it last?

        If stored in an airtight container in the fridge, your flat bread with cottage cheese will last for up to 3 days. 

        How many calories in cottage cheese flatbread?

        One serving of this egg and cottage cheese flatbread recipe is 166 calories, with 17 grams of protein, 9 grams of fat, and 4 grams of carbohydrates. 

        Can you freeze it?

        Technically, yes, you can freeze it, though I prefer to serve it the same day it’s made. For the meal preppers making large batches who wish to freeze them, my main tip is to place parchment paper in between the layers of flatbread, then wrap them all in stretch film/plastic wrap to keep out moisture.

        Expert Tips

        While this is a very uncomplicated recipe, here are a few notes to help ensure your cottage cheese flatbread comes out as beautifully as it did in my test kitchen: 

        • Let it cool for a few minutes after it comes out of the oven. This will allow your flatbread to set and be easier to handle. Otherwise, it may stick to the paper and potentially tear when peeling it off.
        • Thickness and time of cooking time matters. If you follow this recipe’s instructions, you’ll be spreading your mixture out into roughly an 8”x11” rectangle on your quarter sheet pan. If you end up using a smaller pan, your flatbread will be thicker and require a longer baking time. 
        • Texture matters. When mixing your eggs and cottage cheese together, resist the urge to overmix them. You want the mixture to maintain a little thickness, which means some small chunks of cottage cheese are okay. You don’t want to completely puree and liquify the mixture in your Vitamix or blender. Just a few pulses of the blender, food processor, or immersion blender will suffice. 
        • How to make air fryer cottage cheese flatbread: If you’re not looking for perfection, feel free to make this recipe in your air fryer. Due to the smaller space inside the air fryer, you will want to make half a batch of this recipe at a time, so ½ cup of cottage cheese with only one whole egg. Cook it at 350 degrees F for 10 minutes. At that point, check on your flatbread, and if it isn’t cooked enough, give it another 15 minutes. When you take it out, allow it to cool before handling it and serve.
        • If you’re using egg whites, take note. Egg whites will result in a lighter flatbread. Both the color/appearance will be lighter than you see in the main recipe pictures (though the air fryer photos show an egg white version), and the flavor itself will be less robust. 
        • Be careful about adding salt. Many brands of cottage cheese are salty enough on their own and don’t require any additional salt. Taste your cottage cheese before you add any extra salt. In my recipe testing, both Good Culture and Trader Joe’s cottage cheese didn’t need any added sodium.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this flatbread with cottage cheese recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Cottage cheese flatbread topped off with deli meat, tomatoes and microgreens.
        Print

        Cottage Cheese Flatbread Recipe

        If you’re looking for a simple, high-protein, and gluten-free flatbread alternative, this 2 ingredient Cottage Cheese Flatbread recipe is for you! Made with just two main ingredients—cottage cheese and eggs—this viral recipe is low-carb, keto-friendly, and packed with 17 grams of protein per serving. While it’s not a traditional bread, it is a great alternative as a satisfying base for wraps, sandwiches, and even pizza.
        Course Breakfast, Snack
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 35 minutes
        Total Time 40 minutes
        Servings 2 servings
        Calories 166kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup whole milk cottage cheese 4%
        • 2 large eggs
        • Pinch of Salt* optional
        • cooking spray

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 350°F and line a small sheet pan (I used a quarter sheet pan, which is 9 ½ by 13 inches) with parchment paper and spray the sides with cooking spray. Set aside.
        • Place one cup of cottage cheese and two whole eggs (plus any of the optional add-ins you want) into the bowl of the food processor.
          The batter in a food processor before and after it is mixed.
        • Pulse 6-7 times in one-second intervals until thoroughly incorporated but not pulverized. We do not want it to be fully liquid; it is okay to have small chunks of cottage cheese.
        • Pour the mixture onto the prepared baking sheet and spread it in an even (ideally an 8-inch by 11-inch rectangular) layer using a spatula or the back of a spoon.
          The batter spread on a sheet pan before and after it is baked.
        • Bake in the preheated oven for 30 to 35 minutes or until it is lightly golden brown.
        • Let it cool for 5 minutes and carefully remove it from the pan.
        • To serve you have three options. You can:
          1. Enjoy it as is.
          2. Make a sandwich: Spread it with a thin layer of mayo (or mustard) and then place any of your favorite sandwich toppings. I like to start with three slices of provolone cheese and then layer it with two slices of deli meat (turkey or chicken breasts are my favorite) and some lettuce and sliced tomatoes. Gently roll and then cut it in half before serving.
          3. Make a Pizza: After 30 minutes of baking, remove it from the oven and spread it with ½ cup of marinara sauce, ½ to ⅔ cup of shredded mozzarella cheese, and 12-15 slices of turkey (or regular) pepperoni. Put it back in the oven and bake until the cheese is melted, for about 4-5 minutes.
          A collage of images showing how to use cottage cheese flatbread as a sandwich wrap and pizza base.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes one flatbread that is about 8 by 11 inches, which is ideal for 2 servings. The nutritional facts below include the 2 ingredients listed in the recipe. They do not include the optional wrap or pizza ingredients.
        • Adding salt: Be sure to taste your cottage cheese before adding salt in the mixture. Most cottage cheese is already salty. 
        • Storing leftovers: Once cooled, store it in an airtight container for up to 3 days. If you make a few batches, I recommend placing a sheet of parchment paper between stacks of your flatbread to prevent them from sticking together. 
        • Reheating: You can serve this flatbread warm or cold. If you prefer to serve it warm, place it on a parchment-lined sheet pan in a low-heat oven of 300 degrees F for 5 minutes or until warmed all through. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 166kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 182mg | Sodium: 393mg | Potassium: 170mg | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 385IU | Calcium: 112mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-flatbread/feed/ 4
        Quinoa Tabbouleh https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/ https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/#comments Sat, 01 Mar 2025 12:47:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20389 Growing up in a Mediterranean country, tabbouleh, or kisir, was a staple in our house. It was my mom’s go-to spring…]]>

        Growing up in a Mediterranean country, tabbouleh, or kisir, was a staple in our house. It was my mom’s go-to spring and summer salad, which she paired with pretty much everything. 

        This version, made with protein-rich quinoa (a fantastic substitute for bulgur), is the latest addition to my Quinoa Salad recipes collection, and it’s just as delicious as the traditional recipe. If you love quinoa as much as I do, be sure to check out my Mediterranean Quinoa Salad for another fresh and vibrant option. 

        Quinoa tabouli being drizzled with the dressing.

        And if you’ve ever wondered about the different names and spellings—tabbouleh, tabouli—they’re simply variations of the same name, reflecting different versions of the Arabic word.

        Recipe Ingredients:

        This tabouli quinoa recipe is made with simple ingredients that make a bright and refreshing salad. The fresh herbs and crisp vegetables provide a delicious contrast to the fluffy quinoa, while the tangy lemon dressing ties everything together beautifully. You will need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Quinoa: This quinoa tabbouleh salad will work with any type of quinoa. Red, black, tricolor and white quinoa would all work. It is imperative to rinse quinoa before cooking if you want it to taste good. 
        • Cooking liquid: While water works just fine, I highly recommend cooking your quinoa in vegetable stock. It adds depth of flavor, ensuring that the base of your quinoa tabouli salad is tasty right from the start.
        • Fresh lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice is my favorite acid for the dressing used in this recipe, but in a pinch, white wine vinegar can be used. The flavors would be slightly different but still be great.
        • Extra Virgin Olive Oil
        • Fresh herbs: A mix of fresh herbs is key to classic tabouli, and this quinoa version is no exception. I like to use a cup of fresh flat-leaf parsley, a cup of fresh dill, and half a cup of fresh mint leaves, but there’s no strict rule—adjust to your taste! You can stick to just parsley and dill or skip the dill altogether if it’s not your favorite.
        • Fresh tomatoes: I prefer using colorful cherry tomatoes for their sweetness and vibrant look, but any variety will work—just be sure to chop them into small pieces for even distribution.
        • Cucumber: I prefer Persian cucumbers as they are crunchy, but English cucumbers would also work.
        • Scallions: Green onions provide a mild onion flavor that ties everything together. While it is not traditional, finely chopped red onion could be a good substitute in a pinch. 
        • Seasonings: I kept it simple with just kosher salt and pepper in this tabbouleh quinoa salad recipe, but you can add a touch of ground cumin, ground coriander, or a pinch of red pepper flakes to the dressing for extra depth of flavor.

        Optional Add-Ins

        While the recipe for quinoa tabouli I’m sharing stays close to the traditional version, you can easily customize it with a few extra ingredients. These aren’t traditional, but they add delicious new flavors:

        • Feta Cheese: A handful of crumbled feta adds a creamy, salty contrast that pairs perfectly with the Mediterranean flavors.
        • Kalamata Olives: Their briny, tangy taste enhances the salad and adds an extra punch of flavor.
        • Garlic: The traditional tabbouleh salad recipe does not use garlic in the lemon dressing, but you can always add a minced garlic clove if you are a fan.
        • Chickpeas: Again, the classic tabbouleh recipe does not use chickpeas, but sometimes I add a can of (drained and rinsed) chickpeas to make it even more satisfying.

        How To Make Quinoa Tabbouleh?

        Making this quinoa tabouli recipe is easy, and it comes together in just a few steps in under 20 minutes. Yes, there is a bit of chopping involved, but the result is a refreshing and wholesome dish that you’ll want to make on repeat.

        A collage of images showing how to cook quinoa and make the dressing.
        1. Cook the Quinoa: Place the rinsed quinoa in a medium saucepan along with your cooking liquid and salt. Bring to a boil, reduce to a simmer, cover, and cook for about 10-12 minutes until the liquid is absorbed. Let it rest for 10 minutes, then fluff with a fork and transfer it to a large bowl to cool.
        2. Make the Dressing: While the quinoa is cooking, prepare the dressing. In a small bowl, whisk lemon juice, olive oil, salt, and black pepper until fully combined. 
        3. Chop the fresh herbs and veggies – Finely chop the fresh parsley, dill, and mint. Quarter the cherry tomatoes, dice the cucumbers and thinly slice the scallions. Add the chopped herbs, tomatoes, cucumbers, and scallions to the cooled quinoa.
        Tabbouleh with quinoa in a salad bowl.
        1. Assemble your tabouli quinoa salad – Drizzle the cooked quinoa and the veggies with the dressing and gently toss to combine.
        2. Serve – Taste for seasoning and add more salt, pepper, or lemon juice as needed. Serve immediately or refrigerate for later.

        How To Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

        My favorite thing about this quinoa tabbouleh salad recipe is that it stores well. As a matter of fact, since the flavors meld together over time, it actually tastes even better the next day. Here is how I make-ahead and store leftovers:

        • Make Ahead: If preparing in advance, cook and cool the quinoa, chop the veggies, and make the dressing a day or two in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Toss everything together about an hour before serving for the best texture and flavor.
        • Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Before serving, give it a quick stir, taste for seasoning, and refresh it with a squeeze of lemon and more seasoning if needed.
        • Freezing: You can technically freeze this dish, but I do not recommend it as it will lose most of its fresh flavors when thawed.

        Expert Tips:

        This recipe is simple and easy to make, but to ensure the best quinoa tabbouleh, here are a few key tips to help you get it right on your first try:

        • Chopping by hand vs. using a food processor: I like to chop the herbs by hand using a sharp chef’s knife as it gives me more control over the texture, ensuring evenly chopped herbs. Plus, there is no risk of over-processing, which can turn herbs into a paste. However, if you prefer a food processor, pulse in short bursts instead of running it continuously to prevent the herbs from turning into a paste.
        • Herb stems: When it comes to herbs, you can chop the parsley and dill stems, as they are tender and flavorful. However, with mint, I prefer using only the leaves unless you’re growing your own and it’s super fresh.
        • Are you short on time? You can prep the herbs and veggies a day in advance and store them in the fridge until you’re ready to put it all together.
        • Let the quinoa cool a bit: You can mix everything together while the quinoa is still warm for a slightly different texture and flavor, but letting it cool first helps keep the herbs fresh and vibrant. I usually cook the quinoa a day in advance—not only does this save time, but it also ensures it’s perfectly cooled and ready to use.
        • Cooking quinoa: While I opted to cook quinoa on the stovetop, you can cook quinoa in the microwave, in an instant pot, and a rice cooker. Feel free to pick the method that works best for you. Also, I usually cook a big batch and freeze some for later. If you have some cooked quinoa on hand, this quinoa tabbouleh comes together in minutes.
        • Serve at room temperature: This tabouli recipe with quinoa tastes best when served at room temperature, allowing the flavors to fully develop. If you made it in advance, take it out of the fridge 15 minutes before serving for the best taste and texture.

        Serving Suggestions:

        You can serve this gluten-free tabbouleh salad with any protein or vegetarian main or just by itself for a light meal. Below are a few of my favorite pairings:

        Other Quinoa Salads You Might Also Like

        If you make this recipe for tabbouleh salad with quinoa, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to leave a star rating and a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        This recipe was originally published in September 2018 and updated in March 2025 with new step-by-step photos and more helpful tips. The recipe itself remains the same, with only minor edits for clarification.

        Quinoa tabbouleh in a salad bowl with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        Quinoa Tabbouleh Recipe

        Traditional Mediterranean Tabbouleh Salad made with a twist. Made with protein-rich quinoa, this vegan and gluten-free Quinoa Tabbouleh Salad Recipe is the perfect year-round salad for all your indoor and outdoor parties.
        Course Side Dish – Salad
        Cuisine Mediterranean, Turkish
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 27 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 205kcal

        Ingredients

        For the Quinoa:

        • 1 cup uncooked quinoa rinsed
        • 1 ¾ cups water or vegetable stock
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

        For The Dressing:

        • 4 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed – plus more to taste
        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt more to taste as needed
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For the Tabbouleh:

        • 1 cup fresh parsley chopped
        • 1 cup fresh dill chopped (optional)
        • ½ cup fresh mint leaves chopped
        • 1 cup cherry tomatoes quartered
        • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and chopped or 1 English cucumber
        • 3-4 scallions sliced thinly both white and green parts

        Instructions

        • Place 1 cup quinoa in a saucepan along with 1 ¾ cups of vegetable stock (or water) and a half teaspoon of kosher salt. Stir to combine, put the lid on, and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat.
          Person showing how to cook quinoa.
        • Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to low and cook for 10-12 minutes or until water is fully absorbed. Turn the heat off and let it rest for 10 minutes. Fluff it with a fork, transfer it to a large salad bowl, and let it cool while working on the rest of the ingredients.
        • Meanwhile, prepare the dressing by whisking together 4 tablespoons of freshly squeezed lemon juice, ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, and ¼ teaspoon black pepper in a bowl. Set it aside.
          A collage of images showing how to make the dressing and prep the ingredients.
        • To assemble the quinoa tabbouleh, add 1 cup of chopped parsley, 1 cup of fresh dill, ½ cup fresh mint, 1 cup of quartered cherry tomatoes, 2 chopped Persian cucumbers, 3 thinly sliced green onions into the bowl with the quinoa.
        • Drizzle it with the dressing. Give it a gentle toss.
          A bowl of tabouli with quinoa is being drizzled with the dressing.
        • Taste for seasoning and serve immediately.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 5 to 6 cups of tabbouleh, ideal for serving six adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Using dill: Most tabouli recipes are made with fresh parsley and mint, but my mom always added fresh dill, so I followed in her footsteps. If you are not a fan, you can omit using dill (and use more parsley or mint instead.)
        • A quick note on chopping herbs: Traditional tabbouleh is made with finely chopped herbs for a light, delicate texture, but if you prefer a rougher chop, that works too! It all comes down to personal preference.
        • Make Ahead: If preparing in advance, cook and cool the quinoa, chop the veggies, and make the dressing a day or two in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Toss everything together about an hour before serving for the best texture and flavor.
        • Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Before serving, taste for seasoning and add more lemon juice and salt and pepper if needed. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 205kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 408mg | Potassium: 404mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 1812IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 66mg | Iron: 3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/feed/ 22
        Chicken Orzo Soup https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-orzo-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-orzo-soup/#respond Mon, 17 Feb 2025 14:54:50 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80259 Ingredients for Lemony Chicken Orzo Soup This easy soup recipe comes together with a few basic ingredients you probably already…]]>

        How This Recipe Fixes the 2 Most Common Orzo Soup Mistakes

        Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

        Growing up in the Mediterranean, “Chicken Noodle Soup” wasn’t really a dish I knew much about. Instead, my mother made this Chicken Orzo Soup every time I felt under the weather.

        The good news? It isn’t much different from a classic American chicken noodle soup in method or taste. However, it features a much brighter, lemony broth, a hallmark of Mediterranean cooking. But because the ingredients are similar, the issues you run into are also the same:

        • The “Mushy Pasta” Issue: If you’ve ever ended up with a pot of bloated pasta (orzo in this case) that “drank” all your broth, you know the frustration.
        • Dry, Rubbery Chicken: This happens when the meat is boiled for far too long.

        After years of watching my mom and refining this recipe in my own kitchen, I’ve learned two non-negotiables for success:

        1. The Timing: Add the orzo towards the end of the cooking process. This prevents the pasta from overcooking and becoming giant and mushy. And no, you do not need to cook the orzo separately before adding it to the soup.
        2. A gentle simmer: Maintain a gentle simmer and cook the chicken only until it registers 165°F on a meat thermometer.

        One final note: While many consider this a “Greek” soup, do not confuse it with Avgolemono. Traditional Avgolemono soup is thickened with an egg-lemon sauce. My version here is lighter, finished with plenty of fresh lemon juice and a handful of fresh herbs.

        Ingredients for Lemony Chicken Orzo Soup

        This easy soup recipe comes together with a few basic ingredients you probably already have on hand.

        While the complete list of ingredients is in the recipe card below, here are a few notes from making this recipe over the years:

        Ingredients for chicken orzo recipe soup, including chicken, orzo, carrots, celery, onion, garlic, lemon, olive oil, chicken broth, and herbs.

        Chicken: I used boneless, skinless chicken thighs in this soup because I find dark meat more flavorful than white meat. Plus, I find that it stays moist even after it is poached in hot broth. That said, boneless and skinless chicken breasts are also a great option if you prefer a leaner cut. 

        Orzo pasta: Any brand of dried orzo pasta will work for this recipe. There is no need to cook it ahead of time, as the orzo cooks directly in the broth.

        If you are not familiar with it, orzo is a small, rice-shaped pasta that looks similar to rice but cooks much more quickly, making it ideal for soups like this one.

        Chicken stock: It is no secret that Homemade chicken stock elevates any soup, and using a high-quality bone broth makes the texture slightly creamier thanks to its natural collagen.

        With that being said, if you’re short on time, store-bought chicken broth works just as well. I recommend buying a low-sodium one so you can adjust the seasoning yourself.

        Mirepoix: Yellow onion, carrots, and celery make the aromatic vegetable base of any great soup, including this chicken orzo lemon soup. 

        Fresh garlic: I used 3 cloves in this recipe, but feel free to adjust if you prefer a stronger garlic flavor. While I prefer fresh garlic, in a pinch, you can use garlic powder. It is not traditional, but it would work.

        Lemon juice: I used 4 tablespoons in this lemon chicken orzo soup, but I highly recommend keeping some extra on hand, as you may want to add more at the end after tasting.

        Fresh herbs: I used fresh parsley at the end, but if you’d like a little extra burst of Mediterranean flavor, a handful of chopped fresh dill or fresh thyme works beautifully as well.

        Seasonings: Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper are all you really need, but I like adding a teaspoon of Italian seasoning, although it’s completely optional.

        Lemon zest: This is optional, but if you enjoy a brighter lemon flavor, stir in about 1 teaspoon of freshly grated lemon zest right before serving.

        How to Make Chicken Orzo Soup? (Step-By-Step)

        With one pot and 45 minutes, anyone can make this easy soup recipe. Here is how I make it:

        Chopped carrots, celery, and onion cooking in olive oil in a large pot, followed by seasoning added to the softened vegetables.

        Step 1 – Cook your veggies: Heat the olive oil in a Dutch oven or a large soup pot (with a lid) over medium-high heat. Next, add your chopped onion, chopped carrots, and chopped celery. Cook, stirring occasionally, until the vegetables are softened but not browned, which takes about 7 to 8 minutes.

        Step 2 – Add your seasonings: Toss the minced garlic, Italian seasoning, kosher salt, and ground black pepper with the veggies. Sauté the mixture, stirring constantly, for 30 seconds, just until the garlic is fragrant.

        Cooked chicken thighs shredded with forks on a cutting board for lemon chicken orzo soup.

        Step 3 – Add in the broth: Pour in the chicken stock and lemon juice, then add the boneless, skinless chicken thighs (or breasts). Bring the soup to a boil, then reduce the heat to medium and let it simmer gently for about 15 minutes, or until the chicken is fully cooked. The chicken should register 165°F (74°C) when checked with a meat thermometer.

        Once cooked, remove the chicken from the pot and transfer it to a cutting board to rest for a couple of minutes before shredding. 

        Step 4 – Cook your orzo directly in the broth: Add the orzo into the simmering broth and cook for about 10 minutes, stirring occasionally to prevent it from sticking to the bottom of the pot.

        Step 5 – Shred the chicken: While the orzo cooks, shred the chicken with two forks, or cut it into small pieces if you prefer. Then, add it back into the pot and stir to combine.

        Pro Tip – Shred or cut? My mother would always shred the chicken, which is what I usually do. However, if it is easier to cut it into smaller cubes, that is perfectly fine. Remember, the goal here is to have some chicken with every spoonful, so cut them into bite size pieces.

        Two images side by side showing 
shredded chicken added back into simmering lemon chicken orzo soup in a large pot and served in a bowl.

        Step 6 – Season and garnish: When the orzo is fully cooked, give the soup a quick taste, and adjust the seasoning with more salt and lemon juice as needed. Add the chopped parsley, ladle into bowls, and serve right away.

        Two bowls of lemon chicken orzo soup served with crusty bread, fresh dill, sliced carrots, shredded chicken, and lemon wedges.

        Expert Tips for the Best Chicken Orzo Soup

        This chicken lemon orzo soup recipe is simple, but a few small tricks can make a big difference in the final dish. 

        Here are some tips to help you get the best results on your first try:

        Cut your veggies evenly: For the best texture and even cooking, try to chop the onion, carrots, and celery into similar-sized pieces. This way, they’ll soften at the same rate, which will give you the best base without any pieces turning mushy while others stay firm.

        Do not overcook the orzo: It cooks quickly because it is a small pasta, so timing is critical. Adding it toward the end of cooking helps keep the texture tender rather than mushy.
        However, keep in mind that cooking times may vary slightly depending on the brand you use, so following the packaging instructions is the best way to achieve al dente orzo. 

        Adjust your lemon and seasonings to taste: Lemon is a personal preference, as some people (like me!) like this homemade chicken orzo soup even more lemony. Therefore, I highly recommend tasting it before serving and adding a little more lemon juice, salt, or fresh herbs as you see fit.

        This soup will thicken as it sits: As the soup rests, the orzo continues to absorb liquid, which naturally thickens the broth. This is especially helpful to keep in mind if you are not serving it right away. When reheating, simply add a splash of water or chicken stock to loosen it back to your desired consistency.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Lemon chicken orzo soup in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Chicken Orzo Soup Recipe

        This Lemon Chicken Orzo Soup is a cozy, one-pot meal with tender chicken, orzo pasta, and a bright, lemony broth. Easy to make in under 45 minutes, it’s the ultimate Mediterranean chicken soup recipe, perfect for busy weeknights or cold winter days!
        Course Soup
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Kosher
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 30 minutes
        Total Time 45 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 338kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • 1 medium onion chopped about 2 cups (265g.)
        • 3 medium carrots peeled and cut into small pieces about 1 cup (135 g.)
        • 2 stalks celery sliced thinly, about 1 cup (125 g.)
        • 3 cloves fresh garlic minced
        • 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt more to taste
        • ½ teaspoon black pepper
        • 6 cups homemade chicken stock
        • 4 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed plus more to taste
        • 1 lb boneless skinless chicken thighs or breasts*
        • 1 cup uncooked orzo 155 g.
        • ½ cup fresh parsley and or dill, roughly chopped

        Instructions

        • Heat olive oil in a Dutch oven or a large pot with a lid over medium-high heat. Add 2 cups of chopped onion, 1 cup of chopped carrots, and 1 cup of chopped celery. Cook, stirring occasionally, until vegetables are softened, 7-8 minutes.
        • Add 3 cloves of minced garlic,1 teaspoon Italian seasoning, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and ½ teaspoon of ground black pepper. Saute, stirring constantly, for 30 seconds.
        • Add 6 cups of chicken stock, 4 tablespoons of lemon juice and 1 pound (about 4) boneless skinless chicken thighs (or 2 medium-sized chicken breasts).
        • Bring it to a boil. Once it comes to a boil, bring the heat down to medium and let it simmer for 15 minutes or until the chicken is fully cooked. Chicken should register 165 degrees F when inserted with a meat thermometer.
        • Remove the chicken and transfer to a cutting board.
        • Stir in the orzo and let it cook for 10 minutes, stirring occasionally.
        • While the orzo is cooking, shred the chicken using two forks (or you can also cut it into small bite-sized pieces.)
        • Add the now-shredded chicken back into the pot and stir to combine.
        • When the orzo is fully cooked, give it a quick taste and add more seasoning and lemon juice as needed.
        • Add ¼ cup chopped parsley, ladle into bowls, and serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 7-8 cups of soup ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Cooked chicken: While I used raw chicken, if you have leftover or rotisserie chicken on hand you can make this soup even faster. Simply shred it (or cut it into cubes) and then add it to the soup right before adding the orzo. 
        • Storage: Bring the leftover soup to room temperature, place it in an airtight container, and keep it in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. Reheat in a saucepan with a splash of water or broth.
        • Freezing: While you can technically freeze this soup as it is, I am not a fan of freezing pasta. If you are planning to freeze it, reserve the portion that you are planning to freeze before adding the orzo in the soup.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 338kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 79mg | Sodium: 438mg | Potassium: 671mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 5556IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 50mg | Iron: 2mg

        How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat Chicken Orzo Soup

        Preparing a large pot of soup, especially one as satisfying as this chicken and orzo soup, often means you will have leftovers to enjoy for a second or even third meal. 

        Here is how I like to store it to keep it tasting fresh.

        Storage: For any leftovers, allow your soup to cool to room temperature first. Then, store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

        Pro tip: If you know you’ll have leftovers, instead of cooking the orzo in the broth, cook it separately. This way, you won’t run into the issue of it “bloating”.

        Freezing: I honestly do not recommend freezing this soup once the orzo has been added, as pasta generally does not freeze well and tends to become soft and mushy once thawed. 

        However, if you are planning to make a large batch for meal prep, a better option is to prepare the chicken soup without the orzo, freeze the broth and chicken, and then add freshly cooked orzo when reheating.

        Reheating: Transfer the soup to a saucepan and warm it over medium heat, stirring occasionally.

        As the soup sits, the orzo will continue to absorb liquid, so it is normal for it to thicken. If needed, add a splash of water or chicken stock while reheating to thin the sauce and restore its original texture.

        Variations & Substitutions 

        There are a few simple swaps and additions you can make to adapt this easy chicken orzo soup based on what you have on hand.

        Here are a couple of ideas:

        Use leftover or rotisserie chicken: If you already have cooked chicken, such as leftover roasted chicken or rotisserie chicken, you can use it here. Simply skip cooking the raw chicken in the soup and stir the cooked, shredded chicken in toward the end, just long enough to warm it through.

        Regional Adaptations: Most people think of this soup as a Greek dish, but many countries across the Mediterranean region serve it with minor variations.

        For example, Italians add a Parmesan rind to the broth as it simmers, finish the soup with a sprinkle of grated Parmesan, and swap parsley or dill for fresh basil. 

        In Turkiye, we use a generous amount of fresh chopped dill instead of any other herb or spice.

        Add extra greens: If you like adding more vegetables to your meals, you can stir in a few handfuls of spinach or kale toward the end of cooking. The greens will wilt quickly in the soup without overpowering it.

        What to Serve with Chicken Orzo Soup

        While this easy lemon chicken orzo soup is satisfying enough to enjoy on its own, it also pairs well with:

        • A meal-worthy salad: A crisp salad is always a great contrast to a warm bowl of soup. I especially enjoy serving it with my Greek Cucumber Salad for a refreshing Mediterranean touch or my Kale Brussels Sprout Salad when I want something with a bit more substance.
        • Crusty bread: There’s nothing better than soaking up that flavorful broth with a good piece of bread. My go-to options are No Knead Artisan Bread for the classic crusty bread-and-soup pairing, or my Air Fryer Garlic Bread for an extra punch of flavor. 

        Other Mediterranean Brothy Soups

        A Turkish classic: Turkish Red Lentil Soup is another classic soup recipe from the region. Naturally vegan, this is the kind of soup you’d be served in a local restaurant in Istanbul.

        A vegan weeknight dinner: This French Lentil Soup is my go-to when I want something simple and dependable that holds up well for leftovers.

        All the Comfort, Less Work: If you love the idea of stuffed cabbage rolls but not the time commitment, this Stuffed Cabbage Soup delivers the same familiar taste in soup form.

        Chicken orzo lemon soup in a Dutch oven with a ladle, showing orzo pasta, carrots, shredded chicken, and fresh herbs in the broth.

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-orzo-soup/feed/ 0
        Almond Flour Brownies https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-brownies/ https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-brownies/#comments Thu, 13 Feb 2025 18:15:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=38940 These homemade brownies with almond flour are so incredibly fudgy that you’d never know they were gluten-free! Sweetened with maple…]]>

        These homemade brownies with almond flour are so incredibly fudgy that you’d never know they were gluten-free! Sweetened with maple syrup, this extra chocolatey and easy gluten-free brownie recipe is guaranteed to be your next favorite recipe to bake when the chocolate cravings hit. 

        Like my Almond Flour Chocolate Cake and Flourless Chocolate Cupcakes recipes, this easy brownie recipe is easy to make. Plus, it is a great alternative to traditional brownies that are butter and sugar-packed and not so healthy.

        Almond Flour Chocolate Brownies on top of each other

        Why You’ll Love This Recipe:

        1. Made with everyday ingredients: The almond flour brownie batter comes together in one bowl in just a few minutes and uses only 7 simple ingredients, all of which are pantry staples.
        2. No different than a brownie made with regular flour: You won’t be able to detect any difference when it comes to taste and texture. Perfectly fudgy, almond flour brownies pack the same addictive chocolate flavor you’d expect from a brownie.
        3. Made with diet restrictions in mind: Like all of my almond flour recipes, compared to traditional baked goods made with all-purpose flour and butter, it uses a minimal amount of oil. It is also low-carb, grain-free (great for Passover), and paleo-friendly. Plus, thanks to the healthy fats in ground almonds, you can even count this as a healthy brownie recipe.
        Almond brownies sliced into squares from the top view

        Ingredients:

        The ingredient profile for this gluten-free almond flour fudge brownies recipe is similar to that of my Almond Flour Chocolate Cake recipe and even my Flourless Chocolate Cupcakes recipe. (Can you tell I love almond flour desserts?)

        Ingredients for almond flower brownie from the top view

        In terms of ingredients, you will need:

        Substitutions:

        • Oil: If you don’t have coconut oil on hand, you can substitute another neutral oil like avocado oil.
        • Almond Flour: If you cannot find it, you can make almond flour at home using a blender or food processor. This paleo brownie recipe can also be made with almond meal. However, almond meal brownies will be a tad bit dense compared to brownies made with almond flour.
        • Sweetener: You can swap agave nectar in place of maple syrup. You can also use honey, but I would recommend using less honey (¾ cup to 1 cup) as it is sweeter.
        • Keto Sweetener: If you are after keto almond brownies, I recommend sweetening with Keto Maple Syrup (affiliate link) sweetened with monk fruit. Liquid stevia can also be an acceptable substitute.
        • Nuts: Feel free to swap the walnuts in this almond flour brownie recipe for whichever nuts you prefer. Pistachios, pecans, sliced almonds, and even unsweetened coconut would work beautifully here!
        • Optional – Chocolate Drizzle: If you want to take this almond flour fudge brownies to the next level, I recommend drizzling them with chocolate. I prefer refined sugar free sweeteners like Enjoy Life or Lily’s dark chocolate chips (sugar free chocolate chips for the keto option) (affiliate links) for drizzling, but any of your favorite chocolate brand would work.
        • Optional – Dried or fresh fruit: If you want to make it a little bit colorful, top it off with fresh berries, or do what I do, sprinkle it with dried strawberries (affiliate link).
        • Optional – Sea Salt: You can sprinkle it with sea salt or lightly salted nuts as well. 
        • Serve them with ice cream: I can’t imagine a better way to serve these than a scoop of vanilla ice cream or whipped cream made with maple syrup on top.

        How To Make Brownies with Almond Flour?

        The steps to making this easy almond flour brownie recipe have 6 folds:

        1. Prepare for baking: Preheat the Oven to 350 Degrees. Line an 8X8 square baking dish with parchment paper.
        Person Mixing dry ingredients for brownie with almond flour.
        1. Combine Dry Ingredients: Whisk together almond flour and cocoa powder in a large bowl until homogeneous, and no lumps remain.
        Gluten free chocolate brownies batter is being mixed by a woman.
        1. Add Wet Ingredients: Add coconut oil, maple syrup, eggs, and vanilla extract to the bowl of dry ingredients, and whisk until fully incorporated.
        2. Add the Nuts: Fold in half a cup of the nuts.
        Almond meal chocolate brownies in the baking pan before and after photos.
        1. Prepare to Bake: Transfer the raw batter into the prepared pan and spread it out evenly using a spatula. Sprinkle it with the rest of the walnuts.
        2. Bake: Cook them for 35-40 minutes in the prepared oven or until a toothpick inserted in the center of the brownies comes out clean (or with a few tiny crumbs). Allow the brownies to cool for 5 minutes, and remove them from the pan onto a wire rack. Let it cool to room temperature before slicing to avoid them falling apart. Serve with coffee, milk, or plant-based milks such as almond milk.
        3. Optional step: If you are like me, and enjoy extra chocolatey, gooey brownies, then I recommend drizzling them with melted chocolate. I think the easiest way to melt chocolate is in the microwave. To do so;
          1. Place 2 oz. of your favorite chocolate chips (both semi-sweetened and unsweetened would work) in a microwave-safe glass bowl. 
          2. Microwave at high for 30 seconds. Give it a stir and then repeat in 30-second intervals until fully melted. Slice your brownies and drizzle them with melted chocolate chips.
        Paleo Chocolate brownies cut into squares with a knife on the side

        How To Store, Freeze and Thaw?

        My favorite thing about these homemade almond flour brownies is that they get better as they sit. I recommend storing them in the refrigerator and warming them slightly before serving.

        • Storage: These gluten-free chocolate brownies will keep for 3-4 days in the fridge in an airtight container or plastic bag. You can also store them on your counter in the same fashion for a day as long as your kitchen stays fairly cool. 
        • Freezing: To freeze, bring brownies to room temperature, individually wrap them with parchment paper, and store them in an airtight container in the freezer for up to a month.
        • Thawing: To thaw, let it sit on the counter for 15 minutes and warm in a low-heat (300 degrees F) oven for 10-15 minutes and serve.
        Almond Brownies sliced with a knife on the side.

        Expert Tips:

        While this recipe for the most fudgy almond flour brownies you see below is pretty straightforward, there are a few things you can do to get the best results on your first try:

        • Room temperature ingredients: As it is with most baked goods when making these brownies, we recommend using ingredients that are at room temperature.
        • Wait for it to cool completely: We know it is hard to wait, but as it is with all almond flour desserts, these brownies need time to cool down. If you slice while they are still warm, the middle section will be (somewhat) wet, looking like it is not fully baked. Therefore, it is imperative to give them enough time to firm up.

        FAQs:

        Can you make brownies with almond flour?

        You sure can. As a matter of fact, due to its high-fat content, brownies made with almond flour are just as fudgy, moist, and chocolate packed with a similar taste and texture to brownies made with traditional flour and butter.

        Can I make this recipe without eggs?

        This recipe will not work without eggs or egg replacers (i.e., flax eggs or chia eggs). I find that when it comes to baking with almond flour, eggs are crucial for making them rise and stay super fudgy. If you need a vegan brownies recipe, I recommend checking out my Almond Butter Brownies recipe. It’s made with wholesome ingredients like nut butter, spelt flour, Medjool dates, coconut oil, and maple syrup. 

        How many calories are in each serving of almond flour brownies?

        This recipe makes 9 servings and each serving is 375 calories.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Other Almond Flour Recipes You Might Like:

        If you are in need of creative and healthier gluten-free recipes made without the use of refined sugars (i.e., white sugar), you’ll like the recipes below:

        This almond flour chocolate brownies recipe is adapted from Almond Flour Brownies at Allrecipes.com with changes.

        If you try this for Almond Flour Brownies, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Almond flour brownie cut into squares and placed on top of each other from the front view.
        Print

        Almond Flour Brownies Recipe

        Almond Flour Brownies recipe made with only 7 ingredients in one bowl. They are just the trick to satisfy your sweet tooth without going totally overboard. Fudgy, moist, and Paleo-friendly, meaning they’re gluten-free, wheat-free, and dairy-free! Plus, they get their sweetness from maple syrup, making them refined sugar-free, as well.
        Course Dessert
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 40 minutes
        Total Time 55 minutes
        Servings 9 servings
        Calories 375kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 ½ cups almond flour 6.3 oz.
        • ½ cup + 2 tablespoons cocoa powder 2.3 oz.
        • ½ cup coconut oil melted and cooled
        • 1 ⅓ cups maple syrup at room temperature
        • 4 large eggs at room temperature
        • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
        • 1 cup walnuts or pecans chopped & divided

        Chocolate Drizzle (Optional)

        • 2 oz. chocolate chips i.e. Naturally sweetened Enjoy Life brand
        • 1 tablespoon dried strawberries

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees. Line an 8X8 square baking pan with parchment paper.
        • Mix together almond flour and cocoa powder in a large mixing bowl until no lumps remain.
        • Add in coconut oil, maple syrup, eggs, and vanilla extract and whisk until fully incorporated.
        • Fold in half a cup of the nuts.
        • Transfer batter to the parchment lined pan and spread it throughout the pan using a spatula.
        • Sprinkle it with the rest of the walnuts.
        • Bake for 35-40 minutes or until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean (or with a few tiny crumbs).
        • Let it cool for 5 minutes and remove from the pan on to a wire rack. Let it cool before slicing.
        • If you are using chocolate drizzle, place the chocolate chips in a glass bowl and melt in the microwave in 30-second intervals, mixing after each time until fully melted.
        • Drizzle the melted chocolate over the brownie and sprinkle with dried strawberries.
        • Slice & serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • To Store leftovers: Place the leftover brownies in an airtight container after they come to room temperature. Store in the fridge for up to 4 days. You can also store them on your counter in the same fashion for a day as long as your kitchen stays fairly cool. 
        • Freezing: To freeze, bring brownies to room temperature, individually wrap them with parchment paper, and store them in an airtight container in the freezer for up to a month.
        • Thawing: To thaw, let it sit on the counter for 15 minutes, warm in a low-heat (300 degrees F) oven for 10-15 minutes, and serve.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 375kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 73mg | Sodium: 32mg | Potassium: 136mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 31g | Vitamin A: 106IU | Calcium: 103mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-brownies/feed/ 35
        Overnight Steel Cut Oats https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-steel-cut-oats/ https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-steel-cut-oats/#comments Sun, 26 Jan 2025 18:16:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=21973 If you love the traditional overnight oats (made with rolled oats) but want to try making them with steel-cut oats,…]]>

        If you love the traditional overnight oats (made with rolled oats) but want to try making them with steel-cut oats, you’re in the right place! The difference between old-fashioned oats and steel cut oats lies in how they’re processed—steel-cut oats are less processed, resulting in a hearty, chewy texture. Plus, among the different types of oats, they take the longest to cook, but the payoff is a more substantial and satisfying bowl of oatmeal.

        The beauty of this steel-cut overnight oats recipe is that soaking steel cut oats overnight lets time do all the hard work for you. And once you’ve mastered this simple method, you can explore other options like our Overnight Slow Cooker Steel Cut Oats or Instant Pot Steel Cut Oats for even more convenient ways to enjoy this easy, satisfying, and healthy breakfast.

        Overnight steel cut oatmeal in a sauce pan from the top view.

        This recipe was originally published in Jan 2019. It has been updated with new information but with no changes to the original recipe in January 2025.

        Ingredients You’ll Need:

        Making overnight oats with steel cut oats requires just three basic ingredients, plus optional add-ins and toppings. Each ingredient helps create a creamy texture and flavorful base, while still leaving room for substitutions or additions. Below is what will need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Steel Cut Oats: When shopping, be sure to choose regular steel-cut oats rather than quick-cooking varieties. Keep in mind that they’re sometimes labeled as Irish oats as well.
        • Soaking Liquid: I like to use hot boiling water to soak steel cut oats overnight, but any regular or plant-based milk (such as almond milk) would also work. 
        • Kosher salt: A touch of salt help balance the natural earthiness of the oats.

        How To Make Overnight Steel Cut Oats?

        Making this steel cut overnight oatmeal recipe is straightforward and requires minimal effort. The time spent soaking overnight softens the oats, cutting down cooking time in the morning. I usually do this right before bed so that I can wake up to steel-cut oatmeal ready to eat:

        Steps showing how to cook steel cut oatmeal overnight.
        1. Boil the water: Bring 2 cups of water (or milk) to a boil in a medium saucepan with a lid. 
        2. Add oats and salt: Turn the heat off and stir in the steel-cut oats and kosher salt. Cover the saucepan with the lid and let it sit on the counter overnight.
        3. Reheat in the morning: While you can enjoy your overnight steel oats as is, warming them up makes for a more comforting breakfast. Next morning, place the saucepan back on the stove over medium heat. Cook, stirring constantly, to prevent sticking. It should thicken in 3-5 minutes. 
        4. Add almond milk: For a creamy steel-cut oatmeal, stir half a cup of almond milk if you use water as the base. Cook, stirring constantly, until it reaches your desired consistency. Adjust the amount of milk for a thinner or thicker oatmeal to suit your taste.
        5. Serve with toppings: Divide the oats into bowls and top with your favorite fruits, nuts, or seeds. Be sure to scroll down to see my favorite topping suggestions. Alternatively, you can place them in mason jars, bring them to room temperature, and then store them in the fridge for up to 5 days for a grab-and-go breakfast.

        Serving Suggestions with Optional Add-In and Toppings Ideas

        This easy overnight Irish oats recipe is endlessly customizable, offering endless possibilities for mix-ins and toppings to keep things exciting. Here are a few ideas to make it your own:

        • Sweetener: You can use any sweetener you like. Maple syrup, honey, coconut sugar, and brown sugar would all work. A splash of vanilla extract can also enhance the natural sweetness and add a hint of warmth. You can add it when adding the liquid (and let it soak overnight) or use it as a drizzle on top right before serving.
        • Superfoods: I almost always make my overnight steel cut oats with chia seeds but you can also add ground flax seeds,  hemp seeds, pumpkin seeds, or sunflower seeds. Add any of these superfoods with the liquid or use them as a topping.
        • Nuts and nut butters: Adding a handful of nuts (like almonds, walnuts, or pecans) or a dollop of nut butter (such as peanut butter or almond butter) not only makes your overnight steel cut oatmeal more delicious but also adds a boost of protein. You can also add a handful of chunky granola
        • Fresh fruit: Any fruit—like bananas, berries, apples, or pomegranate seeds—makes a great topping. Alternatively, mix in a few tablespoons of blueberry puree to naturally sweeten your overnight steel oats recipe.
        • Yogurt: A dollap of Greek yogurt or even vanilla yogurt is a great way to add a tanginess while boosting the protein content of this overnight Irish oatmeal recipe. And if you are a fan of yogurt for breakfast, be sure to check out our Yogurt and Oats and Chia Yoghurt Pudding recipes.
        • Spices: A sprinkle of ground cinnamon, nutmeg, or cardamom adds warmth and depth of flavor to your oatmeal.
        • Savory toppings: While most people associate this recipe with sweet flavors, I like to switch things up by adding savory toppings like sautéed mushrooms, spinach, and a fried (or poached) egg. My savory steel cut oatmeal is a hearty and delicious breakfast option, using this exact recipe as the perfect base.
        • Protein powders: Add a scoop or two of protein powder to create high protein steel cut overnight oats that are perfect for a satisfying and nutritious start to your day.
        Overnight steel cut oats in a bowl topped off with fruit.

        How to Meal Prep, Store, and Reheat?

        Once you learn how to prepare steel-cut oats overnight, you’ll never run out of ideas for a satisfying breakfast. This recipe is perfect for meal prep and makes busy mornings so much easier. I usually make a big batch over the weekend and have it ready as a grab and go breakfast in the morning. Here is how I do it:

        • To Meal Prep: Bring the oatmeal to room temperature, divide it amongst mason jars, add the toppings, and seal them with the lid. Store them in the fridge for up to 5 days.
        • To Store: Place the leftovers in an airtight container (or a mason jar) and keep in the fridge. 
        • Reheat: If you prefer your steel cut oatmeal warm, warm it up in a small saucepan with a splash of water or milk over medium-low heat, stirring regularly. Alternatively, reheat it in the microwave, stopping and stirring every 15 seconds to ensure even heating. Add more water or milk as needed to adjust the consistency to your liking.

        Frequently Asked Questions

        Can I freeze overnight steel cut oats?

        You technically can, but I do not recommend it as it will be mushy when thawed. Still, if you want to freeze it, store it in a freezer safe airtight container in the freezer for up to a month. Thaw in the fridge overnight.

        How long to soak steel cut oats before cooking?

        Steel cut oats should soak for at least 6 hours, but 8–9 hours (or overnight) is ideal for the best texture.

        What is the ideal ratio of steel cut oats to water for overnight Irish oats?

        The ideal ratio for this recipe is 1 cup of steel cut oats to 2 cups of water (or milk).

        How long do overnight steel cut oats last in the fridge?

        When stored in an airtight container or tightly sealed jar, your oatmeal will stay fresh for up to 5 days.

        More Make-Ahead Breakfast Recipes

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this Overnight Steel Cut Oatmeal recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Steel cut overnight oats in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Overnight Steel Cut Oats Recipe

        Learn how to make Overnight Steel Cut Oats. With only 10 minutes hands on time, it is so easy to enjoy a bowl of warm and creamy steel cut oatmeal without having to wait and stir in front of the stove top.
        Course Breakfast
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 5 minutes
        Resting time 8 hours
        Total Time 8 hours 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 221kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Steel Cut Oats

        For The Toppings (Optional)

        • 1/4 cup fresh fruit or more
        • 1/4 cup nuts
        • 1 teaspoon chia seeds*

        Instructions

        • Bring water to a boil in a medium saucepan (with a lid).
        • Turn the heat off and add the steel cut oats and salt. Stir to combine. Put the lid on.
        • Let it sit on the kitchen counter overnight, at least 6 to 8 hours.
        • Next morning, put it back on the stove and heat over medium heat. Stir with a wooden spoon to prevent it from sticking. It will thicken as it cooks.
        • For a creamy texture pour in the almond milk, while stirring constantly.
        • Cook until its consistency and texture reaches to your liking. Feel free to add in more milk if you like it to be thinner. 
        • Ladle into bowls, top them off with your favorite toppings, and serve while still warm. Alternatively, you can bring it to room temperature, divide it amongst 4 mason jars, add the toppings and store in the fridge for upt o 5 days for an easy grab and go breakfast.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 3 to 3 1/2 cups of steel cut oatmeal, ideal for four servings. The nutrition facts below are per serving and do not include the toppings.
        • Soaking liquid: I prefer to use water for soaking as I think it is lighter. However, you can use an equal amount of regular or dairy-free milk if you prefer. 
        • Optional add ins and toppings: If you prefer your oatmeal sweeter, you can drizzle it with honey (or maple syrup) right before serving. Additionally, you can get creative with toppings and add ins. Anything you have on hand from fresh fruit to nuts to nut butters to chocolate chips would all be great additions.
        • No cook method: I found that a quick reheating in the morning produces the creamiest steel cut oatmeal. However, if you prefer a quicker option, you can enjoy these as no cook overnight steel cut oats. Give them a stir and serve right away with your favorite toppings.
        • Storage: Leftovers can be placed in an airtight container (or mason jars sealed tightly) and kept in the fridge for up to 5 days.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 221kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 194mg | Potassium: 67mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 45IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 67mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-steel-cut-oats/feed/ 45
        Pickled Turnips Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-turnips/ https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-turnips/#comments Fri, 24 Jan 2025 17:23:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79897 If you’re a fan of classic Middle Eastern dishes like chicken shawarma, pita wraps, or chicken kabobs, you’ve likely seen…]]>

        If you’re a fan of classic Middle Eastern dishes like chicken shawarma, pita wraps, or chicken kabobs, you’ve likely seen them served with these pink turnip pickles. Their bold and zesty bite makes them the ideal accompaniment to the region’s spicy, rich, and savory dishes, adding texture, color, and a distinctive flavor.

        While they’re a staple in Lebanese cuisine (and therefore mostly referred to as Lebanese Turnip Pickles), they’ve also become widely enjoyed in neighboring countries, finding a place in their cuisines much like other popular Mediterranean condiments like hummus and tzatziki sauce.

        Pink pickled turnips in a glass jar.

        Ingredients and Substitutions

        This Mediterranean pickled turnips recipe uses just a few basic pantry-friendly ingredients you already have. But if you are missing one or two, below is everything you need to know about the ingredients:

        • Hot water: We need hot water to dissolve the salt and sugar. There is no need to boil water; hot tap water works just fine.
        • White distilled vinegar: Use distilled white vinegar for the most natural and authentic taste. However, while it is not traditional, you can use apple cider vinegar for a more fruity and sweet taste or white wine vinegar for a milder, slightly more delicate flavor. 
        • Sugar: A small amount of sugar balances the tanginess of the vinegar with a touch of sweetness. You can use both granulated and cane sugar when making these Arabic pickled turnips.
        • Kosher salt: We used kosher salt since home cooks widely use it daily. However, pickling salt and sea salt can also be used. We do not recommend table salt as it contains iodine, which can produce bitter-tasting pickled pink pickles.
        • Turnips: We used the purple skin white turnips, which are widely available in grocery stores. Peeling is optional, but we recommend cutting them into uniform batons to ensure even pickling. While it is not traditional, Japanese hakurei turnips (aka Tokyo turnips) can also be used in this recipe. They are smaller and have a milder (less bitter) flavor than white radishes.
        • Beet: Any color of beet can be used, but red beets are used for the signature pink color. 
        • Fresh Garlic: While optional, a clove of fresh garlic infuses the brine with a savory flavor. Use a large clove of garlic or two small ones.
        • Bay leaves: A small bay leaf gives the pickling brine an herbal note that enhances the flavor of the turnip pickles, but it is optional.
        • Whole black peppercorns: We added a small amount of black peppercorns to provide a hint of spice and complexity to the overall flavor.
        • Optional add-ins: If preferred, other flavorings, such as a few leaves of fresh herbs (such as dill, parsley, and thyme) and a pinch of red pepper flakes, can be added.

        How to Make Pickled Turnips?

        Pickling turnips at home requires only 10 minutes of hands-on time. The method we are using is usually referred to as “refrigerator pickles,” as we use a quick vinegar-based brine instead of canning using a heat-processing method used in other pickle recipes for a longer shelf life.

        Once it is assembled and the jar is sealed, all that’s left to do is to wait a few days for the most vibrant and flavorful Lebanese pickled turnips. Here are the steps:

        A collage of images showing how to pickle turnips.
        1. Prepare the quick brine: In a large measuring cup, combine the hot water, vinegar, sugar, and kosher salt. Add sugar and salt and whisk until they are completely dissolved.
        2. Layer the vegetables: In a clean 32-ounce glass jar with a wide mouth, start layering the turnips, beets, and garlic. Add a handful of turnips first, followed by a few beet pieces and a garlic clove. Repeat this process until the jar is nearly full.
        3. Add the spices: Add the bay leaf and sprinkle the peppercorns over the top.
        4. Pour the brine: Carefully pour the prepared vinegar mixture over the vegetables, making sure that everything is completely submerged,  but there is still an inch of space left on top.
        Two photos side by side showing Lebanese turnip pickles before and after they are pickled.
        1. Seal and cool: Seal it with the lid and let it cool to room temperature. At this point, you can let it sit on the counter or transfer it to the refrigerator.
        2. Let time do its magic: For the best flavor, let the pickles sit in the fridge for at least three days. However, keep in mind that the magic really happens after five to seven days when the flavors fully develop.

        FAQs

        How to cut turnips for pickling?

        To cut turnips for pickling, start by slicing the top and the bottom. Use a vegetable peeler to peel the turnip. Cut the now-peeled turnip in half and then cut it into ½-inch slices. Stack the slices and cut them into ½-inch wide strips, creating baton-like pieces.

        How long are pickled turnips good for?

        As long as they are kept in the fridge in a tightly sealed jar, they will last for upto 1 month.

        How To Store Pickled Turnips?

        The best way to store pickled turnips is in a tightly sealed jar kept in the refrigerator. They will stay fresh and flavorful for up to a month, making them a convenient condiment you can use any time.

        How To Serve Them?

        These Middle Eastern pickled turnips are a wonderfully versatile condiment that can add a flavorful kick to many dishes. Below are a few serving suggestions:

        • Shawarma: Whether you’re serving a chicken shawarma platter, beef shawarma wrap in pita bread, or falafel wrap, these pickled pink turnips are the ultimate condiment to complement the bold spices and rich flavors of this classic Middle Eastern dish.
        • Rice Bowls: Use these Lebanese pickles as a topping for rice bowls, like my Homemade Cava Bowl or Shawarma Chicken Bowl, for a tangy crunch that pairs beautifully with roasted vegetables, seasoned rice, and your favorite protein.
        • Mezze Platter: Serve them along with other classic Mediterranean condiments like Baba Ganoush, Muhammara, and Hummus.
        • Salads: Top off any of your favorite Mediterranean salads to add a touch of tangy flavor and a satisfying crunch.

        Expert Tips

        While the process of pickling turnips is a relatively straightforward one, we wanted to include a few helpful tips to make sure you’ll succeed on your first try:

        • Wash the root vegetables well: Rinse turnips and beets under cold water to ensure they are dirt-free. While you can pickle them with the skin on, I prefer to peel them before pickling to ensure that the brine penetrates easily and the pickles have a cleaner taste.
        • Slice the vegetables evenly: Make sure the turnips and beets are cut into uniform pieces (about ½-inch batons) so they pickle evenly. Uneven cuts may result in some pieces being softer or crunchier than others.
        • Start with a clean jar: There is no need to sterilize the jar, but we recommend that your jar is thoroughly cleaned and dried before use. If you don’t have a 32-ounce jar, two 16-ounce glass jars also work.
        • Don’t overfill the jar: It is okay to pack the root vegetables tightly, but it is best to leave about an inch of room at the top of the jar. We do want the turnips and the beets to be fully submerged in the liquid, but leaving a small room at the top will allow the brine to circulate properly.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this pink pickled turnips recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Pickled turnips in a jar with some placed on a fork.
        Print

        Pickled Turnips Recipe

        A Middle Eastern staple, pink pickled turnips are a tangy and crunchy condiment served with wraps, sandwiches, grilled meats, and as a part of mezze spreads.
        Course Condiment
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Resting time 5 days
        Total Time 5 days 10 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 44kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup hot water (tab water would work)
        • 1 cup white distilled vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon granulated sugar or cane sugar
        • 2 tablespoons kosher salt
        • 1 lb turnips peeled and cut into ½-inch batons
        • 1 red beet small one, peeled and cut into ½-inch batons
        • 1 garlic clove cut in half
        • 1 bay leaf
        • ¼ teaspoon black peppercorns

        Instructions

        • Add 1 cup of hot water, 1 cup of white distilled vinegar, 1 tablespoon sugar, and 2 tablespoons of kosher salt in a large measuring cup. Stir until the sugar is fully dissolved.*
        • In the mason jar, layer the turnips, beets, and garlic evenly: start with a handful of turnips, then a few pieces of beet, followed by a piece of garlic.
        • Repeat the same pattern until the jar is filled, ensuring the ingredients are distributed evenly throughout the jar. Gently push down to ensure they fit into the jar.
        • Add the bay leaf and peppercorns.
        • Pour the prepared vinegar mixture over the vegetables, ensuring everything is submerged but there is still an inch of space left on top.
        • Seal the jar tightly and let it cool to room temperature before storing it in the refrigerator.
        • Refrigerate for at least 3 days before serving to allow the flavors to meld. For best results, wait 5-7 days.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 to 2 1/2 cups of turnip pickles that is ideal for 6 servings as a condiment. The nutrition information below is per serving.
        • * Alternatively, you can place cold water in a small saucepan, add the vinegar, sugar, and salt, and cook, stirring occasionally, until the sugar and salt are fully dissolved.
        • Storage: While the color of the brine turns fully pink after 3 days, we highly recommend waiting at least 5 days for the flavors to develop. Be sure to store it in the fridge once the jar is opened. As long as it is tightly sealed and kept in the refrigerator, these Mediterranean pickled turnips will stay fresh for up to a month.
        • In the fridge or on the counter? We’ve seen versions of this pickled turnip recipe where some home cooks leave the jar on the kitchen counter (or a dark place like the pantry) for a few days before transferring it to the refrigerator, while others keep it in the fridge the entire time. We tried both ways and found that there were no differences in taste.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 44kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.1g | Saturated Fat: 0.02g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 2390mg | Potassium: 195mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 7IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 32mg | Iron: 0.4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-turnips/feed/ 2
        Beef Barley Soup Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/beef-barley-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/beef-barley-soup/#comments Wed, 15 Jan 2025 18:42:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79780 Ingredients for Beef Barley Soup While you can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, here…]]>

        Why This Version Succeeds Where Other Recipes Fall Short

        Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

        A big pot of beef soup on the stove is one of the coziest things during the colder months, and beef and barley soup is a true classic.

        The problem is that many versions end up with mushy barley, dry beef, or a soup that’s either too thick or a little bland.

        Over the last few years, I’ve made it my mission to develop a recipe that avoids those exact issues. After many tests, I am here with my version of the best beef and barley soup. Here are the reasons why:

        • Chuck roast stays tender during a long simmer. I cut a whole chuck roast myself (instead of buying precut stew meat made up of odds and ends of leftover cuts), so the pieces cook evenly, stay juicy, and taste consistent throughout the soup.
        • Barley is added later (after the meat is browned and veggies cooked) to prevent it from turning mushy. It gets just enough time to cook through while keeping a nice texture.
        • A splash of apple cider vinegar keeps the soup from tasting bland. It balances the richness of the beef and the earthiness of the barley.
        • Simmering with the lid slightly ajar helps control thickness. Keeping the lid ajar lets excess moisture escape slowly so the soup thickens naturally without becoming gluey or overly dense.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Ingredients for Beef Barley Soup

        While you can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, here are a few helpful notes to guide you as you prepare the soup and make it your own.

        Top-down view of Beef Barley Soup ingredients in small bowls, including cubed chuck roast, pearl barley, diced carrots, celery, onion, and fresh thyme on a blue tiled surface.

        Choosing The Right Meat

        Chuck roast: Chuck roast is my go-to cut for beef barley soup because it is well-suited for longer cooking times. Cut from the shoulder, it contains plenty of connective tissue that slowly breaks down as the soup simmers, resulting in fall-apart tender, rich bites of beef. 

        Wouldn’t it be better (and more time-saving) to buy already-cut stew meat instead? It might seem easier to buy pre-cut stew meat, and yes, it does save you a few minutes.

        But I still like to cut my own because most store-bought stew meat is usually a mix of different cuts that cook at different times. Some pieces turn tender while others stay tough.

        Starting with one cut, like chuck roast, and cutting it into ½-inch cubes yourself helps everything cook evenly and stay tender.

        Vegetable oil: You can use olive oil or any neutral oil, such as avocado oil, to sear the meat. The goal is to use an oil with a higher smoke point so the beef browns properly without burning.

        For the Soup + Tips on Buying Barley

        Pearl barley: When shopping for barley, be sure to choose pearl barley rather than hulled barley. Pearl barley differs in that its outer bran layer is removed, allowing it to cook more quickly and develop a tender, slightly chewy texture that works especially well in soups and stews. 

        Hulled barley can be used, but it takes much longer to cook.

        Vegetables: We are using chopped onion, carrots, and celery, the classic combination of veggies that pretty much any meat soup recipe like this uses. As you are chopping them, take your time to cut them into even pieces so they cook evenly.

        Beef broth: You can use homemade beef stock or buy it from the store. If you choose to use store-bought, get low-sodium beef broth so you can easily control the salt level in your soup.

        Selecting Your Broth: For the richest flavor, I recommend choosing a beef broth that lists real beef bones or beef stock as the first ingredient rather than “beef base” or artificial flavorings.

        I tested this recipe with Kettle & Fire, and it worked beautifully.

        Alternatively, you can use chicken stock. I have also tested this recipe with my homemade chicken stock, and while the color was slightly lighter, the soup was still delicious and satisfying.

        Red wine: A medium-bodied red wine, such as Pinot Noir or Merlot, enhances the soup’s subtle, earthy flavor.

        Can I make this soup without alcohol? Yes, for an alcohol-free barley beef soup recipe, you can substitute an equal amount of beef broth for wine.

        Diced tomatoes: I use one 14-ounce can of diced tomatoes (unsalted) to add just a hint of acidity and subtle sweetness to the soup without overpowering it.

        Worcestershire sauce: This classic seasoning adds a subtle umami depth to the soup. Its savory, slightly tangy notes help balance the richness of the beef.

        Fresh herbs: I use a few sprigs of fresh thyme, tied together with kitchen twine so they are easy to remove before serving. I also add a handful of fresh chopped parsley at the end for a vibrant finish. You can use dried herbs in a pinch, but I would use no more than a teaspoon of dried thyme as a substitute.

        Apple cider vinegar (optional): While optional, a splash of an acidic ingredient, such as vinegar or lemon juice, is my secret move to take this beef and barley soup from good to great. It adds a nice tang that helps balance the rich flavors of the beef and earthy flavors of all the veggies in the soup.

        How to Make Beef Barley Soup (Step-by-Step)

        This homemade beef barley soup comes together in one pot, making it both simple to prepare and easy to clean up. I highly recommend having all your ingredients ready before you start. Here is how I make it:

        A collage showing aromatics being sautéed with tomato paste, deglazing the pot with red wine, and adding diced tomatoes and beef back into the broth.

        Step 1 – Prepare the beef: Using a sharp knife, cut the meat into ½-inch cubes. You can cut them larger (about 1-inch cubes) if you prefer more stew-sized meat in your soup. It is a personal preference. 

        Then, pat the beef really well with paper towels on all sides so it browns instead of steaming, which is what gives you that deep, rich base in the soup.  Once it’s dry, season all sides with salt and pepper so every piece is properly seasoned from the start.

        Step 2 – Sear the meat: Heat the oil in a large Dutch oven (at least 5.5 quarts) over medium-high heat until it shimmers. Add the beef in an even layer. Since we’re using a large Dutch oven with a rather large surface area and the beef is cut into small pieces, we can add all the meat at once. 

        Spread it out in an even layer as much as possible. Let it cook undisturbed for a minute or two before stirring, which gives it a chance to brown, which is imperative for building that rich meat flavor that this soup is known for.

        But wait, there is so much liquid in the pan? During my recipe testing, I quickly found out that at this stage, the meat releases some of its juices as it cooks, and that’s okay.

        As you let it cook and stir, some of it cooks off, and the meat starts to brown. The key is to continue stirring every few minutes so all sides get a chance to brown. It takes about 6-10 minutes (depending on your meat), so be patient.

        Also, keep in mind that they will shrink as they cook.

        Once done, transfer the now-seared beef to a plate and cover it with foil to keep it warm. Do not wash the pot!

        Step 3 – Cook the vegetables: Using the same large pot, add the diced onion, sliced carrots, and sliced celery. Cook them over medium-high heat, stirring frequently, for about 10 minutes, or until they soften and start to release their natural sweetness.

        Pro Tip: I usually don’t add extra oil at this stage since chuck roast is well-marbled and leaves enough fat in the pot to cook the vegetables. That said, if the pot looks dry, feel free to add a tablespoon of olive oil to help them sauté evenly.

        A collage of images showing how to cook the vegetables and make the broth for this Dutch oven beef barley soup recipe.

        Step 4 – Add the aromatics: Add the minced garlic and sauté for about 30 seconds, just until fragrant. Keep an eye on it, as garlic can burn quickly. Stir in the tomato paste, salt, and black pepper and cook, stirring constantly, for about 1 minute.

        Step 5 – Deglaze the pot: Pour in the red wine, then use a wooden spoon to gently scrape up the browned bits from the bottom of the pot. Those bits hold a lot of flavor, and the wine helps lift them while adding depth to the soup. 

        Let it simmer for a minute or two, so some of the alcohol cooks off and further concentrates before we move on to the next part.

        Step 6 – Add the broth: Return the seared beef to the pot along with any juices collected on the plate (those juices are pure flavor, so don’t skip them). Add the beef broth, diced tomatoes, and the thyme sprigs tied together with kitchen twine.

        Give everything a good stir, then reduce the heat to medium-low. Let the soup simmer, partially covered, for 30–45 minutes, allowing the beef to slowly tenderize while the flavors come together.

        Step 7 – Add barley and finish cooking: Stir in the pearl barley and Worcestershire sauce, and let it simmer until the barley is tender, about 45-55 minutes. 

        You’ll notice the barley absorbs liquid as it goes, so check on the soup and give it a stir about every 15 minutes to prevent it from sticking to the bottom. The barley is ready when it’s tender but still has a slight bite.

        Step 8 – Season and serve: Remove the thyme bundle and stir in a splash of apple cider vinegar. Give it a taste and adjust the seasoning as needed, then finish with a sprinkle of fresh parsley and serve while hot.

        A cozy close-up of a bowl of Beef Barley Soup garnished with parsley, served with crusty sourdough bread and a glass of red wine.

        Expert Tips for the Best Beef Barley Soup Recipe

        Making beef barley soup doesn’t have to be complicated, but a few small details can make a big difference in the final result. These are the tips I rely on every time to make sure the soup turns out just right:

        Keep an eye on the consistency: As the soup simmers and the barley cooks, you might notice the liquid reducing quite a bit. This is completely normal. I usually keep the lid slightly ajar to minimize evaporation. You can also move the pot to the simmer burner (or to the smallest heat source on your stove top) and/or add more water or broth as needed. 

        Add warm broth, not cold: If you need to thin the soup while it’s cooking or reheating, use warm water or warm beef broth. Adding cold liquid can slow down the cooking process and affect the overall texture.

        Check the barley packaging: While pearl barley typically takes about 45-55 minutes to cook, different brands can vary slightly. It’s always a good idea to check the package and use the texture as your guide; the barley should be tender but still have a bit of bite.

        Taste at the end: The flavors concentrate as the soup cooks, so it’s best to do your final seasoning right before serving. A quick taste at the end lets you adjust salt or add a splash of acid if needed.

        Beef barley vegetable soup in a Dutch oven with a ladle full of soup.
        Print

        Beef Barley Soup Recipe

        Warm yourself from the inside out with this foolproof, one-pot Beef Barley Soup recipe! Meticulously tested to ensure tender beef and perfectly cooked barley, it's a rich, satisfying comfort meal you can count on. Never mushy or bland.
        Course Soup
        Cuisine American
        Diet Kosher
        Prep Time 30 minutes
        Cook Time 1 hour 50 minutes
        Total Time 2 hours 20 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 462kcal

        Equipment

        Ingredients

        For The Meat:

        • 2 lbs chuck roast
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • 2 tablespoons vegetable oil such as olive oil or avocado oil

        For The Soup:

        • 1 onion 340g/3 cups, roughly chopped
        • 3 carrots 180g/1 ½ cups, peeled and sliced thinly
        • 2 stalks celery about 1 cup, sliced thinly
        • 4 garlic cloves finely minced
        • 3 tablespoons tomato paste
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • ½ cup red wine
        • 7 cups beef broth plus more as needed
        • 1 14- ounce can diced tomatoes
        • 3-4 sprigs fresh thyme tied with kitchen twine
        • 1 cup pearl barley
        • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
        • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar optional
        • ½ cup fresh parsley roughly chopped plus more for garnish

        Instructions

        • Using a sharp chef’s knife, cut 2 lbs of chuck roast into ½-inch cubes. Pat them dry using a sheet of paper towel.
        • Season the cubed beef with 1 teaspoon kosher salt and ½ teaspoon of black pepper on all sides. Set aside.
        • Heat two tablespoons of olive oil in the Dutch oven over medium-high heat until it shimmers.
        • Add the beef cubes and brown them on all sides for about 6-7 minutes, about a minute or two per side. Transfer them onto a plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and set it aside. Do not wash the pot.
        • Add 3 cups chopped onion, 1 ½ cups of carrots, and 1 cup celery to the pot and cook on medium-high heat, until softened, stirring frequently, for about 10 minutes.
        • Add the 4 minced cloves of garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
        • Add 3 tablespoons of tomato paste and cook, stirring constantly for about a minute or so. Season with 1 teaspoon of kosher salt and ½ teaspoon of black pepper.
        • Stir in ½ cup of red wine and scrape any brown “bits” at the bottom of the pot using a wooden spoon.
        • Add the browned beef (with all the juices), 7 cups of beef broth, one 14-ounce can of diced tomatoes, and 3-4 sprigs of fresh thyme. Give it a stir, place the lid ajar, and bring it to a boil. Then, turn the heat down to medium-low and let it simmer for 30-45 minutes or until your meat is fully cooked and tender.
        • Next, stir in 1 cup pearl barley and 1 tablespoon of Worcestershire sauce.
        • Let it simmer, with the lid ajar, for 45-55 minutes, keeping a close eye on it and stirring occasionally, until the pearl barley is tender but has a slight “bite”.
        • Turn the heat off, remove the thyme bundle, and stir in 2 tablespoons of apple cider vinegar if using. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
        • Add ½ cup of chopped fresh parsley and serve right away.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 11-12 cups of soup, enough to serve 6 adults. The nutritional information below is per serving.
        • Consistency of the soup: As the soup simmers, you’ll see some of the liquid evaporate, resulting in a thicker soup. I recommend keeping the lid slightly ajar while simmering to prevent too much liquid from evaporating. This helps maintain the soup’s rich flavor without diluting it. Still, you can add more broth or water for a thinner consistency. However, be sure to add warm liquid to keep the soup’s temperature consistent.
        • Storage and freezing: You can store the leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4-5 days and in the freezer for up to 3 months. Just be sure to bring it to room temperature before storing it. Thaw it overnight in the fridge.
        • Reheating: Transfer the leftovers to a saucepan, add a cup (more or less) of water or broth, and warm on medium heat, stirring regularly.
        • Slow cooker beef and barley soup: If you’re looking for a more hands-off approach, or want to make it ahead, you can cook this soup in your crockpot. The process is similar but with a few key differences. Simply:
          • Sear the meat, set it aside, sauté the vegetables, and cook the wine while scraping up those browned bits. 
          • Store the meat and veggies separately in airtight containers in the fridge overnight. 
          • In the morning, transfer everything to a slow cooker, along with the rest of the ingredients. Cook it on low for 7-9 hours or high for 4-5 hours until the meat is tender. If you can, stir it a few times during the process. 
          • When done, stir in the apple cider vinegar and parsley right before serving.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 462kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 37g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 104mg | Sodium: 2069mg | Potassium: 1051mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 5700IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 89mg | Iron: 6mg

        Storage, Freezing, and Reheating

        One of the great things about this vegetable beef barley soup is that it tastes even better the next day as the flavors develop and meld, so you can make a big pot as a part of your meal plan and enjoy it throughout the week. 

        Here is how I do it:

        Storing leftovers: Let the soup cool to room temperature, then transfer it to an airtight container. It will keep well in the refrigerator for 4-5 days. As it sits, the soup will thicken since the barley continues to absorb liquid. When reheating, add a splash of broth (or water) to thin it out.

        Freezing: Once it comes to room temperature, transfer it to freezer-safe containers and freeze for up to 3 months. When you’re ready to enjoy it, thaw it overnight in the fridge for the best texture and flavor.

        Reheating: To reheat, transfer the soup to a saucepan and warm it over medium heat, stirring occasionally. Since it thickens as it sits, add a small amount (no more than ¼ cup) of water or beef broth as needed to loosen it.

        Pro-Tip for Meal Prepping: If you are making this as a part of your meal prep, I recommend slightly undercooking the barley (about 5 minutes). This way, it will reach perfect tenderness during reheating.

        Variations & Substitutions

        What I love most about this recipe for beef barley soup is that it is easily adaptable with whatever you have on hand. Here are some substitution and variation ideas to make this soup your own:

        Other types of beef: When it comes to meat choice, you have options:

        • Other cuts: Instead of chuck roast, you can also use boneless short ribs, beef shank, or brisket, all of which work for slow cooking.
        • Beef stew meat: You can use pre-cut packaged beef stew meat from most grocery stores, but be sure to check that it’s sourced from the same cut, such as chuck roast, rather than a mix of random trimmings from different leftover cuts. Doing so ensures that you end up with evenly cooked meat with a similar texture and taste.
        • Ground beef: You can use ground beef for a quick and easy beef barley soup. This version, often called hamburger barley soup, allows you to skip the longer cooking time required for tougher cuts. Simply sauté the ground beef (hamburger meat), then cook the vegetables in the same pot.
        • Already cooked (leftover) beef: If you have some leftover roast, prime rib, or beef tenderloin, you can cut them into bite-sized chunks and use them in this veggie beef barley soup. Since the leftover meat is already cooked, you can skip sautéing it at the beginning and add it when you add the broth.

        Additional vegetables: Parsnips, turnips, mushrooms, peas, green beans, or leeks would all be delicious additions. And if you want to sneak in some greens, you can stir in a handful of baby spinach or even kale at the very end. 

        Spices: While I kept the recipe simple with salt and pepper, you can enhance the flavors and bring warmth to your soup by adding a small amount of ground cumin, ground coriander, sweet paprika, and a few bay leaves. These additions add depth to the broth without overpowering the overall flavor.

        FAQs

        Why did my barley turn mushy?

        Barley usually turns mushy if it’s added too early or cooked for too long. Pearl barley needs time to soften, but it should still have a slight bite. To avoid this, add it after the beef has had time to tenderize and keep an eye on the simmer so it doesn’t overcook.

        What is the best cut of beef for beef barley soup?

        The best cuts of beef for beef barley soup are those that can handle longer cooking times, such as chuck roast, short ribs, beef shank, or brisket. These cuts contain connective tissue that breaks down as the soup simmers.

        How long does it take to cook barley in soup?

        If you are using pearl barley, it typically takes about 45-55 minutes to cook in soup. The exact timing can vary slightly by brand, so it’s best to check the packaging for exact timing and use its texture as your guide.

        Do you cook barley before adding it to soup?

        No, there’s no need to cook the barley beforehand. Pearl barley is added uncooked and cooks directly in the soup, absorbing flavor from the broth as it softens.

        Can I use quick-cooking barley?

        Yes, but keep in mind that quick-cooking barley has a much shorter cooking time, usually 10-15 minutes, since it’s partially pre-steamed. If using it, add it toward the end of cooking to prevent it from becoming overly soft or mushy.

        What to Serve With Beef Barley Soup

        While this barley vegetable beef soup is excellent on its own, here are my favorite pairings:

        Other Beef Soup Recipes You Might Like

        It is no secret that beef soups and stews are the classic winter comfort food. If you are in need of more inspiration, here are a few more recipes:

        • Freezer favorite: If you love slow cooker meals, try my Crockpot Vegetable Beef Soup. It’s a set-it-and-forget-it version of classic vegetable beef soup, made with similar ingredients. It’s great for meal prep and freezes well.
        • An Old-Fashion Classic: For a quicker but similar soup, try my Vegetable Beef Soup is an old-fashioned favorite that comes together in under an hour. 
        • Weekend Meal Prep Favorite: If you’re in the mood for a cozy weekend supper, my Eggplant Beef Stew is a slow-simmered stew with pull-apart beef and a rich sauce.

        This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/beef-barley-soup/feed/ 4
        Christmas Fruit Salad https://foolproofliving.com/christmas-fruit-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/christmas-fruit-salad/#respond Mon, 23 Dec 2024 15:15:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79518 Making a fruit salad for Christmas is probably one of the easiest ways to bring a burst of color, freshness,…]]>

        Making a fruit salad for Christmas is probably one of the easiest ways to bring a burst of color, freshness, and flavor to your holiday table with minimal effort. While I focused on red and green fruits to keep it festive, the great thing about this recipe is that you can use virtually any fruits you have on hand.

        Christmas salad with fruit in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients and Substitutions:

        Like any great salad recipe, this fruit Christmas salad has two main components: the dressing and the fruit. To achieve the best flavor and texture, use ripe—but not overripe—fruits. Here’s everything you’ll need:

        For the Dressing:

        The dressing ingredients to make Christmas brunch fruit salad.
        • Maple Syrup: With its rich, caramel-like flavor, maple syrup adds a touch of natural sweetness to the salad. If you prefer, honey makes an excellent substitute.
        • Lemon zest: Be sure to zest the lemon before squeezing it, and whatever you do, do not skip using it, as it enhances the dressing by adding a concentrated burst of citrus flavor and aroma.
        • Lemon Juice: The bright, tangy flavor of lemon juice adds a refreshing tartness to the salad, while its acidity helps prevent the apples and pears from oxidizing and browning. However, you can use other citrus and fruit juices like lime juice, pineapple juice or orange juice.
        • Vanilla Extract
        • Spices: Ground cinnamon and a pinch of nutmeg add warm, spiced notes to the dressing, giving it a cozy, festive flavor perfect for the holiday season. 

        For the Fruit Salad:

        While I am listing a bunch of fruits, feel free to use this as a guide and a place to start to make your own winter fruit salad with whatever fruit you have on hand.

        The fruit used in the recipe in bowls.
        • Apples: I used a combination of green apples (such as Granny Smit) and red apples (Gala or Honeycrisp), but any other type of apple would be lovely.
        • Pear (Red, Anjou, or Bosc): Sweet and juicy pears balance the tartness coming from apples. 
        • Oranges: You can use a combination of navel oranges and mandarin oranges (if you can get your hands on them). I know it is an extra step, but take the time to segment the orange for a clean, membrane-free presentation that ensures each piece is tender, juicy, and easy to eat. Alternatively, you can use clementines as a substitute if you can get your hands on them.
        • Kiwis: I included kiwis for their green color and sweet and tart flavor. 
        • Red or green grapes: When buying grapes for making this Christmas day fruit salad, be sure to choose firm, seedless green or red grapes for the best texture and ease of eating.
        • Pomegranate seeds: Many Christmas recipes with fruit feature pomegranate arils, not just for their sweet-tart flavor but also for their vibrant, jewel-like pop of color they bring to the dish. Here is an easy way to cut pomegranate if you need a refresher.
        • Raspberries: I included raspberries for their vibrant red color and to add a delicate, softer texture that balances the crunch of the other fruits in the salad. Strawberries would be a great substitute if you can’t find raspberries.

        Optional Toppings:

        Many Christmas fruit dishes can end up looking like just a simple pile of fruit in a bowl. While optional, by adding a few thoughtful toppings, you can elevate the presentation and bring in extra pops of color and texture, making the salad as stunning as it is delicious. Try adding:

        • Coconut flakes: If you have the time, toast them to enhance their flavor with a warm, nutty aroma that adds even more depth to the salad.
        • Fresh mint: A few sprigs of fresh mint can add a refreshing aroma and a vibrant pop of green, making your salad look and taste even more festive.

        How To Make Christmas Fruit Salad?

        Yes, there’s a bit of chopping involved, but don’t let that intimidate you—this xmas fruit salad recipe is super simple to put together. It’s quick to assemble, making it a great choice for busy holiday mornings. Here’s how to do it:

        A collage of images showing how to make fruit bowl for Christmas.
        1. Make the Dressing: To keep cleanup simple, prepare the dressing directly in a large bowl. Whisk together the maple syrup, lemon juice, lemon zest, vanilla extract, ground cinnamon, and nutmeg until well combined.
        2. Chop the Fruit: Begin by chopping the apples and pears, then add them to the bowl with the dressing. Coating them in the acidic dressing immediately helps prevent browning. Continue peeling and chopping the rest of the fruit (except raspberries) and place them in the bowl. Give it a toss to ensure all the fruit is evenly distributed and coated with the dressing. If you have the time, chill it for an hour or for upto six hours before serving.
        3. Garnish and serve: Right before serving, top it off with raspberries and garnish with coconut flakes and/or fresh mint, if using. 

        How To Make Ahead, Store and Freeze?

        Once you’ve made this fruit salad for xmas, you won’t want any of it to go to waste. With a bit of planning, you can keep it fresh and delicious for longer. Here’s how:

        • Make ahead: Prepare the salad dressing and store it in a jar in the fridge for up to two days in advance. You can rinse, peel, and cut all the fruits—except the apples and pear—a day ahead. Keep in mind that pre-cut fruit will release some of their juices. When you’re ready to serve, chop the apples and pear, add them to a bowl with the other fruits, and drizzle everything with the dressing. Add the raspberries and serve.
        • Storage: Store leftovers of this holiday fruit bowl in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Keep in mind that the fruits will release their juices over time, but the salad will still taste great. Give it a good toss before serving.
        • Freezing: The leftovers of this Christmas fruit salad can be used to make smoothies. However, I recommend draining the juices (and the dressing) before freezing. Once drained, portion and place the leftover fruit in freezer-safe bags and freeze for upto 3 months.

        Expert Tips:

        • Uniform Cuts: Chop all fruits into similar-sized pieces for even mixing and easy eating. If you have the time, use cookie cutters (affiliate link) to cut apples and pears in fun shapes (like I did in the pictures). This is especially a fun way to make this salad with kids.
        A collage of images showing cutting of the fruit using cookie cutters and the finished dish.
        • Presentation: Use a clear trifle dish or a colorful holiday fruit bowl to show off the salad’s vibrant red and green colors, perfect for a Christmas morning fruit salad centerpiece.
        • Add Raspberries Last: I intentionally added the raspberries at the last minute as their soft texture can easily break.
        • Portion Planning: This recipe yields approximately 8 cups, suitable for a small Christmas dinner, but can be multiplied as needed. 
        • Make it your own: This recipe is a perfect starting point for creating your own signature fruit salad for any holiday! While the citrus-maple dressing is my go-to for Christmas, I love switching things up for other occasions. For Thanksgiving, I’ll often use my honey lime dressing for a bright, zesty twist that complements the autumnal flavors of the season. For Easter, I might add a splash of orange blossom water to the dressing for a festive springtime touch. No matter the holiday, this salad is versatile enough to adapt and impress every time!

        Serving Suggestions:

        This Christmas fruit salad recipe is wonderful when served on its own or as a refreshing side dish, but why not make it extra special for the holidays? Here are a few indulgent serving ideas to take it to the next level:

        You Might Also Like

        If you make this festive fruit salad recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Christmas fruit salad in a bowl.
        Print

        Christmas Fruit Salad Recipe

        Celebrate the holidays with this easy Christmas Fruit Salad recipe. Red and green fruits, drizzled with a citrus-maple dressing, make it a light and refreshing addition to your holiday table.
        Course Dessert
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 277kcal

        Ingredients

        For the dressing

        • 2 tablespoons maple syrup or honey
        • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
        • ¼ cup lemon juice freshly squeezed or lime juice
        • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
        • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon
        • Pinch of nutmeg

        For the fruit salad

        • 1 green apple (about 1 ½ cups) peeled, cored and cut into ½ -inch cubes – such as Granny smith apples
        • 1 red apple about 1 ½ cups, peeled, cored and cut into ½ -inch cubes – such as Honey Crisp, Gala or Fuji
        • 1 pear (180g/1 ½ cups) peeled, cored and cut into ½ -inch cubes – such as Red, Anjou or Bosc
        • 2 oranges (140g) peeled and segmented or mandarin oranges
        • 2 kiwis (142g/1 cup) peeled, quartered, and cut into ½- inch cubes
        • 1 cup green grapes 190g cut in half
        • 1 cup pomegranate arils (160g)
        • 6 ounces raspberries (170g)

        Optional Garnish

        • Sprigs of mint optional topping

        Instructions

        • To make the dressing: In a large salad bowl, whisk together the maple syrup, lemon juice, lemon zest, vanilla extract, cinnamon and nutmeg.
        • To make the salad: Add the apple, pear, orange segments, kiwis, grapes and pomegranate arils. Toss to coat thoroughly. Chill for at least an hour or up to 6 hours in the refrigerator.
        • Right before serving, top it off with raspberries and garnish with fresh mint leaves, if using. Serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 8 cups of fruit salad, ideal for 8 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Make ahead: Prepare the salad dressing and store it in a jar in the fridge for up to two days in advance. You can rinse, peel, and cut all the fruits—except the apples and pear—a day ahead. When you’re ready to serve, chop the apples and pear, add them to a bowl with the other fruits, and drizzle everything with the dressing. Add the raspberries and serve.
        • Storage: Store leftovers of this holiday fruit bowl in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. 
        • Freezing: The leftovers of this fruit salad can be used to make smoothies. However, I recommend draining the juices (and the dressing) before freezing. Once drained, portion and place the leftover fruit in freezer-safe bags and freeze for up to 3 months.
        • Uniform Cuts: Chop all fruits into bite-sized pieces for even mixing. If you have the time, use cookie cutters to shape the apples and pears into fun designs (like I did in the pictures). It’s a great way to make the salad more festive and a fun activity to enjoy with kids!
        • Presentation: You can serve this salad in a large salad bowl or transfer it into a trifle dish, if you have one. Alternatively, you can place it in a large platter as well.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 277kcal | Carbohydrates: 57.1g | Protein: 2.8g | Fat: 5.4g | Sodium: 6mg | Potassium: 405mg | Sugar: 40.4g | Calcium: 100mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/christmas-fruit-salad/feed/ 0
        Marron Glace Recipe (Candied Chestnuts) https://foolproofliving.com/marron-glace-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/marron-glace-recipe/#comments Wed, 04 Dec 2024 17:52:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79176 Humans have relished in candied chestnuts, or marron glacés, since the 16th century. Marron glacé (sometimes also referred to as…]]>

        Humans have relished in candied chestnuts, or marron glacés, since the 16th century. Marron glacé (sometimes also referred to as Marron Lyonnaise) originated in Northern Italy and France, where chestnuts thrive in the autumn and winter months. While preparing this French chestnut delicacy does take four days, the hands-on time is surprisingly minimal once your chestnuts are peeled.

        If you love roasting chestnuts in the oven or over an open fire but are looking to expand your chestnut repertoire, this European classic is a must-try. Yes, the prep time for this marrons glacés recipe may be a bit lengthy, but the process is straightforward and requires no advanced skills. Plus, making these candied chestnuts at home is far more budget-friendly than purchasing them at the store—without compromising that irresistible sweetness!

        Candied chestnuts in a gift box.

        What is marron glacé made of? The Ingredients List:

        Our recipe for candied chestnuts uses just four basic ingredients. However, the success of the end product will significantly depend on the quality of the ingredients you choose. 

        Below is everything you need to look for when buying them:

        Chestnuts:

        It is no secret that the chestnuts are the star ingredient in this recipe. When buying chestnuts, there are a few things to pay attention to:

        • Get the freshest chestnuts you can find: If possible, we recommend hand-selecting your chestnuts to ensure they are equal in size. Look for those that are plump, smooth, shiny, and without any blemishes or mold. Feel it between your fingers to ensure the skin is not dry. Once you’re back at home, one way to test freshness is to drop your chestnuts in a bowl of water. If any float, discard them, as they’re likely hollow inside the shell.
        • Not all chestnuts are created equal: In terms of chestnut variety, the French ‘marrons’ are superior in quality as they tend to be larger in size and more tender in texture. However, it’s hard to find them here in the US. A great alternative is Italian chestnuts, sold at national supermarkets like Whole Foods and Trader Joe’s during the holiday season. For this recipe, we recommend avoiding Chinese chestnuts. While they tend to be cheaper, we find them more challenging to peel.
        • Store-bought pre-cooked and peeled chestnuts are a great shortcut: If you’re short on time or don’t have access to fresh chestnuts, you can buy them (affiliate link) from the store. One important thing to remember is you need to ensure that the only ingredient used is chestnuts. Store-bought, already-sweetened chestnuts won’t work in this recipe. 
        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

        For The Syrup:

        • Water: You need a ratio of 1 part water to 1 part sugar to make the sugar syrup the peeled chestnuts soak in.
        • Vanilla Bean: Use a whole vanilla pod sliced in half to flavor the sugar syrup. The vanilla beans infuse into the syrup for maximum flavor. We advise you against using vanilla extract if you can avoid it. While it won’t ruin the recipe, we found that much of it evaporates along with the water as the syrup reduces.
        • Sugar: Since we do our best to use natural sugars in our recipes, we sweetened the syrup with cane sugar, but granulated white or brown sugar can also be used.

        How to Make Marron Glace?

        Below are the step-by-step instructions detailing the process of making glazed chestnuts. At first glance, the process might look intimidating, but once you’re done with boiling and peeling the chestnuts, the rest will take no more than 5 minutes a day.

        If you’re new to boiling chestnuts, we recommend you first review our guide on How To Boil Chestnuts, as we go into all the nitty gritty details there.

        1. Score the chestnuts: Use a small, sharp knife (or a paring knife, chestnut knife, or a sharp serrated knife) to score a cross outside the shell, right across the middle or “belly” of the chestnuts. Turn it 90 degrees and cut another one, creating an X. Don’t go too deep with your cuts—you want to pierce through the outer shell and the inner fuzzy skin, but do your best not to cut through the flesh too much.
        2. Boil the chestnuts in water: Place two cups of cold water into a medium-sized saucepan and boil over medium heat. Carefully drop the chestnuts into the boiling water and cook for 15-20 minutes. Towards the end, you’ll see the cut part start opening up as they cook, revealing the fuzzy skin on the inside. To check for doneness, carefully remove one chestnut and peel to check if the yellow flesh is fully cooked. If the pulp is soft and creamy, it is cooked. Remove the pan from the heat once they are all (mostly) open.
        Person peeling chestnuts and images showing sugar syrup.
        1. Peel your chestnuts while they are still warm: Carefully remove chestnuts one at a time from the hot water and hold them using a clean dish towel if they’re too hot. Using a sharp knife, peel off the shell and fuzzy skin underneath. If you’re having difficulty removing it, place it back in hot water for a few more minutes.
        2. Make the sugar syrup: Place the chestnuts in a colander and rinse them under cool water. Add the sugar and water to a saucepan and bring to a simmer. Stir continuously until the sugar is fully dissolved. Continue simmering for another five minutes until the sugar syrup turns golden brown. If you are using granulated sugar, the syrup should remain clear.
        Chestnuts in sugar syrup with vanilla bean.
        1. Cook the chestnuts in the sugar syrup: Add the chestnuts and halved vanilla bean into the syrup. Simmer your marrons in syrup for 10 minutes while stirring gently, being careful not to break up the chestnuts. 
        2. Set aside for 24 hours: After 10 minutes, take the saucepan off the heat, put the lid on, and let it sit on the counter for 24 hours. The chestnuts will cool down in the syrup and soak up some of the liquid as they rest.
        3. Cook the chestnuts in syrup a second time: The next day, place the saucepan back on the stovetop and gently heat the syrup until it is simmering. Continue to simmer for another 3 minutes. Remove from the heat, place the lid back on, and set aside to cool.
        Marron glaces drying on a wire rack.
        1. Cook the chestnuts in syrup two more times: Repeat the process of cooking the chestnuts in syrup two more times, waiting 24 hours between each time.
        2. Place chestnuts on a wire rack: After the 4th and final round of simmering in syrup, using a slotted spoon, remove the chestnuts one at a time, draining off excess liquid. Place them onto a baking tray fitted with a wire rack. Continue with the rest of the chestnuts one by one and spread them evenly on the wire rack. Make sure you lift out any little bits that may have broken off.
        3. Dry out the chestnuts in the oven: Preheat the oven to 120F (or as low as it will go) and place the chestnut tray in it. Cook the chestnuts for an hour. Remove the tray from the oven if the nuts have dried and hardened. If they’re still a bit sticky, prop the oven door open and leave the tray inside until thoroughly dried out. 
        4. Serve your marrons glaces: This French confection took effort to make and thus deserves a presentation worthy of your efforts! The best way to serve them is to individually wrap the chestnuts in parchment paper, paper cases, or place them in mini cupcake liners (affiliate link). 

        How To Store and Freeze Candied Chestnuts?

        • To store: Wrap each candied chestnut individually in parchment paper. Place in a sealed container and refrigerate for up to a week.
        • To freeze: Store the individually wrapped chestnuts in an airtight container and freeze for up to 1 month. Defrost at room temperature.

        Ways To Use Marron Glaces

        This candied chestnut recipe is incredibly versatile. Once you’ve made your marrons glacés, there are many ways to enjoy these delicacies:

        • Dessert: Make a Coupe Marron. This is a French classic that, I think, is worthy of your caramelized chestnuts. Add a scoop of vanilla ice cream to a tall glass, add your candied chestnuts, and then top it with a spoonful of whipped cream. It’s a simple yet decadent dessert, perfect for holiday entertaining.
        • Breakfast: Crumble marrons glacés over your favorite oatmeal, porridge, granola, or stack of pancakes
        • Meat and Cheese Board: Adding a sweet element to a cheese and charcuterie board is perfect alongside savory bites. The nutty, sweet earthiness from these chestnuts makes a beautiful, elevated addition to your serving platter.

        Expert Tips

        While making this glazed chestnuts recipe is fairly simple, there are a few important details to remember. Here are some helpful tips we’ve learned along the way to ensure your first attempt is a success:

        • Patience is key when scoring and peeling chestnuts: Take your time to carefully score the outer shell and fuzzy skin, aiming to pierce the skin without cutting too deeply into the flesh. Once cooked, peel the chestnuts while they’re still hot, as the skin becomes much harder to remove once they cool. Keep a paring knife nearby to help with any stubborn bits of skin that get stuck in the folds of the chestnut.
        • Save the broken pieces: Store them in a jar; they will taste just as good. Use them as a topping for ice cream or oatmeal.
        • Heat the syrup gently: Keep the sugar syrup at a gentle simmer rather than letting it boil. Also, it is best to stir regularly to prevent the chestnuts from sticking to the bottom of the pan and ensure they’re evenly coated throughout the whole process.
        • Watch the sugar syrup level: Towards the end, if your syrup reduces too much, the chestnuts will start sticking to the bottom of the saucepan. If that happens, feel free to add a small amount of water (¼ cup or less) to thin it out and maintain consistency.
        • Keep the sugar syrup: Don’t discard the syrup after removing the chestnuts. Pass it through a sieve and store it in an airtight container in the fridge. It’s a great alternative to maple syrup. I love it when poured into cocktails and drizzled over oatmeal and ice cream.
        Candied chestnuts on a plate.

        FAQs

        What is marron glacé in English?

        In English, marron glacé translates to candied chestnuts. It is a French candy made by simmering chestnuts in a sugar syrup until they become tender and coated with a glossy, sugary glaze.

        What do marrons glacés taste like?

        Marrons glacés are sweet through the center with a hard, sugared exterior and tender, nutty, sweet-tasting flesh.

        Why are candied chestnuts so expensive?

        Marron glacé is expensive because making them is labor-intensive and time-consuming. Each chestnut must be carefully scored, peeled, and cooked in sugar syrup over several days, requiring precision and attention to detail. Additionally, high-quality chestnuts add to the cost, making it a luxury treat.

        Other Chestnut Recipes

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Marron Glace (Candied chestnuts) on a plate from the top view.
        Print

        Marron Glace Recipe (Candied Chestnuts)

        Marron Glacé, or candied chestnuts, are a luxurious French treat you can make at home. Sweet, nutty, and delicious, but cheaper than store-bought yet just as decadent!
        Course Dessert, Snack
        Cuisine French
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 1 hour
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Resting/cooling time 4 days
        Total Time 4 days 1 hour 15 minutes
        Servings 12 servings
        Calories 240kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 ½ lbs fresh chestnuts should give you 1.25lb/570g when peeled
        • 2 cups water more to boil chestnuts
        • 2 cups cane sugar or granulated sugar
        • 1 vanilla bean cut in half lengthwise

        Instructions

        • Place the chestnut on a cutting board flat side down. Hold it firmly between your index finger and thumb and make a horizontal slit and then turn the chestnut 90 degrees and make a second cut forming an “X.” Make sure to score through the hard outer shell and the fuzzy skin underneath. Do your best not to cut any deeper into the chestnut flesh. Repeat the same process for all of the chestnuts.
        • Fill a saucepan with cold water and bring it to a boil. Carefully place the chestnuts into the boiling water and cook for 15-20 minutes. The cut part will start opening up as they cook, revealing the fuzzy skin on the inside. To check for doneness, carefully remove one chestnut and peel to check if the yellow flesh is fully cooked. If the pulp is soft and creamy, it is cooked. Remove the pan from the heat once they are all (mostly) open.
        • Using a slotted spoon, remove one to two chestnuts at a time, as they will be hot. If needed, use a kitchen towel to protect your hands. Carefully peel away the hard outer shell and the fuzzy inner skin, taking care not to break the chestnut. If the fuzzy skin is stuck in the folds of the chestnut, use the tip of a knife or a toothpick to remove it. If the skin is stubborn, return the chestnuts to the hot water for a minute to loosen it, then try peeling again. Once done, you can discard the shells, skins, and cooking water.
        • Place the now-boiled chestnuts into a colander and give them a quick rinse. Set aside.
        • To make the sugar syrup, add 2 cups of water and sugar to a medium-sized saucepan and bring it to a simmer over medium heat. Stir it continuously until the sugar dissolves. This should take no more than 7-9 minutes.
        • Carefully add the vanilla bean and chestnuts to the sugar syrup. Let them simmer for 10 minutes, stirring once every 2-3 minutes.
        • Turn the heat off. Carefully remove the vanilla bean and discard it. Put the lid on and let it sit at temperature for 24 hours.
        • After 24 hours, return the pan to the stove and bring the sugar syrup to a simmer, cooking the chestnuts for 3 minutes. Stir the syrup and chestnuts every few seconds to keep them from sticking to the pan. Once again, remove the pan from the heat, cover with a lid, and set aside at room temperature for 24 hours.
        • Repeat this process twice, heating and cooling every 24 hours (it should be 4 times in total).
        • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and place a wire rack over it. Preheat the oven to 120F (or as low as your oven can go.)
        • After the final time, carefully remove them one at a time with a slotted spoon. Let the syrup drip off as much as possible. Spread the chestnuts on the wire rack.
        • Transfer the baking sheet to the preheated oven. Bake low and slow for 1 hour*. The chestnuts should be dry and hardened on the outside. If they’re still sticky, turn the oven off, open the door, and leave the chestnuts to continue drying inside.
        • To serve, individually wrap the chestnuts in parchment paper or cellophane or place them in mini cupcake liners. Gift and/or enjoy.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 18-20 candied chestnuts, depending on the size of your chestnuts. I listed the serving as 10 (2 per person) and the nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Short on time? If you are planning to gift these candied chestnuts and make a bigger batch, you can save time by buying already cooked and peeled chestnuts. Just make sure that the only ingredient listed on the packaging is chestnuts.
        • Heat the syrup gently: As you warm up the sugar syrup, keep the sugar syrup at a gentle simmer rather than letting it boil. Also, it is best to stir regularly to prevent the chestnuts from sticking to the bottom of the pan and ensure they’re evenly coated throughout the whole process.
        • To store: Wrap each candied chestnut individually in parchment paper or mini cupcake liners. Place in a sealed container and refrigerate for up to a week. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 240kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 275mg | Sugar: 33g | Vitamin A: 15IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 12mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/marron-glace-recipe/feed/ 2
        Pumpkin Oatmeal Muffins https://foolproofliving.com/pumpkin-oatmeal-muffins/ https://foolproofliving.com/pumpkin-oatmeal-muffins/#comments Thu, 26 Sep 2024 12:31:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11121 Pumpkin season is here, and today’s recipe, pumpkin oat muffins, is exactly what you need. Not only do they not…]]>

        Pumpkin season is here, and today’s recipe, pumpkin oat muffins, is exactly what you need. Not only do they not require much effort in the kitchen, but they also make your whole house smell like pumpkin season. 

        Like our Easy Pumpkin Bread and Almond Flour Pumpkin Bread, these muffins are a quick breakfast perfect for busy mornings throughout the fall season and best enjoyed with your morning coffee.

        Pumpkin oat muffins on a plate from the top view.

        Ingredients You’ll Need

        This pumpkin oatmeal muffins recipe requires just a handful of simple ingredients you probably already have on hand. You will need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.
        • Coconut Oil: I used melted and cooled coconut oil, but you can also use avocado oil, olive oil, or unsalted butter (though it won’t be dairy-free) if preferred.
        • Sweetener: One of my favorite natural sweeteners is pure maple syrup, but you can also use honey. I would not swap the liquid sweetener out for a dry granulated sweetener (like coconut sugar or brown sugar) because this will affect the moisture content.
        • Eggs: Use two large eggs at room temperature. For a vegan pumpkin and oats muffins recipe, use flax eggs. To make flax eggs that is equal to two eggs, mix two tablespoons of ground flaxseeds (aka flaxseed meal) with 5 tablespoons of water. Let the mixture sit for 10 minutes until it has a gel-like consistency. Use it in the recipe in place of eggs as written.
        • Pumpkin: Make sure to use pure pumpkin puree and not pumpkin pie filling. If you prefer fresh pumpkin puree, you can make yours following this Homemade Pumpkin Puree recipe.
        • Milk: I used unsweetened almond milk, but other options include full-fat coconut milk, cashew milk, or oat milk. You can also use regular whole milk instead.
        • Vanilla extract
        • Whole Wheat Flour: Whole wheat flour keeps adds extra fiber but regular all-purpose flour can be used instead.
        • Kosher Salt: Salt enhances all those oatmeal and pumpkin flavors.
        • Baking Soda: Baking soda helps the muffins rise and promotes a golden brown color.
        • Pumpkin Pie Spice
        • Old-Fashioned Oats: The types of oats you use will determine the final texture of your muffins. I prefer Rolled Oats vs. Quick Oats because they are chewier and more substantial. Quick oats make the muffins too mushy, so I do not recommend using them.
        • Raisins: I highly recommend the raisins because they add the right amount of sweetness. Dried cranberries (apple juice sweetened preferred) are a good substitute.

        Optional Add-Ins

        Here are some additional mix-ins you can add to these healthy oat pumpkin muffins to make it your own:

        • Pumpkin Seeds: Sprinkle the tops of the muffins with pumpkin seeds (pepitas).
        • Chocolate Chips: To give it that pumpkin-and-chocolate vibe, sprinkle with dark chocolate chips (affiliate link) or white chocolate chips.
        • Nuts: Toss in some toasted and chopped pecans or walnuts for crunch.

        How to Make Pumpkin Oatmeal Muffins?

        These oatmeal pumpkin muffins come together in a flash; the hardest part is waiting for them to bake in the oven. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

        A collage of images showing how to make this healthy breakfast pumpkin muffin recipe.
        1. Prep muffin pan: Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F/163 degrees C. Line a 12-cup muffin tin with parchment paper liners. If you do not have liners, generously coat the muffin cups with coconut oil, butter, or cooking spray.
        2. Whisk wet ingredients: In a large bowl, whisk the melted coconut oil, maple syrup, eggs, pumpkin puree, almond milk, and vanilla extract until smooth.
        3. Mix the dry ingredients: In a separate medium bowl, mix the whole wheat flour, Kosher salt, baking soda, pumpkin pie spice, and oats until combined.
        4. Make the muffin batter: Add the dry ingredients to the bowl of wet ingredients. Mix until just combined—do not overmix. Fold in the raisins.
        Person portioning the muffin batter in a muffin tin and then topping each cup with chocolate chips.
        1. Fill muffin pan: Scoop the batter into each cup, about ⅔ full. Top with pumpkin seeds or chocolate chips if using.
        2. Bake: Bake for 25-27 minutes until a toothpick inserted into the center of a muffin comes out clean. 
        3. Cool: Allow to cool in the pan for 10 minutes before removing. Transfer the muffins to a wire rack to cool completely. Enjoy plain, with a drizzle of almond butter or a dollop of vanilla yogurt.

        How to Store, Freeze, Thaw, and Reheat?

        If I have the extra time, I usually bake a double batch of these oatmeal pumpkin spice muffins as they make the best snack or quick breakfast. You can easily grab one and go because they store well. Here are my best storage tips to keep these muffins fresh and moist as long as possible:

        • Storage: Store muffins in an airtight container at room temperature for 3-4 days. The cold moisture in the fridge will draw out some of the moisture.
        • Freeze: Cool completely, then transfer to a freezer-safe container or freezer bag, squeezing out all the air. Freeze for up to 3 months.
        • Thaw: Thaw in the fridge overnight or right on the kitchen counter to room temperature.
        • Reheat: Pop one in the microwave for 10-15 seconds or reheat in an oven or toaster oven until warm, about 5 minutes.
        Healthy pumpkin oatmeal muffins fresh out of the oven in a muffin tin.

        Expert Tips

        While this recipe is pretty straightforward for any home baker, there are a few things worth mentioning to help you succeed on your first try. Here are a few helpful tips for the best oatmeal pumpkin muffin recipe:

        • Use parchment liners: The parchment paper liners make for easy removal and no messy clean-up. I love these Parchment Liners (affiliate link).
        • Do not overmix: The key to light and fluffy pumpkin muffins with oatmeal is not to overmix. This will prevent too much gluten from forming in the batter.
        • Make your own pumpkin spice: If you can’t find it at the grocery store or prefer to make your own, mix 3 tablespoons ground cinnamon, 2 teaspoons ground ginger, 2 teaspoons nutmeg, 1 teaspoon allspice, and 1 teaspoon ground cloves. Stir to combine. This makes 5 tablespoons of pumpkin spice, you can use some of it in this muffin recipe and store the remainder in an airtight container in a cool place for up to 6 months.

        FAQs

        Why are my pumpkin muffins gummy?

        Pumpkin muffins become gummy when you overmix the batter. This means that too much gluten was developed during the mixing process, making tough, dense muffins.

        If you try this Healthy Pumpkin Muffins recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Other Pumpkin Recipes You Might Like

        Healthy oatmeal pumpkin muffins from the top view.
        Print

        Pumpkin Oatmeal Muffins Recipe

        Easy and healthy Pumpkin Oatmeal Muffins are made with whole wheat flour and rolled oats and are minimally sweetened with maple syrup. They are the perfect grab-and-go breakfast or an afternoon snack when craving something sweet.
        Course Breakfast
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 25 minutes
        Total Time 40 minutes
        Servings 12 muffins
        Calories 220kcal

        Ingredients

        • cup coconut oil melted and cooled
        • ¾ cup maple syrup
        • 2 large eggs at room temperature (or flax eggs)
        • 1 cup pumpkin puree (unsweetened) (not pumpkin pie filling)
        • ¼ cup unsweetened almond milk or regular milk
        • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
        • 1 ¾ cup whole wheat flour 8.9 oz./266g
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • 1 teaspoon baking soda 5g
        • 2 teaspoons pumpkin pie spice
        • cup old-fashioned oats 40g
        • ½ cup raisins roughly chopped
        • 2 tablespoons pumpkin seeds as garnish (optional)
        • ¼ cup chocolate chips as topping (optional)

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F/163 degrees C. Line a 12-cup muffin tin with parchment liners. If you do not have parchment liners, generously coat the cups with oil.
        • To prepare the wet ingredients, place coconut oil, maple syrup, eggs, pumpkin puree, almond milk, and vanilla extract in a large bowl. Whisk until thoroughly combined. Set aside.
        • To prepare the dry ingredients, whisk together whole wheat flour, kosher salt, baking soda, pumpkin pie spice and oats in a separate large mixing bowl until fully incorporated.
        • Fold the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients and mix just until combined. Do not overmix.
        • Fold in the raisins.
        • Scoop the batter into each muffin cup, about ⅔ full. If preferred, top with the pumpkin seeds or chocolate chips.
        • Bake for 25-27 minutes until a toothpick, when inserted, comes out clean.
        • Let cool for 10 minutes before removing from the pan onto a wire rack to cool.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 12 muffins. The nutritional values below are per muffin.
        • Storage: Bring them to room temperature and store in an airtight container for upto 4 days.
        • Freeze: Cool completely, then transfer your muffins to a freezer bag, squeezing out all the air. Freeze for up to 3 months.
        • Flax eggs: If you prefer a vegan pumpkin oatmeal muffins recipe, use flax eggs instead. Mix 2 tablespoons of ground flaxseeds (aka flax meal) with 5 tablespoons of water to make flax eggs. Let it sit for 5-10 minutes or until it reaches a gel-like consistency. Use it in the recipe in place of eggs.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 220kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 27mg | Sodium: 308mg | Potassium: 235mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 3220IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 50mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/pumpkin-oatmeal-muffins/feed/ 47
        Harissa Honey Chicken https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-honey-chicken/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-honey-chicken/#comments Fri, 20 Sep 2024 13:02:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78045 If you’ve never tried using harissa to marinate chicken, this is your sign to start! A harissa marinade brings a…]]>

        If you’ve never tried using harissa to marinate chicken, this is your sign to start! A harissa marinade brings a perfect balance of spice, heat, smoke, and sweetness, while the oils tenderize the chicken, and the spices infuse it with rich, aromatic flavor. If you are a fan of harissa chicken recipes, be sure to check out our simple grilled harissa chicken as well.

        Freshly cooked harissa paste and chicken on a plate from the top view.

        What is Harissa Honey Chicken?

        Harissa honey chicken is an easy dinner in which chicken is marinated in a mix of harissa, garlic, lemon juice, and honey. The star ingredient of this recipe, harissa, is a North African chili paste made from hot chili peppers, garlic, olive oil, lemon juice and various spices, such as cumin, coriander, and caraway seeds.

        A short 30 minutes of marinating turns an otherwise bland chicken into a smoky, spicy, and subtly sweet, truly unique dish. Honey harissa chicken can be baked in the oven or grilled, with each cooking method resulting in deeply caramelized, juicy meat. The dish has been famous recently thanks to the popular restaurant chain CAVA.

        Ingredients You’ll Need:

        This harissa honey chicken recipe requires a handful of simple ingredients, all of which you can get from your local grocery store:

        Ingredients for the recipe with text on the image.
        • Chicken: We love extra rich and juicy boneless, skinless chicken thighs, but skinless and boneless chicken breasts can also be used as a leaner option.
        • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper allows the harissa and honey to shine.
        • Harissa: You have a few options when it comes to Harissa. You can make your own Harissa Sauce at home, which allows you to control the heat level and ingredients. If you are short on time, you can use Harissa Powder and make Harissa Paste from Powder. Or, you can save yourself a few steps in the kitchen and purchase a jar from grocery stores. Different brands have varying spice levels, ranging from moderately spicy to intensely hot, so I always like to taste the harissa before making the marinade. My favorite store-bought brand of harissa is Mina Harissa (affiliate link) (also available at Whole Foods), which is mild. There is also New York Shuk Harissa (affiliate link), which is a little more potent, or Trader Joe’s Tunisian Harissa, which is the least expensive.
        • Fresh garlic cloves: While we think fresh garlic delivers the best flavors, you can use garlic powder (¼ teaspoon of garlic powder per 1 clove of garlic) if you prefer a milder garlic flavor. 
        • Fresh lemon juice & lemon zest: We used freshly squeezed lemon juice in the recipe, but apple cider vinegar can be substituted. 
        • Honey: Honey and harissa are a delicious combination because the sweetness of the honey balances and enriches the spicy chilis in the harissa without making it sweet. We felt that ¼ cup honey was a good amount for two pounds of chicken but feel free to add more or less depending on how spicy you want the chicken.

        How to Make Harissa Honey Chicken?

        This honey harissa chicken recipe is easy to make with just a few basic steps.
        Here are the step-by-step instructions:

        A collage of images showing how to prep harissa chicken marinade.
        1. Season chicken: Pat the chicken thighs dry with a paper towel. Season both sides with Kosher salt and black pepper.
        2. Make the harissa chicken marinade: In a large bowl, combine harissa, garlic, lemon juice, and honey.
        3. Marinate the chicken: Add the seasoned chicken thighs to the harissa marinade. Toss to coat them fully. Cover and refrigerate for at least 30 minutes, or a couple of hours.
        4. Preheat the oven: Place an oven rack in the center. Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees Celsius. Line a large sheet pan with parchment paper.
        Hot honey harissa chicken on a sheet pan before and after it is cooked.
        1. Arrange chicken thighs: Place the chicken on the baking sheet, spacing them apart evenly. Brush any leftover sauce on top of the chicken thighs.
        2. Bake: Bake for 13-15 minutes, or until the internal temperature of the thickest chicken thigh reaches 165 degrees F when inserted with a meat thermometer.
        3. Rest, then serve: Tent the chicken with aluminum foil and let it rest for 10 minutes. Serve the chicken thighs whole, or transfer them to a cutting board and cut (or shred) as desired. Drizzle the remaining delicious honey harissa sauce left on the sheet tray over the chicken before serving.

        How to Store, Freeze, Thaw, and Reheat?

        Harissa baked chicken is an easy recipe to make ahead of time and store for later. Here are my storage tips so none of this bold and delicious chicken goes to waste:

        • Make Ahead: You can marinate the chicken a day in advance. Simply make the marinade, add the chicken, cover it tightly, and refrigerate until ready to bake.
        • Storage: Cool the chicken to room temperature. Then, store the leftover chicken in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
        • Freeze: Depending on your preference, you can freeze harissa honey chicken cooked or uncooked.
          • Freezing cooked chicken: Allow the cooked chicken to come to room temperature. Transfer to a freezer-safe container and freeze for up to 3 months.
          • Freezing raw chicken: To get ahead for meal prep, place the raw chicken thighs and harissa marinade in a freezer-safe plastic storage bag, portioning as desired. Push out as much air as possible, seal, label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
        • Thaw: Whether cooked or uncooked, thaw the frozen chicken overnight in the refrigerator.
        • Reheat: If reheating cooked chicken, reheat in a low oven (~300 degrees F) until warm, about 10 minutes. If cooking the raw chicken, remove it from the fridge 30 minutes beforehand, then bake as instructed in the recipe below.

        What to Serve with Harissa Chicken?

        Chicken with harissa and honey is a highly versatile meat that pairs beautifully with various dishes. The good news is that you can prepare a side dish while the chicken cooks and have dinner in no time. Here are a few ideas to help you with your menu:

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        • Pay attention to spice level: We recommend making your harissa from scratch, as this allows you to control the spice level, especially if you are serving kids or are spice-sensitive. If you use a storebought brand to save time, taste it before making the marinade and adjust the quantity as necessary.
        • Broil for 2 minutes: While we didn’t find it necessary, if preferred, you can broil the chicken on high during the last 1-2 minutes of cooking to intensify those char-grilled flavors. However, keep a close eye on it to prevent it from burning.
        • Don’t forget the juices: After the chicken is done cooking, there will be plenty of juice on the sheet pan. For best results, baste the chicken with these juices as soon as it comes out of the oven and drizzle the remaining juices over the chicken when serving.

        FAQs

        Is harissa honey chicken spicy?

        This depends on the spice of the harissa. If you are using a homemade harissa, then you can adjust the spice level. If you use a store-bought harissa, taste it before making the marinade and adjust the spice level to your liking.

        Can I use tomato paste instead of harissa?

        We do not recommend it. Tomato paste is not a one-to-one substitution for harissa because one is tomato-based while the other has a base of hot chili peppers. If you do need a substitute for harissa, I’d recommend another chili-based sauce, such as sriracha, sambal oelek, or chipotle in adobo sauce. Keep in mind that this will alter the taste and flavor profile.


        If you make your own Harissa Honey Chicken following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Honey harissa chicken on a plate served with tzatziki on the side.
        Print

        Harissa Honey Chicken Recipe

        Harissa honey chicken makes a delicious savory, spicy and sweet weeknight meal inspired by CAVA’s harissa chicken. It’s a quick and easy chicken dinner that comes together with only 6 basic ingredients.
        Course Dinner
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Marinating Time 30 minutes
        Total Time 1 hour
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 404kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 pounds boneless skinless chicken thighs or chicken breasts
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon fresh ground black pepper
        • ½ cup harissa homemade or storebought
        • 1 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil *please see note
        • 5 cloves garlic finely minced or grated
        • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
        • ¼ cup honey

        Instructions

        • Pat the chicken thighs dry with paper towels and season them with salt and pepper on both sides. Set aside.
        • In a large bowl, whisk together the harissa sauce, garlic, lemon juice, and honey until fully combined.
        • Add the chicken thighs and toss to coat them fully with the sauce. Cover and refrigerate for at least 30 minutes.
        • Place an oven rack in the center of the oven. Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees Celsius. Line the sheet pan with parchment paper.
        • Arrange the chicken thighs on the baking sheet. Brush any leftover sauce on top of the chicken thighs.
        • Bake for 13-15 minutes, or until the internal temperature of the chicken thigh, when a probe is inserted into the thickest part, reaches 165 degrees F.
        • Cover with foil and let it rest for 10 minutes. Drizzle the remaining liquid on the baking sheet over the chicken before serving.

        Notes

        • Yields: Depending on the size of your chicken, this recipe makes 5-6 harissa chicken thighs ideal for serving 4-6 people. I listed the serving as 4, but the portions would be large. The nutritional values below are per serving (of 4 servings)
        • Olive oil: If you are making your own harissa you will not need this, but if you are buying it from the store, I recommend adding 1 tablespoon of extra virgin olive oil into the harissa chicken marinade. The storebought harissa tends to be thicker (with a paste-like texture) and could benefit from a small amount oil.
        • Marinading time: While we thought that a 30-minute marinating time was necessary, you can marinade your chicken for upto 8 hours if you prefer to make it ahead of time.
        • Tzatziki sauce: The sauce on the side of my harissa honey chicken in pictures is a bowl of tzatziki.
        • Alternative cooking methods: While we love the hands-off cooking method of roasting the chicken in the oven, you can cook it on the stovetop or a grill. 
          • If cooking on the stovetop, preheat a cast iron skillet or large skillet over medium-high heat until it is very hot. Lightly grease with oil and cook the chicken in a single layer for 4-5 minutes per side. 
          • If you want to cook the chicken on an outdoor grill, preheat the grill to 400 degrees F. Grease the grates and cook for 5-6 minutes per side. The spicy honey harissa chicken is done when the internal temperature reaches 165 degrees F with a meat thermometer inserted into the thickest part of the chicken.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 404kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 45g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.04g | Cholesterol: 215mg | Sodium: 1242mg | Potassium: 716mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 287IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 36mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-honey-chicken/feed/ 6
        Homemade Pita Bread Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-pita-bread-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-pita-bread-recipe/#comments Fri, 06 Sep 2024 13:49:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77885 Pita bread—also known as Arabic bread, Lebanese bread, and Mediterranean pita—is a must-have for any Middle Eastern meal. However, it’s…]]>

        Pita bread—also known as Arabic bread, Lebanese bread, and Mediterranean pita—is a must-have for any Middle Eastern meal. However, it’s not the only homemade bread that comes together in a cinch. I have dozens of easy no knead bread recipes to fill out any menu, whether you need a rich brioche or a flaky biscuit.

        Several freshly baked fluffy pita bread on top of each other.

        What is Pita Bread Made Of?

        There are only six simple ingredients in pita bread, making this recipe a cost-effective way to flex your baking skills (and it tastes so much better than store-bought pita!).

        Ingredients for pita bread from the top view.
        • Water: It’s essential that your water is lukewarm (about 105-110 degrees F. or 40-43 degrees C) before adding it to your pita mixture. If the water is too hot, you’ll kill the yeast, but if it’s too cold, the yeast won’t “bloom.”
        • Active dry yeast: I used active dry yeast in this pita dough recipe, which required me to “activate” the yeast before adding other ingredients. Of course, you can use instant dry yeast, but your dough will rise more quickly, and the recipe’s timing will be shorter.
        • Granulated sugar: Sugar is vital among your pita bread ingredients, as it helps activate and fuel the yeast (in addition to giving it a lightly sweet, tender flavor!). To make this recipe refined sugar-free, you can use cane sugar instead.
        • All-purpose flour: I used all-purpose flour in my pita, but you may use bread flour instead if desired. However, keep in mind that bread flour has a higher protein content than all-purpose flour, which can give your pita a slightly chewier texture and a bit more structure. I would stick to all-purpose flour for light and tender pita bread, similar to store-bought pita bread.
        • Olive oil
        • Kosher salt 

        How to Make a Pita Bread Recipe From Scratch?

        You don’t have to work in a bakery to make pita bread like a pro. These step-by-step instructions will give you perfectly fluffy, golden-brown pita pockets, no matter how you want to cook pita bread: in an oven or on a skillet.

        A collage of images showing how to prepare (bloom the yeast) Arabian bread.
        1. Activate the yeast: Add the water, yeast, and sugar to a large mixing bowl and stir until combined.
        2. Add the first cup of flour: Add 1 cup (120 g.) of flour and the olive oil to the yeast mixture and stir until smooth, breaking up as many flour crumbs as possible and scraping down the bowl’s sides when necessary. 
        3. Let it rest: Once integrated, cover the mixture with a kitchen towel and let it rest until it begins foaming and forming bubbles (about 15 minutes).
        A collage of images showing how to make shawarma bread dough.
        1. Add the remaining ingredients: Add the remaining two cups (240 g.) of flour and the salt. Then, use a wooden spoon or clean hands to incorporate the dry ingredients until a sticky ball forms (approx. one minute). Cover the bowl with a clean kitchen towel, place it in a warm place, and let the pita bread dough rest for 30 minutes.
        2. Fold the dough: Hold one edge of the dough with your fingertips, then fold it halfway towards the middle of the ball. Turn the bowl 45 degrees and repeat this step until you complete a full turn. In the end, your dough should be smooth and elastic.
        Steps showing how to prepare the pita bread dough for baking.
        1. Add the olive oil: Drizzle one teaspoon of olive oil over the ball, rotating the dough and spreading the oil until the entire surface has an even coating. Cover the dough again and let it rest in a warm place until it doubles in size—about one hour.
        2. Separate the dough: Dust your work area with 3-4 tablespoons of flour, transfer the dough to the floured surface, and knead it until it forms a smooth ball (30-40 seconds). Then, use a bench scraper or sharp knife to divide the dough into eight equal pieces, with each piece weighing about 71 g.
        Steps showing how to roll the dough for gyro bread.
        1. Form the pita balls: Form each of the eight pieces into a ball, then place them on your work surface with their seam sides facing down. Cover the dough balls and let them rest for 20 minutes. They will slightly grow in size.
        2. Roll the pita bread rounds: Use a floured rolling pin to gently flatten each dough ball into a 6-inch circle, ensuring you don’t press so hard that the air bubbles flatten. Brush any excess flour off of your pita rounds and let them rest, uncovered, for 15 minutes.
        A collage of photos showing pita baking in the oven.
        1. Cook the pita dough:
          1. Bake the pita bread: Adjust your oven’s rack to the lowest position, place an upside-down baking sheet or pizza stone on top, and preheat the oven to 500 degrees F. Then, cut a large sheet of parchment paper into eight 6 x 8-inch squares and place each pita on its own sheet. Working with two rounds at a time, place the loaves and their parchment paper squares on the hot baking sheet. Bake the dough for 2.5 minutes, flip it over, and cook for another 2.5 minutes or until it puffs and is lightly browned. Remove the baked pitas from the oven and repeat the process with the remaining dough.
          2. Make a pan pita recipe: Heat a cast iron skillet on medium-high heat for ten minutes or it is super hot. It is imperative that your skillet is hot for the pita to puff. Then, lightly coat the bottom of the skillet with one teaspoon of olive oil. Place the dough onto the hot skillet one pita round at a time and cook it until bubbles form (about one minute). Then, flip the pita, cook it for one minute, and flip it one more time. Cook the bread for a final 30 seconds before removing it from the heat. Repeat this process until you cook all of the remaining loaves.
        2. Enjoy: Serve your fresh pita bread warm or store it for later use.

        How to Store, Freeze, Thaw, and Reheat Pita Bread?

        Making pita bread is a rewarding experience that doesn’t end when it’s fresh out of the oven! Not only is this recipe delicious right out of the oven, but it’s also a fantastic recipe for storage and freezing—just the thing for anyone who loves easy meal prep.

        • Make ahead: Want to turn this dough into an overnight pita recipe? Simply make your pita dough one day in advance and store the raw dough in the refrigerator until you are ready to bake. Take it out an hour before you are prepared to turn it into balls, and follow the recipe as written.
        • Storage: To store cooked pita bread, let it come to room temperature and place it in an air-tight container. The bread will then stay fresh in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
        • Freezing: When freezing your DIY pita bread, begin by letting the loaves cool to room temperature. Then, wrap them in plastic film and transfer them to a freezer-safe Ziploc bag with as much air removed as possible. Your pita will stay fresh in the freezer for up to three months.
        • Thawing and reheating: You don’t need to thaw your frozen pitas before reheating. Instead, place them directly into a toaster or low-heat oven (300 degrees F.) for 3-4 minutes or until heated.

        FAQs

        What is pita bread?

        Pita bread is a soft, light, and puffy bread with roots in the Middle East. In particular, this bread is known for its hollow, “pocket”-like center, which makes it a classic bread for savory fillings like shawarma, doner kebabs, and gyros.

        Where is pita bread from?

        Pita bread originates in the Middle East—particularly in the area of ancient Mesopotamia. Since then, however, this recipe has become a staple in many different countries’ cuisines, leading to a wide variety of names—“Middle Eastern bread,” “Mediterranean bread,” and “Syrian bread,” just to name a few.

        Does pita bread have yeast in it?

        Yes, traditional pita bread recipes need yeast to help the bread rise and give it its iconic “pocket”—where many fill it with savory additions, like shawarma, gyros, or other cooked meats.

        How to make pita bread soft?

        If your cooked pita bread ever becomes “hard” or “stale,” you can restore its softness by wrapping it in a damp cloth and placing it in a microwave or low-heat oven until warm. You can also help prolong your bread’s soft texture by placing your loaves in a plastic bag right after they’ve cooled from the oven. 

        Is there egg in pita bread?

        Pita bread typically doesn’t contain eggs. Instead, it traditionally includes a mixture of water, yeast, flour, and salt—a great recipe for those who are looking for a vegan bread option.

        Is pita bread Greek?

        Not quite. Pita bread is native to Middle Eastern regions, but it has since become popular in Greek cuisine—especially as a “gyro bread”—which leads many to think that it comes from Mediterranean areas.

        Aysegul’s Helpful Tips

        I might be biased, but I believe I shared the best way to make a homemade pita recipe here. However, there are a few things that I’d like to bring to your attention for succeeding on your first try. In this section, you’ll find everything you need to achieve the fluffiest, tastiest, and most authentic taste.

        • Digital scale: If you have a digital scale, I highly recommend using it for this quick pita bread recipe. It is especially helpful when dividing the dough into small bowls, helping you achieve evenly sized pita pockets.
        • Lukewarm water: Water temperature is the key to letting your yeast work its magic. Be sure to use lukewarm water (about 105-110 degrees F.), as too-hot water will kill the yeast, and too-cold water will keep the yeast from blooming.
        • Bottom rack vs. top rack: Direct heat is necessary when developing beautifully browned pocket bread. Therefore, you should always bake your pita on the bottom rack of your oven—not the top—and be sure to place parchment paper under each of your pita rounds while baking.
        • Maintaining the oven temperature: The best way to make fluffy pita bread with an open pocket is to keep the oven consistently hot. Be sure to set your oven to 500 degrees F. (or 450 degrees F., depending on how hot your oven can get). I also recommend baking two pita rounds at a time to avoid overcrowding the baking sheet (or pizza stone).
        • A word on browning: When we tested this recipe, we tried to achieve a golden brown color during baking. However, regardless of how many times we tried, increasing the amount of oil and sugar or even the baking time resulted in a light golden-yellow color. So, in short, the color you see in the photos is true to what you will end up with when you make this recipe.
        • Using whole wheat flour: To make a whole wheat pita bread recipe, mix one cup of whole wheat with two cups of all-purpose flour. Whole wheat flour is heavier, and using too much will prevent your pita bread from rising or developing its signature “puff.”
        • Gluten-free: To make this pita recipe for gluten-free diets, substitute the all-purpose flour with an equal amount of gluten-free flour. Here in the US,  Bob’s Red Mill’s gluten-free 1-1 baking flour (affiliate link) is a good brand you can use.
        Pita pocket on a cutting board with other pita bread.

        What to Do With Pita Bread

        A staple in my house, pita bread is one of the most versatile ingredients in my pantry. Below are a few of my favorite recipes with pita bread—from hand-held pockets to party-ready flatbreads.

        • Fill the pockets: It goes without saying that making pita pockets is one of the most classic uses of pita bread—especially when packed with authentic Middle Eastern flavors! I love filling my pita with succulent, savory meats, like Beef Shawarma, Chicken Shawarma, and gyros. Or, you can make a tender, light lunch by using one of my favorite easy pita bread fillings: my Chickpea and Tuna Sandwich recipe!
        • Make a wrap: Making a pita wrap is another one of my go-to meals using pita bread. Tasty, customizable, and portable, this serving option is excellent for on-the-go lunches and weeknight dinners alike. I especially like to use freshly baked pitas to make Pita Wraps with Chicken—a succulent, flavorful dish you can dress up with my Tzatziki or Tahini Lemon Sauce.
        • Make chips: You can easily transform this pita bread bake into appetizer-ready pita chips by drizzling the loaves with olive oil, seasoning them with salt and pepper, and baking them until crispy—just like I do in my Mediterranean Nachos Recipe. Or, you can use it as a crunchy-soft addition to your favorite homemade Cava bowl recipes.
        • Serve with dips: Light, tasty, and versatile, this easy homemade pita bread is just what you need to fill out a dip platter. This Middle Eastern bread is especially delectable when paired with classics like my smoky Baba ganoush, creamy Hummus, tangy CAVA Feta dip, or savory-sweet Muhammara.
        • Serve it as bread: Fluffy, light, and fully dip-able, pita bread makes an excellent accompaniment to saucy dishes, soups, and stews. You can make a gourmet Indian meal with ease by serving your pita along with curry dishes, like Chicken Chickpea Curry, or you can use it to sop up every last drop of internet-famous Alison Roman’s Stew.
        • Make pizza: You don’t need to deal with complicated pizza dough when you have this simple pita recipe on hand. With a few simple toppings, you can make a pita flatbread to rival any carryout pizza.

        More Bread Recipes

        If you make this Homemade Pita Bread recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Several pita bread placed on top of each other from the front view.
        Print

        Homemade Pita Bread Recipe

        Once you make this Homemade Pita Bread Recipe you won't ever buy it from the store because it is not only easy to make, but also light years better. So, go ahead, make a batch use some for your favorite shawarmas, wraps, flatbreads or mezze platters and store (or freeze) the rest for later.
        Course Bread
        Cuisine Mediterranean, Middle Eastern
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 16 minutes
        Resting tim 2 hours 15 minutes
        Total Time 2 hours 46 minutes
        Servings 8 pitas
        Calories 191kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup luke-warm water 240 ml. (105-110 degrees F.)
        • 1 packet active dry yeast 7 g.
        • 1 teaspoon granulated sugar 4 g.
        • 3 cups all-purpose flour 360 g., divided, plus more for dusting
        • 1 tablespoon olive oil plus 1 teaspoon to coat
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt

        Instructions

        • To make the dough, stir together water, yeast, and sugar in a large bowl until combined.
        • In the same bowl, stir in 1 cup (120 g.) of flour and olive oil until smooth, breaking up most of the flour crumbs and scraping down the sides of the bowl as needed. Cover with a kitchen towel and let it rest for 15 minutes or until it starts to form bubbles.
        • Add the other 2 cups (240 g.) of flour and salt. Using a wooden spoon (or clean hands), mix to incorporate until a sticky ball forms, approximately 1 minute.
        • Cover the bowl with a clean kitchen towel and let the dough rest in a warm place for 30 minutes.
        • Holding the edge of the dough with your fingertips, fold it over halfway towards the middle. Turn the bowl at 45 degrees and repeat the same process until you complete a full turn. The dough should be smooth and elastic.
        • Drizzle a teaspoon of olive oil on top, rotate the dough ball, and spread the olive oil to cover the whole thing. Cover and let the dough rest in a warm place until it doubles in size, about an hour.
        • To prepare the dough balls, dust your work area with a small amount (3-4 tablespoons) of flour.
        • Transfer the dough and knead it for 30-40 seconds or until it forms a smooth ball.
        • Using a bench scraper (or a sharp knife), divide the dough into eight equal pieces, about 71 to 74 g. each.
        • Form each piece into a ball and place them on the lightly floured work surface with the seam sides down. Cover the balls and let them rest for 20 minutes.
        • To prepare the oven, adjust your oven rack to the lowest position. Place a baking sheet upside down (or a pizza stone) on the wire rack. Preheat the oven to 500 degrees F.*
        • Cut a large sheet of parchment paper into eight 6 by 8-inch squares.
        • Using a floured rolling pin, gently flatten each ball into a 6-inch circle. Do not press down too hard so you retain the air bubbles.
        • Brush any excess flour off before placing them on a square piece of parchment paper. Let them rest, uncovered, for 15 minutes.
        • You can bake it in the oven or cook it on a cast iron skillet:
          Using the oven method: To bake the pita, work with two pita rounds at a time, and place the pita loaves with the parchment paper on the hot baking sheet. It is important to work quickly to maintain the oven temperature and allow the pita to “steam” open and create a pocket. Bake for 2 minutes and 30 seconds, flip over, and cook for another 2 minutes and 30 seconds, until lightly golden brown. Remove and repeat this process with the remaining dough.
          Cooking it in a skillet: Heat a cast iron skillet on medium-high heat for 10 minutes. It should be very hot. Using a brush or paper towel, lightly coat the bottom of the skillet with 1 teaspoon olive oil. Place a pita dough loaf onto the skillet and cook for 1 minute or until bubbles form. Flip and cook for an additional minute. Flip one more time and cook for an additional 30 seconds. Remove from the skillet and repeat until all loaves are cooked. You don't need to add more oil each time, but if the pan starts to look dry, you can add just a little bit more.
        • Serve while they are still warm.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 8 loaves of pita. The nutritional values below are per pita.
        • Using a standing mixer: You can make this recipe using a stand mixer fitted with a dough hook attachment. Instead of working the dough with your hands, simply follow this recipe with your mixer set at low speed, scraping down the sides of the bowl as necessary. Begin by mixing the water, yeast, and sugar for one minute. Then, mix in one cup of flour and olive oil until the dough becomes smooth (approximately one minute). After letting the dough rest for 15 minutes, add the remaining two cups of flour and salt and mix the dough until it forms a ball. When the dough separates from the bowl and begins attaching to the dough hook (in about a minute or so), you can remove it from the mixer’s attachment and let it rest for 30 minutes or until ready to fold. 
        • Gluten free: You can use a 1-1 gluten-free flour to make this recipe. We tested it with Bob’s Red Mills brand, and it worked well.
        • Fluffy pita pockets (troubleshooting): Two main factors to getting fluffy, soft pita bread are kneading and your oven’s temperature. Firstly, don’t skip on the last kneading, and don’t overwork your dough. If you press it too hard when rolling it, you may deflate the dough’s bubbles, leading to flat pita loaves. Secondly, keep your oven as hot as possible while baking, moving quickly to avoid any temperature decreases. Though these steps should ensure fluffy pita pockets, they’ll still be delicious even if they don’t puff up.
        • High-temperature oven: Knowing that not all ovens can reach 500 degrees F., we tested this recipe at 450 degrees F. The timing was slightly longer, with about 30 seconds more cooking time on each side of the pita bread.
        • Storage: Leftover pita can be stored in an airtight container (or a plastic bag) in the fridge for 3-4 days. Be sure to bring it to room temperature first.
        • Freezing: Wrap cooled pita loaves in plastic film and transfer them to a freezer-safe bag with as much air removed as possible. Your pita will stay fresh in the freezer for up to three months.
        • Thawing and reheating: No need to thaw frozen pita. You can reheat in a low-heat oven (or toaster oven) until warmed to your liking.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 191kcal | Carbohydrates: 37g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 0.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 294mg | Potassium: 59mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin C: 0.003mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-pita-bread-recipe/feed/ 2
        Muhammara Recipe (Roasted Red Pepper Dip) https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/#comments Mon, 26 Aug 2024 23:12:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=27123 If you are a fan of similar Middle Eastern dips and sauces, be sure to check out my Eggplant Yogurt…]]>

        If you are a fan of similar Middle Eastern dips and sauces, be sure to check out my Eggplant Yogurt Dip, Roasted Carrot Hummus, Mediterranean Hummus, Baba Ganoush, and Roasted Vegetable Dip recipes.

        What is Muhammara?

        Muhammara is a traditional Middle Eastern red pepper dip or condiment typically served a dip or sauce with warm pita bread. It is claimed by many countries, but the actual origin is the Syrian city of Aleppo.

        Also called Muhumra, Hamara, or Marmara, the dip is popular throughout Lebanon, Turkey, Armenia, the Middle East, and Meditteranean. It’s one of those recipes widely adapted according to the region and personal taste.

        Muhammara is served in a large bowl and garnished with walnuts, scallions, and dill.

        If you’ve never made this Middle Eastern pepper sauce, prepare to be amazed! Similar to its simpler version, roasted red pepper walnut dip, it is robust in flavor with sweet red peppers, nutty walnuts, and pomegranate molasses added to it to make it closer to its traditional version. All you need is a food processor and 30 minutes for a Meditteranean-inspired dip that is bright in color and flavor! Intrigued? Let’s break it down.

        My aunt was the queen of Muhammara sauce! This a delicious dip I grew up eating. We put it on everything – pasta, eggs, vegetables – and brought it to all our special occasions. Being one of the popular recipes of the Turkish Cuisine, pita chips and muhammara dip was our version of bread and butter.

        Key Ingredients:

        To make this Mediterranean red pepper sauce, you will need the following ingredients:

        All of the ingredients are photographed from the top view
        Walnuts are roasted in a baking sheet
        • Red Bell Peppers – Purchase fresh, organic, sweet red bell peppers the day you are going to prepare the dip for the best flavor. If you’re in a pinch, jarred roasted red peppers can be substituted; however, it’s worth noting that the flavor of homemade roasted red peppers is much sweeter than using ones from a jar, and the texture is softer.
        • Raw Walnuts – Toasting walnuts beforehand brings out more of their nutty, creamy flavor. I like to purchase a bulk of walnuts and toast them in a single layer on a large baking sheet in a 350-degree oven until light golden brown (about 7 minutes) as soon as I get home from the store, then cool completely and store them in an airtight container in the freezer. That way I have toasted walnuts ready whenever I need them!
        • Crackers – The authentic muhammara recipe is made with bread crumbs. In this modern version, I followed in the footsteps of the authors of the Vegetable Illustrated and used crackers instead. You can use any type of lean crackers, such as the simple water cracker. However, for even more flavor variation, use a cracker scented with rosemary, thyme, flax seeds, or sesame seeds. For best results, gently crack the crackers in a zip-top bag and finish crushing with a rolling pin.
        • Scallions – Use both green and white parts and be sure to roughly chop prior to adding to the bowl of your food processor.
        • Extra Virgin Olive Oil – This is a raw, uncooked sauce, so a good-quality Extra Virgin Olive Oil makes all the difference. My favorite is California Olive Ranch (affiliate link).
        • Pomegranate Molasses – If you are unfamiliar with pomegranate molasses, it is a slightly sweet, slightly tart syrup made from boiling down pomegranate juice (similar to how balsamic glaze is prepared). It gives the dip its signature sweet and tangy taste, adding an extra depth of flavor. It is a very popular ingredient in Middle Eastern cuisine and an authentic ingredient for this red pepper spread. Most supermarkets sell pomegranate molasses, but you can also purchase it online. If you need a suggestion, this pomegranate molasses (affiliate link) is the brand I use.
        • Lemon Juice – A hint of fresh acidity goes a long way and locks in the color of those beautiful roasted red peppers.
        • Paprika – I prefer sweet paprika over hot since the spice factor will come from the cayenne.
        • Cumin – Although not typically included, I like the punch of savory, smoky goodness cumin brings to this dip.
        • Kosher Salt – Use the amount called for in the recipe and adjust the taste to your liking at the very end. I also recommend finishing it off with some flaky sea salt.
        • Cayenne Pepper (or red pepper flakes) – A slight kick from the cayenne pepper transforms it into a healthy spicy capsicum dip (capsicum is another word for pepper). If you are not into spiciness, you can simply omit it. Alternatively, if you can get your hands on it, you can swap cayenne pepper with Aleppo pepper.

        How to make Muhammara?

        To make this Middle Eastern pepper sauce, simply:

        Red peppers are roasted and charred
        1. Roast bell peppers. Prepare the bell peppers by slicing off the stem end, removing the seeds and core with a spoon, slice in half and cut each half in three pieces. Remove the stem from the end and slice the end into large chunks. Transfer to a parchment-lined baking sheet and broil for 10 minutes, or until skins are well charred, making sure to rotate halfway through.
        2. Steam the bell peppers. Once roasted and charred, transfer the red bell peppers to a large bowl and cover with plastic wrap to steam for 10 minutes (this makes it easier to remove the skins). At this point, you can either leave the skins on for extra charred flavor or remove them.
        3. Crush the crackers. Place the crackers in a plastic bag, seal tight and gently crush with your hands. Finish crushing the crackers into coarse crumbs by rolling over with a rolling pin.
        Ingredients are placed in a food processor and photographed from the top view
        Dip is photographed in the food processor after it is processed
        1. Process all the ingredients. In the bowl of a food processor, add the roasted red peppers, walnuts, crackers, scallions, olive oil, pomegranate molasses, lemon juice, paprika, cumin, salt, and cayenne and process until smooth, about 15-20 seconds, scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through.
        2. Garnish and serve. Transfer to a small bowl, spread it with the back of a spoon, garnish with fresh dill, scallions, sesame seeds, and a drizzle of olive oil. Serve with more crackers, pita or crudites.

        Expert Tips:

        • Don’t have crackers on hand? Substitute ¼ cup plain breadcrumbs, which is actually more traditional. The crumbs are necessary to absorb extra moisture so the finished dip isn’t runny.
        • Want an even more smoky flavor? Replace the sweet paprika with an equal amount of smoked paprika. Also, if you can handle the heat, be sure to sprinkle it with Aleppo chili flakes.
        • For a vegan red pepper dip, make sure to purchase crackers that are vegan compliant.
        • Add a clove of garlic: While it is not a traditional ingredient, I sometimes add in a clove of minced garlic into the food processor for additional garlicky flavor as I did in this Vegan Red Pepper Dip recipe.

        FAQs

        How do you pronounce Muhammara?

        Muhammara is the formal pronunciation and it sounds like it is written (though the “h” is slightly sibilant, almost as if you are exhaling through a sore throat). Not so easy to get right! Mm’hamara is a more idiomatic version. It also means roasted or burnt (made red), sharing the same etymological root as the word red (Ahmar).

        Is Muhammara Similar To Harissa?

        Not quite. Muhammara has a mildly spicy, tangy and sweet flavor and usually served as a dip, spread or a sauce, whereas Harissa is more of condiment that is usually used as a flavoring agent for soups, stews, marinades with rich spicy flavors.

        Can I Use Jarred Roasted Red Bell Peppers?

        You sure can. Just be sure to drain all the liquid before placing the peppers into the food processor or blender.

        Can I Substitute The Pomegranate Molasses?

        While it won’t be the same thing, you have a few options when it comes to substituting pomegranate molasses when making this Middle Eastern red pepper dip. You can use balsamic glaze, cranberry juice concentrate, or you can mixa few teaspoons of lemon juice with a tablespoon of honey to get a similar sweet and tangy flavor.

        How Many Calories?

        This recipe makes 1 1/2 cups and easily serves 6 people. And one serving of it is only 176 calories! When you pair the dip with fresh sliced vegetables, it’s even better for you. So go ahead, eat your veggies!

        Can I Make Muhammara Without A Blender/Food Processor?

        Yes, you can. You can first start by chopping all of the ingredients finely using a sharp chef’s knife and then mix them in a bowl. Alternatively, you can use a mortar and pestle for a smoother texture.

        Is This Recipe Spicy?

        The authentic Muhammara is usually mildly spicy. However, the spiciness level depend on the recipe you are using. Usually the spiciness comes from Aleppo pepper (or red pepper flakes). When making muhammara at home, you can easily adjust the amount of red pepper flakes you use according to your preference.

        Storage Instructions:

        • To store your roasted bell pepper dip: Place muhammara in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Alternatively, drizzle it with a thin layer of olive oil to extend its shelf life. Doing so helps prevent air from reaching the roasted red pepper dip and, as a result, keeps it fresh longer.
        • Freezing: If you prefer to store it for a longer period of time, you can freeze this red bell pepper spread. Simply place it in an airtight container (or a freezer bag) remove the air out as much as you can and freeze for up to 2 months.
        • Thawing: Thaw it in the fridge overnight and give it a good stir before serving.

        Ways to serve this Syrian pepper sauce recipe

        There are a number of ways to serve this muhammara dip recipe, such as:

        • Dip: Definitely the most authentic, serve it as a dip with seed crackers, pita bread, or fresh sliced vegetables as a part of your mezze platter.
        • Spread: Slather it on sandwiches, fresh pita bread, wraps, or your morning toast. In my opinion, leftover muhammara makes the best sandwich spread.
        • Pasta Sauce: Prepare your favorite pasta and toss it in a large bowl with the muhammara and a bit of pasta water – no additional cooking required!
        • Pizza Sauce: Replace the tomato sauce on pizza with muhammara – such a fun, Meditteranean twist!
        • Topping: A scoop of muhammara makes an excellent topping for homemade CAVA bowls and pairs beautifully with other Mediterranean sauces like tzatziki and hummus.
        A bowl of the dip is served with crackers on the side

        Other sauce/dip recipes you might also like:

        If you try this Muhammara dip recipe or any other Middle Eastern Dip recipes mentioned in this post, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        muhammara dip in a bowl from the top view
        Print

        Muhammara Recipe

        Muhammara is a traditional Syrian red pepper dip made with roasted red peppers, walnuts, and pomegranate molasses. This recipe is easy to make, vegan and gluten-free. Serve as a dip, spread, or even as a pasta sauce. It is deliciously addictive!
        Course Appetizer
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Cook Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 30 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 176kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 red bell peppers medium-sized
        • ½ cup walnuts lightly roasted
        • cup crackers any type of lean cracker can be used*
        • 3 scallions chopped (both green and white parts)
        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • 1 ½ tablespoons pomegranate molasses*
        • 4 teaspoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
        • 1 ½ teaspoons paprika
        • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • teaspoon cayenne pepper

        Instructions

        • To roast the bell peppers: Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper. Slice the tops of the bell peppers and remove the stems from the tops. Using a paring knife (or a spoon) take out the core. Cut the bell pepper into three pieces. Place them on the sheet pan skin side up. 
        • Adjust oven rack 3 to 4 inches from the broiler element (or at the top rack) and heat broiler. Broil until the skin is well charred, 10 minutes. Be sure to rotate the sheet pan halfway through.
        • Place the now-charred peppers in a bowl, cover with plastic wrap and let it steam for 10 minutes. At this point, it is up to you to whether or not remove the skin. If you like the charred flavor, feel free to keep the skins on. If not remove and discard them. You should end up with approximately 1 cup of roasted bell peppers.
        • Place crackers into a ziplock bag and crush them with a rolling pin.
        • Place roasted peppers, walnuts, cracker crumbs, scallions, olive oil, pomegranate molasses, lemon juice, paprika, ground cumin, salt, and cayenne pepper into the bowl of a foods processor. 
        • Process until pureed, 15-20 seconds scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through processing. 
        • Transfer to a bowl and serve with crackers, pita bread, and/or crudites.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 1 1/2 cups of muhammara, which is ideal for serving 6 people as an appetizer/dip. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Best way to store: You can store this roasted red pepper dipping sauce recipe in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
        • * If you don’t have crackers on hand, substitute ¼ cups of plain breadcrumbs, which is actually more traditional.
        • Want an even more smoky flavor? Replace the sweet paprika with an equal amount of smoked paprika.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 176kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 227mg | Potassium: 149mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1358IU | Vitamin C: 55mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

        This recipe has been adapted (with minor changes) from Vegetables Illustrated (affiliate link).

        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/feed/ 17
        Almond Flour Banana Muffins https://foolproofliving.com/easy-banana-nut-muffins/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-banana-nut-muffins/#comments Tue, 20 Aug 2024 15:22:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15318 This banana muffins with almond flour recipe is inspired by my Almond Flour Banana Bread. These muffins are a quick,…]]>

        This banana muffins with almond flour recipe is inspired by my Almond Flour Banana Bread. These muffins are a quick, easy, portable alternative and add to my library of Recipes with Almond Flour.

        If you love baking with almond flour, be sure to also check out my Apple Almond Flour Muffins, Carrot Almond Flour Muffins, Almond Flour Blueberry Muffins, and Zucchini Almond Flour Muffins.

        Gluten free banana muffins with almond flour and chocolate chips on a plate from the top view.

        Ingredients You’ll Need

        These banana almond muffins are made with simple ingredients you probably already have in your pantry and fridge. We will need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Almond Flour: Go for blanched almond flour for best results. You can either pick up a bag from the store or make your own DIY Almond Flour. Almond meal (ground almonds with the skins) can be used instead, but the muffins will turn out more dense.
        • Baking Powder
        • Baking Soda
        • Ground Cinnamon: A hint of cinnamon adds a delicate background warmth.
        • Kosher Salt: A pinch of salt is needed to enhance that banana flavor.
        • Extra Ripe Bananas: For best results, use overripe bananas. Brown-speckled bananas provide natural sweetness and make super moist banana muffins.
        • Sweetener: My favorite sugar is coconut sugar, but using an equal amount of brown sugar or pure maple syrup would also work. Alternatively, your favorite keto sweeteners, like monk fruit or Erythritol (affiliate link) can be used as well. If you have less of a sweet tooth, omit the sugar for a no added sugar version.
        • Large Eggs: Eggs provide the right amount of lift and structure, especially for gluten-free almond flour. Bring the eggs to room temperature before mixing.
        • Vanilla Extract: A hint of warm vanilla adds just another level of flavor.

        Optional Add-Ins

        • Dark Chocolate Chips: Toss in about ¼ cup chocolate chips (affiliate link) and have some extra on hand for sprinkling on top too.
        • Chopped Nuts: Give them a banana nut muffin vibe with ¼ cup chopped walnuts, almonds, or pecans.
        • Dried Fruits: Add a pop of sweetness with raisins, dried cranberries, or dried cherries.
        • Make it paleo friendly: For the paleo version, in place of 1 teaspoon of baking powder, you can mix together 1/4 teaspoon of baking soda with 1/2 teaspoon of cream of tartar.

        How to Make Banana Muffins with Almond Flour?

        Here are the step-by-step instructions and photos to make these gluten-free banana muffins:

        A collage of images showing how to make this recipe.
        1. Prep: Position the oven rack in the center of the oven. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F (180 C). Line a 12-cup muffin pan with parchment paper muffin liners.
        2. Mix dry ingredients: In a large bowl, mix together almond flour, baking powder, baking soda, ground cinnamon, and salt.
        3. Whisk wet ingredients: In another large mixing bowl, whisk mashed bananas, coconut sugar, eggs, and vanilla extract until thoroughly combined.
        4. Make muffin batter: Place the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients and stir with a rubber spatula until just combined. Do not overmix.
        Almond banana muffin batter in a muffin tin.
        1. Fill muffin cups: Divide the batter into each muffin cup, filling about ¾ way full. If preferred, sprinkle them with chocolate chips.
        2. Bake: Bake muffins for 25-30 minutes. The muffins are ready when a toothpick or cake tester inserted into the center of the muffin comes out clean.
        3. Cool: Cool in the muffin tin for 10-15 minutes. Then, place the muffins on a cooling rack to cool completely.

        How to Store, Freeze, & Thaw?

        What I love most about this almond flour banana muffin recipe is that you can make a batch and enjoy it throughout the week, as long as they are stored properly. Here are my best storage and freezing tips:

        • Storage: Store muffins in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 2 days. For longer storage, store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
        • Freeze: Wrap each muffin in plastic wrap, then store it in a plastic freezer bag. Muffins can be frozen for up to 3 months.
        • Thaw: Thaw overnight in the fridge, or on the kitchen counter to room temperature.
        • Reheat: If you prefer your muffins warm, reheat in a low oven (300 degrees F) for 5-10 minutes, or pop one in the microwave for 5-10 seconds, until warm.
        Banana and almond flour muffins in a muffin tin right after they come out of the oven.

        Expert Tips

        While this recipe is pretty straightforward and easy to make. There are a few things that I’d like to share to help you make the best almond flour banana nut muffins on your first try:

        • Ripe bananas: Use extra ripe bananas for natural fruity sweetness and a better texture. I’ve found the best way to mash bananas is either with a potato masher or the back of a fork. Since bananas vary so much in size, it’s best to weigh the bananas after mashing (rather than using a measuring cup) to ensure the most precise measurement and the best consistency. 
        • Do not overmix: Just like traditional muffins with regular flour, do not overmix the batter. Overmixing will make them dense, which will result in them loosing their fluffy texture.
        • Don’t overbake: Start checking the muffins with the toothpick test at the 25-minute mark. The muffins will look underbaked, but they continue to bake while cooling.
        • Make it vegan: Vegan almond flour banana muffins will not rise as much but taste good. For the best egg substitute, substitute the eggs with flax eggs (1 flax egg = 1 tablespoon flaxseed meal + 3 tablespoons water).
        • Use parchment liners: Parchment paper liners (affiliate link) are the best and most efficient way to bake almond flour muffins and prevent sticking.

        FAQs

        Can I make this recipe with coconut flour?

        No. coconut flour is super absorbent and will alter the texture of the muffins dramatically. Stick to finely ground almond flour or almond meal.

        Why did my almond flour muffins sink?

        Muffins made with almond flour can sink if they are underbaked or overmixed, if there is too much moisture in the batter, if the oven temperature is lower than what is listed in the recipe, or if the leavening agents are not fresh.


        If you try this Almond Banana Muffin recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Other Almond Flour Recipes You Might Like

        Almond Flour Banana Muffins on a plate from the top view.
        Print

        Almond Flour Banana Muffins

        Moist and fluffy Almond Flour Banana Muffins that are gluten-free, dairy-free and paleo-friendly. Quick and easy to make, these low-carb muffins can be served as a healthy breakfast or snack.
        Course Naturally sweetened dessert
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 30 minutes
        Total Time 45 minutes
        Servings 12 muffins
        Calories 213kcal

        Ingredients

        • 3 cups almond flour
        • 1 teaspoon baking powder
        • ½ teaspoon baking soda
        • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • 3 bananas overripe & mashed
        • ¼ cup coconut sugar or brown sugar or keto friendly sweetener of choice
        • 3 large eggs at room temperature
        • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
        • ¼ cup chocolate chips optional

        Instructions

        • Place a rack in the center of the oven and preheat to 350 degrees F (180 C). Line a 12-cup muffin tin with parchement paper liners. Set it aside.
        • Prepare the dry ingredients by placing almond flour, baking powder, baking soda, ground cinnamon, and salt in a large bowl. Whisk to combine all ingredients.
        • Prepare the wet ingredients by placing the mashed bananas, coconut sugar, eggs, and vanilla extract in a separate large bowl and whisking to combine thoroughly.
        • Place the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients and stir until just combined. Do not over mix.
        • Divide the batter, using about 2.5 oz. of muffin batter per cup, into each muffin cup so that you have 12 muffins. If using, sprinkle the top of the muffins with chocolate chips.
        • Place in the oven and bake for 25-30 minutes. A toothpick or cake tester should come out clean when inserted into the center of the muffin. At first, muffins might look underdone, but they will continue to cook while cooling in the muffin tin.
        • Let it cool in the pan for 10-15 minutes before removing it and placing it on a wire rack for at least 1 hour before serving.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 12 muffins. The nutritional values below are per muffin and do not include the calories from optional chocolate chips.
        • For paleo banana bread muffins: To make almond flour banana muffins that are paleo friendly, mix together 1/4 teaspoon of baking soda with 1/2 teaspoon of cream of tartar and use it in place of baking powder.
        • Store: After they come to room temperature, leftover muffins can be stored in an airtight container. They will stay fresh for up to 5 days as long as they are stored in the fridge.
        • Freezing and thawing: Almond banana muffins can be stored in the freezer for up to 3 months. To prevent freezer burn, place them in an airtight container and remove all the air. Thaw in the fridge overnight.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 213kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Trans Fat: 0.004g | Cholesterol: 41mg | Sodium: 200mg | Potassium: 122mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 79IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 88mg | Iron: 1mg

        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/easy-banana-nut-muffins/feed/ 44
        Grilled Corn On The Cob https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-corn-on-the-cob/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-corn-on-the-cob/#comments Tue, 13 Aug 2024 14:08:51 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77631 In this foolproof guide, I’ll show you how to cook corn on the grill with and without the husk, as…]]>

        In this foolproof guide, I’ll show you how to cook corn on the grill with and without the husk, as well as other essential tips: how to buy corn for grilling, customize your seasoning, tailor your menu, and the best time and temperature to cook corn on the cob on the grill.

        If you prefer a quicker alternative to cooking corn on the cob, be sure to check out our Air Fryer Corn on The Cob recipe.

        Grilled sweet corn on a plate from the top view.

        Ingredients You’ll Need for Grilled Corn

        It only takes a handful of fresh, simple ingredients to make this tasty summer staple:

        Ingredients for the recipe.
        • Ears of corn: We used six ears of fresh sweet corn to make this recipe, but you can easily multiply the recipe and use more. For the best result, do your best to pick the freshest corn. Take your time to examine each ear of corn to avoid moldy, wet, or limp ones while at the grocery store.
        • Olive oil: Olive oil is only necessary if you’re grilling corn without the husk, as it helps the corn develop that external char.
        • Butter: Though optional, a few tablespoons of unsalted butter can add richness and depth to your grilled, seasoned corn on the cob.
        • Seasoning: After cooking corn on the grill, you only need a sprinkle of kosher salt and black pepper to bring out the veggie’s natural flavors.

        How to Grill Corn on the Cob?

        Below, I’ll show you two ways to make this recipe for barbeque corn on the cob: 1.) grilled corn with the husk on and 2.) grilled corn with the husk removed (AKA “husked corn”). 

        In the Husk

        Grilling fresh corn with the husk on is an excellent option for those who prefer juicier, sweeter cobs. The soaked husks keep the kernels moist by “steaming” them, though this method doesn’t produce as much char as naked cobs.

        A collage of images showing how to grill corn on the cob in the husk.
        1. Remove the silk strands: Peel back the husks from the corn, ensuring they remain attached to the cob. Then, remove as many silk strings as possible before bringing the husks back over the cob, covering the kernels again.
        2. Soak the corn cobs: Fill a large pot with tap water and place the corn inside. Let the cobs and their husks soak for fifteen minutes.
        3. Prepare the grill: Preheat the gas grill to medium-high heat (about 450 degrees F.).
        4. Dry the soaked corn cobs: Remove the whole corn cobs from their water bath and shake them to remove as much water as possible.
        5. Grill: Place the corn on the medium-hot grill and cook for 15 minutes—uncovered—while rotating the cobs every 3-5 minutes. At the end of 15 minutes, each side should have an even level of cooking.
        6. Serve: When ready, remove the corn cobs from the grill and remove their husks. Serve them with butter, salt, and pepper (if desired), and enjoy!

        Without Husks

        I recommend grilling husked corn on the cob if you prefer a smokier, more prominent char on your veggies.

        1. Preheat the grill: Heat the grill to medium-high heat (about 450 degrees F.).
        A collage of images showing how to grill corn on the cob without husks on a gas grill.
        1. Prepare the corn: Remove husks and silk strands from the corn cobs, then brush each side with a generous layer of olive oil.
        2. Place the sweet corn on the grill: Place the corn cobs on the hot grill grates. Keeping the grill uncovered, cook the corn until it reaches your desired char level, rotating the cobs every 3-4 minutes (about 15 minutes in total). Finally, pierce a kernel with a sharp knife or fork to test for doneness. Your corn is ready if the kernels are tender, juicy, and lightly charred.
        3. Serve: Remove the grilled cobs from the grill and serve them with butter, kosher salt, and pepper (if using).

        Seasoning Ideas for Grilled Corn

        It’s no secret that salt and butter are iconic additions to grilled corn on the cob. However, the best grilled corn seasoning is one you can customize to fit any flavor profile.

        Below are a few of my favorite ways to take basic corn seasoning to the next level.

        • Butter and salt: Though a staple, plain butter and a sprinkle of salt don’t have to be boring. You can infuse your grilled sweet corn with complex, robust notes using compound butter (hello, Baked Garlic Butter!), garlic, and fresh herbs. Or, you can add lemon zest and pepper to melted butter for a zestier and brighter corn seasoning option.
        • Elote (Mexican Street Corn): Fresh, tangy flavors are at your fingertips when you use this Mexican seasoning for corn on the cob on the grill. All you need are a few simple ingredients—like lime juice, mayonnaise, cotija cheese, sour cream, and chili powder—and you’re ready to please any crowd. If you are short on time but love the flavors of Mexican street corn, try our Elote Corn Dip.
        • Barbecue sauce: With similarly smoky and sweet undertones, BBQ corn on the cob pairs brilliantly with BBQ sauce. You can even make homemade barbecue sauce to ensure a perfect flavor match.
        • Cajun spice: Want to give your corn a touch of spice? My Blackened Seasoning packs all the bold, spicy taste of Louisiana cuisine into one simple seasoning mix.
        • Parmesan cheese and basil: You can put a gourmet spin on your barbequed corn on the cob by sprinkling it with Parmesan cheese and fresh chopped basil—a herby, cheesy, and undeniably delicious combination.

        How to Store and Freeze?

        Of course, grill-roasted corn on the cob tastes best right after cooking. However, it’s also great for meal prep, including short- and long-term storage. 

        • Storage: After cooking corn on the grill, let your leftovers reach room temperature. To avoid sogginess, I recommend wrapping the cooled cobs in plastic wrap (or aluminum foil) and placing them in an airtight container. You can then store the cobs in the refrigerator for 3-5 days. 
        • Freezing: You can freeze your BBQ corn as whole cobs or just the corn kernels. Either way, begin by letting the corn come to room temperature. If you want to preserve the entire cobs, wrap them in tin foil or plastic wrap, then place them in a freezer-safe Ziploc bag with as much air removed as possible. Or, you can remove the corn kernels and put them in an airtight container. You can then store your corn (whole or cut) in the freezer for up to 2-3 months.
        • Thawing: To thaw your grilled corn, transfer it to the fridge overnight until ready to reheat.
        • Reheat: There are three options to reheat your grilled corn cobs. You can put them on a medium-heat grill, heat them in the oven at 350 degrees F. for five minutes, or (if you’re short on time) microwave them in 30-second increments until warmed.

        How to Serve Grilled Corn on the Cob

        Want to fill out your menu after cooking corn on the cob on the grill? Here, you’ll find all the grilled corn recipes you need to fill your table, whether you’re in the mood for a BBQ classic or a light lunch solution.

        • Burgers: Can you imagine a better match than juicy burgers and grilled corn cobs? Not me! I can’t resist serving my tender kernels with a loaded Bacon and Avocado Burger and a side of super-fresh Vegan Coleslaw or creamy Deviled Egg Potato Salad.
        • Grilled meats and seafood: If you’re in the mood for a savory, protein-packed main, barbecue corn on the cob compliments nearly any grilled meat or seafood dish. I love serving this corn recipe with succulent seafood, like my smoky Grilled Salmon or citrusy Grilled Mahi Mahi. Or, when I’m craving a little spice, Grilled Harissa Chicken is the perfect way to enjoy authentic North African eats at home.
        • Salads: This juicy corn recipe pairs incredibly well with garden-fresh salads, adding irresistibly smoky, mildly sweet undertones to all your favorite recipes. I love using this easy grilled corn in Mexican-inspired dishes, like my Street Corn Salad Recipe, tender Corn Black Bean Salad, and zesty Cowboy Caviar.
        Barbequed corn on the cob with and without the husk shown.

        Expert Tips

        If you want to make the most flavorful, tender grilled corn cobs, you’re in the right place. This simple guide has tips on everything you’ll need, from how to grill corn on a gas stove to selecting the best produce.

        • Charcoal grilled corn on the cob: If you prefer cooking corn on a charcoal grill, be sure that you never leave your veggies alone—especially when you plan on grilling the cobs with their husks. The husks may catch fire when the corn sits over direct heat, causing a minor flare-up. If this happens, move the corn to the cool side of the grill, close the lid, and wait until the flames dissipate.
        • Grilling corn inside on a gas stove: Want the savory, smoky flavor of grilled corn without the hassle of outdoor grilling? You can make this recipe indoors by cooking corn on a grill pan over a gas stove. However, keep in mind that grilling corn on a grill pan takes a bit more time than cooking it on the grill, so be patient.
        • Tips for buying corn: There are a few key things to consider when selecting the best corn. Try to choose corn cobs with the following: 1.) firm, plump, and even kernels; 2.) light tan, sticky silk; and 3.) bright green, intact husks. Though fresh corn is easiest to find when in season, as long as you avoid old or moldy-looking produce, you should be able to find corn year-round at your local grocery store.
        • Without soaking: If you’re grilling corn with the husk on, I highly recommend soaking the veggies beforehand, ensuring the kernels come out tender and moist. Of course, you can cook the cobs without soaking them first, but the kernels are prone to drying out after grilling, and the husks are more likely to burn.
        • Dry out: Though achieving photo-ready grill marks is tempting, you mustn’t accidentally overcook your corn—especially when you try to char corn cobs with their husks still on. Too much cooking can dry out the corn kernels, making them tough and flavorless.
        • Keep a close eye on it: Because corn is susceptible to overcooking, it’s essential to keep a close eye on your cobs during the grilling process. Furthermore, you must rotate your corn while cooking to ensure equal cooking around the cob.

        FAQs

        It’s easy to make corn on the cob grill. However, if you want to know more about this beginner-friendly recipe, I’ve answered all your questions below.

        How long do you grill corn on the cob?

        I recommend grilling corn cobs at 425 degrees F. for about 15 minutes, rotating them as needed. However, you might adjust your grilling time slightly, depending on your ideal level of char.

        Do you have to boil corn before grilling?

        If you want to reduce grilling time, you can parboil corn before grilling. However, this step is unnecessary, and there’s virtually no difference in taste or quality—as long as you grill your corn with a high enough heat.

        How to soak corn before grilling?

        Pre-soaking is a great way to give your kernels maximum tenderness and flavor when you want to grill corn on the cob in the husk. To soak your cobs, remove their silk strands, replace their external husks, and place them in a pot filled with cool water for fifteen minutes. When ready, shake off as much water as possible, and they’re ready to grill!

        Can you freeze grilled corn on the cob?

        Definitely! To do so, let your corn cobs reach room temperature, wrap them in tin foil or plastic wrap, and place them in a freezer-safe bag with as much air removed as possible. Then, you can freeze the grilled corn for 2-3 months.

        Can you grill corn on the cob frozen?

        Though not ideal, you can undoubtedly grill frozen corn on the cob. To do so, begin by slightly thawing the frozen corn (letting it rest for 30 minutes to an hour at room temperature should suffice). Then, brush it with olive oil and cook it on a 400-degree F. grill for 15-20 minutes, rotating them occasionally until the kernels become tender and have a slight char.

        How to tell when grilled corn on the cob is done?

        You can tell when your corn is done grilling by piercing one of its kernels with a fork or knife. Your cobs should be ready when the kernels are tender, juicy, and have a little char.

        Other Corn Recipes You Might Like

        If you love roasted corn on the grill, you’re in luck! With these easy recipes, you can enjoy corn’s tender-crisp, sweet flavor any day of the week.

        Grilled corn on the cob on a plate from the front view.
        Print

        Grilled Corn on The Cob Recipe

        Grilling corn on the cob is an easy way to prepare a fresh, sweet, and smoky side that’s fit for any occasion: weeknight dinners, outdoor cookouts, summer get-togethers, and beyond.
        Course Vegan side dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Soaking time (optional) 15 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 157kcal

        Ingredients

        • 6 ears corn
        • ¼ cup olive oil use only if grilling without husks
        • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter more as needed (optional)
        • Kosher salt and pepper to taste

        Instructions

        To prepare corn with husks:

        • Peel the husks back from the corn, keeping them attached to the cob.
        • Remove the silk strands as best as you can. Bring the husks back to cover the kernels and the cob.
        • Fill a large pot with tap water and place the cobs in the pot. Let them soak for 15 minutes.
        • Preheat the grill to medium-high heat, about 425 degrees F.
        • Remove the corn cobs from the water, shaking to remove as much water as possible.
        • Place cobs directly on the grill grate and grill for 15 minutes, uncovered, rotating every 3-5 minutes for even cooking.
        • Remove the husks from the cob and serve the corn with butter, kosher salt, and pepper, if desired.

        To prepare the corn without husks:

        • Preheat the grill to medium-high heat, about 425 degrees F.
        • Remove the husks and silk from the corn cobs.
        • Generously brush the olive oil over all the corn cobs.
        • Place the corn cobs on the grill grate. Grill, rotating every 3-4 minutes, and cook, uncovered, for 15 minutes or to your desired level of “char.” The corn is done when the kernels are tender and have a slight char. You can check by piercing a kernel with a knife or fork; it should be tender and juicy.
        • Remove and serve with butter, kosher salt, and pepper, if using.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes six grilled corn on the cob. The nutritional information below does not include the calories coming from the optional butter.
        • Soaked or not soaked: This recipe was tested as noted above (i.e., with soaked corn cob husks), but we also tried it without soaking the corn with husks first. The cob with soaked husks produced a moist cob, while the non-soaked husk corn tasted slightly dry.
        • With or without husks: Grilling with soaked husks vs. no husks is based on preference. The soaked husk is moist, but it results in a limited char. By contrast, the “naked” corn has a nice char and smoky flavor, but it isn’t as moist.
        • Keep a close eye on it: It is important to stay with the corn as it’s being grilled because the oil can cause flare-ups. The husks can also catch fire when unattended.
        • Storage: Barbecue corn on the cob tastes best on the day it is grilled. However, you can store it in the fridge for up to 5 days. To avoid sogginess, I recommend wrapping the cooled cobs in plastic wrap and placing them in an airtight container.
        • Do not throw away the cobs: Make use of all the corn cobs and make corn stock! It is such an easy and nice way to get more life out of your grilled corn.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 157kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 14mg | Potassium: 243mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 168IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 2mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-corn-on-the-cob/feed/ 2
        Grilled Eggplant Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-eggplant/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-eggplant/#respond Tue, 06 Aug 2024 11:56:43 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77463 Versatile, tender, and delicious, eggplant is easily one of my favorite vegetables. If you’re like me, you can’t get enough…]]>

        Versatile, tender, and delicious, eggplant is easily one of my favorite vegetables. If you’re like me, you can’t get enough easy grilled eggplant recipes, which makes other dishes—like fresh Eggplant Caprese, Baked Eggplant Parmesan, and creamy Baba Ganoush—a no-brainer for simple meal prep.

        Grilled sliced eggplant on a plate garnished with fresh basil.

        Ingredients

        Eggplant

        • Selecting eggplant varieties: The first step to grilling eggplant is to determine which types of eggplant work best for your recipe. I prefer globe eggplants, as they’re widely available at U.S. grocery stores, have a plump shape, and are hearty enough to withstand high grilling temperatures. However, other larger eggplants—like rosa bianca, Italian eggplant, and graffiti eggplant—would also work, though you might have to adjust your cooking time slightly.
          Still, I don’t recommend using thinner varieties, like Japanese eggplant and Chinese eggplant, as they’re too small and delicate for this recipe.
        • Salting the eggplant: Though an option, salting eggplant isn’t necessary, as modern-day eggplants aren’t as bitter as their ancestors. However, you may consider making brined eggplant if you use older or homegrown varieties (like the kind you might find at a farmer’s market), as they tend to have more seeds and a more bitter taste than commercial types.
        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

        Marinade

        Of course, you can get away with brushing your eggplant slices with olive oil, salt, and pepper before grilling. However, my grilled eggplant marinade is an easy way to take your dish to the next level, lending each slice even more savory, complex layers of flavor.

        • Olive oil: You can use any olive oil for this recipe. Though extra virgin olive oil has a more full-bodied flavor, you can also use other neutral oils, like avocado oil, or a half-and-half mix of butter and olive oil for a more decadent finish.
        • Balsamic vinegar: Though I love the rich, umami flavor of balsamic grilled eggplant, you can also use red wine vinegar, depending on what you have in your pantry.
        • Garlic: Be sure to mince or press your fresh garlic cloves before adding them to your marinade. This fine cut will help the garlic release its flavor evenly throughout the olive oil mixture.
        • Eggplant seasoning: You only need kosher salt and ground black pepper to season your vegetables.

        How to Grill Eggplant on a Gas Grill?

        With a handful of simple steps and undeniably delicious results, this BBQ eggplant recipe is a must for anyone with an outdoor grill. Below, I’ll walk you through everything from eggplant preparation for grilling to cooking times.

        1. Preheat the grill: Heat the grill to medium-high heat (about 400 degrees F.) and—once hot—clean the grill grates.
        Person marinating eggplant for grilling.
        1. Slice the eggplant: Without peeling, cut your globe eggplant into rounds that measure ½ inches thick. Then, arrange the slices in a single layer on a baking sheet. (You can learn more about how to cut eggplant for grilling in my foolproof guide to cutting eggplant!)
        2. Make the eggplant marinade: Place the olive oil, balsamic vinegar, garlic, kosher salt, and pepper in a shallow baking dish (a 9” x 13” dish should work). Whisk the ingredients until thoroughly combined.
        3. Marinate the eggplant: Add the eggplant slices to the marinade dish, ensuring both sides get an even covering of the mixture. Let the eggplant rest for ten minutes. When ready to grill, transfer them onto a plate or a sheet pan, shaking off the excess marinade.
        Mediterranean grilled eggplant being cooked on the grill.
        1. Grill eggplant slices: Place the marinated eggplant slices directly on the hot grill grate and cook them until they turn a light, golden brown (4-5 mins.). Then, use a spatula to flip the slices and cook them for another 2-3 minutes until they become tender.
        2. Serve: Remove the finished eggplant from the grill’s grates, sprinkle it with feta cheese (if desired), and serve while warm. 

        How to Store?

        Making eggplant on the grill is a great way to meal prep during the summer months. Here is how I store and reheat it:

        • Store: You can store your leftover marinated grilled eggplant in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days.
        • Reheat: To reheat your grilled aubergine slices, lay them in a single layer on a sheet pan. Then, heat them in a low-heat oven (about 300 degrees F.) for 5-8 minutes or until warmed through.
        • Freeze: I don’t recommend freezing this recipe, as the extreme temperatures make the eggplant mushy and flavorless.

        What to Serve with Grilled Eggplant?

        Grilled eggplant is so delicious that it’s satisfying on its own, especially with fresh basil leaves and crumbled feta cheese on top. Add a loaf of Crusty Bread or Air-Fried Garlic Bread, and you’ll fill everyone at your table.

        Still, this easy eggplant dish is also incredibly versatile, making it a great side dish for dozens of delicious recipes—just a few of which I’ve listed below!

        • Grilled seafood: One of my favorite grilled eggplant ideas is to serve it alongside your favorite grilled seafood. My Grilled Sockeye Salmon is the ultimate 30-minute summer dinner, with a zesty, fresh lemon juice to finish it off. Otherwise, Grilled Mahi Mahi will add deliciously savory-sweet notes to your eggplant-packed plate.
        • Chicken and meat: Juicy and flavorful grilled meat dishes are irresistible with this barbecue eggplant recipe. In particular, grilled eggplant is a fabulous side dish for other Mediterranean classics, like my herby Baked Chicken Kabobs and succulent Baked Beef Kabobs.
        • Salad: In the mood for a vegetarian meal? These grilled eggplant slices are a great accompaniment to countless salad recipes due to their meaty texture and savory taste. The flavor of the eggplant goes especially well with my garden-fresh Spring Mix Salad, tangy Greek Cucumber Salad, and creamy Tomato Mozzarella Salad.
        • Sauces: You can easily enhance the bright, savory flavors of your BBQ eggplant by serving it with a side of your favorite marinara sauce (or my homemade Tomato Basil Sauce for a five-star mix of fresh herbs and red pepper flakes!). Or, you can serve your eggplant with Harissa Sauce for a spicy, smoky dip no one can resist.
        • Antipasto platters: One of my favorite ways to please a crowd is to add these grilled eggplant slices to an antipasti, mezze, or meat and cheese platter. With a delectable range of cured meats, cheeses, sauces, and fruits, this serving idea will be as tasty as it is photo-ready.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        The best way to grill eggplant is with these chef-level pointers. Below, you’ll learn how to grill eggplant like a pro, including tips on slicing methods, grilling temperatures, and more.

        • Slice evenly: When preparing eggplant for grilling, be sure to cut the veggie into uniform slices to ensure even cooking.
        • Clean grates well: Though oiling your grates isn’t necessary, it’s essential that you remove any unwanted residue from them before adding your eggplant.
        • Keep a close eye on it: Eggplant tends to cook super quickly, so you must keep a close eye on your slices to avoid overcooking—especially since you won’t move them for the first 4-5 minutes. You should also watch your grill’s temperature to ensure it maintains an even 400 degrees F. Closing the grill’s lid will lead to a quick temperature increase, and reopening the lid will cool it down.
        • No grill? No problem: If you want to make this grilled brinjal recipe indoors, you can use a grill pan. I own and recommend Staub’s cast iron grill pan (affiliate link), which delivers great results.
        • Seasonings: My recipe only calls for a basic mix of kosher salt and black pepper. However, you can add herbaceous, spicy, or bright flavors by adding more seasoning—like cumin, cayenne, fresh mint, oregano, or fresh parsley. This way, you can perfectly match the flavor profile of your eggplant to the other dishes on your menu. And if you need a shortcut, try adding a few teaspoons of our all-purpose Mediterranean Seasoning.

        FAQs

        How do you prepare eggplant for grilling?

        To barbecue eggplant, begin by slicing your veggie into equally thick rounds (salting and peeling are unnecessary). Then, marinate your slices with a mixture of olive oil, vinegar, and garlic before grilling.

        Can you marinate eggplant?

        Definitely! Marinating eggplant for grilling is a great way to keep your slices from becoming dry (and it only takes ten minutes!). Eggplant tends to soak up oil, so marinade ingredients—especially vinegar—provide a protective barrier that keeps the oil on the outside, giving your slices a golden exterior and deep, savory flavor on the inside.

        How long to grill eggplant on a gas grill?

        I recommend grilling your eggplant slices for 6-8 minutes, flipping them halfway through. However, this timing might change depending on the size and thickness of your eggplant slices, so be sure to keep an eye on them while cooking.

        Does eggplant need to be salted before grilling?

        Not really. You should only sweat your eggplants if you’re using older or homegrown varieties, as most commercial, modern-day varieties don’t have the same bitterness.

        If you make your own Grilled Eggplant following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        More Eggplant Recipes

        Print

        Grilled Eggplant Recipe

        This recipe for grilled eggplant packs all the tender, smoky, and savory flavor you could want in a side dish. Sliced eggplant marinated in balsamic vinegar, garlic, and olive oil marinade takes this otherwise humble vegetable to a whole new level.
        Course Vegetarian Side Dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 8 minutes
        Marinading Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 23 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 187kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 large eggplant or 2 medium eggplants (approximately 1 lb)
        • ¼ cup olive oil
        • ¼ cup balsamic vinegar
        • 2 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • 2 tablespoons Crumbled feta optional topping

        Instructions

        • Preheat your grill to medium-high heat, approximately 400 degrees F.
        • Slice the eggplant into ½-inch-thick rounds and place in a single layer on a baking sheet.
        • To make the marinade, whisk together olive oil, balsamic vinegar, garlic, kosher salt, and pepper in a shallow baking dish (9×13) until combined.
        • Place the sliced eggplant in the marinade and ensure that they are coated with the liquid on both sides. Let them rest for 10 minutes. When ready to grill, transfer the marinated eggplant slices onto a plate, shaking off the excess marinade.
        • Place the eggplant slices directly on the grill grate and cook for 4-5 minutes until lightly golden browned. Using a spatula, flip and cook for an additional 2-3 minutes until tender.
        • Remove and top with feta cheese, if using. Serve while still warm.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe uses one large eggplant and yields 8-10 slices of grilled eggplant, which is ideal for four servings. You can multiply the recipe as you please. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Eggplant skin is edible: There is no need to peel the skin.
        • Check for doneness: Fully cooked eggplant should be tender—not mushy!—and have nice grill marks. Remember, too, that the second side tends to cook more quickly than the first, so you’ll need to adjust each side’s cooking times to maintain the veggie’s consistency.
        • Charcoal grill: If using a charcoal grill, start by lighting the charcoal and letting it burn until the coals are covered with a light layer of ash, about 20 minutes. Arrange the eggplant slices directly on the grill grates over the hot coals. Grill for 4-5 minutes on each side or until the eggplant slices have nice grill marks and are tender.
        • No grill? No problem: If you want to make this grilled brinjal recipe indoors, you can use a grill pan. I own and recommend Staub’s cast iron grill pan (affiliate link), which delivers great results.
        • Store: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days.
        • Reheat: To reheat, place the slices in a single layer on a sheet pan. Then, heat them in a low-heat oven (about 300 degrees F.) for 5-8 minutes or until warmed through.
        • Freeze: I don’t recommend freezing this recipe, as the extreme temperatures make the eggplant mushy and flavorless.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 187kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Cholesterol: 8mg | Sodium: 685mg | Potassium: 295mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 64IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 61mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-eggplant/feed/ 0
        Mediterranean Salad Dressing https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-salad-dressing/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-salad-dressing/#comments Tue, 30 Jul 2024 15:30:32 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77297 If you are a fan of Mediterranean salad dressings like my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette and Yogurt Salad Dressing, you will…]]>

        If you are a fan of Mediterranean salad dressings like my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette and Yogurt Salad Dressing, you will love this Mediterranean dressing recipe! It is similar to a traditional Greek salad dressing (known as ladolemono) but with a touch of inspiration from my Turkish roots. This homemade dressing is also a fantastic alternative to store-bought salad dressings and will surely be a big hit with the whole family.

        Mediterranean vinaigrette in a glass jar with a spoon.

        Ingredients

        This recipe for Mediterranean salad dressing is my secret to making salads that burst with fresh, vibrant flavors and keep everyone coming back for more. It is bright and tangy like most vinaigrettes but enhanced with boldly flavorful ingredients like Dijon mustard and garlic. You’ll need the following ingredients:

        Ingredients for Mediterranean vinaigrette dressing from the top view with text on the image.
        • Fresh lemon juice: I can’t imagine a Mediterranean vinaigrette dressing that doesn’t use freshly squeezed lemon juice. That said, this recipe would also work if you combine half lemon juice and half balsamic vinegar, red wine vinegar, or white wine vinegar.
        • Fresh garlic: A fresh garlic clove will offer the punchiest flavor, but you can substitute ½ teaspoon garlic powder if that is all you have.
        • Dijon mustard: Dijon mustard is the natural emulsifier in this Mediterranean vinaigrette recipe and adds special creaminess. 
        • Honey: While the honey is optional, I’ve found it balances the acidity and makes for a more well-rounded flavor. Real maple syrup is a good substitute.
        • Oregano: Fresh oregano is classic, but I like to use ¼ teaspoon dried oregano when fresh is unavailable. You could also use other fresh herbs, such as fresh mint, fresh parsley, or fresh basil.
        • Seasoning: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper enhances those Mediterranean flavors.
        • Olive oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for the best flavor.

        How to Make Mediterranean Salad Dressing?

        A Mediterranean diet salad dressing is made quick and easy with the help of a small mason jar. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

        A collage images showing how to make the recipe.
        1. Mix ingredients: In a small bowl, add lemon juice, garlic, mustard, honey (if using), oregano, salt and black pepper. Whisk until combined.
        2. Add olive oil: Slowly pour the olive oil in a steady stream while whisking it constantly until creamy and smooth, about 30 seconds.
        3. Taste test: Taste for seasoning and add more salt or lemon juice if necessary.

        How to Store?

        This homemade Mediterranean dressing can be stored in the refrigerator as a healthy essential to have on hand at all times. Simply store it in a mason jar with a tight-fitting lid or in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 1 week.

        Remember that as it sits in the fridge, olive oil and lemon will separate, which is normal. Just be sure to give it a good shake before using it.

        How to Use Mediterranean Dressing in Your Daily Cooking?

        While this dressing is perfect for salads, its versatility goes far beyond that. It’s an excellent way to elevate not only Mediterranean dishes but many other delicious recipes as well. Some of my favorite ways to incorporate this dressing into my daily cooking include:

        • Salad dressing: Think of this as an all-purpose salad dressing you can drizzle on any salad made with fresh ingredients such as veggies, pasta, or even potatoes. It can be used as the dressing component for any of my Summer Salads or drizzled over a simple green salad made with leafy greens, grape tomatoes, crunchy cucumbers, and tangy feta cheese. My favorite side salad, Spring Mix Salad, is a fantastic example. Additionally, its tangy and sweet flavors pair especially well with tomatoes and tomato salads, like my Burrata Caprese Salad, and it elevates pasta salad like my Mediterranean Pasta Salad and grain salads, like Mediterranean Quinoa Salad. The bright lemon flavors give a new meaning to Italian salads, such as the ever-so-popular La Scala Salad.
        • Finishing sauce for roasted or grilled meats: But don’t stop there. Use it as a finishing sauce to brush on any grilled protein, including Grilled Shrimp, Grilled Salmon, or Grilled Harissa Chicken.
        • Marinade for meat and fish: Take this dressing further and use it as a marinade for chicken, beef, lamb, or fish. The acidity from the lemon juice helps tenderize the meat, while the olive oil and fresh herbs add flavor.
        A salad with tomatoes, Kalamata olives, bell peppers and feta being drizzled with lemon olive oil salad dressing.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        Follow these helpful tips to achieve the best results when making this healthy Mediterranean salad dressing. Whether you prefer a well-emulsified dressing or a quick shake-and-go method, these pointers will help you create a flavorful and perfectly balanced dressing every time.

        • Emulsifying: If you are looking for a well-emulsified dressing, whisk together all the ingredients except the olive oil in a small bowl. Then, slowly pour in the olive oil while still whisking constantly. This gradual process helps the oil and vinegar whisk together smoothly.
        • Put it into a jar and shake: While I prefer the emulsifying method, for a fast and easy approach, you can put all the ingredients into a mason jar, seal, and shake vigorously until smooth.
        • Use good quality ingredients: The best dressing for Mediterranean salad will taste even better with high-quality extra-virgin olive oil, honey, and freshly squeezed lemon juice. As with any recipe with minimal ingredients, the quality of the ingredients you use in this lemon olive oil salad dressing matters. Use an extra virgin olive oil that you like, take the time to squeeze your lemon juice, and choose a good-quality honey for the best results.
        • Let it sit: Allow the dressing to sit for 15-30 minutes before using it for the best flavor. This allows the ingredients to marry together.
        • Serve at room temperature: The flavors will be most prominent when served at room temperature. If you have stored the dressing in the fridge, remove it from the refrigerator 5-10 minutes before using it and give it a good shake before serving.
        • Taste for seasoning: Adjust the level of lemon juice, honey, or salt based on your taste. Add some vinegar if you like it more acidic or a bit more salt or honey to tame the acidity.

        Other Mediterranean Diet Salad Dressings You Might Also Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Mediterranean Salad Dressing recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        A batch of my Homemade Mediterranean salad dressing recipe in a jar with a spoon.
        Print

        Mediterranean Salad Dressing Recipe

        Much better than any store-bought dressings, this Mediterranean Salad Dressing with olive oil, lemon juice, and garlic is bursting with fresh, vibrant flavors. Perfect as a salad dressing, marinade, or finishing sauce, it’s heart-healthy and versatile. Try it on salads, grilled veggies, and more!
        Course Salad Dressing
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 252kcal

        Ingredients

        • cup lemon juice or red wine vinegar
        • 1 clove fresh garlic grated or pressed – or ½ teaspoon garlic powder
        • ½ teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon honey or maple syrup (optional)
        • 1 teaspoon fresh oregano finely chopped – or ¼ teaspoon dried oregano
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • ½ cup olive oil

        Instructions

        • In a small bowl, whisk together lemon juice, garlic, mustard, honey (if using), oregano, salt and pepper until combined.
        • Slowly pour the olive oil while whisking it constantly until creamy for 30 seconds.
        • Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
        • Use it immediately or store it in a mason jar in the refrigerator for up to 1 week.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 2/3 cup of vinaigrette, ideal for a salad serving four people, each serving about three tablespoons. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to a week. As it sits, olive oil and lemon will separate, so give it a good shake before using.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 252kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Sodium: 589mg | Potassium: 34mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 11IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 12mg | Iron: 0.4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-salad-dressing/feed/ 6
        Grilled Harissa Chicken https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-harissa-chicken/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-harissa-chicken/#comments Tue, 23 Jul 2024 16:02:14 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77199 What is Harissa Chicken? Harissa chicken is a hot, smoky dish that gets its primary flavors from harissa, a hot…]]>

        What is Harissa Chicken?

        Harissa chicken is a hot, smoky dish that gets its primary flavors from harissa, a hot chili pepper paste native to Tunisia. Harissa—used as a marinade or sauce in this recipe—comes from a blend of chili peppers, roasted red peppers, garlic, olive oil, and warm spices like caraway seeds, cumin, and coriander.

        After infusing the meat with harissa’s spicy, aromatic flavors, you can then grill, bake, or pan-fry the chicken and (most often) serve it with a side of grains or veggies. You can also make it a dinner by making our Copycat CAVA bowl.

        Harissa grilled chicken on a bed of vermicelli rice from the top view.

        Ingredients for Harissa Grilled Chicken

        You only need a handful of ingredients to make this grilled chicken harissa recipe. Hot, smoky, and oh-so-juicy, these simple ingredients will ensure your dish comes out delicious every time.

        Chicken and harissa paste ingredients from the top view.
        • Chicken thighs: I used two pounds of boneless, skinless chicken thighs to make this dish, as dark meat tends to be juicier and more flavorful when grilled. If preferred, you can also make a harissa chicken breast recipe using boneless skinless chicken breasts. However, keep in mind that the grilling times might be longer depending on the thickness of your breasts.
        • Onion: Thinly sliced yellow onion (or red onion) is a great option to give your chicken a sweet yet robust finish. 
        • Garlic: Press or grate your fresh garlic cloves before adding them to your marinade to achieve the most potent, even infusion of flavors.
        • Seasoning: Kosher salt, ground black pepper, and paprika are perfect for lending harissa chicken thighs savory, warm notes. Though I used Spanish paprika, smoked paprika would also work.
        • Lemon juice: Vibrant and bright, fresh lemon juice is my go-to when making this harissa marinade. If you don’t have lemon juice, use red wine vinegar or balsamic vinegar instead.
        • Harissa: Because it’s one of the main ingredients in this recipe, I recommend making your harissa sauce from scratch. If you need a shortcut, you can also make Harissa Paste from Powder. Though the homemade version offers greater customization and a deeper flavor, you can also use store-bought harissa to reduce kitchen time. (My favorite brands are NY Shuk and Mina. Trader Joe’s also has one if you want a cheaper harissa.)
        • Olive oil
        • Garnish: To add a touch of color to your final plate, try serving your harissa chicken with quartered lemon wedges and a sprinkle of fresh parsley (or other fresh herbs like chopped cilantro or oregano.)
        • Greek yogurt: Though optional, ¼ cup of Greek yogurt can add a delicious tang and creaminess to your harissa marinade for chicken.

        How to Make Harissa Chicken?

        With an irresistible marinade and super-easy grilling technique, this harissa chicken thighs recipe is a cinch to make. Plus, it only takes ten to twenty minutes of hands-on prep!

        A collage of images showing how to marinade chicken in harissa.
        1. Dry the chicken: Use a paper towel to pat dry the chicken on both sides. Then, season both sides with salt and pepper and set the thighs aside.
        2. Make the marinade: Add the garlic, onion, paprika, lemon juice, and harissa to a large mixing bowl and stir until combined.
        3. Marinate the chicken: Add the chicken thighs to the harissa mixture and toss them until thoroughly covered. Then, cover the bowl with plastic wrap and refrigerate it for an hour (or up to overnight). Remove the chicken from the fridge 30 minutes before grilling.
        4. Prepare the grill:
          1. Gas grill: Preheat the outdoor grill to 400 degrees F. When hot, scrape the grates to remove unwanted debris and coat them generously with olive oil. 
          2. Charcoal grill: Light the charcoal and let it burn until white ash covers it (20-30 minutes). When ready, spread the coals in an even layer across the bottom.
        A collage of images showing how to grill harissa chicken.
        1. Grill the chicken: Place the harissa-marinated chicken in a single layer on the grate and top it with some onions. Then, cover the grill and cook the chicken for six minutes on each side or until the thickest part of the meat reaches an internal temperature of 165 degrees F.
        2. Let the chicken rest: Transfer the grilled chicken to a serving plate, loosely cover it with aluminum foil, and let it rest for ten minutes.
        3. Serve: Garnish your grilled harissa chicken with fresh parsley and a side of lemon wedges if preferred.

        How to Store, Freeze, Thaw, and Reheat?

        Here, you’ll learn how to maximize the freshness of your harissa sauce chicken, whether you want to enjoy it the next day or the next month.

        • Store: Let your harissa chicken thighs come to room temperature before storing them. Then, transfer them to an airtight container and place them in the refrigerator for up to 4-5 days.
        • Freeze: There are two ways to freeze harissa chicken for long-term storage: cooked and uncooked.
          • Freezing cooked meat: If you’ve already cooked the meat, let it reach room temperature, transfer it to an airtight container, and freeze for up to three months.
          • Freezing raw meat: For advance meal prep, place the raw chicken and harissa paste marinade into a freezer-safe Ziploc bag with as much air removed as possible. You can then store the raw meat in the freezer for three months.
        • Thaw: To thaw your frozen harissa chicken, transfer it to the fridge and let it defrost overnight.
        • Reheat: You can reheat your chicken thighs with harissa in a low-heat oven (~300 degrees F.) until warmed thoroughly, about 10 minutes.

        What to Serve with Harissa Chicken?

        It goes without saying that this recipe for chicken harissa is delicious on its own. However, it also makes an incomparable pair with dozens of other tasty dishes—just a few of which I’ve listed below.

        • Grains: Looking for an easy dinner that’s as delicious as it is filling? Add this spicy chicken recipe to your favorite rice bowls (such as our CAVA Copycat Recipe), and you have an easily customizable option that will tantalize your taste buds any day of the week. I recommend whipping up a serving of Rice with Vermicelli or Turkish Bulgur Pilaf for a rich, savory base. Or, for a lighter, zestier option, you can try serving your chicken with dishes like couscous and Lemon Quinoa.
        • Salads: Chicken thighs and harissa make a fantastic, protein-packed addition to salads. I love adding this recipe to fresh classics, like my Greek Cucumber Tomato Salad, tender Eggplant Caprese, Caprese Pasta Salad, and tangy Spring Mix Salad—especially with a crumble of fresh feta cheese on top!
        • Grilled veggies: Smoky, fresh, and nutritious, grilled vegetables are a no-brainer for harissa chicken. Serve this Middle Eastern dish with Grilled Corn on the Cob or Grilled Eggplant, and you can cut your cooking time in half.
        • Sauces: Serving this spicy chicken recipe with your favorite sauces is an easy way to add layers of flavor. For a creamy, cool accompaniment, I recommend adding a side of plain Greek yogurt, Tahini and Yogurt Sauce, or a refreshing Mint Yogurt Sauce. Or, if you want a spicier accompaniment, you can whip up a delicious Harissa Aioli in a matter of minutes!

        Expert Tips

        With these chef-approved tips, tender chicken, bold flavor, and authentic North African flavors are at your fingertips. Below are a few helpful tips to help you make the best-grilled harissa chicken on your first try:

        • Spice levels: Want to adjust the heat level of this harissa recipe for chicken? I highly recommend making your harissa from scratch so you can control your seasoning levels and pick what kinds of hot chiles you use (some are spicier than others). If you opt for a store-bought brand, remember that some are spicier than others, and you can always make a hotter marinade by adding cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes to the mix.
        • Overnight marinade: Marinating your chicken for one hour perfectly suits achieving a total infusion of flavors. During our recipe testing (and research), we found some recipes warning against marinating overnight. We tested it and found nothing wrong with letting your chicken marinate overnight. It is an excellent option for advanced meal prep!—if you want a deeper, richer taste.
        • Grilling with onions: When grilling with onions, remember that some of the onions will likely fall through the grates and cause a minor flare-up. Though this effect is nothing to worry about, it’s a good idea to shift the chicken away from the flames when this happens to avoid unwanted scorching.
        • Adjust the grill’s temperature: When cooking with a grill, keep in mind that closing the lid will increase the cooking temperature. Therefore, it’s important to open and close the lid to maintain an appropriate temperature.
        • Avoid overcooking: The best way to avoid overcooking harissa spiced chicken is to use an instant-read thermometer. When you think your chicken is ready, insert the meat thermometer into the thickest part of the meat. Once it reaches 165 degrees F., remove the chicken from the grill.
        • Thread it in skewers: Another way to make this recipe is to transform it into harissa chicken skewers. Simply cut the meat into small cubes, marinate them, and thread them onto skewers. Then, grill them as-is or add other tasty veggies—like bell peppers, onions, and cherry tomatoes—for a lighter, more colorful dish. Remember that the cooking time might be slightly shorter as the chicken is cut into smaller pieces.
        • Bring the meat to room temperature before grilling: If you can plan ahead, it is a good practice to remove the chicken from the refrigerator 30 minutes before grilling. Doing so will ensure the meat cooks evenly and doesn’t become tough.

        Other Chicken Dinners You Might Like

        If you make your own Grilled Harissa Chicken following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Grilled harissa spiced chicken on a bed of rice from the top view.
        Print

        Grilled Harissa Chicken Recipe

        Grilled harissa chicken is a spicy, easy-to-make dish that requires just a few minutes of prep time to get the juiciest, most flavorful results. Serve it with grilled vegetables, rice or a green salad for a filling chicken dinner.
        Course Chicken Recipes, Dinner
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Cook Time 12 minutes
        Marinading Time 1 hour
        Total Time 1 hour 32 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 590kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 pounds chicken thighs boneless and skinless*
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • 5 garlic cloves pressed or grated
        • 1 small yellow onion thinly sliced
        • 1 teaspoon paprika we used Spanish paprika but smoked paprika would also work
        • 2 tablespoons lemon juice plus 1 lemon quartered for serving
        • ½ cup harissa
        • ¼ cup olive oil more or less for greasing the grill grates
        • 3 tablespoons fresh parsley as garnish (optional)

        Instructions

        • Pat dry the chicken on both sides. Season with salt and pepper on both sides. Set aside.
        • In a large bowl, combine the garlic, onion, paprika, lemon juice, and harissa. Add the chicken and toss to combine.
        • Cover the bowl with stretch film and refrigerate for an hour or overnight if you have the time.
        • Remove from the refrigerator 30 minutes before you are ready to grill.
        • If cooking on a gas grill: Preheat the grill to 400 degrees F. Once hot, scrape the grates and generously coat them with olive oil.
        • If cooking on a charcoal grill: Light the charcoal and let it burn until the coals are covered with white ash for about 20-30 minutes. Spread the coals evenly at the bottom. Right before grilling, grease the grill grates with olive oil.
        • Place the chicken thighs, topped with some onions, on the grate without overlapping.
        • Cover and grill for 6 minutes on each side (for a total of 12 minutes) or until the internal temperature in the thickest part of the chicken thigh reaches 165 degrees F.
        • Remove and place on a clean plate or platter, loosely tenting with foil. Let rest for 10 minutes.
        • If preferred, garnish with fresh parsley and lemon wedges on the side.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes eight harissa chicken thighs ideal for four servings. However, the number of chicken thighs may change depending on the weight of your thighs. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Chicken Breasts*: You can use chicken breasts if preferred. However, the grilling time might be longer depending on the thickness of your chicken. We recommend using a meat thermometer to check doneness.
        • Harissa: We used homemade harissa, but this recipe would also work with any store-bought harissa. If you have harissa powder, follow our harissa from powder recipe for a quick homemade harissa.
        • Grill pan: If you don’t have a grill, you can also use a grill pan to cook (over medium-high heat) this chicken and harissa paste recipe on the stove. 
        • Store: Let the chicken come to room temperature and then, transfer them to an airtight container and place them in the refrigerator for up to 4-5 days.
        • Freeze: You can freeze this harissa chicken in two ways: cooked and uncooked. 
          • Freezing cooked meat: If you’ve already cooked it, let it come to room temperature, transfer it to an airtight container, and freeze for up to three months.
          • Freezing raw meat: Place the raw chicken and harissa marinade into a freezer-safe plastic bag with as much air removed as possible. You can then store the raw meat in the freezer for three months. Thaw overnight in the fridge.
        • Oven baking instructions:
          • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
          • Place the marinated chicken thighs (with some onions) on the prepared pan without overlapping.
          • Roast for 25 minutes or until the internal temperature in the thickest part of the chicken thigh reaches 165 degrees F. Cover with foil and let chicken rest for 10 minutes before serving.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 590kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 33g | Fat: 46g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 23g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 189mg | Sodium: 1191mg | Potassium: 601mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 884IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-harissa-chicken/feed/ 5
        Pesto Vinaigrette https://foolproofliving.com/pesto-vinaigrette/ https://foolproofliving.com/pesto-vinaigrette/#comments Wed, 17 Jul 2024 18:46:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=52273 Why Should You Make This Recipe? Basil pesto dressing is a mouthwatering yet simple recipe you can’t get enough of.…]]>

        Why Should You Make This Recipe?

        Basil pesto dressing is a mouthwatering yet simple recipe you can’t get enough of. This vinaigrette is easy, fresh, and pairs well with dozens of delicious dishes. 

        • This 5-minute pesto vinaigrette recipe is a great way to use fresh basil, especially if you’re growing your own fresh herbs. Who can resist natural ingredients?
        • Elevate any dish with ease when you top it with this herby and robust dressing. Whether you use pesto sauce for salad (or pasta salad!), to drizzle on pizza, or even to top grilled meat, your tastebuds will thank you.
        Basil Pesto Salad dressing in a jar

        Ingredients

        For this pesto dressing recipe, you will need:

        • Fresh basil leaves: It goes without saying your basil should be fresh and free of any bruises. I used green basil here, but you can use purple basil if you prefer.
        • Pine nuts: If you have the time, toasting your pine nuts in an empty skillet for 3-4 minutes will produce a rich, earthy vinaigrette.
        • Fresh garlic cloves
        • Acid: White wine vinegar and fresh lemon juice
        • Parmesan cheese
        • Kosher salt and black pepper
        • Extra virgin olive oil
        Sweetgreen pesto vinaigrette ingredients from the top view.

        Substitutions & Variations

        • Nuts: Don’t have any pine nuts on hand? No problem! Swap out your pine nuts for almonds or walnuts for an easy substitution.
        • Vinegar: Give your pesto vinaigrette sweeter, sharper, or more robust undertones by swapping out which vinegar you use. Simply substitute your white wine vinegar with an equal amount of red wine vinegar or balsamic vinegar for a delectable Pesto Balsamic Dressing.
        • Make it a 3-ingredient pesto vinaigrette: You can make this pesto vinaigrette with store-bought or homemade pesto, white wine vinegar, and parmesan cheese. For measurements, I recommend mixing ½ cup prepared pesto with ¼ cup vinegar and ¼ cup parmesan cheese.
        • Copycat Sweetgreen Pesto recipe: If you have ever dined at one of the Sweetgreen restaurant locations, you probably already know about their pesto dressing. It seems like Sweetgreen’s Pesto Vinaigrette recipe is very similar to mine, except that they use red wine vinegar instead of white wine vinegar and add a teaspoon of dDijon mustard to your basic lemon pesto dressing.
        • Make it vegan: To make a vegan version of this delicious recipe, all you need to do is use vegan parmesan. For a homemade substitution, I suggest using this recipe for vegan parmesan or an equal amount of nutritional yeast.
        • Sweetener: A teaspoon of honey or maple syrup can be added to balance out the acidity and earthy flavors coming from the vinegar and fresh basil leaves.

        How to Make Pesto Vinaigrette

        This 5-minute recipe for classic basil pesto dressing is as easy as it is fresh, and it comes together in just three steps.

        a collage of photos showing how to make pesto vinaigrette
        1. Chop/Pulse the ingredients in a food processor: Place all the ingredients except the olive oil (i.e., fresh basil leaves, pine nuts, garlic, vinegar, lemon juice, parmesan cheese, salt, and black pepper) into a food processor (or a blender). Pulse the mixture 4-5 times for a rough chop.
        2. Add the olive oil: Turn on the food processor and, while it runs, drizzle the olive oil through the tube. Stop the machine 1-2 times while mixing to scrape the bowl’s sides. Continue running your food processor until the salad dressing is creamy (approx. 45 seconds).
        3. Season and serve: Taste your pesto salad sauce and add any additional seasoning. Give the mixture one more pulse, and then serve.

        How to Store

        This pesto salad dressing recipe is a delicious addition to any meal. With these simple storage tips, you can keep your leftover vinaigrette fresh for days.

        • Storage: To store lemon pesto vinaigrette, place it in an airtight container (like a mason jar) in the refrigirator. Your dressing will stay fresh for up to 5 days.
        • Freeze: You can freeze this vinaigrette for up to 2 months in an airtight container.
        • Thaw: To thaw your pesto dressing, let it sit on the counter for 2 hours before using.

        Recipe Ideas to Use

        Basil pesto vinaigrette is a delicious dressing that goes with just about anything. This topping adds a sumptuous flavor to countless dishes, from leafy green salads to hearty mains.

        pasta salad in bowl using this basil salad dressing

        Expert Tips

        • Texture: Feel free to adjust the consistency and texture by processing (or blending) longer or shorter. I like it to have a pourable consistency, but you can always process it less if you prefer it to be more like a sauce.
        • Emulsify: You can process everything all at once, but taking the time to drizzle the olive oil over the tube after processing the rest of the ingredients will help the dressing blend well and result in a creamier vinaigrette.
        • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to taste it before serving and adjust the amount of acid and seasoning as needed.

        FAQs

        Pesto vinaigrette dressing is easy enough for even beginner chefs to prepare. Still, you can become an expert saucier in no time with these helpful FAQs!

        What is pesto vinaigrette?

        Pesto vinaigrette is a dressing that combines the classic elements of a pesto recipe (e.g., fresh basil, pine nuts, and parmesan cheese) with vinegar and lemon juice.

        How to turn pesto into salad dressing?

        For an easy pesto vinaigrette salad dressing, mix ½ cup of leftover pesto, ¼ cup of white wine vinegar, and ¼ cup of parmesan cheese. It’s that easy!

        What is in Sweetgreen pesto vinaigrette?

        Sweetgreen pesto vinaigrette is made with apple cider vinegar, fresh basil, garlic, dijon mustard, parmesan cheese, pine nuts, and salt and pepper.

        What is pesto dressing made of?

        This basil pesto salad dressing recipe consists of fresh basil leaves, pine nuts, minced garlic, white wine vinegar, lemon juice, parmesan cheese, salt, pepper, and olive oil.

        Other Homemade Salad Dressing You Might Like:

        If you try this Pesto Vinaigrette recipe or any other one of my homemade salad dressing recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Pesto Vinaigrette in a spoon
        Print

        Pesto Vinaigrette Recipe

        Learn how to make pesto vinaigrette recipe to use in salads, sandwiches, and more. Made with basic pantry staples, this basil salad dressing is easy and quick to make.
        Course Salad Dressing
        Cuisine American/Italian
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 254kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 ½ cups fresh basil leaves loosely packed
        • cup pine nuts or sliced almonds
        • 2 small cloves garlic minced
        • 2 tablespoons white wine vinegar
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
        • 2 tablespoons shredded parmesan cheese
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt*
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • cup extra virgin olive oil

        Instructions

        • Place fresh basil leaves, pine nuts, garlic, vinegar, lemon juice, parmesan cheese, salt, and black pepper into the bowl of a food processor*. Pulse 4-5 times to give them a rough chop.
        • Turn the machine on and while it is running drizzle the olive oil through the tube. Stop and scrape once or twice and continue running the machine until the salad dressing is creamy, 45 seconds or so.
        • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary. Give it one more pulse and serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe yields 2/3 cup pesto salad dressing that is ideal for 4 servings (about 3 tablespoon each.)
        • Amount of salt used: This is one of those recipes that you want to taste as you go. I listed 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt, but please give it a taste before serving to make sure that it is properly seasoned to your taste.
        • Blender: If you do not have a food processor, you can use a blender.
        • Make it a 3-ingredient pesto vinaigrette: You can make this pesto vinaigrette with store-bought pesto. For measurements, I recommend mixing ½ cup prepared pesto with ¼ cup vinegar and ¼ cup parmesan cheese.
        • Pesto Vinaigrette Sweetgreen Recipe: For a version similar to Sweetgreen’s pesto vinaigrette recipe, use red wine vinegar instead of white wine vinegar and add a teaspoon of Dijon mustard.
        • Storage: To store lemon pesto vinaigrette, place it in an airtight container (like a mason jar) in the fridge. Your dressing will stay fresh for up to 5 days.
        • Freeze: You can freeze this vinaigrette for up to 2 months in an airtight container.
        • Thaw: To thaw your pesto dressing, let it sit on the counter for 2 hours before using.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 254kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Cholesterol: 2mg | Sodium: 336mg | Potassium: 121mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 501IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 45mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/pesto-vinaigrette/feed/ 2
        Red Wine Vinaigrette https://foolproofliving.com/red-wine-vinaigrette/ https://foolproofliving.com/red-wine-vinaigrette/#comments Wed, 17 Jul 2024 14:48:29 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77071 If you are ready to skip the store-bought dressings and dive into the homemade salad dressings made from scratch with…]]>

        If you are ready to skip the store-bought dressings and dive into the homemade salad dressings made from scratch with basic pantry staples, you have come to the right place. This red wine vinegar dressing recipe is super versatile and exceptionally delicious. It is the dressing you would find at your favorite Italian restaurant or even bigger chain restaurants like Quiznos or Sweetgreen.

        If you love making homemade dressings as much as we do, be sure to check out our Lemon Vinaigrette and Maple Dijon Dressing.

        Salad dressing with red wine vinegar and olive oil in a jar with a spoon.

        Ingredients

        The secret to a good vinaigrette is to use good-quality ingredients. Most store-bought dressings fall short because they use canola oil and artificial flavors. Conversely, our classic red wine vinaigrette recipe requires six simple ingredients that are easy to find at the grocery store if you don’t already have them in your kitchen. Here’s a look at the ingredient list:

        Ingredients for olive oil red wine vinegar dressing.
        • Red wine vinegar: I have found the best red wine vinegar for salad dressing is one that is not too acidic (with an acidity level of 6-7%), made with natural ingredients without any artificial flavors, and offers a rich and complex flavor with slightly tangy and sweet notes. My favorite red wine vinegar brand is Napa Valley (affiliate link). It is made from organic oak-aged red wines. With that being said, any red wine vinegar that you enjoy using in your cooking would work in this recipe. Feel free to use your favorite brand based on your taste preference and price point.
        • Fresh garlic cloves: Fresh minced garlic provides the best flavor, but you can use ¼ – ½ teaspoon garlic powder instead.
        • Dijon mustard: Dijon mustard is the secret ingredient that helps emulsify the olive oil red wine vinegar dressing. Dijon mustard is a classic, but you can also use regular, country-style, or whole-grain mustard.
        • Honey: Honey adds a touch of natural sweetness, which helps to balance the acidity. Real maple syrup or agave nectar are great vegan options.
        • Oregano: This red wine vinegar vinaigrette recipe can be made with fresh or dried oregano. Some people consider fresh oregano quite potent and sometimes hard to come by. If you feel that way, ¼ teaspoons of dried oregano is a delicious alternative.
        • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper allows the red wine vinegar to shine.
        • Extra-virgin olive oil: For the best flavor in this homemade dressing, use good-quality extra virgin olive oil. 

        Optional Add-In’s & Variations

        While this red wine vinegar salad dressing recipe is delicious as written, you can swap out one or two ingredients or amp up the flavor based on your taste preferences. You could try:

        • Other kinds of vinegar: For a tangy flavor, you can swap a portion of red wine vinegar (perhaps half and half) for some balsamic vinegar. If you prefer the crisp flavors of white wine vinegar, you can substitute it for red wine vinegar. For a lighter (no alcohol) version, you can also use apple cider vinegar.
        • Parmesan cheese: If you like the classic Italian flavors, add ¼ cup of finely grated Parmesan cheese for a delicious, cheesy addition.
        • Fresh herbs: While I think fresh oregano complements this red vinegar salad dressing best, use any fresh herbs in your fridge, including fresh basil, fresh parsley, or fresh chives.
        • Citrus: Add even more tang with fresh lemon juice or orange juice for a bright, citrusy flavor.
        • Additional seasonings: To make it even more Italian, replace the oregano with ¼ – ½ teaspoon Italian seasoning blend.
        • Mayo / Greek yogurt: Add 1-2 tablespoons of mayo or Greek yogurt to make it creamy.

        How to Make Red Wine Vinaigrette?

        Homemade red wine vinaigrette can be made in one of two ways. Either using a bowl and a whisk or shaking it up in a mason jar. Here are the step-by-step instructions for each method:

        Steps showing how to make salad dressing with red wine vinegar.
        1. Whisk ingredients: In a small bowl, whisk together the red wine vinegar, garlic, Dijon mustard, honey, oregano, Kosher salt, and pepper until combined.
        2. Add olive oil: While still whisking, slowly add the olive oil in a steady stream. Continue whisking until slightly thickened, silky, and smooth. Alternatively, you can place all the ingredients in a mason jar, seal it with a tight-fitting lid, and shake vigorously until it is silky smooth.
        3. Taste test: Taste for seasoning, adding more salt or vinegar as needed.

        Ways to Use This Red Wine Vinegar Dressing

        I must admit that a salad dressing made with red wine vinegar and olive oil compliments nearly any kind of salad. Whip up a recipe, and this dressing will make it shine. But because it is so versatile, there are so many different ways you can use this red wine dressing, including:

        • Fresh Greens: Toss it over simple green salads like Spring Mix Salad or a sweet and salty salad combo of baby arugula, sliced red onion, dried cherries, walnuts or pecans, and feta cheese.
        • Vegetable Salads: Use it as the dressing component for Turkish Bean Salad or Greek Cucumber Salad for extra zing and tang.
        • Pasta Salad / Grain Salads: Go for a heartier side dish by tossing this red vinaigrette dressing over pasta salads and grain salads, such as my Quinoa Feta Chickpea Salad or Avocado Quinoa Salad.
        • Roasted or Grilled Vegetables: Drizzle over any cooked veggies to brighten and season them with tangy flavors. Try it on my Grilled Eggplant, Roasted Asparagus, or Air Fryer Green Beans.
        • Marinade for Meat or Tofu: Use it for your favorite protein, such as beef, pork, lamb, chicken, or tofu. Allow it to sit for a few hours in the refrigerator to allow the zippy, tangy flavors to sink in.
        • Brush onto Seafood or Fish: Use it as a fast and flavorful sauce by brushing onto fish filets, grilled shrimp skewers, or scallops before (or after) cooking.
        • Sandwiches and Wraps: Drizzle it on top of any sandwich or wrap for a tangy kick. It’s especially delicious when served on Chicken Caprese Sandwiches or Chicken Pita Wraps (instead of tzatziki).

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        Here are some of my expert tips for the best red wine vinaigrette recipe:

        • Emulsifying: While shaking all the ingredients in a mason jar is a simple approach, achieving a perfectly creamy red wine vinaigrette requires a bit more technique. When using Dijon mustard, it’s best to whisk the vinegar and mustard together first. Then, gradually drizzle in the oil while continuing to whisk constantly. This method allows the natural compounds in the mustard to effectively bind with both the water and oil, stabilizing the emulsion and preventing the dressing from separating.
        • Shake well before using: With that being said, the vinegar and oil will naturally separate as it sits over time, so it is best to give it a good shake or whisk before serving.
        • Serve at room temperature: The flavors and viscosity of the olive oil are best enjoyed at room temperature. If the salad dressing has been in the refrigerator for a while, take it out 5-10 minutes before using it in your recipe.
        • Olive oil red wine vinegar dressing ratio: After testing this recipe multiple times, we found the best ratio of oil to vinegar was 2:1 (½ cup olive oil to ¼ cup vinegar).
        Red wine vinegar oil salad dressing in a jar with a spoon on the side.

        FAQs

        Does red wine vinaigrette have alcohol?

        Yes, it does, but it contains a very tiny amount of alcohol. According to American Vinegar Works, during the production of red wine vinegar, bacteria eat away at the wine to convert it to vinegar, consuming most of the alcohol in the process. However, in the end, a small amount of alcohol might still remain.

        What is the difference between red wine vinaigrette and vinegar?

        Red wine vinaigrette is an emulsified dressing with olive oil, mustard, and additional seasonings like garlic and herbs. On the other hand, red wine vinegar is plain vinegar on its own.

        How long does red wine vinaigrette last in the fridge?

        Our homemade red wine vinegar salad dressing will keep for 1 week in the fridge when stored in an airtight container or mason jar with a tight-fitting lid.

        If you make this red wine vinegar oil salad dressing recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Red wine vinaigrette recipe with a spoon.
        Print

        Red Wine Vinaigrette Recipe

        This is an all-purpose red wine vinaigrette recipe that you can use as a salad dressing, drizzle for roasted or grilled veggies, marinade for meat (or tofu), and more. All you need is 5 minutes and 6 basic ingredients.
        Course Salad Dressing
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 167kcal

        Ingredients

        • ¼ cup red wine vinegar
        • ½ cup olive oil
        • 1 clove garlic grated or pressed
        • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon honey
        • 1 teaspoon fresh oregano finely chopped – I used ¼ teaspoon dried
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon fresh ground black pepper

        Instructions

        • In a small bowl (or a mason jar), whisk the red wine vinegar, garlic, Dijon mustard, honey, oregano, kosher salt, and pepper until combined.
        • While still whisking, slowly add the olive oil and continue whisking until fully incorporated*.
        • Taste for seasoning and adjust as needed before using it in your recipe.

        Notes

        • Yields: This red wine vinaigrette dressing recipe makes ¾ cups and is ideal for six servings, each serving around two tablespoons.
        • Make it in a jar: While I think whisking oil into the red vinegar and mustard mixture produces the most creamy dressing, you can also put everything in a mason jar, cover it tightly with the lid and shake vigorously.
        • Storage: You can store your vinaigrette in a mason jar (or an airtight container) for up to one week. The olive oil will naturally solidify in the refrigerator, so give it a good stir or whisk before serving.
        • Freeze: Freeze the dressing in a freezer-safe container for up to 1 month. Thaw to room temperature on the kitchen counter.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 167kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.1g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 398mg | Potassium: 12mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 6IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 0.3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/red-wine-vinaigrette/feed/ 7
        Harissa Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-sauce/#comments Tue, 09 Jul 2024 23:14:50 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76518 In this simple guide, you’ll discover how to make harissa sauce that’s as close to an authentic harissa paste recipe…]]>

        In this simple guide, you’ll discover how to make harissa sauce that’s as close to an authentic harissa paste recipe as possible, in addition to delectable serving suggestions, storage tips, and more.

        Harissa recipes are essential to any spice-lover’s cookbook. If you’re in the mood for a succulent poultry main, my Grilled Harissa Chicken and Harissa Honey Chicken offer a brilliant flavor that will enrich any weekday dinner.

        What is Harissa?

        Harissa is a smooth, spicy condiment that originated in Tunisia. Sometimes referred to as “Tunisian ketchup” or “harissa paste,” this bold, red sauce includes a basic mixture of dried chilis, warm spices, tomato paste, garlic, olive oil, and lemon juice. This mix results in a delicious blend of hot, smoky, and mildly tangy flavors.

        Since its creation, harissa has spread to neighboring countries, like Morocco, Jordan, and Algeria, and it’s now a staple in North African and Middle Eastern cuisine.

        Harissa paste in a jar from the front view.

        Harissa Ingredients

        You only need a handful of ingredients to make this iconic Middle Eastern condiment. Plus, you can even customize your harissa’s main ingredients to ensure your sauce matches any menu.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Dried chilies: I prefer using a mix of guajillo, ancho, and de arbol chilies in this recipe due to their balanced mix of heat and complexity. However, if you’re looking to make a spicy harissa recipe, you can incorporate Mexico chilies that fall higher on the Scoville Scale, or you can make a sweeter harissa sauce by using more New Mexico chilies (a milder variant). For the best harissa, I recommend using 7-8 dried peppers of different kinds. You should be able to find dried chilies at your local grocery store, or you can purchase them online (affiliate link) if desired.
        • Spices: Cumin, coriander, and caraway seeds are essential to giving this condiment its warm, fragrant heat. I prefer using pre-ground spices in this mixture to save time, but you can also grind an equal amount of whole spices with a spice grinder or mortar and pestle.
        • Roasted red peppers: To make homemade harissa paste, you’ll need two whole roasted red peppers. I usually opt for a jarred version (be sure to drain its juices first!), but you can also make homemade roasted red bell peppers for a fresher, smokier taste.
        • Fresh Garlic cloves
        • Seasonings: I found that a simple mix of kosher salt and Spanish paprika was sufficient to give this African chili paste a savory, bright flavor. Smoked paprika—a version of Spanish paprika—will also work if you prefer a more robust smokiness. If desired, you can also add ¼ teaspoon of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes to increase the recipe’s heat level.
        • Tomato paste
        • Lemon juice: I always opt for fresh lemon juice, which has the most vibrant, citrusy flavor. 
        • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: A mild-tasting extra virgin olive oil such as  Costo’s single-origin organic olive oil (affiliate link) would work beautifully in this recipe.
        • Honey (optional): The recipe below does not include honey, but harissa and honey are a wonderful combination that you’ll find in many recipes. If you prefer a sweet harissa, I recommend adding two tablespoons of honey, giving it a taste, and increasing it based on your preference.

        How to Make Harissa Sauce?

        It’s easy to make harissa paste worthy of a North African restaurant in your own kitchen. With my easy step-by-step instructions, you can prepare this condiment in under an hour.

        Steps showing how to make harissa from scratch.
        1. Rehydrate the chilies: Place the dried chiles in a medium-sized bowl, add boiling hot water, and place a weighted bowl on top to keep the chilies submerged. Alternatively, you can cover it with plastic wrap. Let the chilies steep in the water for 30 minutes.
        2. Deseed the chili peppers: Once the chilies rehydrate, remove them from the water and remove their stems and seeds. If you prefer a spicier blend, you can keep some of the seeds in the peppers.
        3. Blend the ingredients for harissa: Place the rehydrated harissa peppers in your food processor bowl (or a blender, depending on what you’re using). Then, add the ground cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, roasted peppers, garlic, kosher salt, Spanish paprika, tomato paste, lemon juice, olive oil, and cayenne pepper. Pulse the mixture until smooth.
        4. Enjoy: Use your harissa chili paste in your desired recipe or store it in an airtight container in the fridge if you plan to use it later.

        How to Store & Freeze?

        Once you make harissa paste, you’ll want to use it every day of the week. These storage tips guarantee easy meal prep and keep this condiment fresh whenever the craving strikes.

        • Storage: To store your harissa sauce, transfer it to an airtight container or jar and store it in the refrigerator for 2-3 weeks. I also recommend pouring a thin layer of olive oil over the top of the sauce before storage to prolong its shelf life, as this layer will help limit exposure to oxygen and bacteria.
        • Freezing: This red harissa recipe can be frozen for up to one month in an airtight, freezer-safe container. For easier portion sizes, pour your sauce into an ice cube tray, freeze until solid, and then transfer the individual cubes into a Ziplock bag.
        • Thawing: To thaw frozen harissa, place it in the fridge overnight or until ready to use.

        How to Use Harissa Paste in Recipes?

        Wondering how to use this spicy harissa sauce in everyday cooking? In this section, you’ll find all my favorite dishes with harissa sauce—sandwich spreads, marinades, salad dressings, and beyond!

        • Marinade: I highly recommend adding this harissa sauce to marinade recipes if you love spicy foods. Try adding a tablespoon (or two) of harissa to my Yogurt Chicken Marinade and Shrimp Marinade to introduce a vibrant heat and depth of flavor that will make your dishes stand out. Also, honey and harissa make a delicious marinade that can be used for chicken or salmon. Want to give it a try? Make my harissa honey chicken and use it in my Copycat CAVA bowls recipe!
        • Soups and stews: Want to add extra complexity and spice to a basic soup recipe? Try using this spicy sauce in place of tomato or chili paste! In particular, I love adding harissa to hearty, full-bodied dishes like Quinoa Stew, Vegan Chili, and Beef Stew.
        • Pasta sauce: If you want to add sumptuous heat to your pasta, harissa is just the thing. For a spicy kick, stir a quarter cup of this condiment into your favorite tomato-based pasta sauce.
        • Spread for sandwiches, pizza, and flatbread: I love using this simple recipe as a harissa spread for easy weekday lunches, like sandwiches and flatbreads. You can even spread it over avocado toast for a delectable balance of rich, piquant flavors.
        • Dip: Add a spoonful of this Mediterranean chili sauce to plain Greek yogurt, and you can spice up any dipping sauce in no time. You can even mix it with Hummus for a creamy, hot classic no one can resist. You can also make it a part of your next mezze platter by serving it with other Middle Eastern dips like my Babaganoush and Muhammara recipe.
        • Roasting vegetables: Because it’s such a flavorful, smooth sauce, hot chili pepper paste is an excellent condiment to drizzle over roasted veggies. I especially love pouring it over a hearty plate of Roasted Butternut Squash or Roasted Eggplant for an extra-bold side.
          Alternatively, you can also spread it over vegetables before roasting like I did in my Roasted Harissa Carrots recipe.
        • Salad Dressing: This harissa hot sauce recipe is a flavorful condiment and a fantastic base for salad dressings. With a few simple ingredients, you can even make a tangy yet hot Harissa Vinaigrette.
        • Grains: Tired of bland grains? You can give a little kick of spice to everything from rice to bulgur to quinoa to couscous when you add harissa to your mix.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        The best way to make homemade harissa is to use these chef-approved pointers. With tips on flavoring, safety, and consistency, this guide will ensure that even beginners can easily make harissa paste.

        • Experiment with different types of dried peppers: Red chili peppers have a wide range in spice levels, with some (especially Mexico chilies) having greater amounts of heat and others (like New Mexico chiles) boasting a milder profile. Therefore, I encourage you to experiment with the blend of chilies to achieve your ideal level of spice.
        • Wear gloves (or wash your hands well): When making this spicy condiment, you must protect yourself from the chilies’ spicy compound, capsaicin. Though flavorful, capsaicin often clings to the skin and can cause a burning sensation when exposed to eyes, airways, and cuts. Wearing gloves is a good idea when working with chili peppers or—if you don’t have any gloves—wash your hands thoroughly afterward.
        • Toast spices: As I mentioned earlier, I used ground spices to save time. However, you can use whole spices and grind them yourself. If you decide to do so, I recommend toasting them in a cast iron skillet for 3-5 minutes before grinding them in a spice grinder or with a mortar and pestle. 
        • Consistency and texture: In its original Tunisian form, harissa has a smooth, condiment-like consistency. However, harissa has since taken on other commercialized forms, like “harissa sauce” (which purportedly has a thinner, sauce-like texture) and “harissa paste” (which is supposed to be thicker and less liquidy). Though these terms technically refer to the same thing, you can still adjust this recipe’s consistency using more or less olive oil, depending on your desired thickness. During our recipe testing, we compared our homemade version to commercial brands (like Trader Joe’s Harissa, NY Shuk, and Mina ) and thought ⅓ to ½ cup of olive oil was a good place to start. 
        • Taste for seasoning: As with any recipe, it’s important to taste your sauce before serving and adjust the seasoning as needed. If your recipe already includes salt, be mindful of this when adding harissa sauce. You may need to reduce the amount of salt in your harissa to prevent over-seasoning your final dish.
        • Gets better the next day: Letting your DIY harissa sauce sit in the fridge overnight is an easy way to let its flavors develop and mix, leading to a much tastier, more robust recipe.
        Store-bought harissa in jars.

        FAQs

        Where is harissa from?

        The origin of harissa lies in Tunisia, though this condiment has since spread to other North African and Middle Eastern countries, such as Morocco, Libya, and Algeria.

        What is a harissa paste substitute?

        If you’re looking for a harissa sauce alternative, I recommend selecting another chili-based sauce, like sriracha, sambal oelek, or chipotle in adobo sauce. These substitutions have similar spicy, aromatic notes, but they also have different flavor profiles. Therefore, when using these substitutions, I’d encourage you to add other spices —like cumin, coriander, and caraway—into your dish to imitate the flavors of harissa. 

        Where can I find harissa paste?

        While making harissa sauce from scratch is superior, you can find this condiment at grocery stores like Trader Joe’s and ALDI—particularly in their “international,” “Mediterranean,” or “ethnic” sections. I like to use brands like NY Shuk and Mina (affiliate link) due to their freshness and depth.

        Is sriracha the same as harissa?

        Though they both boast a similarly smooth, chili-based flavor profile, sriracha isn’t the same as harissa sauce. Sriracha, a Thai chili sauce, is tangier and sweeter, and people often use it in Asian dishes. By contrast, Tunisian harissa boasts a spicier, more concentrated flavor, which many use to enhance the flavor of meat marinades, dips, soups, and more.

        How spicy is harissa?

        Depending on the chilies used, this condiment can range from mild to super-hot. Some versions may be spicier if they use Mexico chilies and spices like cayenne pepper, while others may have a more subtle heat if they use New Mexico chilies. Because of this range, I highly recommend that you make harissa yourself, even starting with homemade harissa powder, so you can adjust the spiciness to your desired level.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Harissa sauce in a jar from the front view.
        Print

        Harissa Sauce Recipe

        Made from a basic mix of fresh ingredients, homemade harissa sauce is a simple recipe that will infuse any dish with spicy, smoky, and subtly tangy flavors. Plus, it not only tastes better but it is also cheaper than its store-bought alternatives.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Mediterranean, Middle Eastern
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 35 minutes
        Total Time 35 minutes
        Servings 1 cup
        Calories 717kcal

        Ingredients

        • 8 dried chilis I used 3 guajillo chili peppers, 3 Ancho chili peppers, and 2 Arbol chili peppers*
        • 1 cup boiling water
        • 1 ¼ teaspoon ground cumin
        • 1 ¼ teaspoon ground coriander
        • 1 teaspoon caraway seeds
        • 2 whole roasted red peppers from jarred – drained
        • 3 garlic cloves
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • 1 teaspoon paprika you can use sweet Spanish paprika or smoked paprika
        • 1 tablespoon tomato paste optional
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
        • cup extra virgin olive oil
        • ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper optional

        Instructions

        • Place the dried chilies in a medium-sized bowl and add the boiling water.
        • Place a weighted bowl* on top to keep the chilies submerged and to rehydrate them. Let them steep for 30 minutes, and then drain.
        • Remove the stems and deseed all the chili peppers. You can remove all of the seeds or keep some for added heat, depending on your preference.
        • Place the chili peppers in the food processor (or blender). Add the ground cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, roasted red pepper, garlic, kosher salt, paprika, tomato paste, lemon juice, olive oil, and cayenne pepper.
        • Pulse until pureed and smooth.
        • Place in an airtight container and refrigerate if not using right away.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 1 cup of harissa. The nutritional values below are for the whole recipe.
        • Dried chilies: Use this recipe as a starting place, but feel free to use different types of dried chilies to make this sauce.
        • Toast spices: I used ground spices to save time. However, you can use whole spices and grind them yourself. If you decide to do so, I recommend toasting an equal amount of whole spice in a cast iron skillet for 3-5 minutes before grinding them in a spice grinder or with a mortar and pestle.
        • Storage: To store your harissa sauce, transfer it to an airtight container or jar and store it in the refrigerator for 2-3 weeks. I also recommend pouring a thin layer of olive oil over the top of the sauce before storage to prolong its shelf life, as this layer will help limit exposure to oxygen and bacteria.
        • Freezing: This red harissa recipe can be frozen for up to one month in an airtight, freezer-safe container. For easier portion sizes, pour your sauce into an ice cube tray, freeze until solid, and then transfer the individual cubes into a Ziplock bag.
        • Thawing: To thaw frozen harissa, place it in the fridge overnight or until ready to use.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 717kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 74g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 53g | Sodium: 2505mg | Potassium: 483mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 2550IU | Vitamin C: 27mg | Calcium: 97mg | Iron: 4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-sauce/feed/ 1
        Harissa Paste from Powder https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-paste-from-powder/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-paste-from-powder/#comments Tue, 09 Jul 2024 22:53:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76561 This simple guide includes everything you need to transform harissa powder into a paste, including how to make it, how…]]>

        This simple guide includes everything you need to transform harissa powder into a paste, including how to make it, how to use it in your daily cooking, how to adjust its spice levels and consistency, and how to select the best ingredients (including storebought powders.)

        Harissa paste made by using harissa powder in a jar.

        With a thick, creamy texture and a bold, spicy flavor, this harissa paste made using harissa powder will surely get you hooked on tons of other harissa recipes. My Harissa Vinaigrette is just the thing to give your salads a delicious kick of heat, while my Harissa Grilled Chicken will be the star of any dinner menu.

        Ingredients You Will Need

        You only need a few key ingredients to turn harissa powder to paste. Below are my go-to’s for making this condiment as robust and flavorful as possible.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Roasted red peppers: To make this recipe, you’ll need two jarred roasted red peppers, with as much juice removed as possible. Since these peppers tend to be milder, they better balance the spicier components of harissa seasoning.
        • Harissa Powder: I prefer making this spice mix from scratch because it gives complete control over its heat levels, as you can select your favorite balance of mild and hot chili peppers. Made with a blend of dried chilis, coriander and cumin seeds, and garlic powder, I find that homemade harissa seasoning is fresher and more flavorful than premade ones. However, if you want to reduce prep time, you can also find different brands at the store. My favorite ones are New York Shuk’s Fiery Harissa or Whole Foods Organic Harissa Seasoning (a slightly milder spice blend). We tested this recipe with both brands and found that it tasted very good.
        • Kosher Salt: I listed only one teaspoon of kosher salt, but you can add more or less depending on the saltiness of your harissa seasoning. You can also use sea salt or table salt based on what you have on hand.
        • Garlic cloves: Because you’ll eventually blend your fresh garlic cloves in a food processor, a rough chop will suffice before adding them to your other ingredients.
        • Tomato paste: This is an optional ingredient, but I enjoy the umami flavors it provides to the recipe.
        • Lemon juice: I recommend using fresh lemon juice in this recipe due to its brighter, more resonant citrus flavors. However, you can use store-bought lemon juice instead if needed.
        • Extra virgin Olive oil: Olive oil is one of the main ingredients in this powder-based harissa paste recipe. Though some recipes might advise using hot water instead, I found that a mild-tasting extra virgin olive oil offers a richer taste and smoother texture.

        How to Make Harissa Paste from Harissa Powder

        It is no secret that harissa paste is a staple ingredient in Tunisian cooking. While you can buy it at the store (or make it from scratch), following my simple, step-by-step instructions will teach you to convert harissa powder to paste in less than ten minutes.

        Steps showing how to make the recipe.
        1. Add the ingredients: Add the roasted red chilies, harissa powder, garlic cloves, tomato paste, lemon juice, and olive oil to your food processor or a bowl large enough to accommodate an immersion blender. 
        2. Blend: Blend the ingredients to your desired consistency.
        3. Enjoy: You can use your harissa paste in your favorite recipe or store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to two weeks.

        Ways to Use It

        Adding authentic North African flair to your favorite meals is easy with this recipe. Whether you’re perfecting a meat marinade or adding heat to your favorite pasta sauce. Below are just a few of my favorite uses for this iconic blend:

        • Marinades: An easy way to give your favorite meats depth and heat is to add harissa paste to your marinade mix—especially yogurt-based marinades, like my Greek Yogurt Chicken. This mix tastes excellent with poultry, beef, and lamb, and it also makes an incredible pair with seafood and fish (such as my Harissa Salmon), given its mild citrus flavor. 
        • Dips and sauces: Want to give a spicy kick to your favorite dips? I love mixing harissa paste with Mediterranean classics, like Baba Ganoush, Tahini Yogurt Sauce, and Hummus—perfect additions to any mezze platter! Or, you can even infuse ketchup with harissa paste for a hot take on this classic condiment.
        • Burgers and sandwiches: If you’re tired of bland lunches, try using this harissa paste as a spicy spread for burgers, weekday sandwiches, and on-the-go wraps. That way, you can enjoy gourmet eats any day of the week.
        • Pasta sauce: A dollop of harissa paste can infuse any basic pasta sauce with deliciously smoky heat. 
        • Soups and stews: If you want to add more fragrant, bold notes to your favorite soup recipes, I highly recommend using harissa paste instead of tomato or chili paste. In particular, this recipe tastes out of this world when added to my Eggplant Beef Stew, Lentil Soup, and Quinoa Chili.
        • Eggs: Start your morning meal with vibrant heat by adding this harissa paste recipe to everything from simple scrambled eggs to a five-star plate of shakshuka.
        • Roasted veggies: With a deep yet tender taste, roasted vegetables expertly balance the savory heat of harissa paste. Roasted carrots, Roasted Eggplant, and Oven-Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes are just a few great ideas for this flavor-packed pairing.
        • Grains and legumes: Mixing harissa paste into a bowl of rice, Bulgur Pilaf, or lentils is one of my favorite ways to add a touch of heat to Middle Eastern cuisine. You can even try making harissa-marinated chickpeas for a side dish that’s as flavorful as it is filling.

        Expert Tips

        The best way to make powder-based harissa paste is by using these chef-approved tips. Below, you’ll discover how to adjust your paste’s consistency, enhance its natural flavors, and more.

        • Texture and consistency: When preparing harissa paste from powder, remember that the mixture’s consistency depends on how long you blend it. The less you blend, the thicker your mix will be, and more blending will result in a thinner, more sauce-like consistency. If your mixture becomes too liquidy, add more harissa powder to thicken it.
        • Freshest spices: It’s no secret that fresh spices have the most potent, delicious flavor. Therefore, I highly encourage you to select the freshest ingredients possible—especially if you make your harissa spice blend from scratch.
        • Order of ingredients: When blending your paste, place the red peppers into the bowl first, followed by the powder. This ordering will lead to a more thorough, even incorporation of the ingredients.

        FAQs

        What does harissa paste taste like?

        Harissa paste—a classic ingredient from Tunisia—boasts a complex balance of heat, smokiness, and earthy fragrance. In addition to its base of dried chiles and warm spices, this spicy condiment also gets a subtle tang from its lemon juice and tomato paste.

        Is harissa paste the same as harissa powder?

        Not quite. Of course, both recipes come from a similar mix of dried chili peppers and ground spices, like cumin, paprika, coriander seeds, and caraway seeds. However, harissa paste has a thick, wet consistency due to its inclusion of other ingredients, like lemon juice and tomato paste. Meanwhile, harissa powder exists in a dry, powder form—more like a seasoning.

        What can I use as a substitute for harissa paste?

        If you don’t have the ingredients to make your own harissa paste, you can try substituting it with another hot chili pepper paste, like sambal oelek, gochujang, or sriracha. Though these mixes have slightly different favorite profiles, they all boast a similarly spicy base, and you can add ingredients like ground cumin, coriander, and caraway to mimic the aromatic warmth of traditional harissa.

        If you make your own Harissa Paste from Powder following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Harissa paste from powder in a jar from the front view.
        Print

        Harissa Paste from Powder Recipe

        This flavor-packed recipe for harissa paste from powder takes less than ten minutes to prepare. With just a few simple ingredients, you can add delectably spicy North African notes to dozens of dishes.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 128kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 whole roasted red peppers jarred, without juice
        • cup Harissa powder homemade or store-bought
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • 3 garlic cloves roughly chopped
        • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
        • cup extra virgin olive oil*

        Instructions

        • In the bowl of a food processor (or a bowl that can accommodate an immersion blender), place the roasted red peppers, harissa powder, garlic cloves, tomato paste, lemon juice and olive oil.
        • Blend to your desired consistency. Taste for seasoning and add more if desired.
        • Store in an airtight jar and refrigerate for up to 2 weeks.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 1 1/2 cups of harissa paste, which is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Olive oil *: I found that ⅓ cup of olive oil was enough to give this recipe a rich taste and smooth, paste-like consistency. However, you can increase this amount to ½ cup if you prefer a thinner mix or a less concentrated spiciness.
        • Storage: To store your harissa paste from powder, transfer it to an airtight container or mason jar and store it in the refrigerator for up to two weeks. I recommend pouring a thin level of olive oil over the top to limit the exposure to oxygen and bacteria before storing.
        • Freezing: You can freeze harissa paste in a freezer-safe airtight container for up to a month. You can also portion it in ice cubes, freeze until solid, and then transfer the individual cubes into freezer bags to use in your daily cooking.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 128kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Sodium: 781mg | Potassium: 115mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 209IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 13mg | Iron: 0.4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-paste-from-powder/feed/ 7
        Harissa Powder https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-powder/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-powder/#comments Tue, 09 Jul 2024 22:40:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76547 If you’re a fan of this spice’s bold, spicy, and deep taste, you’ll fall head over heels for my other…]]>

        If you’re a fan of this spice’s bold, spicy, and deep taste, you’ll fall head over heels for my other harissa recipes. My Homemade Harissa Recipe is an essential condiment for any spice lover, while my Harissa Vinaigrette will transform any weekday salad into a flavor-packed meal.

        Person holding a jar of homemade harissa spice blend in her hand.

        What is Harissa Spice?

        Harissa spice—also referred to as a “harissa spice blend,” “harissa seasoning,” or “harissa powder”—is a spicy, aromatic seasoning made from a mixture of dried chili peppers and other spices, such as cumin, coriander, and caraway seeds.

        This hot seasoning is native to Tunisia, though it’s since spread to other areas in North Africa and the Middle East, including Algeria, Morocco, and Egypt. Because of its vast popularity, harissa powder has developed many uses, including in condiments, dry rubs, and other food seasonings.

        What is in Harissa Powder?

        This authentic spice recipe is easy for anyone with a simple mix of natural spices. I’ve listed my favorite harissa powder ingredients below, including the best chilis to use, classic spices, and tasty add-ins.

        Harissa powder ingredients on a marble backdrop from the top view.
        • Dried chilies: This harissa seasoning recipe works with virtually any dried chili pepper, making it incredibly customizable in taste and heat. My favorite combination includes ancho, guajillo, and de arbol chilies. I usually buy this trio of chile peppers online (affiliate link), but you can also find them in the “Mexican” or “Latin” section of your local grocery store. Additionally, even though my mix primarily uses Mexican dried chilies, you can also cut back on spiciness by adding more New Mexican dried chilies, which tend to have a milder flavor.
          No matter which chilies you use, during our recipe testing, we found that 7-8 chilies of various kinds work best in this recipe.
        • Spices: Cumin seeds, coriander seeds, caraway seeds, and peppercorns are the best warm spices to give this mix added fragrance and earthiness. If you can, I highly recommend buying organic spices.
        • Seasonings: I recommend adding smoked paprika and garlic powder to this harissa blend for greater depth and complexity.
        • Optional add-ins: Nowadays, many commercial harissa spice blends include additional flavorings like rose petals and lemon peel. To achieve a similar floral flavor profile in your homemade blend, add ½ teaspoon of crushed, food-grade rose petals and lemon peel. For extra heat, include a pinch of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes.

        How to Make Harissa Powder

        This authentic, restaurant-worthy harissa powder recipe takes less than 15 minutes to make. Plus, you only need a handful of ingredients, a skillet, and a good food processor (affiliate link).

        Steps showing how to prepare chiles and toast the spices to make the recipe.
        1. Prepare the chilies: Remove the stems and seeds of the ancho, guajillo, and de arbol chili peppers. Then, chop them roughly.
        2. Toast the peppers: Heat the cast iron skillet over medium heat and add the chopped chilies. Stirring constantly to avoid burning, toast them until thoroughly dried (4-6 minutes). To test whether the chilies are ready, see whether they “crack” or “snap” under pressure. When they do, you can remove them from the pan.
        3. Cool: Transfer the toasted chili peppers to a plate to cool, and set them aside.
        4. Toast the seeds: Add the cumin, coriander, coriander seeds, and peppercorns to the heated skillet. Cook them for 1-2 minutes, stirring frequently, then remove them from the pan. Set them aside to cool.
        A collage of images showing how to make harissa spice mix in a food processor.
        1. Process the peppers: Transfer the cooled chili peppers to your food processor bowl fitted with the blade attachment. Pulse the processor 7-10 times until the chilies break down.
        2. Add the toasted seeds: Then, add the toasted seeds and peppercorns to the bowl. Continue processing—being sure to scrape down the processor bowl every so often—until the ingredients reach a powder-like consistency and are fully incorporated. This step should take 1-2 minutes, depending on the brand of your food processor. Once you get your desired consistency, add the smoked paprika and garlic powder and pulse it for another 2-3 times.
        3. Store: Scrape the powder into an airtight jar or container and store it at room temperature for up to six months.

        Ways to Use Harissa Spice Blend

        Because of its bold flavor and broad versatility, harissa spice provides an indispensable taste to dozens of recipes. Below are just a few of my favorite dishes harissa seasoning can be used for.

        • Salad dressing: You can use this harissa powder recipe to make my harissa vinaigrette dressing (famously used when making CAVA Bowls). It is a wonderful way to season and elevate any salad recipe. Or, if you’re in the mood for lighter, zestier options, add a teaspoon to my Yogurt Salad Dressing and Lemon Salad Dressing to introduce the earthy flavors of harissa to your salad dressings.
        • Roasted vegetables: If you’re into roasting vegetables—like carrots, bell peppers, and potatoes—this easy recipe perfectly complements their smoky, tender notes. Simply sprinkle a few teaspoons of harissa powder over veggies before roasting them in the oven.
        • Seasoning for meat and seafood: Harissa spice makes an excellent dry rub for all your favorite recipes, from chicken to beef, fish, and lamb. In particular, you can use this seasoning for classic Middle Eastern dishes, like my Baked Chicken Kabobs, Roasted Turkey Tenderloin, and Grilled Rack of Lamb.
        • Dips: You can quickly transform this seasoning into a crowd-ready dip by adding it to a creamy Mediterranean Hummus or making Harissa Aioli—a delectable accompaniment for burgers, sandwiches, French fries, and more. You can even add harissa powder to ketchup to give it spicy, complex dimensions!
        • Marinades: Besides being a great seasoning, this harissa spice blend recipe makes a deliciously hot, full-bodied marinade when combined with extra virgin olive oil, lemon juice, and other flavorings. Try it in my citrusy Shrimp Marinade, creamy Yogurt Chicken Marinade, or bold Mahi Mahi Marinade to infuse your meat with rich, flavorful notes.
        • Grains and rice: You can give any grain bowl or side dish a kick of heat by sprinkling it with harissa seasoning. I love adding this spice blend to dishes like couscous, rice, and rich pilafs (especially my Wild Rice Pilaf and Chicken Herb Pilaf!).
        • Eggs: If you love to start your mornings with a spicy wake-up call, I highly recommend using harissa powder to season savory breakfast recipes like scrambled eggs and shakshuka.
        • Soups and stews: A teaspoon of harissa powder infuses any soup or stew recipe with deep, aromatic spice. For the tastiest combination, I recommend pairing this recipe with equally hearty, chili-friendly dishes, like Eggplant Beef Stew, Chicken Chili, or—for a lighter variation try it in my Vegan Chili instead of chili powder.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        Easy to make and unbelievably versatile, homemade harissa powder is vital to any chef’s spice rack. These tips ensure you make the freshest, most flavorful seasoning with zero hassle.

        • Wear gloves: Chili peppers are notorious for their spiciness due to their high levels of the compound capsaicin. Though capsaicin is vital to giving chilis their flavor, it may cause a burning sensation after direct contact. Therefore, wearing gloves when working with them is a good idea. If you don’t have any gloves on hand, however, be sure to thoroughly wash your hands after handling your chili peppers.
        • Adjust heat: You can easily adjust your seasoning’s heat levels by changing a few simple factors. For a hotter blend, use a spicier mix of dried chilies, leave the seeds in your chili peppers, or add ½ teaspoon of cayenne pepper. For a milder mix, remove as many seeds from your chilies as possible and try to select chili peppers that land lower on the Scoville Scale—in particular, New Mexico chiles.
        • Adding salt: I did not add salt to my harissa spice blend recipe, as I prefer to adjust the amount of salt according to the recipe I plan to use. This way, I can easily control the amount of salt in my food without the risk of making it overly salty.
        • Spice grinder: I prefer to blend my harissa spices using a food processor. The bowl of a food processor is large enough to pulverize everything in one take, and its strong blades are ideal for turning all spices and dried chilies into powder. However, you can also make this recipe using a spice grinder (affiliate link.)To do so, blend the cooled chili peppers, one tablespoon at a time, until powdered. Then, add the toasted cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, and peppercorns, and grind the mixture until it reaches your preferred consistency (about five seconds). Remember, too, that you might need to grind your ingredients in small batches to ensure they fit in your grinder.

        FAQs

        What is the closest spice to harissa?

        Suppose you don’t have harissa spice but still want the same aromatic, spicy taste. In that case, I recommend blending chili powder, smoked paprika, ground cumin, ground coriander, and garlic powder. Though not identical, this mix strikes a similar balance between fragrant heat and the earthiness of harissa powder. Or, if you need a condiment-like consistency, you can even try sriracha sauce for a store-bought, chili-based substitute.

        Is harissa a spice?

        Not a single spice, “harissa” refers to a hot, fragrant mix of multiple spices and dried chili peppers. You can find this traditional blend in several forms, including a dry seasoning, a paste form, and a creamy sauce.

        Is harissa powder spicy hot?

        In general, yes, harissa powder contains a fair amount of spiciness. However, if desired, you can adjust this heat level by using different combinations of chili peppers and spices to make a milder mix.

        What is the difference between harissa powder and harissa paste?

        Since they both come from a similar mixture of dried chili peppers and spices, harissa powder and harissa paste boast a hot, earthy flavor. However, they have very different consistencies. Powdered harissa is a dry, powdered version of the mix, while harissa paste has a thicker, wetter consistency due to additional ingredients like tomato paste, lemon juice, and olive oil.

        Where to buy harissa powder?

        After trying several store-bought brands, I recommend purchasing either New York Shuk’s Fiery Harissa or Whole Foods Organic Harissa Seasoning (which is a little milder). These premade harissa blends will work in a pinch, though I find my homemade recipe more flavorful and customizable.

        If you make your own Harissa Powder following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Harissa powder in a jar with a spoonfull.
        Print

        Harissa Powder Recipe

        With deep spice and complex flavors, Harissa Powder packs all the hot, bold taste you could want from a seasoning. You can make this simple spice mix in less than 15 minutes using a simple set of natural ingredients.
        Course Seasoning
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 6 minutes
        Total Time 21 minutes
        Servings 5 tablespoons
        Calories 12kcal

        Equipment

        Ingredients

        • 8 dried chili peppers we used a combination of Ancho, Guajillo, and De Arbol chili peppers
        • 1 ½ teaspoons cumin seeds
        • 1 ½ teaspoon coriander seeds
        • 1 teaspoon caraway seeds
        • ½ teaspoon peppercorns
        • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika
        • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt optional*

        Instructions

        • Remove the stems and deseed the chili peppers. Give them a rough chop.
        • Heat a cast iron skillet on medium-high heat. Add the peppers and toast for 4-6 minutes or until thoroughly dried. Stir frequently to avoid burning. To test for doneness, you should feel the chili pepper “crack” or “snap.”
        • Place the toasted peppers on a plate to cool while working on the rest of the ingredients.
        • Add the cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, and peppercorns to the heated skillet and toast, stirring frequently, for 1-2 minutes. Remove from the pan and set aside to cool.
        • Place the cooled chili peppers into the bowl of a food processor (*instructions for making it in a spice grinder are below in the notes section) fitted with the blade attachment. Pulse the processor 7-10 times to break down the dried chilies. Add the toasted cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, peppercorns, and salt if using. Continue to process until they are pulverized and reach a powder consistency, scraping down the processor bowl to incorporate all the ingredients. Depending on your food processor, this takes about 1-2 minutes of processing. Finally, add the smoked paprika and garlic powder and pulse 2-3 times to ensure all spices are fully incorporated.
        • Place the powder in an airtight container and store it in a cool and dark place for six months.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about ⅓ to ½ cup harissa seasoning, depending on the size of your peppers. The nutritional values below are for the full recipe.
        • If using a spice grinder: Add the cooled chili peppers, one tablespoon at a time, to the grinder and pulse to create a powder. Add the toasted cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, and peppercorns. Continue to grind until it reaches powder consistency. Add the smoked paprika and garlic powder if using. Grind for 5 seconds.
        • Mortar and Pestle: If you do not have a food processor or a spice grinder, the good old mortar and pestle would also work.
        • Adding salt: When I make homemade spice blends, I usually use very little or no salt. This way, I can salt my food separately and easily gauge the amount of salt used in my dish. Feel free to omit it or use more as needed.
        • Storage: To store this harissa spice mix recipe, first transfer it to an airtight container. Then, store it in a cool, dry place—such as a pantry or kitchen cabinet—for up to six months.
        • Wear gloves: Chili peppers are usually very hot, even when dry. I would recommend wearing gloves if you have them.
        • Fumes: Proper ventilation is essential when cooking chili peppers. The fumes from these chilies may irritate your eyes, nose, and mouth, so I highly recommend opening windows, turning on your kitchen’s range hood, and/or using portable fans to increase your kitchen’s air circulation.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 12kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.4g | Saturated Fat: 0.04g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 468mg | Potassium: 61mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 420IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 17mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-powder/feed/ 2
        Harissa Vinaigrette https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-vinaigrette/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-vinaigrette/#comments Tue, 09 Jul 2024 22:26:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76802 In this simple guide, I’ll teach you how to make a restaurant-quality harissa vinaigrette dressing, including preparation tips, tasty uses,…]]>

        In this simple guide, I’ll teach you how to make a restaurant-quality harissa vinaigrette dressing, including preparation tips, tasty uses, and storage guides.

        Cava copycat hot harissa vinaigrette in a glass jar with a spoon.

        What is Harissa Dressing Made Of?

        The best way to capture the bright flavors of CAVA’s hot harissa vinaigrette is by using the right ingredients—fresh, flavorful, and already in your pantry!

        Ingredients for the recipe in small bowls from the top view.
        • Olive oil: Though a little more expensive, high-quality extra virgin olive oil is excellent for vinaigrettes due to its richness and depth. (Remember: Olive oil plays a big part in vinaigrette recipes!) Still, any olive oil will work as long as you like its flavor.
        • Lemon juice or vinegar: I recommend using fresh lemon juice due to its bright, citrusy overtones. However, if you want sharper, more acidic notes in your harissa vinaigrette, you can use red wine vinegar or white wine vinegar instead.
        • Harissa: This recipe works with both harissa sauce (or paste) and harissa powder. You can also make harissa paste from powder. Regardless of your choice, I suggest making them from scratch due to their more vibrant, fresh, and customizable flavors. However, you can also purchase store-bought versions for simpler meal prep. In particular, I love brands like NY Shuk, Mina, and Whole Foods, though you should be able to find more harissa products in the “international” or “ethnic” sections of local grocery stores.
        • Honey: Honey is the key to giving harissa salad dressing a beautiful balance of “heat and sweet,” though you may also use maple syrup or agave syrup for a vegan version.
        • Garlic: Be sure to grate or press your fresh garlic before adding it to your recipe. Otherwise, the garlic won’t properly infuse the dressing with its flavors.
        • Seasoning: Kosher salt and ground black pepper are all that’s necessary to bring out the savory tones of this all-natural harissa vinaigrette recipe.

        Optional Add-Ins

        How you customize your harissa salad dressing depends on your brand of harissa. Some store-bought brands—like Trader Joe’s—tend to have a hotter flavor profile, while others—like Whole Foods—are a little milder. 

        In short, taste your harissa sauce and consider your final dish before adjusting your recipe!

        • Spicier: Want to kick up the heat of this CAVA copycat recipe? Try adding a pinch of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes to your mix. Depending on the brand of harissa you are using, you can also add cumin for an added layer of warmth. If you are making it from scratch following our recipe, I do not recommend adding more, but of course, you can give your harissa a taste and decide for yourself.
        • Herbal flavors: If you prefer an earthier, lighter taste in your harissa dressing, try adding a shake of dried oregano or dried mint to your recipe.
        • Greek yogurt: Though not traditional, you can make a creamy harissa dressing by adding Greek yogurt to your recipe. Not only does this ingredient lend the mixture a nice tang, but it’s also a great way to lighten up its flavor profile for those who want a not-too-spicy harissa vinaigrette.

        How to Make Harissa Vinaigrette?

        You can make hot harissa vinaigrette in three simple steps, bringing spicy, Middle Eastern flavors to any meal. And the best part, you ask? It takes less than 5 minutes to make.

        A collage of images showing how to make harissa vinaigrette.
        1. Add the ingredients: Place the olive oil, lemon juice, harissa sauce (or powder), honey, garlic, kosher salt, and black pepper to a mason jar with a tight-fitting lid.
        2. Mix: Cover the jar and shake it for 30 seconds or until emulsified. Taste for seasoning and adjust as necessary.
        3. Serve or store: Refrigerate the vinaigrette or use it immediately in your desired recipe. Be sure to shake the mixture after storage to ensure a well-integrated mixture.

        How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

        • Store: You can store your harissa vinaigrette in an airtight container or glass jar in the refrigerator for up to one week. Remember to shake the mixture well before using it to help reintegrate any separated ingredients.
        • Freeze: For extra-long storage, freeze this recipe in a freezer-safe, airtight container for up to one month. Leave enough room in your chosen container for the vinaigrette to expand.
        • Thaw: To thaw your frozen harissa dressing, put it in the refrigerator overnight.

        How to Use Harissa Vinaigrette?

        Lighter and tangier than traditional harissa, this delicious condiment works pretty much anywhere you want that hot harissa taste. Below are a few of my favorite ways to add a bold flavor to any weekday menu.

        • Salad dressing: No one can resist a classic. Using harissa dressing for salad is a no-brainer, especially since it strikes such a tasty balance with the crispness of leafy green salads. This vinaigrette pairs impeccably with the refreshing cucumber and tomatoes in my Spring Mix Salad. Or, you can balance this spicy condiment with the rich creaminess of my Butter Lettuce Salad or Massaged Kale Salad with Avocado—especially when topped with a crumble of feta cheese.
        • Grain bowls: Want to learn how to make CAVA at home? Grain bowls are a staple of this Mediterranean restaurant chain—a clear reason why I love using this copycat vinaigrette for dishes like my vegan Quinoa Power Bowl and gluten-free Quinoa Sweet Potato Bowl.
        • Sandwiches and wraps: This harissa vinaigrette doesn’t just work in bowls. It’s also a mouthwatering blend for sandwiches and wraps—whether you drizzle it over the spread or use it as a dipping sauce.
        • Roasted vegetables: Equal parts nutritious and flavorful, this easy vinaigrette makes the perfect addition to roasted veggies. Drizzle it over tender dishes like Baked Eggplant Slices, sweet Roasted Maple Carrots, and hearty Air Fried Red Potatoes, and you’ll never have a bland side dish again.
        • Roasted and grilled meats & seafood: You can lend any protein a delicious spice by serving this vinaigrette with dishes, such as my succulent Grilled Salmon, Steak Kabobs in Oven, and Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast. Use this dressing like your other go-to dips and serve it on the side, or use it as a drizzle for a well-infused smokiness.
        • Use it as a marinade: Out of all the CAVA dressing recipes, this is one of my favorites for meat marinades. Simply add ¼ cup of harissa vinaigrette to your favorite marinade recipe (especially my tangy Chicken Marinade with Yogurt, zesty Shrimp Marinade, and savory Turkey Tenderloin Marinade!) and add more as necessary.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        If you want the flavors of the authentic hot harissa vinaigrette, below are a few helpful tips for getting the best flavor, consistency, and use from this five-star dressing.

        • Powder vs. sauce: Though both will work, during our recipe testing, we thought the harissa sauce performed better when making this vinaigrette. Powder tends to sink at the bottom as it sits, while sauce blends better (depending on the brand you use, of course). If your only option is harissa powder, be sure to shake it vigorously before using it in your recipe.
        • Adjust seasoning and sweetness: Because this dressing recipe can be customized in many ways, you must taste it for seasoning. Consider, too, what kind of dish you plan to make, and adjust your dressing’s ingredient ratios to make the best match. For instance, you can make a sweet honey harissa vinaigrette by increasing the amount of honey you use.
        • Shake well before use: Letting your harissa dressing rest for 20 minutes is an easy way to help its flavors infuse and develop. However, as with any vinaigrette, this recipe’s ingredients tend to separate as it sits. Therefore, you must whisk or shake it well before using it.

        FAQs

        What is harissa dressing?

        Harissa dressing is a spicy, light vinaigrette popularized by the Mediterranean restaurant chain CAVA. This dressing gets its primary flavors from harissa—a chili-based condiment that originated in Tunisia. However, it also contains rich, citrusy notes from other ingredients like lemon juice and garlic.

        What is the difference between harissa sauce and harissa vinaigrette?

        Of course, both recipes boast a hot, smoky taste due to their use of chili peppers, spices, and herbs. However, harissa sauce is an ingredient in harissa vinaigrette, with a more concentrated flavor and thicker consistency. The vinaigrette version is a thinner, lighter, and less intense mixture, as it has an olive oil base and other ingredients like lemon juice, vinegar, and honey.

        Other CAVA-Inspired Dressing Recipes

        If you make this hot harissa vinaigrette recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Harissa vinaigrette in a jar with a spoon.
        Print

        Harissa Vinaigrette Recipe

        Hot harissa vinaigrette is the ultimate condiment for anyone craving the spicy and smoky flavors of harissa. In just five minutes and with a handful of ingredients, you can take any dish—grain bowls, veggies, salads, and beyond—to the next level.
        Course Salad Dressing
        Cuisine Mediterranean, Middle Eastern
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 146kcal

        Ingredients

        • ¼ cup olive oil
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice or red wine vinegar
        • 2 tablespoons harissa sauce or 1 tablespoon harissa powder
        • 1 tablespoon honey or maple syrup or agave nectar for a vegan option
        • 1 clove garlic grated or pressed
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground

        Instructions

        • Combine the olive oil, lemon juice, harissa sauce (or powder), honey, garlic, kosher salt, and pepper in a mason jar.
        • Cover and shake until emulsified, about 30 seconds. Adjust seasoning to your desired taste.
        • Use right away or store in the fridge until ready to use. Be sure to shake before serving.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 1/2 cup harissa vinaigrette. I listed 4 servings because you can use it in a salad or grain bowl recipe that serves 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Storage: Place leftovers in a mason jar (or any other airtight container) and keep them in the fridge for up to a week.
        • Freeze: You can freeze this dressing in a freezer-safe container for up to a month. Thaw it in the fridge overnight.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 146kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 0.3g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 392mg | Potassium: 47mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 52IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 5mg | Iron: 0.2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-vinaigrette/feed/ 4